MindMap Gallery Mechanical and electrical practice
This is a mind map about electromechanical practice. The main contents include: 2H330000 Construction-related regulations and standards for electromechanical engineering projects, 2H320000 Construction management of electromechanical engineering projects, and 2H310000 Construction technology of electromechanical engineering.
Edited at 2024-11-04 00:59:12これは、この本を理解して読むのに役立つ、「ジェーン・エア」の登場人物の関係性を分析したマインドマップです。非常に実用的で、収集する価値があります。
これは時間を友達として扱うことについてのマインド マップです。「時間を友達として扱う」は、時間管理と個人の成長に関する実践的なガイドです。著者のリー・シャオライは、豊富なストーリーと鮮やかな例を通じて、先延ばしを克服し、効率を高め、将来の計画を立てる方法に関する実践的なスキルを読者に教えます。この本は、将来に向けて奮闘している若者だけでなく、時間を上手に管理して個人的な成長を遂げたいと願うすべての人にも適しています。
効率的にコミュニケーションをとり、日常業務におけるコミュニケーション上の困難を回避し、会話スキルを向上させるにはどうすればよいでしょうか? 「Crucial Conversations」は、2012 年に Mechanical Industry Press から出版された本です。著者は、(米国) Corey Patterson、Joseph Graney、Ron McMillan、Al Switzler です。この本は、人々の話す、聞く、および行動のスキルについても分析しています。コミュニケーションにおける一般的な盲点を、読者ができるだけ早くこれらのスキルを習得できるように、会話のシチュエーションや短編小説で補います。これがお役に立てば幸いです!
これは、この本を理解して読むのに役立つ、「ジェーン・エア」の登場人物の関係性を分析したマインドマップです。非常に実用的で、収集する価値があります。
これは時間を友達として扱うことについてのマインド マップです。「時間を友達として扱う」は、時間管理と個人の成長に関する実践的なガイドです。著者のリー・シャオライは、豊富なストーリーと鮮やかな例を通じて、先延ばしを克服し、効率を高め、将来の計画を立てる方法に関する実践的なスキルを読者に教えます。この本は、将来に向けて奮闘している若者だけでなく、時間を上手に管理して個人的な成長を遂げたいと願うすべての人にも適しています。
効率的にコミュニケーションをとり、日常業務におけるコミュニケーション上の困難を回避し、会話スキルを向上させるにはどうすればよいでしょうか? 「Crucial Conversations」は、2012 年に Mechanical Industry Press から出版された本です。著者は、(米国) Corey Patterson、Joseph Graney、Ron McMillan、Al Switzler です。この本は、人々の話す、聞く、および行動のスキルについても分析しています。コミュニケーションにおける一般的な盲点を、読者ができるだけ早くこれらのスキルを習得できるように、会話のシチュエーションや短編小説で補います。これがお役に立てば幸いです!
Mechanical and electrical practice
2H310000 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction technology
2H311000 Commonly used materials and engineering equipment for mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311010 Commonly used materials in mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311011 Types and applications of metal materials
1. Metal materials
(1) Classification of metal materials
(2) Properties of metal materials
2. Black metal
(1) Classification
(2) Steel products commonly used in mechanical and electrical engineering
1. Carbon structural steel
2.High quality carbon structural steel (3) Application: Mainly used for mechanical parts, usually after heat treatment.
3. Boiler steel
4.Stainless steel
5. Heat-resistant steel
3. Non-ferrous metals
Non-ferrous metals refer to all metals and their alloys except iron, manganese and chromium, which are usually divided into light metals, heavy metals, precious metals, semi-metals, rare metals and rare earth metals. The strength and hardness of nonferrous alloys are generally higher than those of pure metals, and their resistance is greater and their temperature coefficient of resistance is smaller.
(1) Aluminum and aluminum alloys
(2) Other nonferrous metals
(3) Precious metals
2H311012 Types and applications of non-metallic materials
1. Types of non-metallic materials
(1) Polymer materials
(2) Inorganic non-metallic materials
2. Non-metallic materials commonly used in mechanical and electrical engineering and their scope of use
Non-metallic air duct/applicable scope non-applicable scope
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Adhesive
New polymer materials/features
2H311013 Types and applications of electrical materials
1. Wire:
2. Cable
3. Bus duct
4. Insulating materials
2H311020 Common engineering equipment for mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311021 Classification and performance of general engineering equipment
Mix of general and specialized equipment
Classification and performance parameters of pumps, fans and compressors
4. Classification and performance of continuous conveying equipment
2H311022 Classification and performance of special engineering equipment
1. Classification of special equipment
2H311023 Classification and performance of electrical engineering equipment
Commonly used electrical equipment in mechanical and electrical engineering include motors, transformers, high-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices, low-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices, electrical measuring instruments and meters, etc.
1. Classification and performance of electric motors
2. Classification and performance of transformers
3. Classification and performance of high-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices
High-voltage electrical appliances refer to electrical appliances with an AC voltage of 1000V and a DC voltage of 1500V or above.
4. Classification and performance of low-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices
Low -voltage electrical appliances refer to electrical appliances with AC voltage 1000V and DC voltage 1500V and below. Performance of high -voltage, low -voltage electrical appliances and complete sets: cross, protection, control, adjustment
5. Performance of electrical measuring instruments
2H312000 Mechanical and electrical engineering professional technology
2H312010 Mechanical and electrical engineering measurement technology
2H312011 Measurement requirements and methods
1. Principles and requirements of engineering surveying
2. Principles of Engineering Surveying
(1) Level measurement
(2) Baseline measurement
3. Procedures and methods of engineering surveying
(1) Engineering survey procedures
(2) Height control measurement
4. Common engineering measurements in mechanical and electrical engineering
1. Basic marking and elevation measurement
2. Embedding of central mark and reference point
(2) Measurement of continuous production equipment installation
(3) Measurement of pipeline engineering
(4) Measurement of foundation construction of steel towers (towers) for long-distance transmission lines
2H312012 Function and use of measuring instruments
Applications of commonly used measuring instruments
(3) Application of fully automatic total station (measurement robot)
4. Other measuring instruments
(1) Electromagnetic wave range finder
(2) Laser measuring instruments
(3) Global Positioning System (GPS)
2H312020 Mechanical and electrical engineering lifting technology
2H312021 Requirements for the use of lifting machinery and spreaders
1. Classification of lifting machinery and spreaders
(1) Hoisting machinery
1. Classification of lifting machinery
(2) Classification of spreaders
(3) Slings, lifting lugs, and shackles
2. Requirements for the use of lifting machinery
(1) Requirements for the use of light and small lifting equipment
1. Requirements for using jacks
2. Requirements for the use of lifting pulleys
3. Requirements for the use of winches
4. Requirements for the use of hand chain hoists
(2) Requirements for the use of mobile cranes
1.General requirements
2. Requirements for mobile cranes on foundations
3. Requirements for the use of truck cranes
4. Requirements for the use of crawler cranes
(3) Requirements for the use of mast cranes
(4) Requirements for the use of cranes for overall lifting of heavy-duty structures and equipment
3. Requirements for the use of spreaders
(1) Beam -type piano product logo and factory documents
(2) Requirements for the use of slings, lifting lugs and shackles
4. Structural form, scope of use and usage requirements of ground anchors
2H312022 Selection requirements for hoisting methods and hoisting plans
1. Commonly used lifting methods
(1) Hoisting process methods and applications
(3) Overall installation technology for large equipment (overall lifting and hoisting technology)
2. Hoisting plan
(2) Hoisting plan management
3. Parameters and applications of mobile cranes
(1) Basic parameters of mobile crane
(2) Characteristic curve of mobile crane
(3) Selection steps for mobile cranes
5. Preparation, review and modification of special construction plans for safety of dangerous major projects
2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2H312030 Mechanical and electrical engineering welding technology
2H312031 Selection and evaluation of welding processes
Welding process refers to all relevant processing methods and implementation requirements for manufacturing weldments, including welding preparation, material selection, welding method selection, welding parameters, and operating requirements.
1. Selection of welding process
(1) Welding preparation
(2) Welding method
(3) Welding parameters
(4) Operational requirements
2. Welding process evaluation
(1) Specification requirements
(2) Selection of welding process qualification standards
(3) Steps and procedures for welding process qualification
(4) Welding procedure qualification rules
2H312032 Welding quality inspection
1. Inspection level
1. Pressure pipeline
2.Steel structure
2. Inspection methods
3. Welding joint defects
4. Inspection before welding
5. Welding process inspection
6. Inspection after welding
2H313000 Industrial mechanical and electrical engineering installation technology
2H313010 Mechanical equipment installation engineering construction technology
2H313011 Mechanical equipment installation procedures and requirements
1. General procedures for installation of mechanical equipment
2. General requirements for installation of mechanical equipment
(2) Equipment unpacking and inspection
(3) Basic measurement and setting out
(4) Basic inspection and acceptance
(5) Horn settings
(7) Equipment installation and adjustment
(8) Equipment fixation and grouting
(9) Parts cleaning and assembly
(10) Lubrication and equipment refueling
(11) Equipment trial operation
(12) Project acceptance
2H313012 Control of installation accuracy of mechanical equipment
1. Factors affecting equipment installation accuracy
2. Control of equipment installation accuracy
2H313020 Electrical installation engineering construction technology
2H313021 Electrical Equipment Installation Procedures and Requirements
1. Electrical installation procedures
(1) General construction procedures for electrical installation projects
(2) Construction procedures for electrical equipment
2. Construction technical requirements for electrical equipment
(1) Installation requirements for electrical equipment
(2) Handover test content and precautions
(3) Electrical equipment power-on inspection and adjustment test
(4) Trial operation conditions and safety requirements of the power supply system
2H313022 Construction requirements for power transmission and distribution lines
1. Construction requirements for overhead power lines
(1) Construction process of pole lines
(2) Composition and material requirements of pole lines
(3) Construction of pole foundation pit and pole assembly
(4) Cross arm installation
(7) Wire erection
(8) Electric power overhead line test
(9) Connection between overhead lines and 10/0.4kV substation
(10) Construction requirements for temporary power overhead lines on site
2. Construction requirements for power cable lines
(1) Construction requirements for cable duct laying
1.Cable conduit materials and connections
2. Cable protection tube construction
3. Cable duct construction
4. Laying of cable ducts and protective tubes
(2) Requirements for cable bracket production and installation and bridge installation
(3) Requirements for direct buried cable laying
(4) Requirements for cable laying in cable trays, trenches, mezzanines or tunnels
(5) Requirements for cable (body) laying
(6) General requirements for the production of cable terminals and cable joints
(7) Fire prevention and flame retardant measures for cables
(8) Precautions for power cable laying line construction
3. Installation of busbars and closed busbars
(1) Requirements for busbar installation
(2) Requirements for closed busbar installation
2H313030 Pipeline engineering construction technology
2H313031 Construction procedures and requirements for pipeline projects
1. Classification of industrial pipelines
(1) Classification according to material properties
Go to (P364) 2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
2. Types of special equipment
(3) Pressure pipeline
2. Composition of industrial pipelines
Industrial pipelines consist of pipeline components and pipeline supports.
3. Construction procedures of industrial pipeline projects
4. Technical requirements for industrial pipeline construction
(1) The conditions that should be available before the construction of the pipeline
(2) Inspection of pipeline components and materials
(3) Pipe processing
(4) Pipeline installation
2H313032 Piping system testing and purging requirements
1. Pipeline system test
(1) Pressure test
1. Provisions for pressure testing of pipeline systems A test to verify the strength and tightness of pipes. The following requirements should be met:
2. Conditions that should be met before pressure test:
3. Provisions for pressure test substitution
4. Key points of hydraulic test implementation
5. Key points for implementing air pressure test
(2) Leakage test
2. Pipe purging and cleaning
(1) General provisions
(2) Key points for water flushing implementation
(3) Key points for air purging implementation
(4) Key points for steam purging implementation
(5) Key points for oil cleaning implementation
2H313040 Power and power generation equipment installation technology
2H313041 Installation technical requirements of steam wheel generator equipment
1. Main equipment of turbine generator system
(2) Generator type and composition
2H313042 Technical requirements for installation of boiler equipment
1. Main equipment of boiler system
(1) Boiler
Go to (P363)
2. Types of special equipment
Go to (P366)
2. Special equipment installation, modification and maintenance licenses
(2) The structure and function of the steam drum, steam-water separator and water storage tank
(3) The structure and function of the water-cooled wall
2. Installation technical requirements for the main equipment of the boiler system
(1) Boiler system installation and construction procedures
(2) Key technical points for industrial boiler installation
(3) Technical points for installation of main equipment of power station boilers
(4) Key points for quality control of power station boiler installation
3. Boiler thermal debugging and trial operation
(1) Oven
(2) Stove and chemical cleaning
(3) Flushing and purging of steam pipelines
(4) Boiler trial operation
2. Technical requirements for steam turbine installation
(2) Installation technical requirements for industrial small steam turbines
1. Install general programs
2. Install quality control points
3. Technical points for the installation of major equipment
(3) Technical requirements for installation of steam turbines in power stations
2. Technical points of installation
3. Technical requirements for generator installation
(1) Generator installation procedures
(2) Key points of installation technology
1. Key points of generator stator hoisting technology
2. Key points of generator rotor installation technology
2H313043 Installation technical requirements for photovoltaic and wind power generation equipment
1. Composition of solar and wind power generation equipment
(1) Classification and composition of solar power generation equipment
(2) Classification and composition of wind power equipment
2. Installation procedures for solar, photothermal and wind power generation equipment
1. Installation procedures for solar power generation equipment
2. Installation procedures for photothermal power generation equipment
3. Technical requirements for installation of solar, photothermal and wind power generation equipment
2H313050 Manufacturing and installation technology of static equipment and metal structures
2H313051 Technical requirements for production and installation of static equipment
1. Steel welded atmospheric pressure vessels
2. Pressure vessels
Go to (P363) 2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
Go to (P367) 2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
4. Storage tanks
(1) Classification and application
(2) Production and installation technology
5. Gas cabinet
(1) Classification
(2) Production and installation technology
6. Inspection and test requirements for static equipment
(1) Requirements for welding test pieces of pressure vessel products
(2) Inspection of three-layer lap welds of large storage tank bottom plates
(3) Water filling test of storage tank
(4) Geometric dimension inspection requirements
2H313052 Technical requirements for fabrication and installation of steel structures
1. Steel structure production
(2) Steel component manufacturing procedures and requirements
2. Industrial steel structure installation technology
(1) General procedures for metal structure installation
(3) Steel structure fastening connection requirements
(4) Steel component assembly and steel structure installation requirements
2H313060 Automation instrument engineering installation technology
2H313061 Installation procedures and requirements for automated instruments
1. Construction preparation for automatic instrument installation
(3) Construction site preparation
(4) Preparation of construction machinery and standard instruments
(5) Inspection and storage of instrument equipment and materials
2. Main construction procedures for automated instrument installation
3. Automation instrument installation and construction content
2H313062 Technical requirements for installation of automated instrumentation equipment
1. Installation requirements for automated instrumentation equipment
2. Installation requirements for source components of automated instruments
3. Instrument test
2H313070 Anti-corrosion and thermal insulation engineering construction technology
2H313071 Technical requirements for anti-corrosion engineering construction
1. Anti-corrosion
2. Anti-corrosion construction technology
(1) Surface treatment
(2) Painting
(3) Lining
(4) Anti-corrosion engineering construction safety technology
2H313072 Technical requirements for thermal insulation engineering construction
1. Technical requirements for thermal insulation layer construction
(1) Thickness and width
(2) Seams
(3) Attachments
(4) Construction by bundling method
2. Technical requirements for moisture-proof layer construction
(1) General requirements
(3) Glass fiber cloth composite clay coating structure
(4) Polyurethane or polyvinyl chloride membrane structure
3. Technical requirements for protective layer construction
(1) Technical requirements for metal protective layer construction
1.General requirements
2. Equipment thermal insulation protective layer
3. Pipe insulation protective layer
(2) Technical requirements for construction of non-metallic protective layers
2H313080 Construction technology of furnace and kiln masonry engineering
2H313081 Construction procedures and requirements for furnace and kiln masonry projects
1. Classification of industrial furnaces
2. Classification and performance of refractory materials
(1) Classification according to chemical properties
(6) Types and properties of other refractory materials
3. Regulations on process handover before furnace and kiln masonry construction
4. Construction procedures of refractory brick masonry
2H313082 Construction technical requirements for refractory materials
3. Technical requirements for refractory brick masonry construction
4. Technical requirements for construction of refractory castables
5. Technical requirements for refractory spray coating construction
6. Refractory ceramic fiber construction technical requirements
7. Technical requirements for winter construction
8. Technical requirements for ovens
2H314000 Building mechanical and electrical engineering construction technology
2H314010 construction pipeline project construction technology
2H314011 Division and construction procedures of construction piping projects
1. Division of construction piping projects
2. Construction procedures of building pipeline projects
(2) Water supply pipeline construction procedures
(3) Drainage pipeline engineering construction procedures
2H314012 Construction technical requirements for construction pipelines
1. Commonly used connection methods for construction pipelines
2. Key points of building pipeline construction technology
2. Materials and equipment management
4. Cooperate with civil engineering to reserve and bury
5. Pipe bracket production and installation
7.Pipeline installation
8. Appliance/Equipment Installation
9.Pipeline system testing
(1) Pressure test
(2) Irrigation test
(3) Water flow test
(4) Ball passing test
10. Pipeline anti-corrosion and insulation
11. Pipeline system cleaning and trial operation
2H314020 Building electrical engineering construction technology
2H314021 Division and construction procedures of building electrical works
2H314021 Division and construction procedures of building electrical works
1. Division of construction electrical engineering divisions and sub-projects
2. Construction procedures of building electrical engineering
(1) Construction procedures for power transformation and distribution projects
(2) Construction procedures for power supply trunk lines and indoor wiring
(5) Construction procedures for lightning protection grounding devices:
2H314022 Construction technical requirements for building electrical engineering
1. Technical requirements for installation of power transformation and distribution equipment
1. Technical requirements for installation and construction of transformers and box-type substations
2. Technical requirements for installation and construction of switch cabinets and distribution cabinets
2. Technical requirements for construction of power supply trunk lines and indoor distribution lines
1. Technical requirements for the installation of bus ducts
2. Technical requirements for construction of ladder frames, pallets and trough boxes
3. Technical requirements for conduit construction
4. Technical requirements for cable construction
5. Technical requirements for wiring in conduits and wiring in slots
6. Technical requirements for plastic sheathed wire wiring
3. Technical requirements for installation of electrical power equipment
1. Technical requirements for installation of power distribution cabinets and control cabinets (boxes, tables)
2. Technical requirements for motor inspection, wiring and air load trial operation
4. Technical requirements for electrical lighting construction
1. Technical requirements for installation of lighting distribution boxes
2. Technical requirements for lighting installation
3. Technical requirements for switch installation
4. Technical requirements for socket installation
5. Technical requirements for construction of lightning protection devices
1. Construction technical requirements for air terminals
2. Construction technical requirements for lightning protection down conductors
6. Technical requirements for grounding device construction
(1) Construction technical requirements for grounding bodies
1. Construction technical requirements for artificial grounding bodies (poles)
2. Construction technical requirements for natural grounding bodies
3. Precautions for grounding body construction
(2) Construction technical requirements for grounding wires
1. Construction technical requirements for grounding trunk lines
2. Construction technical requirements for grounding branch lines
(3) Technical requirements for equipotential bonding construction
2H314030 Ventilation and air conditioning engineering construction technology
2H314031 Division and construction procedures of ventilation and air conditioning projects
2. Construction procedures for ventilation and air conditioning projects
2H314032 Construction technical requirements for ventilation and air conditioning projects
—Construction technical requirements for the production and installation of air duct systems
(1) Classification of air ducts
(2) Construction technical requirements for air duct production
(3) Key points for installation of air duct system
(4) Inspection and testing of air ducts
2. Construction technical requirements for air conditioning water systems
3. Construction technical requirements for equipment installation
4. Technical requirements for anti-corrosion and thermal insulation construction
5. Technical requirements for debugging ventilation and air conditioning systems
6. Clean air conditioning engineering construction technology
(2) Technical requirements for clean air conditioning systems
1. Technical key points of air duct production
3. Installation points of high-efficiency filter
4. Key points for debugging clean air conditioning projects
2H314040 Building intelligent engineering construction technology
2H314041 Division and construction procedures of intelligent building projects
2. Construction procedures of intelligent building projects
(1) Construction procedures of intelligent building projects
(2) Construction content and requirements for construction intelligent projects
4. Cable construction
2H314042 Technical requirements for installation of intelligent building equipment
1. Technical regulations for the installation of building intelligent system equipment
1. Installation requirements for computer room equipment
2. Installation requirements for satellite antennas and cable television equipment
3. Installation requirements for loudspeakers in broadcasting systems
4. Telephone switching equipment installation requirements
5. Installation requirements for building intelligent monitoring equipment
6. Installation of automatic fire alarm system equipment
7. Security system equipment installation requirements
2. Debugging and testing of building intelligent system equipment
1. Satellite antenna and cable TV equipment debugging and testing
2. Debugging and testing of broadcast system speakers
3. Building equipment monitoring system Equipment debugging and testing
4. Debugging and testing requirements for automatic fire alarm equipment
5. Safety technology prevention system debugging and testing requirements
6. Conference system detection
2H314050 Fire engineering construction technology
2H314051 Division and construction procedures of fire protection projects
1. Division of fire protection engineering
2. Fire engineering construction procedures
1. Construction procedures of water fire extinguishing system
3. Technical requirements for fire protection engineering construction
2H314052 Acceptance requirements for fire protection projects
1. Relevant regulations for acceptance of fire protection projects
2. Fire protection acceptance conditions for special construction projects and materials that should be submitted
3. Organization and acceptance procedures for fire protection engineering acceptance
4. Fire acceptance during construction
2. Fire protection projects can be divided into three types of fire protection acceptance forms according to construction procedures.
5. Fire acceptance and filing of other construction projects
2H314060 Elevator engineering construction technology
2H314061 Division and construction procedures of elevator projects
1. Division of sub-projects of elevator projects
2. Classification and composition of elevators
1. Classification of elevators
2.Elevator composition
3. Main technical parameters of the elevator
① Rated load capacity ② Rated speed.
3. Classification, composition and main parameters of escalators
1. Escalator classification
2. Composition of escalators
3. Main parameters of escalators
4. Elevator engineering construction procedures
1. Construction procedures for electric-driven traction or forced elevators
2. Hydraulic elevator construction procedures
3. Construction procedures for escalators and moving walkways
2H314062 Acceptance requirements for elevator projects
1. Requirements for installation and implementation of elevator projects
1. Procedures and construction management that should be performed before elevator installation
2. Requirements for elevator technical data
2. Quality acceptance requirements for electrically driven traction or forced elevator installation projects
3. Quality acceptance requirements for hydraulic elevator installation projects
4. Quality acceptance requirements for escalator and moving walkway installation projects
1. Equipment entry acceptance
2. Civil Construction Transfer Inspection Inspection
3. Complete machine installation and acceptance
Go to P367 2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
1. Special equipment production licensing system
(2) Relevant requirements of the "Special Equipment Safety Supervision Regulations"
2. Special equipment installation, modification and maintenance licenses
(3) Elevator
2H330000 Regulations and standards related to the construction of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H331000 Legal regulations related to the construction of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H331010 Measurement related regulations
2H331011 Management regulations for the use of construction measuring instruments
1. Calibration division of construction measuring instruments
3. Management regulations on the use of construction measuring instruments
4. Grades and calibration marks of construction measuring instruments
2H331012 Management procedures for measuring instruments at construction sites
4. Classified management of measuring instruments
Measuring instruments are divided into three categories: A, B, and C based on their performance, location of use, nature of use, and frequency of use.
(1) Class A measuring instruments
(2) Class B measuring instruments
(3) Class C measuring instruments
5. Management procedures for measuring instruments at construction sites
6. Management of measuring instruments by the project department
(1) Requirements for the use of measuring instruments at construction sites
(2) Storage, maintenance and maintenance system of measuring instruments at construction sites
2H331020 Relevant regulations on electricity consumption and construction in construction
2H331021 Regulations on electricity use in construction
1. Regulations on electricity usage procedures
Applications for new installation of electricity, temporary electricity use, increase of electricity capacity, change of electricity use and termination of electricity use shall be handled in accordance with the prescribed procedures.
(1) Electricity regulations for new installations, capacity additions and changes
(2) Regulations for users to handle electricity use procedures
2. Electricity metering devices and their regulations
3. Electricity safety regulations
(2) Safety management of temporary electricity use
2H331022 Regulations on construction operations in power facility protection zones
2. Protection scope and protected areas of electric power facilities
3. Protection scope of electric power facilities and operating permission regulations within the protection zone
(1) Protection scope of electric power facilities and operating permission regulations within the protection zone
(2) Requirements for construction operations in or near power facility protection zones
2H331030 Relevant regulations for special equipment
2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
1. Definition of special equipment
2. Types of special equipment
Boilers, pressure vessels, pressure pipes, lifting machinery
Go to each chapter
2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2. Qualification licenses for special equipment manufacturing, installation, modification and maintenance units
Qualifications for boilers, pressure vessels, hoisting machinery, elevators, and pressure pipelines
Go to each chapter
3. Production of special equipment
(1) Conditions that special equipment manufacturing, installation, transformation and repair units should meet
(2) Notice of installation, modification and repair of special equipment
(3) Special equipment leaves the factory (completion)
5. Legal responsibilities and prescribed penalties for violating the special equipment licensing system
2H332000 Construction related standards for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H332010 Unified requirements for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
2H332011 Project division and acceptance procedures for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
1. Division of construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
2. Project division for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
4. Procedures for construction quality acceptance
2H332012 Organization and qualification regulations for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
2. Procedures and organization for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
3. Acceptance of construction quality
2H332020 Unified requirements for construction quality acceptance of building and installation projects
2H332021 Project division and acceptance procedures for construction quality acceptance of building installation projects
1. Division of items for construction quality acceptance of construction and installation projects
2. Procedures for acceptance of construction quality of building and installation projects Inspection batch acceptance→sub-project acceptance→division (sub-division) project acceptance→unit (sub-unit) project acceptance.
2H332022 Organization and qualification regulations for construction quality acceptance of building installation projects
2. Regulations on the acceptance of construction quality of inspection batches
Inspection batch is the smallest unit of project acceptance.
4. Regulations on the quality acceptance of division (sub-division) projects
5. Regulations on project quality acceptance of units (sub-units)
2H333000 Regulations and related requirements for registration and practice management of Level 2 construction engineer (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2H333001 Standards for project scale for registered professional construction engineer level 2 (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2. Setting of project scale standards for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H333002 Scope of registered engineering practice for Level 2 construction engineer (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2. In mechanical and electrical engineering, the professional engineering scope of mechanical and electrical installation, petrochemical industry, electric power, and smelting
2H333003 Catalog of Construction Management Signature Documents for Second Class Construction Engineer (Electrical and Mechanical Engineering)
1. The type of project for which the registered construction engineer of mechanical and electrical engineering fills in the signature document
2. Documents generally included in various types of signature documents
2H320000 Mechanical and electrical engineering project construction management
2H320010 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction bidding management
2H320011 Construction Bidding Scope and Requirements
1. Scope of compulsory bidding for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering projects that must be tendered:
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering projects that do not require bidding:
2. Bidding methods for mechanical and electrical projects
1. The bidding methods for mechanical and electrical engineering projects are divided into public bidding and invitation bidding.
2. Projects where state -owned funds occupy a holding or dominant position must be bidded according to law, and bidding shall be made public; but if one of the following circumstances, bidding may be invited:
3. Tendering and bidding management requirements for mechanical and electrical projects
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding management and requirements
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding management and requirements
3. Requirements for bid opening and evaluation management of mechanical and electrical projects
2H320012 Conditions and procedures for construction bidding
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding conditions
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding procedures
3. Electronic bidding methods
1. The review of bidders’ professional qualifications includes: Business qualifications, professional qualifications, technical capabilities, management capabilities, construction experience (or similar project performance), personnel status, financial status, reputation, etc.
2H320020 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction contract management
2H320021 Implementation of construction subcontract
1. Contract Analysis
3. Contract Control
During the project implementation process, it is necessary to supervise, track and adjust the performance of the contract, and strengthen project change management to ensure the smooth performance of the contract.
1. Implement supervision
2. Track and adjust
4. Performance and management of construction subcontracts
(1) Management of the general contractor
(2) Performance and management of subcontractors
2H320022 Construction contract changes and claims
2. Claims for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Reasons for the claim
2. Classification of claims
3. Prerequisites for establishing a claim
4. Events in which the contractor may file a claim
2H320030 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction organization design
2H320031 Construction organization design preparation requirements
1. Construction organization design type
3. Basis for preparation of construction organization design
4. Basic contents of construction organization design
5. Approval of construction organization design preparation
6. Dynamic management of construction organization design
2H320032 Preparation and implementation of construction plan
1. Types of construction plans
3. Basis for preparation of construction plan
4. Contents and key points of construction plan preparation
5. Preparation, review and revision of special construction plans for safety of dangerous major projects
6. Construction plan optimization
7. Implementation of construction plan
2H320040 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction resource management
2H320041 Requirements for human resource management
1. Basic principles of human resource management
2. Allocation of key personnel of the project department at the construction site
3. Requirements for special operators and special equipment operators
(1) Requirements for special operations personnel
(2) Requirements for special equipment operators
(3) Management requirements of construction enterprises for special operators and special equipment operators
4. Basic principles of dynamic management of labor force at construction sites
2H320042 Requirements for engineering materials management
1. Material procurement planning and procurement plan
4. Material inventory management requirements
5. Requirements for material issuance, use and recycling
2H320043 Requirements for construction machinery management
2. Principles for Selection of Construction Machinery and Tools
3. Construction machinery and tool management requirements
2H320050 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction technology management
2H320051 Construction technology briefing
1. Basis, type and content of construction technical disclosure
(1) Basis for construction technical disclosure
(2) Type and content of construction technical disclosure:
2. Responsibilities and requirements for construction technical disclosure
(1) Responsibility for construction technical disclosure
(2) Requirements for construction technical disclosure
2H320052 Design change procedure
1. Classification according to the content nature of design changes
2. Design change requirements
(1) Change procedures for design change applications submitted by construction units
(2) Change procedures for design change applications submitted by construction units
(3) The design unit issues design change procedures
(4) Precautions for design changes
2H320053 Construction technical data and completion file management
2. Classification of construction project data
1. Construction project information (construction project documents)
2. Construction technical documents of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
3. Preparation and filling requirements of construction technical documents
4. Construction technical data management requirements
5. Main contents of completion files of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
6. Requirements for preparation of completion files for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
7. Requirements for completion file management of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H320060 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction progress management
2H320061 Implementation of unit project construction progress plan
1. Method of expressing the construction progress plan of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
Methods for expressing the construction progress plan of mechanical and electrical engineering include bar diagrams, network diagrams, milestone tables, and text descriptions. Commonly used are the bar diagram plan and the network diagram plan.
(1) Horizontal chart construction progress plan
(2) Network diagram construction progress plan
2. Key points in the preparation of mechanical and electrical engineering progress plans
3. Implementation of unit project construction progress plan
2H320062 Operation schedule plan requirements
1. Requirements for preparation of construction work progress plan
2. Implementation requirements of construction operation progress plan
2H320063 Monitoring and adjustment of construction progress
1. Reasons and factors affecting the progress of the construction plan
(1) Reasons affecting the progress of the construction plan
(2) Factors affecting the progress of the construction plan
2. Monitoring and analysis of construction progress
3. Construction schedule adjustment method
4. Contents and steps of construction schedule adjustment
5. Main measures for construction progress control
2H320070 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction quality management
2H320071 Construction quality pre-control
2. Preparation of quality plan for mechanical and electrical engineering
3. Quality control of the construction process of mechanical and electrical installation projects
4. Pre-control of mechanical and electrical engineering construction quality
5. Quality pre-control plan
6. Quality control of coordinated construction of mechanical and electrical projects
2H320072 Construction process quality inspection
2. Contents and methods of on-site quality inspection
2H320073 Handling of construction quality problems and quality accidents
1. Classification and definition of engineering quality accident issues
2. Classification of engineering quality accidents
3. Characteristics of quality accidents
4. Quality incident handling procedures
1. Accident report
3.Accident investigation
4.Write a quality accident investigation report
5. Accident handling report
5. Quality incident handling methods
2H320080 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction safety management
2H320081 Construction site occupational health and safety management requirements
1. Key points for the implementation of occupational health and safety management
2. Key points for construction safety implementation of the project department
1. Implement safety production management at the construction site in accordance with the enterprise's production safety management system
2. Establish and improve the safety production responsibility system
3. Safety production responsibilities of various personnel in the project department
3. Safety technical disclosure system
4. Safety inspection
6. Fire safety inspection
2H320082 Construction site hazard source identification
1. Scope of project hazard source identification
2. Types of hazard sources
3. Identification of hazard sources
2H320083 Construction safety technical measures
1. Formulation of construction safety technical measures
(2) Key points for implementation
2. Safety technical measures for hoisting operations
(2) Key points for lifting implementation
3. Main construction machinery and temporary electricity safety management
2H320084 Construction safety emergency plan
1. Emergency plan for safety accidents in mechanical and electrical engineering construction
(1) Regulations and standards
(2) Key points for implementation
2. Implementation requirements for preventing major hazardous source accidents in electromechanical engineering
(1) Implementation requirements for preventing falling accidents from heights
(2) Implementation requirements for preventing electric shock accidents
(3) Implementation requirements for preventing object strike accidents
3. Emergency measures when casualties occur
2H320085 Construction site safety accident handling
1. Classification of production safety accidents
2. Accident report
3. Accident investigation
2H320090 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction site management
2H320091 Communication and coordination
1. Internal communication and coordination
(2) Main contents of internal communication and coordination
(3) Main methods of internal communication and coordination
(4) Forms and measures of internal coordination and management
2. External communication and coordination
(1) Main objects of external communication and coordination
(2) Main contents of external communication and coordination
2H320092 Subcontracting management
1. The project department’s requirements for subcontracting team management
2. Principles and key points of the project department’s management of subcontracting teams
3. Management system and supervision and assessment
4. The project department’s coordination and management of the subcontracting team
5. The project department’s form of coordination and management of the subcontracting team
2H320093 On-site green construction measures
1. Green construction principles
"Four Festivals and One Environmental Protection" Energy saving, material saving, water saving, land saving and environmental protection.
2. Green construction responsibilities
1. Construction unit
4. Construction unit
3. Key points of green construction
(2) Key points of environmental protection technologies
1. Dust control
2.Noise and vibration control
3. Light pollution control
4. Water pollution control
5.Soil protection
6. Construction waste control
7. Underground facilities, cultural relics and resource protection
4. Green construction requirements
5. Green construction evaluation
(1) Evaluation system
(2) Evaluation organization, procedures and materials
2H320094 Civilized construction management on site
1. Construction site access and safety protection measures
2. Construction material management measures
4. Temporary power management measures at construction sites
2H320100 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction cost management
2H320101 Basis for construction cost control
1. Composition of mechanical and electrical engineering cost items
2. Construction cost plan of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H320102 Implementation of construction cost plan
1. Principles of project cost control
2. Basis and procedures for project cost control
3. Contents of project cost control
4. Methods of project construction cost control
2H320103 Measures to reduce construction costs
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering project assessment costs, project planned costs (target costs), and actual project costs
2. Main measures to reduce construction costs of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Organizational measures to reduce project construction costs
2. Technical measures to reduce project costs
2H320110 Mechanical and electrical engineering project trial operation management
2H320111 Trial operation conditions
1. Division of trial operation stages of electromechanical engineering projects
According to the trial operation stage, it is divided into three stages: stand-alone trial operation, linkage trial operation, and load trial operation (or feeding trial operation, trial production). The trial operation of the previous stage is the preparation for the trial operation of the latter stage, and the trial operation of the latter stage must be carried out after the completion of the previous stage.
2. Division of responsibilities and participating units for trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
3. Conditions that should be met before trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
2H320112 Trial operation requirements
1. Single machine trial operation of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(3) Requirements for stand-alone trial operation of general mechanical equipment
1.Fan
(1) Centrifugal ventilator
(2) Axial flow fan
(3) Roots and Ye's blowers
(4) Centrifugal blower
(5) Axial flow blower
3.Pump
(1) Basic requirements for pump trial operation
(2) Trial operation of centrifugal pump
(5) After the trial operation of a single machine, tasks that should be completed in time
2. Joint trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
(1) Main scope and purpose of joint trial operation
3. Load trial operation of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(2) Standards that should be met during load trial operation
2H320120 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction settlement and completion acceptance
2H320121 Application of construction settlement regulations
1. Types of completion settlement and basis for project pricing
2. Engineering prepayment and mid -term payment
3. Project Completion Settlement
2H320122 Completion acceptance work procedures and requirements
1. Scope and classification of completion acceptance of project delivery
2. Basis for completion acceptance
4. Procedures for completion of construction projects
5. Requirements and implementation of completion acceptance
2H320130 Mechanical and electrical engineering warranty and return visit
2H320131 Warranty implementation
1. Scope of warranty liability
2. Warranty period
3. Warranty work procedures
2H320132 Implementation of return visit
2. Project return visit plan
4. Methods of project return visits
2H311000 Commonly used materials and engineering equipment for mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311010 Commonly used materials in mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311011 Types and applications of metal materials
1. Metal materials
(1) Classification of metal materials
Metal materials are usually divided into ferrous metals, non-ferrous metals and special metal materials. 1. Ferrous metals are also called steel materials, including pure iron, steel, cast iron, structural steel for various purposes, stainless steel, heat-resistant steel, high-temperature alloys, precision alloys, etc. Generalized ferrous metals also include chromium, manganese and their alloys. 2. Non-ferrous metals refer to all metals and their alloys except iron, chromium and manganese. They are usually divided into light metals, heavy metals, precious metals, semi-metals, rare metals and rare earth metals. The strength and hardness of non-ferrous alloys are generally higher than that of pure metals. , and the resistance is large and the temperature coefficient of resistance is small. 3. Special metal materials include structural metal materials and functional metal materials for different purposes. Among them are amorphous metal materials obtained through rapid condensation process, as well as quasicrystalline, microcrystalline, nanocrystalline metal materials, etc.; there are also alloys with special functions such as stealth, hydrogen resistance, superconductivity, shape memory, wear resistance, shock absorption and damping, etc. and metal matrix composites, etc.
(2) Properties of metal materials
Generally divided into two categories: process performance and usage performance. 1. Process performance: refers to the performance of mechanical parts during the manufacturing process, that is, under cold and hot processing conditions. The technological performance of metal materials determines its adaptability to processing and shaping during the manufacturing process, such as casting performance, weldability, forgeability, heat treatment performance, cutting processability, etc. 2. Usage performance: refers to the performance of metal materials under the conditions of use of mechanical parts. It includes mechanical properties, physical properties, chemical properties, etc. The performance of metal materials determines its range of use and service life.
Mechanical properties: strength, plasticity, hardness, impact toughness, multiple impact resistance and fatigue limit, etc.
Physical properties: density (specific gravity), melting point, thermal expansion, magnetism, electrical properties, etc.
Chemical properties: corrosion resistance, oxidation resistance, and the impact of compounds formed between different metals and between metals and non-metals on mechanical properties, etc.
2. Black metal
(1) Classification
1. Classification of steel: Steel refers to materials with iron as the main element, carbon content generally below 2%, and other elements. 2% is usually the dividing line between steel and cast iron. Steel can be divided into three categories: non-alloy steel, low alloy steel and alloy steel according to its chemical composition. 2. Classification of non-alloy steel: classified according to the main quality grade of steel
Ordinary quality non-alloy steel mainly includes: general-purpose carbon structural steel, carbon reinforced steel, general carbon steel for railways, etc.
High-quality non-alloy steel mainly includes: high-quality carbon steel for mechanical structures, carbon steel for engineering structures, low-carbon structural steel for stamping thin plates, carbon steel for welding rods, non-alloy free-cutting structural steel, high-quality cast carbon steel, etc.
Special quality non-alloy steel mainly includes: carbon steel with guaranteed hardenability, special carbon steel for railways, special carbon steel for aviation and weapons, carbon steel for nuclear energy, steel for special welding rods, carbon spring steel, carbon tool steel and special Free cutting steel, etc.
(2) Steel products commonly used in mechanical and electrical engineering
1. Carbon structural steel
(1) Grade representation method: consisting of the yield strength letter Q, the yield strength value (unit: MPa), the quality grade symbol (A, B, C, D, the quality increases in order), the deoxidation method symbol (F- - boiling steel, Z -Killed steel, TZ (a special killed steel) consists of four parts in sequence. (3) Application: Mainly used for general engineering structures and ordinary mechanical parts. Carbon structural steel is usually hot-rolled into various profiles (such as round steel, square steel, I-beam, etc.) and is generally used directly without heat treatment.
Q195, Q215: Usually rolled into thin plates and steel bars to supply the market. It can also be used to make rivets, screws, light-load stamping parts and welded structural parts, etc.
Q235: Slightly higher strength, can be used to make bolts, nuts, pins, hooks and less important mechanical parts as well as rebar, section steel, steel bars, etc. in building structures; Q235C and D grades with better quality can be used as important welded structures Materials
Q275: It can partially replace high-quality carbon structural steel 25, 30 and 35 steel.
2.High quality carbon structural steel (3) Application: Mainly used for mechanical parts, usually after heat treatment.
08 Steel: Low carbon mass fraction, good plasticity, low strength, rolled into thin plates mainly used for cold stamping parts, such as home appliances, automobiles and instrument casings
20 Steel: Good cold plastic deformation and weldability, can be used for parts with low strength requirements and carburized parts, such as hoods, welding containers, small shafts, nuts, washers and carburized gears, etc.
45 steel: Good comprehensive mechanical properties can be obtained after quenching and tempering. Medium carbon steel is mainly used for mechanical parts with greater stress, such as gears, connecting rods, shafts, etc.
65 (65Mn) steel: Steel has high strength and can be used to manufacture various springs, motorcycle rims, low-speed wheels, etc.
3. Boiler steel
Boiler steel mainly refers to the materials used to manufacture boiler superheaters, main steam pipes and boiler heating surfaces. The performance requirements for boiler steel are mainly good welding performance, certain high temperature strength and resistance to alkaline corrosion and oxidation. Commonly used boiler steels include low-carbon killed steel smelted by open-hearth furnaces or low-carbon steel smelted by electric furnaces, with carbon content WC in the range of 0.16% to 0.26%. When manufacturing high-pressure boilers, pearlitic heat-resistant steel or austenitic heat-resistant steel is used. In recent years, ordinary low alloy steel has also been used to build boilers, such as 12 manganese, 15
4.Stainless steel
(1) Stainless acid-resistant steel is referred to as stainless steel. It is composed of two parts: stainless steel and acid-resistant steel. In short, steel that can resist atmospheric corrosion is called stainless steel, while steel that can resist corrosion by chemical media (such as acids) is called acid-resistant steel. Generally speaking, steel with a chromium content Wcr greater than 12% has the characteristics of stainless steel. (2) Stainless steel can be divided into five categories according to its microstructure after heat treatment: ferritic stainless steel, martensitic stainless steel, austenitic stainless steel, austenitic-ferritic stainless steel and precipitation hardening stainless steel.
5. Heat-resistant steel
(2) Heat-resistant steel can be divided into austenitic heat-resistant steel, martensite heat-resistant steel, ferritic heat-resistant steel and pearlitic heat-resistant steel according to its normalized structure. Heat-resistant steel and stainless acid-resistant steel overlap with each other in terms of use. Some stainless steels have the characteristics of heat-resistant steel and can be used as stainless acid-resistant steel or heat-resistant steel.
3. Non-ferrous metals
Non-ferrous metals refer to all metals and their alloys except iron, manganese and chromium, which are usually divided into light metals, heavy metals, precious metals, semi-metals, rare metals and rare earth metals. The strength and hardness of nonferrous alloys are generally higher than those of pure metals, and their resistance is greater and their temperature coefficient of resistance is smaller.
(1) Aluminum and aluminum alloys
1. Aluminum ingots for remelting (1) Aluminum ingots for remelting (hereinafter referred to as aluminum ingots) are pure aluminum produced by the alumina-cryolite molten salt electrolysis method. (2) Aluminum ingot products are divided into 8 grades according to their chemical composition: Al99.85, Al99.80, Al99.70, Al99.60, Al99.50, Al99.00, Al99.7E, Al99.6E, where the numbers represent The chemical composition (mass fraction) Al is not less than this value.
2. Cast aluminum alloy (1) Using aluminum ingots as the main raw material, add other elements according to national standards or special requirements, such as: silicon (Si), copper (Cu), magnesium (Mg), iron (Fe)... to improve the castability of pure aluminum , chemical and physical deficiencies, and prepared alloys. (2) According to the differences in main alloy elements, there are four types of cast aluminum alloy products: aluminum-silicon alloys, aluminum-copper alloys, aluminum-magnesium alloys, and aluminum-zinc alloys, which can be used for the production of aluminum alloy castings (excluding die castings).
3. Deformed aluminum and aluminum alloys (1) Aluminum and aluminum alloy processing products produced by pressure processing methods and the ingots and billets used therein.
4. Aluminum and aluminum alloy pipes (1) Seamless round pipes are pipes that have no dividing lines or welds between the boundaries of the inner holes by piercing and extruding the blank with a perforation needle, or by boring and extruding the blank with a fixed needle. (2) Seamed pipes do not use perforation extrusion of the blank, but use a split flow combination die or a bridge combination die to extrudate the pipes (including round pipes) with one or more dividing lines or welds between the boundaries of the inner holes. , rectangular tubes and regular polygonal tubes). (3) Welded pipes are pipes welded from rolled plates or strips and have a clear dividing line or weld between the welding boundaries.
5. Aluminum and aluminum alloy building materials profiles (1) Aluminum alloy building profiles can be divided into: base materials, anodized profiles, electrophoretic painted profiles, powder-coated profiles, and heat-insulating profiles. (2) Thermal insulation profiles are often called broken bridge aluminum alloys. They are composite materials with heat and cold insulation functions made of non-metallic materials with low thermal conductivity connected to aluminum alloy building profiles.
6. Aluminum and aluminum alloy busbars Aluminum and aluminum alloy busbars for electrical purposes (also known as aluminum and aluminum alloy busbars) are divided into aluminum busbars and aluminum alloy wires according to the type of material.
(2) Other nonferrous metals
Non-ferrous metal materials involved in mechanical and electrical installation projects also include: copper, titanium, magnesium, nickel, zirconium metals and their alloys.
(3) Precious metals
Precious metals mainly refer to gold, silver and platinum group metals. According to the production process and taking into account the specific use of a certain product, precious metals and their alloy grades are divided into five categories: smelting products, processed products, composite materials, powder products, and brazing materials.
2H311012 Types and applications of non-metallic materials
1. Types of non-metallic materials
(1) Polymer materials
Polymer materials are also called polymer materials. They are a type of material made of polymer compounds as a matrix and other additives. Polymer materials can be divided into rubber, fiber, plastic, polymer adhesive, polymer coating and polymer-based composite materials according to their characteristics.
1.Plastic
According to use, it can be divided into three types: general plastics, engineering plastics and special plastics.
General plastics: polyethylene, polypropylene, polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene
Engineering plastics: general engineering plastics
Polyamide, polycarbonate, polyacetal, polyester, polyphenylene ether
Engineering plastics: special engineering plastics
Special plastics: polyphenylene sulfide, polyimide, polysulfone, polyetherketone, liquid crystal polymer
(1) General plastic General-purpose plastics generally refer to plastics with large output, wide range of uses, good formability, and low price. There are four major varieties of general plastics, namely polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and polystyrene (PS). According to the characteristics of synthetic resin, it can be divided into thermoplastic plastics and thermosetting plastics. Typically, thermoplastic products are recyclable, while thermoset plastics are not.
General plastic/features/application
polyethylene
High density polyethylene (HDPE)
Better thermal, electrical and mechanical properties
Films, pipes, injection parts, daily necessities and other fields.
Low density polyethylene (LDPE)
Better flexibility, impact performance, film forming properties, etc.
Packaging film, agricultural film, plastic modification, etc.
Linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE)
Better flexibility, impact performance, film forming properties, etc.
Packaging film, agricultural film, plastic modification, etc.
Polypropylene
Homopolymer polypropylene (HOMOPP)
Drawing, fiber, injection parts, BOPP film and other fields
Block copolymer polypropylene (COPP)
Household appliances, injection parts, modified raw materials, daily injection products, pipes, etc.
Random copolymerized polypropylene (RAPP)
Transparent products, high-performance products, high-performance pipes, etc.
The largest areas where polypropylene is used are woven bags, packaging bags, strapping ropes and other products. Modified polypropylene can be molded into bumpers, anti-scuff strips, automobile steering wheels, instrument panels and interior decoration parts.
PVC
Low cost, the product is self-flaming retardant
It is widely used in the construction field, especially in sewer pipes, plastic steel doors and windows, plates, artificial leather, etc. Hydrogen chloride and other toxic gases are released during combustion.
polystyrene
Transparent, cheap, rigid, insulating, good printability
Various instrument casings, lampshades, optical and chemical instrument parts, transparent films, capacitor dielectric layers, etc.
General engineering plastics/features/application
Polyamide (PA)
It is non-toxic, lightweight, has excellent mechanical strength, wear resistance and good corrosion resistance.
Instead of copper and other metals, it can be used to manufacture bearings, gears, pumps and other parts in machinery, chemical, instrumentation, automobile and other industries.
Polycarbonate (PC)
Features None
Protective windows for banks, embassies, detention centers and public places, aircraft canopies, lighting equipment, industrial safety shields and bulletproof glass
Polyoxymethylene (POM)
It has metal-like hardness, strength and rigidity, good self-lubricating properties, good fatigue resistance, and elasticity over a wide temperature and humidity range. In addition, it has good chemical resistance.
At a lower cost than many other engineering plastics. In the fields of electronics, electrical, machinery, instrumentation, daily light industry, automobiles, building materials, agriculture and other fields
Polyester (PBT)
Features None
In the early days of development, it was mainly used to make small replacement metal parts for automobiles. Later, due to the advent of flame-retardant glass fiber reinforced PBT and other varieties, it was widely used to make electrical products, such as transformer parts for televisions.
Polyphenylene ether (PPO)
Features None
Make car dashboards, radiator grilles, speaker grilles, consoles, fuse boxes, relay boxes, connectors, wheel covers. In the electronic and electrical industry, it is widely used in the manufacture of connectors, coil winding bobbins, switching relays, tuning equipment, large electronic displays, variable capacitors, battery accessories, microphones and other components. It can be used as exterior parts and components for copiers, computer systems, printers, fax machines, etc. In addition, it can be used as housings and parts of cameras, timers, water pumps, blowers, silent gears, pipes, valve bodies, surgical instruments, sterilizers and other medical equipment parts.
2.Rubber
According to source
Natural and synthetic rubber
According to performance and usage
General rubber
Refers to rubber whose properties are the same as or close to those of natural rubber, with good physical properties and processing properties, and are used to make general products such as hoses, seals, and conveyor belts.
Natural rubber, styrene-butadiene rubber, butadiene rubber, chloroprene rubber, etc.
Special rubber
It has special properties and is specially used for rubber with special performance requirements such as heat resistance, cold resistance, chemical corrosion resistance, oil resistance, solvent resistance, radiation resistance, etc.
Silicone rubber, fluorine rubber, polyurethane rubber, nitrile rubber, etc.
3.Polymer coating
Classification standards: different according to film-forming substances
Category: Grease paint, natural resin paint and synthetic resin paint
6. Functional polymer materials
In addition to the general mechanical properties, insulation properties and thermal properties of polymers, functional polymer materials also have special functions such as material energy and information conversion, magnetism, transmission and storage. Including polymer information conversion materials, polymer transparent materials, polymer simulated enzymes, biodegradable polymer materials, polymer shape memory materials and medical and pharmaceutical polymer materials, etc.
(2) Inorganic non-metallic materials
1. Ordinary (traditional) inorganic non-metallic materials such as cement, glass, ceramics and refractory materials are necessary basic materials for industry and infrastructure construction. 2. Special (new) inorganic non-metallic materials mainly include advanced ceramics, amorphous materials, artificial lenses, inorganic coatings, inorganic fibers, etc.
1. Ordinary (traditional) inorganic non-metallic materials
Such as cement, glass, ceramics and refractory materials, etc., are necessary basic materials for industry and infrastructure construction.
2. Special (new) inorganic non-metallic materials
Mainly include advanced ceramics, amorphous materials, artificial crystals, inorganic coatings, inorganic fibers, etc.
2. Non-metallic materials commonly used in mechanical and electrical engineering and their scope of use
Non-metallic air duct/applicable scope non-applicable scope
Fiberglass composite air duct
Air conditioning system below medium pressure
Clean air conditioning, acid-base environment and smoke prevention and exhaust systems and systems with relative humidity above 90%
Phenolic composite air duct
Low and medium voltage air conditioning systems and humid environments
High-pressure and clean air conditioning, acid-base environment and smoke prevention and exhaust systems
Polyurethane composite air duct
Low, medium and high pressure clean air conditioning systems and humid environments
Acid-alkaline environment and smoke prevention and exhaust system
Rigid polyvinyl chloride air duct
Clean room exhaust system containing acid and alkali
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe
The inner wall is smooth and has low resistance, no scaling, non-toxic, non-polluting and corrosion-resistant. The operating temperature is not greater than 40℃, so it is a cold water pipe. It has good anti-aging properties and is flame retardant, and can be installed with a rubber ring flexible interface. Mainly used for water supply pipes (non-drinking water), drainage pipes, and rainwater pipes.
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipe
It has high mechanical strength at high temperatures and is suitable for situations under pressure. Mainly used in hot and cold water pipes, fire water pipe systems, and industrial piping systems.
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Random copolymer polypropylene pipe
Non-toxic, harmless, non-rusting, non-corrosive, highly resistant to acid and chloride. It is suitable for direct burial and concealed application in walls and floor surfaces, as the water flow resistance is small. Mainly used in drinking water pipes, hot and cold water pipes.
Butylene tube
It has high strength, good toughness and is non-toxic. Used in drinking water, hot and cold water pipes. Especially suitable for thin-walled and small-diameter pressure pipes.
Cross-linked polyethylene pipe
Non-toxic, hygienic and transparent. Coils primarily used in radiant floor heating systems.
Plastic and composite water pipes/characteristics and scope of use
Aluminum plastic composite pipe
Safe and non-toxic, corrosion-resistant, non-scaling, large flow, small resistance, long life, good flexibility, no rebound after bending, simple installation. Applied to drinking water, cold and hot water pipes.
Plastic coated copper tube
Non-toxic, antibacterial and hygienic, non-corrosive, non-scaling, good water quality, large flow, high strength, high rigidity, heat-resistant, anti-freeze, durable, wide temperature range for long-term use (-70~100℃), better insulation than copper pipes Good performance. Mainly used as industrial and domestic drinking water, cold and hot water transportation pipelines.
Adhesive
Modern adhesives can be divided by how they are used: Types/Applications
Aggregation
Epoxy resin
Hot melt type
Nylon, polyethylene
Pressurized type
natural rubber
water soluble type
starch
New polymer materials/features
Optical functional materials
Able to absorb and convert light, or transmit and store it.
Polymer separation membrane materials
A semi-permeable filter membrane made of polymer materials. Its typical feature is selective permeability. This material has made important contributions to environmental protection work, etc., and has high separation efficiency and good use conditions.
Polymer composite materials
This material combines the characteristics of multiple materials, and its advantages are very obvious. For example, composite materials can have multiple advantages such as high temperature resistance and high strength at the same time.
Polymer magnetic materials
It refers to a composite form of magnetic materials and polymer materials, and is also a type of polymer composite material.
2H311013 Types and applications of electrical materials
1. Wires: Wires are used to transmit electrical energy and signals. There are many types of conductors, which can be divided into bare conductors, insulated conductors, etc. according to their performance, structure and usage characteristics.
1. Bare wires: Bare wires have no insulation layer, good heat dissipation, and can carry larger currents. Commonly used ones include round single wire, bare stranded wire and shaped wire.
(1) Bare stranded wire: Bare stranded wire is mainly used for overhead lines and has good electrical conductivity and sufficient mechanical strength. Commonly used bare stranded wire models, specifications and uses
name
model
Section (mm2)
use
aluminum stranded wire
LJ
10~600
Used for overhead lines with small spans
Steel core aluminum stranded wire
LGJ
10~400
Used for overhead lines with large distances
copper stranded wire
TJ
10~400
Generally not used
(2) Profile line Profiled wires include copper busbars, aluminum busbars, flat steel, etc. Rectangular hard copper busbars (TMY type) and hard aluminum busbars (LMY type) are used for busbar devices in power transformation and distribution systems and low-voltage overhead busbars in workshops. Flat steel is used for grounding wires and lightning wires. Commonly used flat steel specifications include 25x4, 25x6, 40x4, etc. For example, TMY-100x10 means that the hard copper busbar is 100mm wide and 10mm thick
2. Insulated wires Low-voltage power supply lines and electrical equipment connections mostly use insulated wires. According to the insulating layer material, it is divided into polyvinyl chloride insulated wires, rubber insulated wires, etc. PVC insulated copper wires are often used in construction projects. The core materials of insulated wires include copper core and aluminum core (aluminum core is basically not used). Commonly used wire cross-sections in mechanical and electrical engineering are 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120 , 150, 185, 240mm², etc. Sheathed wires are divided into two cores, three cores, four cores and five cores.
model
name
use
BX(BLX)
Rubber copper (aluminum) core wire
Suitable for electrical equipment and lighting equipment with AC 500V and below, DC 1000V and below
BXR
Rubber copper core cord
Suitable for electrical equipment and lighting equipment with AC 500V and below, DC 1000V and below
BV(BLV)
PVC copper (aluminum) core wire
Suitable for fixed wiring of various equipment, power and lighting
BVR
PVC copper core flexible wire
Suitable for fixed wiring of various equipment, power and lighting
BVV (BLVV)
PVC insulated and sheathed copper (aluminum) core wire
Suitable for fixed wiring of various equipment, power and lighting
RVB
PVC parallel copper core flexible wire
Suitable for connection of various AC and DC electrical appliances, electrical instruments, small power tools, and household electrical appliances
RVS
PVC twisted copper core soft wire
Suitable for connection of various AC and DC electrical appliances, electrical instruments, small power tools, and household electrical appliances
RV
PVC copper core flexible wire
Suitable for connection of various AC and DC electrical appliances, electrical instruments, small power tools, and household electrical appliances
RVV
PVC insulated and sheathed copper core flexible wire
Suitable for connection of various AC and DC electrical appliances, electrical instruments, small power tools, and household electrical appliances
For example, BV-0.5kV-1.5mm² means plastic copper core wire, rated voltage 500V, cross-section 1.5mm²;
For example, BVV-0.5kV-2x1.5mm² means plastic sheathed copper core wire, rated voltage 500V, 2 cores, cross-section 1.5mm²
2. Cable Cables are divided into power cables, communication cables, control cables and signal cables according to their uses; they are divided into paper insulated cables, rubber insulated cables, plastic insulated cables according to insulating materials; cables are also divided into flame retardant cables and fire-resistant cables. The structure of a cable mainly consists of three parts, namely the core, the insulation layer and the protective layer. The protective layer is divided into an inner protective layer and an outer protective layer. The most widely used in electrical engineering are power cables.
1.Power cable Power cables are products used to transmit and distribute electrical energy. Mainly used in power transmission and transformation lines, the operating current ranges from tens to thousands of amps, and the rated voltage is 220V-500kV and above. Commonly used power cables are divided into two categories: copper core and aluminum core according to their core materials. According to the insulation materials used, they are divided into polyvinyl chloride insulated power cables, cross-linked polyethylene insulated power cables, rubber insulated power cables and paper insulated power cables. For cables with PVC insulation or PVC sheath, the ambient temperature during installation should not be lower than 0°C.
Model/name
model
Name
VV/VLV
PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper core/aluminum core power cable
YJV
XLPE insulated PVC sheathed copper core power cable
YJV22
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed steel tape armored copper core power cable
YJV32
XLPE insulated PVC sheathed fine steel wire armored copper core power cable
YJV42
XLPE insulated PVC sheathed thick steel wire armored copper core power cable
YJY
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyethylene sheathed copper core power cable
YJFE
Irradiation cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyolefin sheathed copper core power cable
For example, YJV22-0.6/1-3x95 1x50 means cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed steel tape armored copper core power cable, rated voltage 0.6/1kV, 3
For example, YIY-26/35-3x240 means cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyethylene sheathed copper core power cable, rated voltage 26/35kV, 3 cores 240mm².
(1) Flame retardant cable Flame-retardant cables refer to cables whose residual flames or residual burns can extinguish themselves within a limited time. When flame-retardant cables are burned, they can control the spread of flames within a certain range, thus avoiding major disasters caused by cable fire and extension, thereby improving the fire protection level of cable lines.
According to the different flame retardant materials of the cable, flame retardant cables are divided into halogen-containing flame retardant cables and halogen-free low-smoke flame retardant cables. Halogen-free low-smoke cables are made of rubber materials that do not contain halogens (F, Cl, Br, I, At), lead, cadmium, chromium, mercury and other substances. They produce less smoke and dust when burned and are not It emits toxic fumes and is less corrosive when burned, so it does little harm to the environment. Flame-retardant cables are divided into three categories: A, B, and C, with category A being the highest. Halogen-free and low-smoke polyolefin materials mainly use hydroxide as a flame retardant. Hydroxide is also called an alkali, and its characteristic is that it easily absorbs moisture in the air (deliquescence). The result of deliquescence is that the volume resistivity of the insulation layer drops significantly.
model
Name
Purpose
ZA(B,C)-YJV
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed Class A (B, C) flame retardant copper core power cable
Can be laid in rooms, tunnels, etc. that require flame retardancy
WDZA(B,C)-YJY
Halogen-free low-smoke Class A (B, C) flame-retardant cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyethylene sheathed copper core power cable
Can be laid in rooms, tunnels, etc. that require flame retardancy, halogen-free and low smoke.
WDZA(B,C)-YJFE
Halogen-free low-smoke Class A (B, C) flame-retardant radiation cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyolefin sheathed copper core power cable
Can be laid in places requiring halogen-free, low-smoke, flame-retardant, and high temperatures.
(2) Fire-resistant cable Fire-resistant cables refer to cables that can maintain safe operation for a certain period of time under flame burning conditions. It is divided into two categories: A and B. Category A can last for 90 minutes when the flame temperature is 950-1000°C. Category B can last for 90 minutes when the flame temperature is 750-800°C. Fire-resistant cables are widely used in high-rise buildings, subways, underground shopping malls, large power stations and important industrial and mining enterprises and other places related to fire safety and firefighting and life-saving. Fire-resistant cables can still maintain complete operation of the line even when the building is burning and accompanied by water spray.
When fire-resistant cables are used in cable tunnels and cable mezzanines with dense cables, or in flammable places such as oil pipelines and oil depots, Class A fire-resistant cables should be selected first. Except for the above situations and when the number of cable configurations is small, Class B fire-resistant cables can be used. Fire-resistant cables are mostly used as power supply circuits for emergency power supplies and are required to function normally in case of fire. Since the ambient temperature rises sharply during a fire, in order to ensure the transmission capacity of the line and reduce the voltage drop, for circuits with long power supply lines and strictly limited allowable voltage drops, the cross-section of the fire-resistant cable should be enlarged by at least one level. Fire-resistant cables cannot be used as high-temperature resistant cables. In order to reduce the probability of cable joint failure in a fire accident, the number of joints should be minimized during installation to ensure that the line can work normally in a fire. If branch wiring is required, fireproofing should be done at the joints.
model
Name
Purpose
WDN (A, B)-YJY
Halogen-free low-smoke (A, B) fire-resistant cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyethylene sheathed copper core power cable
Can be laid in rooms, tunnels and pipelines that require halogen-free, low smoke and fire resistance
WDN (A, B)-YJFE
Halogen-free low-smoke (A, B) fire-resistant radiation cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyolefin sheathed copper core power cable
It can be laid in rooms, tunnels and pipelines that require halogen-free, low-smoke and fire resistance and have high temperatures.
(3) Magnesium oxide cable Magnesium oxide cable is made of copper core, copper sheath and magnesium oxide insulation material. Excellent fire resistance; high temperature resistance (the cable allows long-term working temperature up to 250°C), explosion-proof, large current carrying capacity, good waterproof performance, high mechanical strength, long life, good grounding performance and other advantages, but it is expensive and the process is complex. Construction is difficult. Magnesium oxide cables can be used in oil irrigation areas, important wooden public buildings, high temperature places and other places with high fire resistance requirements and acceptable economic performance. Due to the particularity of the raw materials and processes of magnesium oxide cables, multi-core cables with a cross-section of 25mm² or more are composed of single-core cables.
model
name
BTTQ
Light copper sheathed magnesium oxide insulated copper core power cable
BTTZ
Heavy duty copper sheathed magnesium oxide insulated copper core power cable
For example, BTTQ-3x4, means lightweight copper sheathed magnesium oxide insulated copper core cable, 3 cores, 4mm².
For example, BTTZ-5x1x25, means heavy-duty copper sheathed magnesium oxide insulated copper core power cable, 5 single cores 25mm²
(4) Branch cable Branch cables are pre-fabricated on the main cable by the factory according to the design requirements. The cross-section and length of the branch lines are determined according to the design requirements, which greatly shortens the construction period, greatly reduces material costs and construction costs, and ensures power distribution safety and reliability. Branch cables can be widely used in various mid- and high-rise buildings such as residential buildings, office buildings, business buildings, teaching buildings, and scientific research buildings, as main and trunk cables for power distribution. Commonly used branch cables include cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyvinyl chloride sheathed copper core power cable (YJV type), cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyethylene sheathed copper core power cable (YJY type) and halogen-free low-smoke flame retardant and fire-resistant type. Irradiation cross-linked polyethylene insulated polyolefin sheathed copper core power cable (WDZN-YJFE type) and other types of cables can be selected according to the flame retardant and fire resistance requirements of the branch cable's use occasion. When ordering branch cables, the location of each distribution cabinet should be determined according to the building electrical design drawing, and the model, specifications and total effective length of the main cable should be provided; the model, specifications and effective length of each section of each branch cable should be provided; each branch connector should be on the main cable The location (size); installation method (vertical laying along the wall, horizontal overhead laying, etc.); required model, specification and quantity of branch cable hanging heads, beam hanging and other accessories.
(5) Aluminum alloy cable Aluminum alloy cable is different from traditional aluminum core cable. It is a novel cable in China. The structure of the cable mainly includes two categories: unarmored and armored, with and without PVC sheath. The core The wire is made of aluminum alloy material with high strength, creep resistance and high conductivity. Non-embedded aluminum alloy power cables can replace YJV type power cables and are suitable for laying indoors, tunnels, cable trenches and other places, and cannot withstand external mechanical forces; Embedded aluminum alloy power cables can replace YJV22 power cables. They are suitable for laying in tunnels, cable trenches, shafts or underground, and can withstand large mechanical external forces and tensile forces.
2.Control cable Control cables are used in secondary systems of electrical control systems and power distribution devices. The current of the secondary circuit is small, so the cross-section of the core wire is usually below 10mm². The core of the control cable is mostly made of copper conductor, and its core wire combinations include concentric and twisted types. Control cables are divided into polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene and rubber according to their insulation layer materials. Among them, polyethylene has the best electrical properties and can be used in high-frequency lines. Plastic insulated control cables: such as KVV, KVVP, etc. Mainly used for control, signal, protection and measurement lines of AC 500V, DC 1000V and below.
Plastic insulated control cable
Applicable places
KVVP
Laying indoors, cable trenches and other places requiring shielding
KVV22
Layed in cable trenches, direct burials and other places that can withstand large mechanical external forces
KVVR, KVVRP
Installed indoors in places requiring mobility
3. Instrument cable (1) Instrument cables: such as YVV, YVVP, etc., suitable for signal transmission and control lines in instruments and other electrical equipment. (2) Flame-retardant instrument cables: such as ZRC-YVVP, ZRC-YYJVP, ZRC-YEVP, etc., flame-retardant instrument cables have high anti-interference performance, stable electrical performance, can reliably transmit digital signals and analog signals, and have resistance It has characteristics such as combustion, so it is widely used in detection and control systems in power stations, mining and petrochemical industries. It is often fixedly installed indoors, in tunnels, in pipes or in outdoor brackets.
3. Bus duct The bus duct is composed of a metal shell (steel plate or aluminum plate), conductive bars, insulating materials and related accessories. It has the advantages of series matching, small size, large capacity, easy distribution of current to various branches, short design and construction period, convenient assembly and disassembly, safety and reliability, and long service life. It is especially suitable for high-rise buildings, standard workshops, and workshops with intensive machine tools, etc. Place, used for power feed and distribution, is an ideal series of power transmission and distribution products.
1. Classification of bus ducts
Classification
Classification
bus duct
According to insulation method
Air bus duct, compact bus duct and high strength bus duct
According to conductive materials
Copper bus duct and aluminum bus duct
According to fire protection ability
Ordinary bus duct and fire-resistant bus duct
(1) Air bus duct The joints between the busbars are softly connected with copper sheets. The joints are too large and occupy a certain space, so they are rarely used. Air bus ducts cannot be used for vertical installation due to the chimney effect.
(2) Compact bus duct The compact bus duct adopts plug-in connection and has the advantages of small size, compact structure, reliable operation, large transmission current, easy tap feeding, and convenient maintenance. It can be used in tree-trunk power supply systems and is widely used in high-rise buildings. The heat dissipation of the compact bus duct mainly depends on the outer shell. The temperature rise of the bus duct is high and the heat dissipation effect is poor. The air gap between the phases of the busbar is small. When the busbar passes a large current, a large electric force is generated, causing the magnetic oscillation frequency to form a superposition state, which may produce large noise. The compact bus duct has poor moisture-proof performance and is prone to moisture and water seepage during construction, resulting in a decrease in inter-phase insulation resistance.
(3) High-strength bus duct The high-strength bus duct shell is made into a tile groove, which increases the mechanical strength of the bus duct and solves the problem that long-span installation cannot support hoisting. There is a certain spacing between the busbars, and the ventilation between the wires is good. Compared with the compact busbar duct, its moisture-proof and heat dissipation functions are significantly improved; because there is a certain gap between the wires, the temperature rise of the wires is reduced, which improves the overload capability and reduces magnetic oscillation noise. However, the stray current and inductive reactance it generates are much larger than that of a compact bus duct. Therefore, when comparing the same specifications, its conductive bar cross-section must be larger than that of a compact bus duct.
(4) Fire-resistant bus duct The fire-resistant bus duct is specially used for the power supply of fire-fighting equipment. Its outer shell is made of fire-resistant materials with a high temperature resistance of not less than 1100°C, and the heat insulation layer is made of insulating materials with a high temperature resistance of not less than 300°C. The fire-resistant time is 60min, 90min, 120min. , 180min, full load operation can reach more than 8h. In addition to passing CCC certification, fire-resistant bus ducts should also have a type inspection report issued by a nationally recognized testing agency.
2. Bus duct selection
Bus duct selection
scope
bus duct
Things to note
Vertical power transmission and distribution in high-rise buildings
Compact bus duct
To prevent the chimney effect, the conductor should be covered with flame-retardant materials with a long-term operating temperature of not less than 130°C. Fire-retardant partitions should be set up between floors, and fire-retardant blocking materials should be used for fire-retardant partitions.
emergency power supply
Fire-resistant bus duct
It is not allowed to release toxic gases that endanger personal safety.
Large capacity bus duct
Compact bus duct with good heat dissipation
If an air-type bus duct is selected, an IP30 enclosure protection grade should be used which can only be used in dedicated workplaces.
(3) The bus duct interface is relatively susceptible to moisture. When selecting a bus duct, attention should be paid to its protection level. For different installation locations, bus ducts with different shell protection levels should be selected. Generally, bus ducts with a protection level of IP40 can be used in normal indoor environments, and bus ducts with a protection level of IP54 or IP66 should be used in fire sprinkler areas.
(4) The bus duct cannot be directly connected to equipment with significant shaking and impact vibration, and soft joints should be used for connection.
Supplement: IP is followed by two numbers to clarify the level of protection.
The first digit indicates the range of the device's resistance to dust, or the degree to which people are protected from harm in a sealed environment. It represents the level of protection against the entry of solid foreign objects. The highest level is 6;
first characteristic digit
Brief description
0
No protection
1
Prevent the intrusion of solid objects larger than 50mm; prevent the human body (such as the palm of your hand) from accidentally touching the parts inside the instrument
2
Prevent the intrusion of solid objects larger than 12mm; prevent human fingers from contacting the parts inside the instrument, and prevent the intrusion of medium-sized foreign objects (diameter larger than 12mm)
3
Prevent the intrusion of solid objects greater than 2.5mm; prevent tools, wires or similar objects with a diameter or thickness greater than 2.5mm Small foreign objects may invade and come into contact with the internal parts of the instrument.
4
Prevent the intrusion of solid objects greater than 1.0mm; prevent tools, wires or similar objects with a diameter or thickness greater than 1.0mm Small foreign objects may invade and come into contact with the internal parts of the instrument. That is, to protect against dust that is harmful enough to cause
5
Dustproof, completely prevents the intrusion of foreign objects. Although it cannot completely prevent dust from entering, the amount of intruded dust will not affect the to the normal operation of the instrument
6
Dust sealing (that is, dust should not invade the enclosed body at a low pressure of 20MPa)
The second digit indicates how waterproof the device is, representing the level of protection against water intrusion, with the highest level being 8.
second characteristic digit
Brief description
0
No protection
1
Prevent dripping water from intruding (vertical water droplets)
2
Can still prevent dripping water from intruding when tilted 15°
3
Prevent the intrusion of sprayed water, or prevent the intrusion of sprayed water from directions less than 60° from the vertical.
4
Protects against water splashing from all directions
5
Protects against water ejected from nozzles from all directions
6
Prevent damage from large waves
7
Prevent water intrusion during short-term immersion in water
8
Prevent long-term water intrusion during sinking
4. Insulating materials
1. Classification by physical state Gas insulation materials, liquid insulation materials and solid insulation materials.
Gas insulation materials
Air, nitrogen, sulfur dioxide and sulfur hexafluoride (SF6).
liquid insulation
Transformer oil, circuit breaker oil, capacitor oil, cable oil, etc.
solid insulating material
Insulating paint, glue and deposited powder; insulating fiber products such as paper and cardboard; insulating impregnated fiber products such as varnish cloth, paint tubes and strapping tapes; insulating mica products; films, composite products and adhesive tapes for electrical purposes; laminate products for electrical purposes; Electrical plastics and rubber, etc.
2. Classification according to different chemical properties It can be divided into inorganic insulation materials, organic insulation materials and hybrid insulation materials.
Inorganic insulation materials
There are mica, asbestos, marble, porcelain, glass and sulfur, etc. Mainly used as motor and electrical insulation, switch bottom plate and insulator.
organic insulating materials
There are mineral oil, shellac, resin, rubber, cotton yarn, paper, linen, silk and rayon, etc. It is mostly used in the manufacture of insulating paint, coating insulation for windings and wires, etc.
Mixed insulation materials
Various molded insulation materials made from processed inorganic insulation materials and organic insulation materials. Mainly used as the base and shell of electrical appliances.
2H311020 Common engineering equipment for mechanical and electrical engineering
2H311021 Classification and performance of general engineering equipment
Mix of general and specialized equipment
General equipment, strong versatility and wide range of uses. Generally refers to: fan equipment, pump equipment, compressor equipment, conveying equipment, etc.
Special equipment refers to equipment that is specifically designed to implement one or several functions for a certain type or type of object or product. For example, power equipment, petrochemical equipment, metallurgical equipment, building materials equipment, mining equipment, etc.
Classification and performance parameters of pumps, fans and compressors
Centrifugal pumps have high efficiency, simple structure and the widest range of applications.
pump
According to working principle and structural form
Positive displacement pump (divided according to moving parts)
reciprocating pump
Piston pump, plunger pump,
Rotary pump
Gear pump, screw pump, vane pump
Impeller type pump
Centrifugal pump, axial flow pump, vortex pump
Press to send media points
Clean water pump, impurity pump, corrosion-resistant pump
According to inhalation method
Single suction pump, double suction pump
Number of impellers
Single stage pump, multi stage pump
fan
Commonly used fans
Centrifugal fan, centrifugal induced draft fan, axial flow fan, rotary blower, centrifugal blower
Classified according to the direction of gas flow inside the rotating impeller
Centrifugal fan, axial flow fan, mixed flow fan
According to structural form
Single-stage fan, multi-stage fan
Different points according to exhaust pressure
Ventilator, blower, compressor
compressor
Commonly used compressors
Piston compressor, rotary screw compressor, centrifugal compressor, etc.
Different parts of compressed gas
Air compressor, oxygen compressor, ammonia compressor, natural gas compressor
According to compressed gas mode
Volumetric type
Reciprocating type, rotary type
Power type
Axial flow type, centrifugal type, mixed flow type
Press and compress times minutes
Single-stage, two-stage, multi-stage compressor
According to the arrangement of the cylinder
Vertical, horizontal, L-type, V-type, W-type, fan-shaped, M-type, H-type compressors
Press exhaust final pressure
Low pressure, medium pressure, high pressure, ultra high pressure compressor
Equipment performance parameters
pump
Flow, head, power, efficiency, speed
fan
Flow (air volume), full air pressure, dynamic pressure, static pressure, power, efficiency, speed, specific speed
Compressor
Volume, flow, suction pressure, exhaust pressure, working efficiency, noise
The performance of the fan refers to the performance of the fan under the standard air inlet state, which is the gas state where the air pressure at the fan inlet is a standard atmospheric pressure, the temperature is 20°C, and the relative humidity is 50%.
4. Classification and performance of continuous conveying equipment
Continuous conveying equipment
Device name
Conveying equipment with flexible traction elements
Belt conveyor, plate conveyor, scraper conveyor, elevator, overhead ropeway.
Conveying equipment without flexible traction parts
Spiral conveyor, roller conveyor, vibration conveyor, pneumatic conveyor.
2H311022 Classification and performance of special engineering equipment
1. Classification of special equipment
1. Electrical equipment Electric power equipment includes: thermal power generation equipment, nuclear power equipment, wind power generation equipment, photovoltaic power generation equipment, etc.
(1) Thermal power generation equipment includes: pressure-bearing steam boiler units, turbine generator units, industrial automation instruments, pipelines and systems, water treatment and hydrogen production equipment and systems.
(2) Nuclear power equipment includes: nuclear island equipment, conventional island equipment, and auxiliary system equipment.
Conventional island equipment includes: steam turbine, generator, condenser, steam-water separation reheater, feed water heater, deaerator, valves, water pumps, power transmission and transformation equipment, lifting equipment, and high-voltage motors.
(3) Wind power generation equipment
According to installation site
Onshore wind turbines, offshore wind turbines
According to driving mode
Direct-drive wind turbines, doubly-fed wind turbines
(4) Photovoltaic power generation systems are divided into:
Independent photovoltaic power generation system, grid-connected photovoltaic power generation system, distributed photovoltaic power generation system
(5) Tower solar thermal power generation equipment is divided into:
Mirror field equipment (including reflectors and tracking equipment), heat collecting towers (heat absorption towers), thermal storage equipment, heat exchange equipment and conventional island equipment for power generation.
2.Petrochemical equipment Petrochemical equipment is divided into static equipment, dynamic equipment, etc.
Static equipment includes: containers, reaction equipment, tower equipment, heat exchange equipment, storage tanks, etc.;
reaction equipment
chemical reaction
Relax device, kettle, decomposition pot, polymer kettle, etc.
Heat exchange equipment
heat exchange
Shell and tube waste heat boilers, heat exchangers, coolers, condensers, evaporators, etc.
Dynamic equipment includes: compressors, crushing equipment, mixing equipment, separation and filtering equipment, refrigeration equipment, drying equipment, packaging equipment, conveying equipment, storage and transportation equipment, molding equipment, etc.
Separation equipment
Fluid pressure balancing and gas purification separation
Separator, filter, oil collector, buffer, scrubber, etc.
storage device
Contains raw materials for production
Various forms of storage tanks and storage tanks.
3.Metallurgical equipment
(1) Rolling equipment includes: blank drawing machines, crystallizers, tundish equipment, plate rolling mills, pipe rolling machines, automatic seamless steel pipe rolling machines, profile rolling mills and straightening machines, etc.
(2) Steelmaking equipment includes: converter, electric arc furnace, ladle refining furnace, ladle vacuum refining furnace, vacuum oxygen blowing decarburization furnace, continuous steel casting machinery and equipment, etc.
(3) Mineral processing equipment includes: crushing equipment, screening equipment, grinding equipment, separation equipment, etc.
2H311023 Classification and performance of electrical engineering equipment
Commonly used electrical equipment in mechanical and electrical engineering include motors, transformers, high-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices, low-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices, electrical measuring instruments and meters, etc.
1. Classification and performance of electric motors
1. Classification of electric motors
Classification
electric motor
According to working power supply
DC motor, AC motor
According to structure and working principle
Synchronous motor, asynchronous motor, DC motor
According to use
Driving motors, control motors
According to the structure of the rotor
Squirrel cage induction motor, wound induction motor
2. Performance of electric motor
electric motor
Performance
Synchronous motor
The speed is constant and the power factor is adjustable.
Disadvantages: Complex structure and relatively expensive price.
DC motor
It has large starting torque and good starting and braking performance, and can achieve smooth speed regulation in a wide range.
Disadvantages: Complex structure and high price.
Asynchronous motor
The most widely used electric motor. It has simple structure, easy manufacturing, low price, reliable operation, easy maintenance, strong and durable.
Compared with synchronous motors, its power factor is not high.
Compared with DC motors, its starting performance and speed regulation performance are poor.
2. Classification and performance of transformers
1. Classification of transformers A transformer is a device used to transform voltage and current when transmitting alternating current.
According to the difference in conversion voltage
Step-up transformer and step-down transformer
According to cooling method
Natural air cooling, forced oil circulation air cooling, forced oil circulation water cooling, forced guide oil circulation cooling
According to cooling medium
Oil-immersed, dry, and gas-filled transformers
According to the difference in phase number
Single-phase transformer, three-phase transformer
According to the difference in the number of windings per phase
Double winding, three winding and autotransformer
Depending on the purpose of the transformer
Power transformer, electric furnace transformer, rectifier transformer, welding transformer, marine transformer, measuring transformer
2. Transformer parameters
The main technical parameters of the transformer are: Rated capacity, rated voltage, rated current, no-load current, short-circuit loss, no-load loss, short-circuit impedance, connection group, etc.
3. Classification and performance of high-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices
High-voltage electrical appliances refer to electrical appliances with an AC voltage of 1000V and a DC voltage of 1500V or above.
4. Classification and performance of low-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices
Low-voltage electrical appliances refer to electrical appliances with an AC voltage of 1000V and a DC voltage of 1500V and below. Performance of high-voltage and low-voltage electrical appliances and complete sets of devices: switching, protection, control, and regulation
5. Performance of electrical measuring instruments
The performance of electrical measuring instruments is determined by the object being measured.
With the advancement of technology, digital instruments with integrated circuits as the core and smart measuring instruments with microprocessors as the core have achieved rapid development and application. These instruments not only have the measurement and display functions of conventional instruments, but also usually With parameter setting, interface switching, data communication and other functions.
2H312000 Mechanical and electrical engineering professional technology
2H312010 Mechanical and electrical engineering measurement technology
2H312011 Measurement requirements and methods
1. Principles and requirements of engineering surveying
Engineering surveying should follow the principle of "from the whole to the part, control first and then the details", that is, first based on the permanent datum points and lines provided by the construction unit as the benchmark, and then measure and set the accurate position of each part of the equipment.
Inspection is the soul of measurement work.
Inspection is divided into: instrument inspection, data inspection, calculation inspection, setting out inspection and acceptance inspection.
2. Principles of Engineering Surveying
(1) Level measurement
The principle of leveling is to use the horizontal line of sight provided by a level and use a leveling rod to measure the height difference between two points on the ground, and then calculate the elevation.
Methods for determining the elevation of the point to be measured: height difference method and instrument height method.
Height difference method: A method that uses a level and a leveling rod to measure the height difference between the point to be measured and the known point, and then calculates the height of the point to be determined.
Height method: Using a level and a leveling rod, you only need to calculate the elevation of the level once, and you can easily measure the elevation of several forward sight points.
For example: when an instrument is installed once and the elevation of several forward sight points needs to be measured at the same time, it is more convenient to use the instrument height method. Therefore, the instrument height method is widely used in engineering surveying.
(2) Baseline measurement
The principle of base line measurement is to use theodolite and calibration steel ruler to measure the base line based on the principle of two points forming a straight line.
Method to determine the point to be located:
① Horizontal angle measurement ② Vertical angle measurement
1. Setting of installation baseline
There should be no less than two vertical and horizontal datum lines for plane installation.
2. Setting of installation elevation reference point
The height difference between adjacent installation reference points should be within 0.5mm.
3. Setting of settlement observation points
Subsidence observation adopts the second-class leveling measurement method.
For example, for a datum point embedded in a foundation, the first observation begins after embedding, and subsequent observations are performed continuously during the installation of the equipment.
3. Procedures and methods of engineering surveying
(1) Engineering survey procedures
Set vertical and horizontal center lines → Set elevation reference points → Set settlement observation points → Installation process measurement and control → Actual measurement records, etc.
(2) Height control measurement
1. Principles for laying out elevation control points
(1) The elevation system of the survey area should adopt the national elevation datum. When measuring in areas with existing elevation control networks, the original elevation system can be used. When there are difficulties in joint measurement in small survey areas, the assumed elevation system can also be used.
(2) Elevation measurement method: ①Leveling method ②Electromagnetic wave ranging trigonometric height measurement method
(3) Elevation control measurement grade classification: second, third, fourth, fifth and so on. Each level can be used as the first level elevation control of the survey area if necessary.
2. Method of laying out elevation control points
(1) Main technical requirements for leveling method:
1) Leveling stones should be buried at the leveling points of each grade. The leveling point should be selected in a location with hard soil that is convenient for long-term storage and easy use. The wall level points should be selected on stable buildings, and the points should be easy to find, save and detect.
2) There should be at least 3 leveling points in and around a survey area.
3) Leveling observation should be carried out after the marking stone has been stably buried. If the height difference between the two observations is large, the measurement should be repeated if it exceeds the limit. When the retest results are compared with the original test results respectively and the differences do not exceed the limit, the average of the three results should be taken.
(2) During the equipment installation process, attention should be paid when measuring: it is best to use a level point as the starting point for calculating the elevation. When the factory building is larger, additional leveling points can be added, but the observation accuracy should be improved.
4. Common engineering measurements in mechanical and electrical engineering
1. Basic marking and elevation measurement
(1) Basic planning of single equipment
The stand-alone equipment should be measured according to the main column base center line of the building structure and the coordinate position provided by the design. Draw out the centerline of the equipment foundation, and fix the vertical and horizontal centerlines on the center mark plate or draw them on the foundation with an ink line as the installation reference centerline.
Specific process: omitted
(2) Height measurement of individual equipment
The installation unit accepts the elevation datum point handed over by the civil engineering department, and guides the elevation datum point to a place near the equipment foundation that is convenient for measurement. It will be used as the datum point for elevation measurement during the next step of equipment installation and the elevation datum point will be buried.
(3) Precision control
1) Measuring equipment used for line measurement must be verified or calibrated and must be within the validity period. Calibrate equipment before use. When measuring and setting out, try to use the same equipment and the same person for measurement.
2) The allowable deviation of the plane position and elevation of the surface, line or point of the mechanical equipment positioning datum and the installation datum line. For a single piece of equipment, the allowable deviation of the plane position is ±10mm and the elevation deviation is 20~-10mm.
3) The centerline of the equipment foundation must be re-measured, and the error between the two measurements should not be greater than 5mm.
4) For important equipment foundations with a central mark embedded in them, the center line should be measured from the center mark, and the deviation of the same central mark should not exceed ±1mm. The vertical and horizontal center lines should be checked for orthogonality and the horizontal center lines should be adjusted. The parallel deviation of the reference center line of the same equipment or the straightness of the center line of the same production system should be within ±1mm.
5) Temporary elevation control points should be established for each group of equipment foundations. For the accuracy of elevation control points, for general equipment foundations, the elevation deviation should be within ±2mm; for equipment foundations related to transmission devices, the elevation deviation of two adjacent elevation control points should be within ±1mm.
2. Embedding of central mark and reference point
(1) Center mark
The center mark plate is two pieces of steel of a certain length embedded on the center line of the foundation surface at both ends of the equipment, and marked with a center line point, which is used as a calibration point for correcting the position of the equipment when installing and setting out.
1) Method of burying the center mark ① The center mark should be buried at both ends of the center line, and the center of the mark should be approximately on the center line. ②The height of the central target plate exposed to the basic surface is 4~6mm. ③ Before pouring concrete for the center mark, the foundation must be flushed with water so that the newly poured concrete can be combined with the original foundation. ④ When burying the central mark, high-grade mortar should be used for pouring and fixing. If possible, they should be welded to the reinforcement of the foundation. ⑤After the mortar for embedding the center mark is completely solidified, the surveyor will measure the centerline point and place it on the center mark. The diameter of the throw point (punch hole) is 1 to 2 mm, and red lead oil painting is used around the throw point. A circle as an obvious mark.
2) Embedding form of the central mark ① Buried on the foundation surface (Figure 2H312011-2). Generally, small sections of rails are used, and I-beam, angle steel, and channel steel can also be used, with a length of 150~200mm. ② Buried in the depression across the trench (Figure 2H312011-3). If the center line of the main equipment passes through the concave part of the foundation or the trench, 50mmX50mm angle steel or 100mmX50mm channel steel should be buried. ③ Buried at the edge of the foundation (Figure 2H312011-4). The length of the center mark is 150~200mm, and the edge to the foundation is 50~80mm.
(2) Reference point
Bury solid metal parts (usually with 50~60mm long rivets) on the basis of the equipment, and measure its elevation according to the standard zero point of the factory building as the basis for measuring the elevation when installing the equipment, which is called the datum point. Since the original datum points in the factory building are often blocked by previously installed equipment, when the equipment is subsequently installed for elevation measurement, reusing the original datum points in the factory building is not as accurate and convenient as the newly buried datum points. Commonly used reference points are shown in Figure 2H312011-5. It is to weld a steel plate about 50mm square to the rod end of a rivet with a diameter of #19~25mm and a length of about 50~60mm, or weld a U-shaped steel bar on the rivet rod. When burying, first dig a small pit at the predetermined location and then pour it with cement mortar to fix it. The small pit where the reference point is buried should have a small upper opening and a large lower opening. The part of the reference point exposed on the top surface of the foundation should not be too high (about 10~14mm) The center mark and the datum point can be buried in conjunction with the civil construction when pouring the foundation concrete, or the holes for the center mark and the datum point can be reserved in the foundation and buried after the foundation maintenance period expires, but the size of the reserved holes must be appropriate. , and the bottom should be large and the top small, and the position should be appropriate.
(2) Measurement of continuous production equipment installation
1. Measurement and design of installation baseline The central sign board should be buried in conjunction with the civil construction when the foundation is poured, or it can be buried after the foundation maintenance period expires. Layout is to measure the longitudinal and transverse center lines of mechanical equipment according to the construction drawings and the positioning axis of the building and mark them on the center mark board as the baseline for equipment installation. There should be no less than two vertical and horizontal baselines on the equipment installation plane. Equipment installation baseline and elevation reference point
2. Measurement and design of installation elevation reference points The elevation datum point is generally buried at the edge of the foundation and is easily observed. There are generally two types of elevation datum points: one is a simple elevation datum point; the other is a pre-embedded elevation datum point. The steel elevation datum point should be close to the edge of the equipment foundation for easy measurement, and is not allowed to be buried on the foundation surface under the equipment bottom plate. For example, simple elevation reference points are generally used as reference points for the installation of independent equipment; embedded elevation reference points are mainly used for installation of equipment on continuous production lines.
3. Continuous production equipment can only share one longitudinal reference line and one embedded elevation reference point.
(3) Measurement of pipeline engineering
The main contents of pipeline engineering survey include center line measurement, longitudinal and cross-sectional measurement and construction measurement.
1. Pipeline centerline measurement
The task of pipeline centerline measurement is to measure and mark the designed pipeline centerline position on the ground. Its main work content is to measure and set the main points of the pipeline (starting point, end point and turning point), calibrate mileage piles and add piles, etc.
(1) Measurement and design of main points of pipelines
1) Measure and set the main points of the pipeline based on the control points
2) Measure and set the main points of the pipeline according to the existing buildings on the ground After the main point measurement is set up, the distance between the main points and the turning angle of the measurement pipeline should be measured, and connected with the nearby measurement control points to check the results of the centerline measurement. In order to facilitate the location of the main points during construction, it is generally necessary to mark the points.
(2) Mileage piles and additional piles
In order to determine the length of the pipeline and survey the longitudinal and cross-sectional views, piles are nailed every 50m along the centerline of the pipeline from the starting point. Piles must be driven where the terrain changes between 50m, and where new pipelines intersect with old pipelines, roads, bridges, houses, etc. The mileage pile numbers of mileage piles and additional piles are determined based on the midline distance from the pile to the starting point of the pipeline.
pipeline
The starting point of the pipeline
water supply pipe
water source
Drainage pipe
downstream outlet
Gas and heat pipes
Air supply direction
In order to provide information for design and construction, after the center line is determined, the center line should be drawn on the current topographic map. The map should reflect the location and chain number of the points, the location and chain number where the pipeline intersects with major ground objects and underground pipelines, the coordinates and turning angles of each main point, etc.
2. Pipeline longitudinal and cross-sectional measurement
The content of the longitudinal section measurement of the pipeline is to draw a longitudinal section diagram based on the pile point elevation and pile number measured from the center line of the pipeline. The longitudinal section view reflects the undulations of the ground and the steep and gentle slope along the center line of the pipeline, and is the basis for calculating the design pipeline burial depth, slope and earthwork volume.
Cross-sectional measurement is to measure the horizontal distance and height difference from the terrain change points within a certain range on both sides of the center line to the pipeline center line. The mileage pile or added pile on the center line is the origin of the coordinates, the horizontal distance is the abscissa, and the height difference is the ordinate. , draw a cross-sectional view at a scale of 1:100.
3. Pipeline engineering construction measurement
The main task of pipeline engineering construction measurement is to set various signs for construction measurement according to the requirements of the design drawings, so that construction technicians can easily grasp the center line direction and elevation position at any time.
Pipeline construction is generally carried out below the ground, and there are many types of pipelines, such as water supply pipelines, drainage pipelines, natural gas pipelines, oil pipelines, etc. In urban construction, especially in urban industrial areas, pipelines are interspersed up and down and criss-crossed to form a pipeline network. If there is a slight error in the pipeline construction measurement, it will cause the pipelines to interfere with each other and cause difficulties in construction. Therefore, the role of construction measurement in pipeline construction Especially prominent.
(1) Preparation for pipeline engineering construction measurement
1) Familiar with design drawings and materials 2) Survey the construction site 3) Draw a test sketch 4) Determine the measurement accuracy
(2) Underground pipeline laying out and measurement
1) Restore the center line 2) Measurement and installation of construction control piles ① Measure and install centerline direction control piles ② Measure and install control piles for ancillary structures 3) Pay out the slot
(3) Underground pipeline construction measurement
The measurement work in pipeline construction is mainly to control the center line and elevation position of the pipeline. Therefore, construction signs to control the center line and elevation of the pipeline should be set before and after grooving to carry out construction according to design requirements.
1) Gantry plate method: The gantry plate consists of a slope plate and an elevation plate The measurement task in pipeline construction is mainly to control the design position of the pipeline center line and the design elevation of the pipe bottom. Therefore, a slope plate needs to be installed. After the slope plate is set, use the theodolite to project the centerline of the pipeline to the slope plate according to the centerline control pile, nail the center nail, and mark the mileage pile number. During construction, the center line of the pipe can be easily checked and controlled by the connection line of the center nail. Then use a level to measure the elevation of the top of the slope plate. The difference between the elevation of the top of the plate and the design elevation of the pipeline is the depth of excavation from the top of the plate.
(4) Measurement of foundation construction of steel towers (towers) for long-distance transmission lines
1. After the long-distance transmission line is located and inspected, the center pile of the steel tower foundation can be measured and installed according to the actual conditions of the starting and ending points, turning points and obstacles along the way. After the center pile is measured, it is generally controlled by the cross line method or the parallel baseline method. Control piles should be measured against the center pile.
2. When using a steel ruler to measure distance, the measurement length should not be greater than 80m and not less than 20m.
3. Considering that the comprehensive sag error between steel towers of overhead power transmission lines should not exceed the determined margin value, the measured sight distance length of a section of overhead power transmission lines should not exceed 400m.
4. Large-span span measurement usually uses ① electromagnetic wave ranging method ② analytical method
2H312012 Function and use of measuring instruments
Applications of commonly used measuring instruments
Measuring instruments
Application
Level
Used to measure elevation and elevation. Measurement control network elevation reference point, factory building, large equipment foundation settlement observation.
Theodolite
Used for construction setting out measurement. Horizontal angle, vertical angle. Longitudinal, transverse center line, verticality.
Mechanical and electrical engineering building construction plane control network measurement, factory column installation vertical control measurement, measurement of longitudinal and transverse center lines.
Total station instrument
Angle measurement, distance (slope distance, horizontal distance, height difference) measurement, three-dimensional coordinate measurement, wire measurement, intersection fixed point measurement and stakeout measurement, etc. are used for many purposes. Horizontal distance measurement.
(3) Application of fully automatic total station (measurement robot)
1. Submarine pipeline underwater robot inspection technology Underwater inspection robots have the advantages of deep operating depth, large range, and long operating time.
2.BIM lofting robot It is suitable for construction in environments with numerous electromechanical systems, intricate pipelines, and complex and changeable spatial structures.
3.Pipeline inspection robot Industrial pipeline inspection robots are widely used in construction monitoring of water supply pipelines, drainage pipelines, industrial pipelines, gas pipelines and oil pipelines, pipeline network inspection, new pipe acceptance, pipeline inspection, maintenance inspection, repair acceptance, etc., and are also widely used in mines. Detection and exploration, tunnel acceptance, earthquake search and rescue, fire rescue, disaster assistance, power inspection, etc.
4. Other measuring instruments
(1) Electromagnetic wave range finder
1. Classification of electromagnetic wave rangefinders ①Microwave range finder that uses microwave band radio waves as carrier waves ②Laser range finder using laser as carrier wave ③Infrared rangefinder using infrared light as carrier wave
2.Application of electromagnetic wave range finder An instrument that measures the distance between two points using electromagnetic waves carrying ranging signals. It has been widely used in measurements such as control, terrain and construction stakeout.
(2) Laser measuring instruments
Measuring instruments
Application
Laser pointing instrument
Observation of building deformation.
Laser collimation (plumb) instrument
Observation of building deformation. Vertical positioning during construction and subsequent tilt observation. Alignment and measurement of equipment concentricity.
Laser theodolite
Set the line, position, measure and set the known angle.
laser level
Ordinary level alignment guide.
Laser plane meter
Level control, mold support, pouring and leveling work.
(3) Global Positioning System (GPS)
All-weather, high precision, automation, high efficiency and other distinctive features.
2H312020 Mechanical and electrical engineering lifting technology
2H312021 Requirements for the use of lifting machinery and spreaders
1. Classification of lifting machinery and spreaders
(1) Hoisting machinery
1. Classification of lifting machinery
(1) Light and small lifting equipment: Light and small lifting equipment can be divided into four categories: jacks, pulleys, lifting hoists, and winches.
(2) Cranes can be divided into three categories: bridge type cranes, jib type cranes and cable type cranes.
1) Bridge type cranes mainly include: beam crane, bridge crane, gantry crane, semi-gantry crane, etc.
2) Boom type crane
Jib cranes are divided into 11 categories, mainly including: portal cranes and semi-gantry cranes, tower cranes, mobile cranes, railway cranes, mast cranes, jib cranes, etc.
Commonly used mechanical and electrical installation projects include: tower cranes, mobile cranes, and mast cranes; mobile cranes mainly include crawler cranes, truck cranes, tire cranes, all-terrain cranes, and truck-mounted cranes. Mobile cranes can run along trackless roads with or without load, and rely on their own weight to remain stable; comb-type cranes are divided into 6 categories according to their structural forms, excluding single and double mast forms.
(1) Mast crane
①The mast crane (hereinafter referred to as the mast) consists of the mast body, the power-hoisting system, and the stabilizing system. ②The mast body includes the mast, base and its accessories. The mast is composed of multiple sections (or segments) connected and is the main stress-bearing structure of the mast. Large masts mostly use lattice cross-sections, while small and medium-sized masts also use steel pipe cross-sections. ③The power-hoisting system mainly consists of a winch, wire rope (running rope), lifting pulley group, guide pulley, etc. In recent years, masts using hydraulic lifting systems have also been used in hoisting operations. ④The stabilization system mainly includes wind ropes, ground anchors, etc. The angle between the wind rope and the ground should be between 30° and 45°, and a safe distance should be kept from power supply lines, buildings, and trees.
2) Mast crane Hydraulic overall lifting of large building structures and hydraulic overall lifting of large equipment gantry cranes. These two types of projects also currently account for the highest proportion of the overall upgrade of large-scale equipment and components. Such as the lifting of tall equipment or chemical containers, the lifting and rotation of bridges, etc. They have basic similarities and special points.
Cable type crane: omitted
(2) Classification of spreaders
A device used for lifting objects in hoisting machinery operations.
Classification
spreader
According to the connection method with the lifting machinery
Spreaders and fixed spreaders
Divide according to the way of taking things
Clamping type, hanging type, fork type, adsorption type, grab bucket and combination of the above types
(3) Slings, lifting lugs, and shackles
1. Sling
Wire rope loops can be divided into wire rope loops and cable loops according to their structural forms. Braided slings are divided into flat slings and round slings according to their structural forms.
2. Lifting ears
The structural form of the lifting lugs should be determined according to the characteristics of the equipment and the lifting process. Lid type, tube shaft type and plate type are often used.
3.Shackle
The shackle is an assembly composed of two easily detachable parts, the buckle body and the pin. The two commonly used forms are D-shaped shackles and bow-shaped shackles.
2. Requirements for the use of lifting machinery
(1) Requirements for the use of light and small lifting equipment
1. Requirements for using jacks
(1) The jack must be placed on a stable, flat and strong foundation. Wooden boards or steel plates should usually be placed under the seat to increase the pressure-bearing area and prevent the jack from sinking or tilting.
(2) Thin wooden boards, aluminum plates and other soft materials can be placed between the jack head and the object being pushed, so that the head is in full contact with the object being pushed to increase friction and prevent the jack from slipping after being stressed.
(3) When using a jack, a safety pad should be set next to it, and the height of the safety pad should be adjusted in time as the workpiece rises and falls.
(4) When several jacks are used at the same time, synchronization should be maintained during operation so that the load borne by each jack is less than 80% of its rated load.
(5) The jack should work within the allowed jacking height and must not push out the red warning line, otherwise the jacking operation should be stopped.
(6) When using a jack, the force should pass through its pressure-bearing center.
2. Requirements for the use of lifting pulleys
(1) When a multi-wheel pulley uses only part of its pulleys, the lifting capacity of the pulley should be reduced in proportion to the number of wheels used and the total number of wheels of the pulley.
(2) The minimum distance between the moving and fixed (static) pulleys of the pulley group shall not be less than 1.5m; the deflection angle of the running rope entering the pulley shall not be greater than 5°.
(3) The methods for threading the pulley group around the running rope include straight threading, flower threading, and double-tap threading. When the number of pulleys exceeds 5, the running rope should adopt double tap method. If the flower threading method is adopted, the net distance between the upper and lower pulleys should be appropriately increased.
3. Requirements for the use of winches
①Electric slow-speed winches are generally used in hoisting operations. The main parameter of the winch is the rated load. The main technical performance parameters include: rated load, rated speed, wire rope diameter and rope capacity, etc. It is strictly prohibited to use the winch overloaded. During major hoisting operations, a dynamometer should be installed on the traction rope.
② The winch should be installed in a flat, open place with no obstacles in front and slightly far away from the hoisting center, so that the operator can directly see the hoisting process and receive command signals at the same time. When using a mast for lifting, the distance between the winch and the mast must be greater than the length of the mast.
③The winch should be firmly fixed to prevent overturning and movement. Ground anchors, building foundations and heavy objects can be used as anchor points. The fixed ropes binding the base of the winch should be led out from both sides to prevent the base from moving due to force. After the winch is fixed, it should be pre-tensioned according to its usage load.
④The horizontal straight line distance from the drum to the first guide pulley should be greater than 25 times the length of the drum, and the guide pulley should be located on the center vertical line of the drum to ensure that the rope entry angle of the drum is less than 2°.
⑤The wire rope on the winch should be released from the bottom of the drum, and the remaining wire rope on the drum should not be less than 4 turns. When winding multiple layers of steel wire rope on the drum, the steel wire rope should always be tightly wound on the drum layer by layer in sequence, and the outermost layer of steel wire rope should be one rope diameter lower than the flanges at both ends of the drum.
4. Requirements for the use of hand chain hoists
1) Before use, check the integrity of the lifting structure, the flexibility and lubrication of the running part, and the zipper should be flexible and free of chain running, falling, and stagnation.
2) When using, the chain should be straightened and gradually tightened. The two hooks should be stressed on the same axis. After inspection and confirmation that there are no problems, start the lifting operation.
3) The carrying capacity of the hanging point of the hand chain hoist shall not be less than 1.05 times the rated load of the hand chain hoist; when multiple hoists are used to lift the same workpiece, the operations shall be synchronized, and the maximum load of a single hoist shall not exceed its rated load. 70%.
4) When the hand chain hoist is used in a vertical, horizontal or inclined state, the direction of force application of the hand chain hoist should be consistent with the direction of the sprocket to prevent the chain from getting stuck or falling off.
5) If the loaded hand chain hoist needs to stay for a long time, the hand chain hoist must be tied to the lifting chain to prevent the self-locking device from malfunctioning.
6) Hand chain hoists that have been used for more than 3 months or have been idle for a long time should be disassembled, cleaned, inspected and filled with lubricating oil. If there are missing parts, structural damage or severe wear of the machine parts, they must be repaired or replaced. After that, it can be used.
(2) Requirements for the use of mobile cranes
1.General requirements
①The load hoisted by a single crane should be less than its rated load. ②The crane should choose reasonable working conditions based on its performance. ③The bearing capacity of the foundation at the standing position of the crane for hoisting should meet the usage requirements. ④ When using super-lift working conditions, the necessary site and space requirements for changing the working radius (expansion, contraction, rotation) of the super-lift system should be met. ⑤The safe distance between the boom and the external accessories of the equipment should not be less than 500mm. ⑥The safe distance between cranes, equipment and surrounding facilities should not be less than 500mm. ⑦The minimum lifting height of the crane should maintain a safe distance of at least 200mm between the bottom of the equipment and the top of the foundation or anchor bolts. ⑧When two cranes are used as the main hoisting equipment, the lifting weight should be reasonably distributed, and the load of a single crane should not exceed the rated load of the relevant lifting specifications. Proportion. Balancing measures should be taken where necessary. For example: the lifting speed and rotation speed should be limited. ⑨A joint lifting operation plan should be developed for the operation of multiple hoisting machinery, which should also include a careful estimation of the load carried by each crane in proportion. The basic requirement is to ensure that the lifting wire rope remains vertical.
2. Requirements for mobile cranes on foundations
① Mobile cranes must perform lifting operations on level and hard ground. The foundation of the crane's working position (including the position of the hoisting station and the walking route) should be based on the given geological conditions or the measured ground pressure resistance, and an appropriate method should be used (generally, the soil ground at the construction site can be excavated, backfilled and tamped). ) for processing. ② The treated ground should be tested for pressure resistance. The pressure resistance of the ground should meet the requirements of the crane for the foundation.
3. Requirements for the use of truck cranes
①The truck crane’s legs should be fully extended. ② Overloading operations are strictly prohibited. It is not allowed to pull or lift objects diagonally, it is not allowed to lift objects that are staggered and squeezed, and it is not allowed to lift objects that are buried in the soil or frozen and stuck to the ground. ③When the crane is operating, no one is allowed to stand on the turntable. When the truck crane is moving, no one is allowed to sit in the control room. ④ During lifting operations, it is strictly forbidden to stand under the lifting arm, and it is not allowed to lift heavy objects when there are people on the heavy objects.
4. Requirements for the use of crawler cranes
① When the crawler crane is traveling with a load, it should be operated in accordance with the requirements of the instruction manual. If necessary, a load traveling plan should be prepared. ② Hoisting personnel should pass the examination according to the "Assessment Rules for Non-Destructive Testing Personnel of Special Equipment" TSGZ6001-2019 and obtain the "Special Equipment Safety Management and Operator Certificate", which includes work items including crane commander Q1 and crane driver Q2.
(3) Requirements for the use of mast cranes
1. The use of masts should have quality and safety documents: product quality certificate; manufacturing drawings, instructions for use; load test report; safety inspection certificate.
2. The mast should be used strictly in accordance with the instructions for use. If it is not used within the performance range stipulated in the instruction manual (including any of the three indicators of mast length, tilt angle and main crane pulley opening angle), the mast should be fully accounted for according to the conditions of use.
3. The length of the mast should be determined according to the height of the lifting equipment and components. The straightness deviation of the mast should not be greater than 1/1000 of the length, and the total length deviation should not be greater than 20mm.
4. Bolts specified in the design should be used. Anti-seize agent or grease should be applied to the threaded part before installing the bolts. The tightening torque should meet the requirements. After the connecting bolts are tightened, the screw rod should expose 3 to 5 thread pitches of the nut. When tightening the bolts, proceed symmetrically and crosswise.
5. After the mast is assembled, acceptance procedures should be carried out and relevant personnel should sign for confirmation.
(4) Requirements for the use of cranes for overall lifting of heavy-duty structures and equipment
It is suitable for large building structures with a lifting weight not exceeding 8000t and a lifting height not exceeding 100m and large equipment with a lifting weight not exceeding 6000t and a lifting height not exceeding 120m. It adopts computer-controlled hydraulic overall lifting engineering design and construction.
3. Requirements for the use of spreaders
(1) Beam spreader product logo and factory documents
1. The product mark of the beam spreader includes: manufacturer name, spreader name, spreader model, rated load, dead weight of the spreader, factory number, and date of manufacture.
2. The factory documents of the beam spreader should include: product certificate of conformity, product instruction manual, product main material inspection sheet (when necessary), product test report (when necessary), and packing list (when necessary).
(2) Requirements for the use of slings, lifting lugs and shackles
1. Requirements for using slings
1. Wire rope rings (slings) shall not be used under any of the following circumstances: ①The end of the rope at the no-hanging sign is exposed and cannot be repaired. ②The rope strands are loose or separated and cannot be repaired. ③ The steel wire rope has defects such as broken wires, broken strands, steel wire extrusion, single-strand steel wire rope core extrusion, partial reduction in the diameter of the steel wire rope, rope strand extrusion or twisting, and kinking. ④No signage.
2. Requirements for using lifting lugs
(1) Before the equipment leaves the factory, the lifting lugs should be tested according to the design requirements, and a test report should be issued. After the equipment arrives on site, the appearance quality of the lifting lugs should be inspected, and non-destructive testing should be performed if necessary. For lifting lugs welded on site, the welded parts connected to the equipment should undergo surface penetration testing. (2) After the equipment arrives at the site, technicians must retest the welding position and size of the lifting lugs.
3. Shackle usage requirements
(1) The shackles used in hoisting construction should be selected according to the rated load mark and must not be used overloaded. Unmarked shackles must not be used. (2) The surface of the shackle should be smooth and free of defects such as burrs, cracks, sharp corners, and interlayers. Welding methods must not be used to repair defects in the shackle. (3) The shackle should be visually inspected before use. If any permanent deformation or cracks are found, it should be scrapped. (4) When using a shackle, it should only bear longitudinal tension.
4. Structural form, scope of use and usage requirements of ground anchors
1. Commonly used ground anchor structures include fully buried ground anchors, semi-buried ground anchors, and ballasted movable ground anchors.
Structural form of ground anchor
Scope of use
Fully buried ground anchor
Suitable for sites with excavation conditions. It can withstand large pulling forces and is often used in large-scale hoisting.
Weighted movable ground anchor
It is suitable for sites with high groundwater levels or soft soil where it is inconvenient to excavate at a deep depth. Small ballast type movable ground anchors can withstand little force and are mostly used in medium and small hoisting operations.
(2) Requirements for the use of ground anchors
1. Select an appropriate geoglyph structure according to the stress conditions and soil conditions of the construction area. 2. During construction, if existing buildings are used as ground anchors, such as concrete foundations, concrete structures, etc., strength verification should be carried out and reliable protective measures should be taken, and written approval should be obtained from the building design unit. 3. No matter what form of ground anchor is used, a load-bearing test must be carried out, and there should be a large enough safety margin to ensure the stability of the ground anchor and the safety of the lifting operation.
2H312022 Selection requirements for hoisting methods and hoisting plans
1. Commonly used lifting methods
(1) Hoisting process methods and applications
Hoisting method
application
1. Slip method/3. Rotation method
Tower equipment, torch towers, etc. in petrochemical industry.
2. Crane lifting method
Tower equipment in petrochemical industry
4. Push and lift method without anchor point
Expansion project of the old factory. The exhaust pipe of the nitrogen fertilizer plant and the primary distillation tower of the millisecond furnace.
5. Cluster hydraulic jack overall lifting (sliding) lifting method (There are pull-up and climbing types)
Large equipment and components. Such as the hoisting of large roofs, grids, steel overpasses (corridors), TV tower steel mast antennas, etc., the overall lifting of large gantry crane main beams and equipment, the overall lifting of large TV tower steel mast antennas, large airport terminals, sports venues, etc. Overall slippage of steel roof trusses, etc.
6. High-altitude inclined cable hoisting method
Ultra-high altitude lifting of medium and small equipment and uphill cableways in mountainous areas. Such as Shanghai Oriental Pearl high-altitude lifting equipment.
7. Universal pole lifting method
Bridge construction.
8. Hydraulic lifting method (inversion method of large storage tanks)
Oil tank inversion, power plant generator set installation, etc.
(3) Overall installation technology for large equipment (overall lifting and hoisting technology)
1. Overall installation technology of large equipment
The overall installation technology of large equipment is one of the core technologies used in the construction industry, including: the upright double mast sliding method hoisting large equipment technology, and the rotating method gantry (A-shaped) mast erecting large equipment (component) technology , anchor-free push-lift large-scale equipment technology, cluster hydraulic jack overall lifting (sliding) large-scale equipment and component technology are its main individual technologies.
2. Computer controlled overall jacking and lifting installation and construction technology
"Computer-controlled overall jacking and lifting installation and construction technology of steel structures and large equipment" developed from the improvement of cluster hydraulic jack overall lifting (slip) hoisting technology has become a priority application technology in the construction industry.
2. Hoisting plan
(2) Hoisting plan management
2. Management points
(1) Highly dangerous sub-projects (hereinafter referred to as "hazardous projects") refer to sub-projects that may easily lead to death or injury of people or cause significant economic losses during the construction process of housing construction and municipal infrastructure projects. project.
(2) The construction unit shall organize engineering and technical personnel to prepare special construction plans before the construction of dangerous and major projects. If general construction contracting is implemented, the special construction plan shall be organized and prepared by the general construction contracting unit. If subcontracting is implemented for major critical projects, special construction plans may be organized and prepared by relevant professional subcontracting units.
(3) "Hoisting and hoisting machinery installation and disassembly projects" are dangerous and major projects. Hoisting projects within the scope of certain projects with greater risks (hazardous projects)
The scope of hoisting projects within the scope of sub-projects with greater risks (hazardous projects):
① Lifting and hoisting projects using unconventional lifting equipment and methods with a single lifting weight of 10KN and above ② Installation projects using lifting machinery ③ Hoisting machinery installation and disassembly project
The scope of hoisting projects that exceed a certain scale and are highly dangerous sub-projects (dangerous projects that exceed a certain scale):
① Lifting and hoisting projects using unconventional lifting equipment and methods, and with a single lifting weight of 100KN and above ② Hoisting machinery installation and disassembly projects with a lifting capacity of 300KN and above, or a total erection height of 200m and above, or a foundation elevation of 200m and above
(4) The special construction plan shall be reviewed and signed by the technical person in charge of the construction unit and stamped with the official seal of the unit, and shall be reviewed and signed by the chief supervisory engineer and stamped with the professional seal before implementation.
If a major critical project is subcontracted and a special construction plan is prepared by the subcontracting unit, the special construction plan shall be reviewed and signed by the technical person in charge of the general contracting unit and the technical person in charge of the subcontracting unit and stamped with the official seal of the unit.
(5) For dangerous and large projects exceeding a certain scale, the construction unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting to demonstrate the special construction plan. If general construction contracting is implemented, the construction general contracting unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting. The special construction plan shall be reviewed by the construction unit and the chief supervising engineer before expert evaluation.
If the special construction plan needs to be revised after verification, the construction unit shall complete the review and approval procedures again after revising and improving the plan based on the verification report. Experts shall be selected from the expert database established by the housing and urban-rural development department of the local people's government, meet professional requirements and the number shall not be less than 5. Persons with an interest in this project are not allowed to participate in the expert demonstration meeting as experts.
(6) Before the implementation of the special construction plan, the compiler or project technical leader shall explain the plan to the construction site management personnel. The construction site management personnel shall make a safety technical briefing to the operators, which shall be signed and confirmed by both parties and the project's full-time safety production management personnel.
(7) The construction unit shall register the construction workers of dangerous and major projects, and the project leader shall perform his duties at the construction site.
Full-time project safety production management personnel shall conduct on-site supervision of the implementation of the special construction plan.
3. Parameters and applications of mobile cranes
(1) Basic parameters of mobile crane
1. The basic parameters of mobile cranes, but the crane performance data, which are an important basis for selecting cranes and formulating lifting technical plans, mainly include maximum rated lifting capacity, maximum working radius (amplitude), and maximum lifting height. 2. In special circumstances, it is also necessary to understand the maximum lifting moment of the crane, the maximum pressure of the outriggers, the maximum load of the tires, the crawler ground pressure and wind resistance.
(2) Characteristic curve of mobile crane
The curve that reflects the change of the lifting capacity of the mobile crane with the change of the arm length and working radius and the change of the lifting height of the mobile crane with the change of the arm length and working radius is called the characteristic curve of the crane, that is Lifting capacity curve and lifting height curve. The characteristic curves of large cranes are graphed. The operating range (or lifting height-working range) diagram and load (lifting capacity) table of the crane under various working conditions have been marked by each manufacturer when leaving the factory.
(3) Selection steps for mobile cranes
1. Collect lifting technical parameters
Collect crane performance data based on the weight, hoisting height and hoisting range of equipment or components, and collect information on possible rental cranes. Hoisting load includes equipment weight, lifting rigging weight, and load factor. Calculate the load: Qj=k1Xk2XQ, where k1 is the dynamic load coefficient, k2 is the unbalanced load coefficient, and Q is the hanging load.
2.Choose a crane
Determine the crane's operating conditions and hoisting channels based on the crane's station, hoisting position and hoisting site environment.
3. Develop lifting technology
Determine the type and operating conditions of the crane according to the overall conditions such as the lifting process weight, the crane's position, installation location, site environment, and access routes, and according to the overall dimensions and rated lifting capacity charts of various types of cranes. Ensure that under selected working conditions, the crane's working capacity covers the lifting process requirements.
4. Security check
(1) Check and calculate the safe distance between the crane's legs, counterweight, boom, spreader, and hoisted objects and surrounding buildings under the selected working conditions. (2) When multiple cranes are hoisted together, the factors that determine the calculated load are: hoisting load, unbalanced load factor, and dynamic load factor. (3) The calculated load lifted by a single crane should be less than its rated load. (4) When two cranes are used as the main hoisting crane, the lifting weight should be reasonably distributed. The load of a single crane should not exceed 80% of its rated load. Balancing measures should be taken when necessary. (5) If two or more mobile cranes are used to lift the same workpiece, the lifting load of each crane shall not exceed 75% of its rated lifting capacity.
5. Determine the crane operating parameters
Carry out optimization according to the above steps and finally determine the crane working condition parameters.
5. Preparation, review and modification of special construction plans for safety of dangerous major projects
1. Requirements for the preparation of special construction plans for safety in dangerous major projects
(1) If general construction contracting is implemented, the special safety construction plan shall be organized and compiled by the construction general contracting unit. If subcontracting is implemented for major critical projects, special construction plans may be organized and prepared by relevant professional subcontracting units.
It is a sub-project that is more dangerous than a certain scale (mechanical and electrical engineering)
Lifting and hoisting projects that use unconventional lifting equipment and methods in mechanical and electrical engineering, and the single lifting weight is 100kN and above;
Hoisting machinery installation and disassembly projects with a lifting capacity of 300kN and above, or a total erection height of 200m and above, or a foundation elevation of 200m and above;
Steel structure installation projects with spans of 36m and above
Or installation projects of grid and cable-membrane structures with spans of 60m and above;
Overall jacking, translation and rotation of large structures weighing 1000kN and above
It is a sub-project that is more dangerous than a certain scale (electric power construction)
Lifting and hoisting projects that use unconventional lifting equipment and methods in power construction projects and have a single lifting weight of 100kN and above;
Installation projects for overweight equipment with a lifting capacity of 600kN and above;
Dismantling works of internal climbing lifting equipment with a height of 200m and above;
Wind turbine (including offshore) hoisting project
(2) The main contents of the special construction plan for dangerous major projects should include the following nine aspects:
(1) Project overview: Overview and characteristics of dangerous and large projects, construction layout, construction requirements and technical guarantee conditions; (2) Basis for preparation: relevant laws, regulations, normative documents, standards, specifications, construction drawing design documents, construction organization design, etc.; (3) Construction plan: including construction progress plan, material and equipment plan; (4) Construction technology: technical parameters, process flow, construction methods: operation requirements, inspection requirements, etc.; (5) Construction safety assurance measures: organizational assurance measures, technical measures, monitoring and control measures, etc.; (6) Construction management and operation personnel allocation and division of labor: construction management personnel, full-time safety production management personnel, special operations personnel, other operations personnel, etc.; (7) Acceptance requirements: acceptance standards, acceptance procedures, acceptance content, acceptance personnel, etc.; (8) Emergency response measures; (9) Calculation sheets and related construction drawings.
2. Review requirements for special construction plans for safety in critical projects
(1) The special safety construction plan shall be reviewed by the technical department of the construction unit organized by professional and technical personnel from the construction technology, safety, quality and other departments of the unit. If it passes the review, it shall be signed by the technical person in charge of the construction unit and stamped with the official seal of the unit, and the signature shall be reviewed and signed by the chief supervisory engineer and stamped with the professional seal before implementation. If general construction contracting is implemented, the implementation must be signed by the technical person in charge of the construction general contracting unit and the relevant professional contracting unit before the implementation can be organized.
(2) For dangerous and large projects exceeding a certain scale, the construction unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting to demonstrate the special construction plan. If general construction contracting is implemented, the construction general contracting unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting. The special construction plan shall be reviewed by the construction unit and the chief supervising engineer before expert evaluation.
3. Expert argumentation content for ultra-hazardous large-scale projects
(1) Whether the special construction plan is complete and feasible; (2) Whether the calculation sheet and verification basis of the special construction plan and construction drawings comply with relevant standards and specifications; (3) Whether the special construction plan meets the actual conditions on site and can ensure construction safety.
4. Modification requirements after demonstration of the ultra-hazardous and major safety special construction plan
(1) If the special construction plan for dangerous and large-scale projects exceeding a certain scale is concluded as "passed" after expert argumentation, the construction unit can modify and improve it by referring to the expert opinions. (2) If the conclusion is "passed after modification", the expert opinion must specify the specific modification content. The construction unit shall make modifications in accordance with the expert opinion and perform relevant review and review procedures before implementation. The expert shall be informed of the modification status in a timely manner. (3) If the special construction plan “fails” after verification, the construction unit shall reorganize expert verification after modification.
2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
2. Types of special equipment
(5) Hoisting machinery
1. Hoisting machinery: refers to electromechanical equipment used for vertical lifting or vertical lifting and horizontal movement of heavy objects. Its scope is specified as lifts with a rated lifting capacity greater than or equal to 0.5t; tower cranes with a rated lifting capacity greater than or equal to 3t (or tower cranes with a rated lifting moment greater than or equal to 40t m, or loading and unloading bridges with a productivity greater than or equal to 300t/h ), and a crane with a lifting height greater than or equal to 2m; a mechanical parking equipment with a number of floors greater than or equal to 2.
Classification
variety
Bridge crane
General bridge crane, explosion-proof bridge crane, insulated bridge crane, metallurgical bridge crane, electric single beam crane, electric hoist bridge crane
Gantry crane
General gantry crane, explosion-proof gantry crane, rail-mounted container gantry crane, tire-type container gantry crane, quayside container crane, shipbuilding gantry crane, electric hoist gantry crane, loading and unloading bridge, bridge erecting machine
tower crane
Ordinary tower crane, power station tower crane
mobile crane
Tire cranes, crawler cranes, container reach stacker cranes, railway cranes
Portal crane
Portal crane, fixed crane
lift
Construction lifts, simple lifts
Cable crane
mast crane
Mechanical parking equipment
2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2. Special equipment installation, modification and repair license
(2) Hoisting machinery
1. The lifting machinery installation (including repair) license is implemented by the provincial market supervision department or the provincial market supervision department authorized by the State Administration for Market Regulation.
Device category
License parameter level
License scope
Remark
Bridge and gantry cranes
A
Rated lifting capacity above 200t
A>B, from shore container Heavy machinery and loading and unloading bridges are included in A level license
B
Rated lifting capacity 200t and below
Same as above
mobile crane
A
Rated lifting capacity above 100t
A>B
B
Rated lifting capacity 100t and below
Same as above
Portal crane
A
Rated lifting capacity above 40t
A>B
B
Rated lifting capacity 40t and below
Same as above
Mechanical parking equipment
Not graded
Tower cranes, lifts
Not graded
Cable crane
Not graded
mast crane
Not graded
2H312030 Mechanical and electrical engineering welding technology
2H312031 Selection and evaluation of welding processes
Welding process refers to all relevant processing methods and implementation requirements for manufacturing weldments, including welding preparation, material selection, welding method selection, welding parameters, and operating requirements.
1. Selection of welding process
(1) Welding preparation
1.Weldability analysis
(1) Steel structure The welding difficulty of steel structure engineering is divided into level A (easy), level B (general), level C (difficult), and level D (difficult). The influencing factors include: plate thickness, steel classification, stress state, and steel carbon equivalent .
(2) Non-alloy steel Non-alloy steel has good weldability and is suitable for electrode arc welding, tungsten inert gas arc welding, gas melting arc welding, self-shielded flux-cored wire arc welding, submerged arc welding, gas-electric vertical welding, stud welding and Gas welding method.
2. Welding operators (welders)
Welders engaged in the following welding work must pass the assessment in accordance with these detailed rules and hold the "Special Equipment Safety Management and Operator Certificate": ① Welds of pressure components of pressure-bearing equipment, welds to pressure components, and surface surfacing of the base metal of pressure components; ② Welding seams of main stress-bearing structural (parts) of electromechanical equipment and welds with main stress-bearing structural (parts) parts; ③ Melt into the positioning welds within the first two welds.
3.Welding process evaluation
Welding procedure qualification report (PQR) and welding procedure instruction book (WPS) control, including welding procedure qualification report, relevant inspection and testing reports, procedure qualification welding records and storage of welding procedure qualification samples, etc.; the welding procedure qualification items cover special The welding process required for equipment welding.
(2) Welding method
1. Commonly used welding methods
One-digit code indicates the category of process method
The two-digit code indicates the classification of the process method
The three-digit code indicates a certain process method
arc welding
arc welding
111
SMAW
Monofilament submerged arc welding
121
SAW
Gas tungsten arc welding
141
GTAW
Gas metal arc welding
131 (135)
GMAW(MAG)
Self-shielded flux-cored wire arc welding
114
FCAW
other
electroslag welding
72
ESW
Gas and electric vertical welding
73
EGW
Short circuit arc stud welding
784
SW
2. Boiler
(1) "4.3.3.2 Argon arc welding primer" in the "Boiler Safety Technical Regulations" TSG 11-2020 stipulates: Class A high-pressure boilers and above, combined welds of drums and headers, pipe joints on pipes, heating surface pipes For butt welds, butt welds of pipes and pipe fittings, argon arc welding should be used as primer when the structure permits.
Use argon arc welding for primer, electroslag welding should not be used
(2) "Watertube Boilers Part 5: Manufacturing" GB/T 16507.5-2013 states "8.1.2 Electroslag welding shall not be used for boiler pressure components."
3. Spherical tank
"Construction Specifications for Spherical Storage Tanks" GB 50094-2010 states "6.1.4 The welding method of spherical storage tanks should be electrode arc welding, flux-cored wire automatic welding and semi-automatic welding."
Electrode arc welding, flux cored wire automatic welding and semi-automatic welding
4. Public pipes
"Technical Rules for Welding of Polyethylene Pipes for Gas" TSG D2002-2006 stipulates that GB1 (PE) adopts two methods: hot fusion welding and electric fusion welding.
Hot fusion welding, electric fusion welding
5. Aluminum and aluminum alloy containers (pipes)
(1) "10.3.1" in "Aluminum Welding Vessels" JB/T4734-2002, the welding method should be tungsten arc welding, melting arc welding, plasma welding and other welding methods that can ensure welding quality through testing. No need Welding rod arc welding is generally not used for gas welding.”
Gas welding (generally not used), gas tungsten arc welding (tungsten arc welding), gas metal arc welding (melting arc welding), plasma welding. Arc welding without electrodes.
(3) Welding parameters
During welding, the general term for various parameters (such as welding current, welding voltage, welding speed, welding line energy, etc.) selected to ensure welding quality. It is an important part of the preparation of welding operation instructions and is a process parameter that must be strictly followed during welding operations.
1. Welding joints
(1) The weldment melts under the action of heat energy to form a molten pool. After the heat source leaves the molten pool, the molten metal (the base metal and the filler metal in the molten pool) cools and crystallizes, and is integrated with the base metal to form a welded joint. .
The welded joint consists of weld, fusion zone, heat affected zone and base metal.
(2) During welding, due to the different thickness, structure and usage conditions of the weldment, the joint form and groove form are also different.
The forms of welded joints include: butt joints, T-shaped joints, corner joints and lap joints, etc. The form of the welded joint is mainly determined by the relative position of the two welding parts.
For example, commonly used lap joints are connected between the webs of the steel tank bottom plate, between the webs and the edge plates, between the manholes (takeovers) or the leg reinforcement plates and the container wall plates (roof plates).
2.Bevel form
According to the shape of the groove, the groove is divided into various groove forms such as I-shaped (without groove), V-shaped, single-sided V-shaped, U-shaped, double U-shaped, J-shaped, etc.
For example: the butt joints of water supply and drainage steel pipes use electrode arc welding.
3.Weld seam form
Classification
weld
According to weld joint form
Butt weld, fillet weld, plug weld, slot weld, end weld
According to the position of the weld in space during welding
Flat weld, vertical weld, horizontal weld, overhead weld
According to the discontinuity of weld seam
Continuous and intermittent welds
(4) When the shape of the weld is represented by a series of geometric dimensions, the shape parameters of different forms of welds are also different.
Weld form
Weld shape and size
Butt joint, butt weld
Weld length, weld width, weld reinforcement
T-joint butt or fillet weld
Welding leg, welding leg size, welding seam convexity (concavity)
4.Welding materials
(1) The general name for materials consumed during welding, including: welding rods, welding wires, flux, gases, etc.
(2) Welding rod models are classified according to the mechanical properties of the deposited metal, coating type, welding position, current type, chemical composition of the molten metal and post-weld condition.
5.Welding line energy
The main parameters that determine the welding line energy are welding speed, welding current and arc voltage
q=I·U/v In the formula, q-line energy (J/cm); I-welding current (A); U-welding voltage (V); V-Welding speed (cm/s).
6. Preheating, post-heating and post-weld heat treatment
(1) Any wall thickness of 20HIC requires preheating before welding and post-welding heat treatment to prevent the occurrence of delayed cracks. If heat treatment cannot be carried out in time, it should be heated at 200~350℃ immediately after welding and slowly cooled with heat preservation.
Post-heating can reduce the influence of hydrogen in the weld, reduce welding residual stress, avoid the occurrence of martensite structure in the welded joint, thereby preventing the occurrence of hydrogen-induced cracks.
(2) When other grades of non-alloy steel are used in pressure vessels, the minimum preheating temperature is 15°C.
(3) When other brands are used for industrial pipe welding joints with base metal thickness ≥ 25mm, the minimum preheating temperature is 80°C. The thickness of the base material is <25mm, and the minimum preheating temperature is 10℃.
(4) Heat treatment performed to improve the post-weld structure and performance of welded joints or to eliminate residual stress is called post-weld heat treatment. For example: when the wall thickness of non-alloy steel pipes is greater than 19mm, post-weld stress relief heat treatment should be performed.
(5) Post-weld heat treatment should comply with the design documents or relevant construction standards, specifications, and welding process assessment reports.
(6) For pressure vessels (pressure pipes) that require post-weld stress relief heat treatment, after excavation and repair, whether stress relief treatment is required should be determined based on the depth of the repair welding.
7.Welding position
During fusion welding, the spatial position of the seam of the weldment can be expressed by the weld inclination angle and the weld angle. There are flat welding, vertical welding, horizontal welding and overhead welding positions.
(4) Operational requirements
2. Welding groove cleaning
(1) The welding groove of non-alloy steel pressure vessels and its vicinity (about 10mm on each side for arc welding; 20mm on each side for submerged arc welding, plasma arc welding, and gas shielded welding) should be free of water, rust, and oil. , slag and other harmful impurities are cleaned.
(2) Remove the surface oxide film chemically or mechanically from the welding groove of aluminum and aluminum alloys and the 50mm adjacent areas; use organic solvents such as acetone to remove oil stains and substances harmful to welding quality.
3. Preheating and interlayer temperature
For multi-layer (pass) welding parts that require preheating, the interlayer temperature should not be lower than the preheating temperature. When welding is interrupted, the cooling rate should be controlled or other measures should be taken to prevent it from having harmful effects on the pipeline. Before resuming welding, preheating should be carried out again according to the provisions of the welding procedure regulations.
4. Precautions
(1) It is not allowed to strike an arc or test current on the surface of the weldment.
(2) Hammering is not allowed on the root weld and cover weld.
2. Welding process evaluation
(1) Specification requirements
Boilers, vessels, pipes, and steel structures should all undergo welding process qualification before welding.
For the steel materials, welding materials, welding methods, welding joints, welding positions, post-weld heat treatment and other parameters and combinations used by the construction unit for the first time, welding process qualification tests should be conducted before the steel structure is made and installed.
(2) Selection of welding process qualification standards
2. Industrial pipelines (utility pipelines, boilers, pressure vessels, lifting machinery)
(4) Welding procedure evaluation should be carried out in the unit. The equipment and instruments used for welding process qualification should be in normal condition, the metal materials and welding materials should meet the corresponding standards, and the unit's skilled welding personnel should use the unit's equipment to weld the test pieces.
(3) Steps and procedures for welding process qualification
Sequence: Assessment first, then homework.
Pre-welding process regulations (guidance assessment)
Welding procedure qualification report (Supporting documents for welding operation instructions, but do not directly guide production)
Welding work instructions (basis for work)
(4) Welding procedure qualification rules
1. General assessment rules for various welding methods
①Evaluation rules for welding methods ②Evaluation rules for base materials ③Evaluation rules for filler metal ④Evaluation rules for post-weld heat treatment ⑤Evaluation rules for test piece thickness and weldment thickness
2. Special assessment rules for various welding methods
① According to the degree of influence of joints, filler metal, welding position, preheating (postheating), gas, electrical characteristics, and technical measures on various welding methods, they can be divided into important factors, supplementary factors, and secondary factors. ②When any important factor is changed, the welding process qualification needs to be re-qualified. ③When any additional factor is added or changed, additional welding impact toughness specimens can be tested according to the added or changed additional factor. ④ When minor factors are added or changed, there is no need to re-evaluate, but the pre-welding process regulations need to be re-written.
2H312032 Welding quality inspection
1. Inspection level
1. Pressure pipeline
pressure pipe
Check level
Long-distance pipelines (GA category)
Inspection levels are divided according to detection proportion, detection method and qualification level.
Public pipe (GB class) Industrial piping (GC type)
There are five levels: I, II, III, IV and V, of which level I is the highest and level V is the lowest.
Thermal power plant boiler welding and power pipes (GD type), steam and water pipe butt joints
There are three levels: I, II and III.
2.Steel structure
Weld quality grades are divided into: first grade, second grade and third grade. The influencing factors include: the importance of the steel structure, load characteristics, weld form, working environment and stress state, etc.
2. Inspection methods
equipment
Check method
Quality inspection of boiler pressure components and welded joints
Appearance inspection, ball passing test, chemical composition analysis, non-destructive testing, mechanical property testing
Steel welded storage tank welding joints
Appearance inspection, non-destructive testing, tightness test (all welds on the bottom of the tank), kerosene leakage (floating roof), water filling test.
GA type long-distance pipeline
Line construction welding joints
Appearance inspection, non-destructive testing, mechanical properties, pressure test and tightness test
Site construction welds
Appearance inspection, non-destructive testing, pressure test and tightness test
Class GB utility piping and Class GC industrial piping
Visual inspection, non-destructive testing, pressure test and leakage test
GD type power pipe butt joint
Visual inspection, non-destructive testing, spectral analysis, hardness inspection, metallographic inspection
Steel structure welded joints
Appearance inspection and non-destructive inspection
3. Welding joint defects
The phenomenon of metal discontinuity, lack of density or poor connection caused by welding in a welded joint but not exceeding the allowable range of the standard is a welding defect, and a defect exceeding the allowable range is a welding defect.
1. Defect classification
(1) Welding defects
1) Welding defects can be divided into six categories (major categories) according to their nature and characteristics, including: cracks, voids, solid inclusions, lack of fusion (lack of penetration), poor shape and size, and other defects.
(2) Welding defects
Classification
welding defects
According to the shape of defects
planar defects
Cracks, lack of fusion, etc.
Volumetric defects
Porosity, slag inclusion, etc.
Divided according to the location of defect occurrence
surface defects
The size of the weld does not meet the requirements, such as undercuts, surface pores, surface slag inclusions, surface cracks, weld nodules, arc craters, etc.
internal defects
Porosity, slag inclusion, cracks, lack of fusion, segregation, microstructure not meeting requirements, etc.
According to the visibility of defects
macroscopic defects, microscopic defects
3. The impact of welding defects on the mechanical properties of welded joints
welding defects
Effect on mechanical properties of welded joints
stomata
It weakens the effective working area of the weld, destroys the density and structural continuity of the weld metal, significantly reduces the bending and impact toughness and fatigue strength of the weld, and the mechanical performance of the joint is obviously poor.
Slag inclusion
Irregular slag inclusions with edges and corners (the main feature of slag inclusions) can easily cause stress concentration and are the fatigue source of brittle fracture propagation. Reduce the working area of the weld, destroy the continuity of the weld metal structure, and significantly reduce the mechanical properties of the joint. The presence of inclusions (also called slag inclusions) in the weld not only reduces the plasticity of the weld metal and increases low-temperature brittleness, but also increases the tendency of cracks and lamellar tearing of the thick plate structure. Metal slag inclusions (tungsten inclusions, etc.) in the weld, like pores, will also reduce the mechanical properties of the weld.
Not penetrated
As a result, the mechanical strength of the weld is greatly reduced, and it is easy to extend into crack defects, leading to component damage. In particular, continuous lack of penetration is a dangerous defect.
Not fused
is an extremely dangerous flaw similar to a crack. Lack of fusion itself is a kind of virtual welding. Under the working condition of alternating load, the stress is concentrated and it is easy to crack. It is one of the most dangerous defects.
crack
It is the most dangerous defect in welds and causes the damage of most welded components.
Shape defects
It mainly causes discontinuities on the surface of the weld. Some will cause stress concentration and cracks (such as undercuts). Some will cause the cross-sectional area of the weld to decrease (such as pits, inner pits, etc.). Some defects are Not allowed (such as burn-through), because burn-through can cause complete destruction of the weld joint and reduce the mechanical strength.
4. Inspection before welding
(1) Basic requirements
1.Welder
They should obtain corresponding qualifications, obtain welding process (operation) instructions, and accept technical briefings.
2.Welding equipment and auxiliary equipment
It should be able to ensure the normal operation, safety and reliability of the welding work, and the instruments should be inspected regularly.
3.Welding environment
The normal working range of hot fusion welding machine and electric fusion welding machine is -10~40℃. In the welding work area, when the wind speed exceeds 8m/s for manual arc welding and 2m/s for gas shielded welding and flux-cored wire arc welding, wind protection measures should be taken. The relative humidity in the welding work area shall not exceed 90%.
4. Preheat before welding
The heating method, heating width, insulation requirements, and temperature measurement requirements should comply with the specification requirements.
(2) Steel structure weld inspection plan
1. Prepare inspection and test plan
Before welding, an inspection and test plan should be prepared based on the weld quality inspection levels specified in the construction drawings, construction plans, and construction specifications, and should be approved by the project technical leader and reported to the supervising engineer for record.
2.Weld inspection plan
The content includes the division of inspection lots, sampling methods for sampling inspection, inspection items, inspection methods, inspection timing and corresponding acceptance standards, etc.
5. Welding process inspection
(1) Inspection of welding processes and welding technical measures
1.Welding process When welders operate electrode arc welding, the welding process parameters they check include: welding method, welding materials, welding current, welding voltage, welding speed, current type, polarity, number of welding layers (passes), and welding sequence.
(2) Inspection of weld repair process
When repairing pressure vessels to remove defects in welds or base materials, welding can only be carried out after non-destructive testing has confirmed that the defects have been removed. After welding is completed, non-destructive testing should be performed again.
6. Inspection after welding
(1) Visual inspection
2. For direct visual inspection, sufficient space for human eyes to observe should be provided within 600mm of the surface to be inspected, and the inspection viewing angle should be no less than 30°. When this cannot be met, mirrors, endoscopes, fiber optic cables, and cameras should be used for indirect visual inspection.
(2) Non-destructive testing
1. Non-destructive testing methods on the surface of welded joints usually refer to magnetic particle testing and penetrant testing; Internal non-destructive testing methods are usually radiographic testing and ultrasonic testing.
(3) Heat treatment
1. For welds subjected to local heating and heat treatment, parameters such as the heating rate, cooling rate, constant temperature temperature and constant temperature time, the temperature difference between any two temperature measurement points, and the width of the heating area should be checked and recorded.
2. The heat treatment effect of the weld should be inspected according to the inspection methods specified in the design documents or current national standards. Welds subjected to local heating and heat treatment shall undergo hardness inspection.
3. When the heat treatment effect inspection fails or there are abnormalities in the heat treatment record curve, it should be reviewed or evaluated through other detection methods (metallographic analysis or residual stress testing).
(4) Physical, chemical and mechanical property testing
When conducting chemical composition analysis, weld ferrite content determination, welded joint metallographic inspection, product mechanical properties and other inspections on welds, the inspection results should comply with the design documents and current relevant national standards.
(5) Strength test
1. The strength test and tightness test of the weld should be carried out after radiographic testing or ultrasonic testing and heat treatment.
2. Industrial water should be used as the liquid pressure test medium. Other liquids can be used when the production process requires it. When testing stainless steel equipment or pipelines with water, the chloride ion content in the water must not exceed 25PPm and should be drained immediately after the test.
(6) Others
1. After the welding seam is completed, the welder's mark or other marks should be made near the welding seam. The marking method shall not cause damage or contamination to the surface of the base material. Hard-printed markings are not allowed on low-temperature steel, stainless steel and non-ferrous metals. When stainless steel and non-ferrous metals are marked with color codes, the printing color should not contain substances that are harmful to the materials.
2. Welding construction inspection records should at least include: welder qualification approval records, welding inspection records, and weld repair inspection records.
3. For welds that require non-destructive testing and weld heat treatment, the weld position, weld number, welder code, non-destructive testing method, non-destructive testing weld position, and weld repair welding should be marked on the equipment layout diagram or pipeline isometric drawing. location, heat treatment and hardness inspection of weld locations.
For welds that do not require non-destructive testing, the welds can be marked using weld identification diagrams.
2H313000 Industrial mechanical and electrical engineering installation technology
2H313010 Mechanical equipment installation engineering construction technology
2H313011 Mechanical equipment installation procedures and requirements
1. General procedures for installation of mechanical equipment
Construction preparation → Equipment unpacking and inspection → Basic measurement and laying out → Basic inspection and acceptance → Pad iron setting → Equipment hoisting in place → Equipment installation and adjustment → Equipment fixation and grouting → Equipment parts cleaning and assembly → Lubrication and equipment refueling → Equipment trial operation →Project acceptance
2. General requirements for installation of mechanical equipment
(2) Equipment unpacking and inspection
When unpacking mechanical equipment, the construction unit, supervision unit, and construction unit should jointly participate, and the following items should be inspected and recorded:
①Box number, number of boxes and packaging conditions. ②The name, specification and model of the equipment, and important parts must also be inspected and accepted according to quality standards. ③ Random technical documents (instructions for use, certificate of conformity, packing list, etc.) and special tools. ④ Check whether there are any defective parts, and whether there is any damage or rust on the surface. ⑤Other matters that need to be recorded.
(3) Basic measurement and setting out
1. Principles for setting baselines and reference points
(2) When setting baselines and reference points, the following principles should usually be followed:
1) Easy to install, test and use; 2) Conducive to preservation without being damaged; 3) The markings are clear and easy to identify.
2. Requirements for setting baselines and reference points
① Before the mechanical equipment is put in place, the installation baseline and reference point shall be demarcated according to the process layout drawing and the measurement control network or the axis, edge line and elevation line of the relevant building.
3. Requirements for setting permanent baselines and reference points:
① If the reference lines and reference points need to be retained for a long time, a permanent center mark and a permanent reference point should be set up. It is best to use copper or stainless steel. Anti-corrosion measures should be taken when making ordinary steel, such as painting or galvanizing. ② The permanent center mark and reference point are usually set on the main axis and important centerline, and should be buried in the concrete of the equipment foundation or the cast-in-place floor frame beam.
For example: the main axis (longitudinal centerline) of the sintering machine and the axis of the large star wheel of the head (transverse centerline).
④ For important, heavy, and special equipment, settlement observation points need to be set up to monitor and analyze the changes in the foundation during the installation and use of the equipment. Such as steam turbine generator units, turbine compressor units, large storage tanks, etc.
(4) Basic inspection and acceptance
1. Inspection and acceptance of equipment foundation concrete strength
① The foundation construction unit or supervision unit shall provide documents proving the quality of the equipment foundation. The installation unit shall mainly check whether the foundation maintenance time and concrete strength meet the design requirements. ② If you have doubts about the strength of the equipment foundation, you can ask an engineering testing unit with testing qualifications to retest the strength of the foundation. ③ When the equipment foundation has requirements for preloading and settlement observation, it must be qualified for preloading and have detailed records of preloading and settlement observation.
2. Inspection and acceptance of equipment foundation location, elevation, and geometric dimensions
(2) Before installing the equipment, recheck the basic position, elevation and geometric dimensions of the equipment according to the allowable deviations in the specifications.
(3) The measurement and inspection of the basic position, elevation, and geometric dimensions of the equipment mainly include:
①Basic coordinate position; ②Elevations of different planes; ③Plane dimensions; ④Plane dimensions and cavity dimensions on the boss; ⑤The levelness of the plane; ⑥The plumbness of the basic facade; ⑦ Reserve the center position, depth and hole wall plumbness of the hole; ⑧The location and elevation of embedded boards or other embedded parts.
3. Equipment basic appearance quality inspection and acceptance
4. Inspection and acceptance of embedded anchor bolts
(1) The center distance, elevation and exposed foundation length of directly buried anchor bolts meet the design or specification requirements. The center distance should be measured at the root and top of the anchor bolts in both longitudinal and transverse directions, and the elevation should be measured at the top of the anchor bolts.
(3) The center position, elevation, and levelness of the grooved or threaded anchor plate of the movable anchor bolt anchor plate meet the design or specification requirements.
5. Common quality problems of equipment basics:
①Basically the plane elevation is out of tolerance ②The position and elevation of embedded anchor bolts are out of tolerance ③The depth of reserved anchor bolt holes is out of tolerance
(5) Horn settings
Correct the elevation and level of the equipment by adjusting the height of the horns. Through the pad iron group, the weight of the equipment, the working load and the pretightening force of the anchor bolts for fixing the equipment are evenly transmitted to the foundation.
1. Setting requirements for horns
② There should be good contact between the pad iron and the equipment foundation. ③ There should be at least one set of pads next to each anchor bolt, and they should be placed close to the anchor bolt and under the main stress-bearing part of the base. ④A set of shims is provided on both sides of the joint of the equipment base. The number of horns in each group should not exceed 5. ⑤ When placing flat shims, thick ones should be placed at the bottom and thin ones should be placed in the middle. The thickness of the shims should not be less than 2mm. ⑥After the equipment is leveled, the end face of the pad iron should be exposed to the outer edge of the bottom of the equipment. The flat pad iron should be exposed by 10~30mm, and the inclined pad iron should be exposed by 10~50mm. The length of the pad iron group extending into the bottom surface of the equipment base should exceed the center of the equipment anchor bolts. ⑦Except for the cast iron pads, all pads must be firmly welded to each other with tack welding after the equipment is adjusted. Supplement: The distance between two adjacent sets of horns should be 500 to 1000mm.
(7) Equipment installation and adjustment
2. Equipment adjustment
The equipment's leveling adjustment (leveling), coordinate position adjustment (alignment), and height adjustment (elevation finding) are a comprehensive adjustment process.
(1) Equipment leveling
1) Usually, select the measuring point on the finishing surface of the equipment, measure it with a level, and adjust it by adjusting the height of the pad iron. Adjusted to the level specified in the design or specification.
(2) Equipment alignment
2) Commonly used equipment alignment detection methods:
Find the correct detection method
Accuracy requirements
Wire hanging method
Detection accuracy is 1mm
Magnifying glass observation contact method
Detection accuracy is 0.05mm
conductive contact signal method
Detection accuracy is 0.05mm
High-precision theodolite and precision total station surveying methods
Can achieve more precise detection accuracy
(3) Find the elevation of the equipment
1) Elevation adjustment. By adjusting the height of the horn, align the equipment with its designated baseline or base plane at the set reference point, so that the position of the equipment in the vertical direction meets the design or specification requirements.
2) The basic method for finding the elevation of equipment is to use a precision level to measure and control it through reference points.
(4) Equipment leveling, alignment, and elevation measurement points
1) The location of the measurement point selection: generally choose the location specified in the design or equipment technical documents; the main working surface of the equipment; the surface with higher processing precision on the component; the main joint surface between components; the guide surface that supports the sliding component; The split surface of the bearing seat, the journal surface, and the outer ring of the rolling bearing; the main contour surface on the equipment should be horizontal or vertical.
2) Advanced measuring instruments and equipment have been widely used in equipment installation and testing, such as electronic levels, electronic levels, laser theodolite, sensors and robot measuring instruments, etc.
(8) Equipment fixation and grouting
Equipment grouting is divided into primary grouting and secondary grouting.
Primary grouting: After rough alignment of the equipment, grout the reserved holes for anchor bolts.
Secondary grouting: grouting between the equipment base and foundation after precise alignment of the equipment, tightening of anchor bolts, and passing inspection items.
(9) Parts cleaning and assembly
2. Common parts assembly
(1) Common parts assemblies include:
Bolt or screw connection fastening, key, pin, expansion sleeve assembly, coupling, clutch, brake assembly, sliding bearing, rolling bearing assembly, transmission belt, chain, gear assembly, seal assembly, etc. No: shims, anchor bolts.
(2) Assembly of threaded connectors
2) Common tightening methods for threaded connections with pre-tightening force requirements: ①Constant moment method ②Measuring elongation method ③Hydraulic stretching method ④Heating elongation method
(3) Assembly of interference fitting parts
The assembly methods of interference fittings generally use press-fit assembly, low-temperature cold assembly and heated assembly methods. At the installation site, heated assembly methods are mainly used.
(4) Split sliding bearing assembly
The installation process of split sliding bearings includes bearing cleaning, inspection, scraping, assembly, gap adjustment and pressing force adjustment.
1) Scratching of bearing bush
Generally, the tiles are scraped off first and then the tiles are scraped on; scraping and grinding should be carried out after the equipment is leveled. When scraping and grinding, all parts on the shaft should be installed. The number of contact points between the bearing bush and the journal should not be less than the requirements of the specification.
2) Installation of bearings
The installation of bearings includes the installation of bearing bushes, bearing seats and bearing caps. When installing the bearing seat, the bearing bush must be installed on the bearing seat, and then adjusted according to the center of the bearing bush. The centers of all bearings on the same transmission shaft should be on the same axis.
3) Detection and adjustment of bearing clearance
Check content
Check method
Related requirements
Top clearance between journal and bearing bush
Lead pressing method
The diameter of the lead wire should not be greater than 3 times the top clearance
Side clearance between journal and bearing bush
Measure with feeler gauge
The side clearance should be 1/2~1/3 of the top clearance
Bearings subject to axial load should also check the axial clearance
Measure with a feeler gauge or micrometer
(10) Lubrication and equipment refueling
1. According to the lubricant filling method, it is generally divided into dispersed lubrication and centralized lubrication. 2. Dispersed lubrication is usually filled with lubricant manually. Before the equipment is commissioned, each lubrication point should be carefully inspected and cleaned to ensure that the lubrication part is clean. The lubricant should be selected according to the design and user requirements, and the filling amount should be appropriate. 3. Centralized lubrication usually consists of a lubrication station, pipelines and accessories to form a lubrication system, which transports a certain amount of pressured lubricant to each lubrication point through pipelines.
(11) Equipment trial operation
Equipment trial operation should be carried out according to four steps: post-installation commissioning, single unit trial operation, no-load linkage trial operation and load linkage trial operation:
1. Debugging after installation. Including: passing the independent simulation debugging of lubrication, hydraulic, pneumatic, cooling, heating, electrical and operation control systems; conducting process action tests of each action unit, single machine, up to the complete machine or complete production line according to the production process, operating procedures and random technical documents. Finish. 2. Single unit trial operation. Conduct a comprehensive assessment of a single piece of equipment within the specified time, including single unit no-load test operation and load test operation. The single load test operation is only carried out for equipment that does not require linkage and the equipment that requires single load test according to the load linkage test operation. The order of trial operation of individual equipment is: manual first, then electric; first jog, then continuous; first low speed, then medium and high speed. 3. No-load linkage test operation. The main purpose is to check whether the equipment in the entire production line or linkage unit cooperates with each other and whether the action procedures according to the process flow are correct. It also checks whether the interlocking device is sensitive and reliable, and whether the signaling device is accurate. The no-load linkage test operation should be carried out according to the linkage program specified in the design or simulated. 4. Load linkage test operation. In the case of inputting materials, comprehensively assess the quality of the equipment installation project, assess the performance, production process and production capacity of the equipment, and check whether the design complies with and meets the requirements of normal production. Load-linked trial operation should be carried out according to the production process. Equipment that requires thermal load trial operation (such as industrial furnace equipment) is often accompanied by trial production.
(12) Project acceptance
1. The acceptance procedure for mechanical equipment installation projects is generally carried out in three steps: single test operation, no-load linkage test operation and load linkage test operation. 2. For projects that do not require linkage trial operation, the project acceptance procedures can be processed after the single unit test operation is qualified; for projects that are subject to linkage trial operation, the project acceptance procedures can be processed after the load linkage trial operation is qualified. 3. The construction unit is responsible for preparing the no-load single unit and linkage trial operation procedures, and is responsible for the organization, command and operation of the trial operation, with the participation of personnel from the construction unit and relevant parties. The construction unit is responsible for preparing the load cell and linkage trial operation procedures, and is responsible for the organization, command and operation of the trial operation. The construction unit and relevant parties can send people to participate according to the entrustment of the construction unit to cooperate with the load trial operation. 4. After the no-load monomer and linkage trial operation meet the requirements, the construction unit shall go through relevant handover procedures such as engineering and technical data with the construction unit, supervision unit, design unit, and quality supervision department. 5. If the project acceptance is qualified and meets the requirements of the contract, design and acceptance specifications, the project acceptance should be processed immediately.
2H313012 Control of installation accuracy of mechanical equipment
1. Factors affecting equipment installation accuracy
Equipment basics
strength and settlement
Burial of horns
Bearing area and contact conditions
Equipment grouting
Strength and compactness
Anchor bolts
Tightening force and verticality
measurement error
Instrument accuracy, reference accuracy, skill level and responsibility
Equipment manufacturing and disassembly equipment assembly
Machining accuracy and assembly accuracy
environmental factors
Basic temperature deformation, equipment temperature deformation, harsh environment places
6. Assembly of equipment manufacturing and disassembly equipment.
(1) The impact of equipment manufacturing on installation accuracy is mainly processing accuracy and assembly accuracy. If the manufacturing quality of the equipment fails to meet the design requirements, it will have the most direct impact on the installation accuracy, and most of these problems cannot be dealt with on site. Therefore, quality inspection of the equipment before leaving the factory is crucial.
(2) The assembly accuracy of disassembled equipment will directly affect the operation quality of the equipment. The assembly accuracy of disassembled equipment includes: relative movement accuracy between moving parts, matching accuracy and contact quality between mating surfaces.
1) Relative movement accuracy between various moving parts. The relative motion accuracy between the moving parts of large-scale equipment assembled on site includes linear motion accuracy; circular motion accuracy, transmission accuracy, etc.
2) Fitting accuracy and contact quality between mating surfaces. Fitting accuracy refers to the closeness between mating surfaces to achieve the specified fit gap or interference; Contact quality refers to the size and distribution of the contact area between mating surfaces. Main impact: The size of the contact deformation between matching parts affects the stability and life of the matching properties, such as gear meshing.
(3) Installation accuracy of equipment reference parts. The installation accuracy of equipment reference parts includes: elevation difference, levelness, plumbness, straightness, parallelism, etc. The installation accuracy of equipment reference parts affects: the mutual position accuracy and relative movement accuracy between various parts of the equipment. For example, the straightness of the bed guide rails of a gantry planer and the parallelism between the guide rails will affect the linear motion accuracy of the workbench.
2. Control of equipment installation accuracy
2. If necessary, in order to offset excessive assembly or installation accumulated errors, use compensation parts at appropriate positions to adjust or repair.
3. Deviation control of equipment installation accuracy
(1) Deviation control requirements:
① Helps offset the impact of the weight of equipment accessories after installation; ②It is helpful to offset the influence of the force generated when the equipment is running; ③ Helps offset the impact of component wear; ④It is helpful to offset the influence of oil film between friction surfaces.
(2) Main aspects causing deviations
1) Compensate for deviations caused by temperature changes For example, when adjusting the radial displacement of the two axes, the end with high temperature during operation (steam turbine, dryer) is lower than the end with low temperature (generator, blower, motor). When adjusting the inclination of the two axes, the upper gap is smaller than the lower gap. Select a larger value when adjusting the gap between the two end faces.
2) Compensate for deviations caused by force For example, if equipment with a cantilever rotation mechanism tilts downward and forward after being stressed, the deviation direction of the horizontality of the cantilever axis and the direction of the verticality of the axis to the centerline of the unit should be controlled during installation so that it can compensate for the deviation caused by the force. Deviation changes.
3) Compensate for deviations caused by wear during use For example, the meshing clearance of gears, the clearance of adjustable bearings, the clearance of sealing devices such as shaft seals, the clearance between slideways and guide wheels, the clearance between guide keys and grooves, etc.
4) Compensate each other for equipment installation accuracy deviations For example, control the vertical deviation between the axis of the adjacent roller table and the centerline of the unit.
2H313020 Electrical installation engineering construction technology
2H313021 Electrical Equipment Installation Procedures and Requirements
1. Electrical installation procedures
(1) General construction procedures for electrical installation projects
Buried pipes and embedded parts→Equipment installation→Wires and cable laying→Loop connection→Inspection, testing, debugging→Power on and trial operation→Delivery for use.
(2) Construction procedures for electrical equipment
1. Construction procedures of oil-immersed power transformer
Unpacking inspection→Second transportation→Equipment in place→Handling core inspection→Accessory installation→Oil filtering and oil filling→Handover test→Acceptance.
Whether oil-immersed transformers require hanging core inspection should be based on:
①The size of the transformer ②Manufacturer’s regulations ③Storage time ④Is there any abnormality during transportation? ⑤Determined according to the requirements of the construction unit.
2. Construction procedures for high-voltage electrical appliances and distribution equipment
(3) Vacuum circuit breaker installation procedure:
Vacuum circuit breaker inspection → operating mechanism inspection → vacuum circuit breaker in place → mechanical and electrical performance test.
(4) Installation procedures for sulfur hexafluoride circuit breaker:
Unpacking and inspection → body installation → filling with sulfur hexafluoride → operating mechanism installation → inspection and adjustment → insulation test → test.
(6) Installation procedures for complete sets of power distribution equipment:
Unpacking and inspection → secondary transportation → installation and fixation → busbar installation → secondary circuit connection → test adjustment → acceptance of power transmission operation.
2. Construction technical requirements for electrical equipment
(1) Installation requirements for electrical equipment
2. The storage and storage period of electrical equipment and equipment before installation should comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
4. Fasteners used in the installation of electrical equipment should be galvanized or stainless steel.
5. The insulating oil should be strictly filtered and its electrical strength, dielectric loss angle tangent value and chromatographic analysis should be passed before it can be injected into the equipment.
6. The contact surface of the terminal block should be smooth, clean, free of oxide film, and coated with electrical compound grease.
7. The protective grounding and working grounding of electrical equipment must be reliable.
8. The secondary coil of the current transformer that is not used temporarily should be short-circuited and then grounded.
9. Installation requirements for complete sets of power distribution equipment
(1) The allowable deviation of the basic section steel installation should comply with the specification requirements, and the allowable deviation of the circular arrangement should comply with the design requirements. The final height of the basic section steel exposed to the ground should be 10mm, but the height of the basic section steel of the handcart type cabinet exposed to the ground should be in accordance with the product technical instructions. The two ends of the basic steel and the grounding trunk line should be welded firmly. (2) The connections between cabinets and between cabinets and basic steel should be firm and should not be fixed by welding. (3) When installing cabinets in rows, the allowable deviation of cabinet installation should comply with the specification requirements. (4) The connections between equipment, devices, wires, terminals and other structures in the cabinet need to be comprehensively inspected, and loose parts must be tightened. (5) The mechanical locking and electrical locking of fixed cabinets, handcart-type cabinets and drawer-type cabinets should be accurate and reliable, and the contacts should be in close contact; the drawer units and handcart units should be able to be pulled out and pushed forward easily and flexibly without jamming. Collision phenomenon; the secondary circuit connecting plug-in should be in good contact and have locking measures. (6) The grounding contact of the handcart unit is reliably grounded: when the handcart is pushed forward, the grounding contact contacts before the main contact, and when the handcart is pulled out, the grounding contact disconnects after the main contact. (7) The wiring of high-voltage electrical component plugs of the same functional unit and the same type should be the same and can be used interchangeably.
(2) Handover test content and precautions
1. Handover test content:
Measuring insulation resistance, AC withstand voltage test, measuring DC resistance, DC withstand voltage test, leakage current measurement, insulating oil test, line phase inspection, etc.
(1) Contents of the handover test of oil-immersed power transformers: insulating oil test, measuring the DC resistance of the windings and bushings, measuring the insulation resistance and absorption ratio of the transformer windings, measuring the insulation resistance of the core and clamps, and checking all tap connections Transformation ratio, inspection of three-phase transformer groups, non-pure porcelain bushing test, measurement of dielectric loss factor of windings and bushings, AC withstand voltage test of windings and bushings, etc. (2) The handover test content of the vacuum circuit breaker: measuring the insulation resistance, measuring the resistance of each phase conductive loop, AC withstand voltage test, measuring the opening and closing time of the circuit breaker, measuring the opening and closing synchronicity of the circuit breaker, measuring the closing time of the circuit breaker The contact bounce time during switching is measured, the insulation resistance and DC resistance of the opening and closing coil of the circuit breaker are measured, and the operating mechanism test of the circuit breaker is measured. (3) Contents of the sulfur hexafluoride circuit breaker handover test: measurement of insulation resistance, measurement of each phase conductive loop resistance, AC withstand voltage test, measurement of the opening and closing time of the circuit breaker, measurement of the opening and closing speed of the circuit breaker, measurement of the circuit breaker The insulation resistance and DC resistance of the opening and closing coils were measured, the operating mechanism test of the circuit breaker was measured, and the water content of sulfur hexafluoride gas in the circuit breaker was measured. (4) The handover test content of power cables: measuring insulation resistance, AC withstand voltage test, measuring DC resistance, DC withstand voltage test and leakage current measurement, line phase inspection, etc.
2. Precautions for handover test:
(1) Barriers should be installed and warning signs should be hung around high-voltage test equipment and high-voltage lead wires. (2) When conducting high-voltage tests, there should be a sufficient safety distance between the operator and the high-voltage circuit. For example: when the voltage level is 6~10kV and there is no guardrail, the minimum safety distance is 0.7m. (3) After the high-voltage test, the DC test equipment and the equipment under test with large capacitance should be discharged multiple times, and the discharge time should be at least 1 minute. (4) The AC withstand voltage test of the circuit breaker should be carried out in the opening and closing states respectively. (5) When performing a withstand voltage test on a complete set of equipment, it is advisable to separate the various equipment connected together and conduct it separately. (6) When doing the DC withstand voltage test, the test voltage is increased in stages by 0.5 times the rated voltage for each stage, staying for 1 minute at each stage, and recording the leakage current.
(3) Electrical equipment power-on inspection and adjustment test
1.Electrical equipment energization conditions
The energization condition of the electrical equipment system is ① Confirm that the installation of power distribution equipment and electrical equipment is complete, ②The model, specifications, and installation location comply with the requirements of the construction drawings and pass the acceptance inspection. ③The electrical handover test is qualified, ④All building decoration work is completed and cleaned, ⑤The environment where electrical equipment is powered is clean and tidy.
2. Power-on inspection and adjustment test
(1) Check that the installation and wiring of primary and secondary equipment should be completed, and all signs should be obvious, correct and complete. The secondary circuit power check should be carried out first, and then the primary circuit power check should be carried out. (2) The primary circuit has undergone insulation resistance measurement and withstand voltage testing, and the insulation resistance values are in compliance with regulations. The insulation resistance measurement and withstand voltage test of the weak current circuit in the secondary circuit shall be carried out according to the manufacturer's regulations.
3. Precautions for secondary circuit power inspection:
(1) Before turning on the secondary circuit power supply, the insulation resistance and DC resistance of the secondary circuit should be measured again to ensure that there is no grounding or short circuit, and check whether the fuses and fuses of the operation and closing circuit meet the design requirements. (2) The connection between the circuit to be inspected and the circuit that is already in operation and the circuit that is not yet inspected should be disconnected to avoid malfunction. All secondary circuit fuses not yet inspected should be removed. (3) When checking the operation of the secondary circuit, the corresponding primary circuit (such as busbar, circuit breaker, isolating switch, etc.) should not have operating voltage. (4) When monitoring and operating equipment from a distance, there must be a dedicated person near the equipment to monitor the actions and maintain contact. (5) When abnormality is found during power-on inspection, the power supply should be disconnected immediately and timely inspection and treatment should be carried out.
4. Power receiving steps
(1) The secondary circuit test of the power receiving system has passed the test, and its protection setting value has been set according to actual requirements. The insulation of equipment and cables in the power receiving system is qualified. Safety warning signs and fire protection facilities are in place. (2) According to the approved power receiving operation instructions, organize the high-voltage side of the electrical system transformer to receive power from the grid side, and test power on step by step through the distribution cabinet according to the principle of first high voltage then low voltage, first main line then branch line. (3) After trial power-on, the system works normally and can be trial run.
(4) Trial operation conditions and safety requirements of the power supply system
1. Conditions for trial operation of power supply system
(1) The electrical equipment is installed completely and the connecting circuit wiring is correct, complete and intact. (2) The phase sequence of the power supply circuit should be checked and the power supply and special power supply should meet the power supply conditions. (3) Electrical equipment should be checked after power-on, and the protection setting value of the power supply system has been set according to the design requirements. (4) The environment is clean and tidy, and the necessary sealing has been done.
2.Safety precautions requirements
"Five-proof interlocking"
①Prevent mis-closing and mis-opening of circuit breakers ② Prevent opening and closing the isolating switch under load ③Prevent live wires from hanging on the ground ④Prevent the grounding switch from being powered on ⑤Prevent entering the electrified interval accidentally
2H313022 Construction requirements for power transmission and distribution lines
1. Construction requirements for overhead power lines
(1) Construction process of pole lines
1. Be familiar with engineering drawings and clarify design requirements. 2. Calculate the project quantities according to the construction drawings and prepare materials and machinery. 3. On-site survey, measurement and positioning, and determination of line direction. 4. Excavate the pole foundation pit according to geographical conditions and construction machinery. 5. Inspection and assembly of poles, cross arms, porcelain bottles and various hardware. 6. Carry out foundation construction and pole erection according to the soil condition of the pole location. 7. Wire production and installation. 8. Pay out, set up, tighten, tie and connect wires. 9. Acceptance of power transmission operation and compilation of completion data.
(2) Composition and material requirements of pole lines
The pole line consists of foundation, poles, wires, insulators, fittings, lightning protection wires and grounding devices.
1. Basics of electric poles
Electric pole basics
Scope of application
Prefabricated chassis and chuck
Wooden and concrete poles are stable
Reinforced concrete flange and anchor bolt foundation
metal pole
cable reel
Guy wire anchoring
2. Electric pole
(3) According to the purpose and stress of the pole, it is divided into 6 types of poles:
Electric pole
use
Tension rod
Line transposition points and line sections are used to withstand line breakage tension and control the scope of accidents.
corner pole
At the corner of the line, it bears the resultant force of the conductor corner under normal circumstances; it bears the breaking tension in the event of an accidental breakage.
terminal rod
The starting and ending ends of the line bear the tension on one side of the line
branch rod
Where branches need to be made in the middle of the line
across pole
There are rivers, valleys, extremely high intersections and other places on the route.
straight rod
On the straight section of the line, it supports the vertical and horizontal loads of the line and has a certain supporting force along the line direction.
(4) Material requirements for cement poles
①The surface is smooth and smooth, the thickness of the inner and outer walls is uniform, and there should be no exposed tendons or slurry. ② When cement poles are inspected according to regulations, there should be no longitudinal cracks, the width of transverse cracks should not exceed 0.1mm, and the length should not exceed 1/3 of the circumference of the pole. ③The bending value of the rod length should not exceed 1/1000 of the rod length.
3. Overhead wires
wire
Material
High voltage overhead line conductors
Steel core aluminum stranded wire or aluminum clad steel core aluminum stranded wire composed of aluminum, steel or composite metal
Lightning protection line
Steel stranded wire or aluminum clad steel stranded wire
Low voltage overhead line conductors
Plastic copper core wire
4. Cross arms, hardware and material requirements for overhead lines
(1) Cross arm
The cross arm is installed on the upper end of the pole and is used to fix insulators and wires. Sometimes it is also used to fix switchgear or lightning arresters. The cross arms are mainly angle steel cross arms, porcelain cross arms, etc.
(2) Metal tools
Some metal accessories required for the fixed connection of poles, cross arms, insulators, guy wires, etc. are called hardware. Commonly used ones include M-shaped iron hoops, U-shaped hoops, guy wire hoops, hanging plates, wire clamps, heart-shaped rings, etc. .
5. Overhead line insulators and material requirements
(1) Insulator
Insulators are used to support fixed wires, insulate the wires from the ground, and also bear the vertical load and horizontal tension of the wires. The insulators should have good electrical insulation properties and sufficient mechanical strength. Commonly used insulators include pin insulators, butterfly insulators and Suspension insulator.
6. Pull the thread
Guy wires are used in overhead lines to balance the tension in all directions of poles and prevent poles from bending or toppling. Therefore, guy wires must be installed on load-bearing poles (corner poles, terminal poles). Commonly used pull cords include:
Ordinary pull cord (end pull cord)
Used on the terminal rod to balance the tension
Corner cable
Used on corner poles to balance tension
Herringbone cable (guys on both sides)
It is used for straight poles with weak foundations and cross-crossing between high poles or long tension poles to keep the poles balanced and avoid falling or breaking.
High pile guy wire (horizontal guy wire)
It is used to cross roads, rivers and traffic arteries. The high pile cables must be kept at a certain height to avoid obstructing traffic.
(3) Construction of pole foundation pit and pole assembly
1. Foundation pit construction
(1) Foundation pit positioning
The measurement and positioning of electric poles in general terrain should be carried out with theodolite, rangefinder and level. Coordinates and parameter measurement of complex terrain should be carried out by total station and GPS measuring instrument. The displacement of the linear pole along the line should not exceed 1% of the design span for 35kV overhead power lines; and should not exceed 3% of the design span for overhead power lines of 10kV and below.
(3) Foundation pit backfill soil
The backfilling of the tower foundation pit and cable foundation pit should meet the design requirements and should be compacted in layers. Every 300mm backfill thickness should be compacted once. An anti-settlement layer should be built on the ground at the pit entrance. The side width of the anti-settlement layer should not be less than the side width of the pit entrance. Its height should be determined according to the degree of soil compaction. It should be 300 to 500mm during foundation acceptance. After settlement, fill and compact in time. When the project is handed over, the backfill at the pit entrance should not be lower than the ground. There is no need to leave anti-settlement soil platforms on asphalt floors, pavements with cement tiles or urban green spaces.
2. Electric pole assembly
(1) Segmented pole docking Segmented metal rod joints usually use flanges and plug-in joints. The segmented cement poles are welded together, and the curvature of the entire pole after welding should not exceed 2/1000 of the full length of the pole.
(2) Cement pole erection method ②After the single pole is upright, the allowable deviation of the inclination is: Pole above 10kV should not be larger than 3/1000 of the pole length; Pole 10kV and below should not be larger than 1/2 the diameter of the pole top. ③For the sake of construction safety, when the pole is erected using the pole-holding or pole-erecting method, a temporary cable control should be installed at the top, and the temporary wiring should be adjusted evenly; the pole-erecting method can only be used to erect wooden poles and cement poles with a length of less than 8m.
(4) Cross arm installation
1. Cross arm production
Generally, cross arms are made of angle steel and galvanized.
2. Cross arm installation
(1) The straight metal cross arms can be fixed to the pole with U-shaped bolts; the tension rod and corner pole cross arms can be composed of two straight cross arms and fixed to the pole with four through-bolts. Cross arms should be installed levelly, and installation deviations should comply with specifications.
(2) Installation of porcelain cross arms (all-ceramic type, adhesive type) ① When installed upright, the top tilt along the line should not be greater than 10mm; ② When installing horizontally, the top should be tilted upward by 5° to 15°; ③The fixed part of the all-ceramic porcelain cross arm should be padded.
3. Cross arm installation position requirements
cross arm
Installation location requirements
Single cross arm for linear rods of 10kV and below
Installed on the load side
90° angle poles (upper and lower), branch poles and terminal poles adopt single cross arms
Installed on the cable side
porcelain cross arm
Not suitable for vertical installation
Zhongxiang porcelain cross arm
should be vertical to the ground
(7) Wire erection
2. Wire connection requirements
(1) The wire connection should have good contact, and its contact resistance should not exceed 1.2 times the resistance of the wire of the same length. (2) The wire connection should have sufficient mechanical strength, and its strength should not be less than 95% of the wire strength. (3) Each conductor within any span can only have one joint; no joints are allowed when crossing areas such as railways, highways, and rivers. (4) Wires of different metals and different cross-sections can only be connected at the jumper on the pole. (5) Before crimping the wires, select a suitable connecting tube, and its model should match the wires.
(8) Electric power overhead line test
1. The insulation resistance of the measuring line should not be less than the acceptance specification; 2. Check that the phases on both sides of each phase of the overhead line should be consistent; 3. The impact closing test on the no-load line should be conducted three times at rated voltage; 4. Weld the tower lightning protection grounding wire and the grounding device, and measure the grounding resistance value of the tower to meet the design requirements; 5. Use an infrared thermometer to measure the temperature of the wire connector to check the connection quality of the connector.
(9) Connection between overhead lines and 10/0.4kV substation
substation
composition
indoor type
Including high voltage electrical equipment, transformers and low voltage electrical equipment. The high-voltage side cable or busbar of the overhead line is connected to the indoor high-voltage entry cabinet
Semi-outdoor type
Low voltage electrical equipment only. The high-voltage side cable or busbar of the overhead line is connected to the high-voltage terminal of the ground-mounted transformer The cables or busbars of the low-voltage terminals of the transformer are connected to the indoor low-voltage entry cabinet.
Outdoor type
Double pole open-air type
It consists of high-voltage overhead lines, low-voltage overhead lines, pole-mounted transformers and electrical equipment. The high-voltage side includes high-voltage lines, automatic drop-out fuses, lightning arresters and lightning protection down conductor installation; The low-voltage side includes the installation of low-voltage lines, distribution boxes and meter boxes; The transformer is installed on the pole and connected to high-voltage wires, low-voltage wires and working ground wires.
Floor type open-air type
The transformer is installed on the ground, and the rest is the same as the double-pole open-air substation.
Ground box type substation
It consists of high-voltage overhead lines, dry-type transformers in closed boxes and complete sets of electrical equipment. The high-voltage side cable of the overhead line is connected to the high-voltage incoming cabinet in the box.
(10) Construction requirements for temporary power overhead lines on site
1. Electric pole
Electric poles should be reinforced concrete poles or special wooden poles.
2. Cross arms and insulators
cross arm
Electric pole
Cross arms and insulators
Straight rods and angle rods below 15°
Single cross arm, single insulator
Across the motorway
Single cross arm, single insulator
Tension rods and 15°~45° angle rods
Double cross arms, double insulators
Branch poles and poles with angles above 45°
cross arm
insulator
form
Electric pole
insulator
Pin insulator
straight rod
butterfly insulator
Tension rod, corner rod
cross arm
Angle steel cross arm
∠50x5 and ∠63x5
wooden cross arm
80mmX80mm
(4) Minimum vertical distance between cross arms
Arrangement
Straight rod (unit: m)
Branch or corner (unit: m)
High pressure and low pressure
1.2
1.0
Low pressure and low pressure
0.6
0.3
3. Wire selection and connection
(1) The conductors must be insulated conductors. The conductor cross section is selected as follows:
①The cross-sections of the N line and PE line of the three-phase four-wire line are not less than 50% of the phase line cross-section, and the cross-sections of the single-phase lines are the same. ②The cross-section of the copper wire is not less than 10mm2, The cross-section of the aluminum wire is not less than 16mm2.
(2) The phase sequence is arranged as follows:
1) When power and lighting cross arms are erected on the same floor, the conductors facing the load from the left are L1, N, L2, L3, and PE.
2) When power and lighting are installed separately on the second-floor cross arms, the upper conductors facing the load are L1, L2, and L3 in order from the left; The lower conductors facing the load are L1 (L2, L3), N, and PE from the left.
2. Construction requirements for power cable lines
(1) Construction requirements for cable duct laying
1.Cable conduit materials and connections
Cable guide
Connection method
steel pipe
Casing welding connection
Hard plastic tube
Socket or sleeve glue connection
bellows
Butt tape, socket connection
Plastic composite pipe
Sockets, pipe clamps, hot melt or electrofusion connections
asbestos cement pipe
Pipe clamp or sleeve connection
FRP and concrete pipes
socket connection
ceramic tube
Flange connection
2. Cable protection tube construction
(1) Settings and requirements for cable protection tubes
① When there are no design requirements, cable protection tubes should be installed in the following situations: where cables are introduced and led out of buildings, tunnels, trenches, cable wells, etc. through floors and walls; where cables intersect with various pipes and trenches; where cables are led out of the ground , when the distance from the ground is less than 2m; when the cable passes through roads or railways. ②The inner diameter of the cable protection tube is greater than 1.5 times the outer diameter of the cable. ③ Waterproof casings should generally be used where cables are introduced and led out of buildings, tunnels, trenches, cable wells, etc.; When hard plastic pipes intersect with heating pipes, steel casings should be worn; when metal pipes are buried underground, they should be painted with asphalt to prevent corrosion. ④ The cable protection tube should be laid under the thermal pipe; the mutual distance from underground pipelines, trenches, road and railway intersections shall meet the design or specification requirements.
(2) Cable protection tube processing
② A pipe bending machine is used to bend steel pipes, and a hot simmering method is used to bend hard plastic pipes; the number of elbows should not exceed 3, and the number of right-angle elbows should not exceed 2. The bending flatness after processing should not exceed 10% of the outer diameter of the pipe, and the bending radius should not be greater than the minimum bending radius of the cable. The bending radius of exposed pipes and buried concrete pipes should not be less than 6 times the outer diameter of the pipe. The bending radius of buried pipes should not be less than 10 times the outer diameter of the tube.
(3) Cable protection tube exposed
① Welding brackets and hot melt openings are not allowed on the steel structure. ② In the absence of design requirements, the spacing between cable tube support points should not exceed 3m; fixed pipe clamps should be installed at the midpoint of the pipe elbow, 150 to 500mm away from the pipe terminal or the edge of the box and panel. ③When the straight length of the hard plastic pipe exceeds 30m, an expansion joint should be installed.
(4) Construction method of cable protection tube
Construction method
Cable protection tube
Excavation and buried pipe method
Non-excavation buried pipe method (pipe jacking)
steel pipe
Directional drill pipe
Steel pipes and plastic composite pipes connected by hot melt or electrofusion
3. Cable duct construction
②The hole diameter of the pipe for laying power cables is generally 150mm. ③The distance from the top of the buried pipe to the ground should be no less than the following values: 500mm for sidewalks; 700mm in general areas. ④ Cable wells must be set up wherever the straight line distance of the cable ducts exceeds 50m, at turns and branches of the cable ducts. The drainage pipe leading to the cable well should have a slope of not less than 0.1% so that the water in the pipe can flow into the cable well.
4. Laying of cable ducts and protective tubes
①Cables laid in pipes should be armored cables. ② Before laying cables, the cable pipes should be dredged and debris and water should be removed. ③ When passing cables through the pipe, the protective layer of the cable must not be damaged. Non-corrosive lubricant (powder) can be used. ④The number of cables inserted into the pipe should meet the design requirements. AC single-core cables must not be inserted into the steel pipe alone.
(2) Requirements for cable bracket production and installation and bridge installation
1. Cable bracket production and installation
③ When there are no design requirements, the distance from the top of the metal bracket to the top of the cable trench, the top of the cable tunnel and the metal bracket, hanger to the mezzanine floor should comply with the specification requirements. However, when the cable is connected to the upper distribution box panel, the clear distance The minimum bending radius requirements of the cable should be met. ④ In the absence of design requirements, the distance from the lowest layer of the metal bracket to the bottom of the cable trench, the bottom of the cable tunnel and the ground such as public corridors, cable mezzanines, indoors, outdoors, and roofs should comply with the specification requirements; ⑤The entire length of the metal bracket should be well grounded, and the entire length should be welded to the grounding wire at no less than 2 points.
Location
The distance between the bottom layer of the bracket and the ground
Non-channel parts of cable mezzanine
Not less than 200mm
Cable mezzanine channel
Not less than 1400mm
Outdoor non-vehicle access area
Not less than 2500mm
outdoor vehicle access area
Not less than 4500mm
Unfenced public corridors
Not less than 1500mm
Indoor computer room and activity area
Not less than 2000mm
2. Cable tray installation
Bridge production is divided into on-site processing and entrusted factory processing. Detailed construction sketches or detailed design drawings should be drawn based on the construction drawings (branch, bend, straight line), combined with the actual path on site (perforated holes and height adjustment, cross adjustment with other pipelines, expansion joints) and factors conducive to cable laying. As a necessary technical measure for bridge production.
① Metal bridges need to be treated with anti-corrosion, generally using galvanizing, plastic plating and painting. In highly corrosive environments, corrosion-resistant materials such as aluminum alloy, plastic, and stainless steel can be used to make the bridge frame.
② For metal bridge installation, a support or hanger should be installed every 1.5~3m in the horizontal section; In the vertical section, a bracket is installed every 1 to 1.5m; Supports and hangers should be installed 1m away from tees, crosses and elbows.
③Cable trays and brackets should be reliably grounded. When the bridge passes through the expansion joint of the building, a 100~150mm gap should be opened, and grounding bridges should be made at both ends of the gap.
④ When the straight section of the metal bridge exceeds 30m and the straight section of the aluminum bridge exceeds 15m, expansion joints should be left and connected with expansion pieces.
NOTE: Conventional practice for bridge grounding: The jumper should be spanned between 2 ground bolt holes, not across the connecting plate.
(3) Requirements for direct buried cable laying
1. Cable trench excavation and earthwork backfilling
① Clearly position the piles and mark or stretch the lines according to the size and length of the trench opening; generally, the trench depth is 0.9m. ② Mechanical excavation is used to ensure that the trench size and the curvature of the turns meet the design and specification requirements, and the bottom is cleaned and trimmed in a timely manner. ③After the cable is laid, it should be paved with 100mm thick soft soil or fine sand, and then covered with concrete protective boards, red bricks or warning tapes. The coverage width should exceed 50mm on both sides of the cable, and the covering soil should be compacted in layers.
2. Requirements for cable laying and joint protection
① Armored cables should be used for directly buried cables. The metal sheaths at both ends of the armored cables should be reliably grounded, and the grounding resistance should not be greater than 10Ω. Directly buried cables and underwater cables should be subjected to handover tests before laying. Cables with aluminum or lead sheaths must be tested for insulation resistance of the outer sheath. ② When the bottom of the excavated trench is in soft soil, cables can be laid directly. Generally, the cable burial depth should not be less than 0.7m, and when crossing farmland, it should not be less than 1m; if there are stones or hard debris, a 100mm thick soft cable should be laid. Soil or fine sand. ③ When directly buried cables are in the same trench, the mutual distance should meet the design requirements, the parallel distance is not less than 100mm, and the crossing distance is not less than 500mm. ④ There should be a protective box outside the intermediate joint of the directly buried cable to prevent mechanical damage (except the epoxy resin joint box). The bottom of the box should be padded with a concrete foundation board, and the length should extend 600 to 700mm from both ends of the joint protection box before entering the building. Leave enough cable allowance in front of the device. ⑤ When directly buried cables are introduced from cable trenches into tunnels, working wells and buildings, they must be threaded into the pipe and the pipe openings should be blocked.
⑥Mutual distance between cable trench and other facilities
Facility type
Minimum clear distance parallel
Minimum clearance vertical
Non-thermal, drainage and combustible pipes or trenches
0.5
0.5
Building foundation edge
0.6
/
Rod Basics
1.0
/
Drainage ditches, fuel and gas pipes or trenches
1.0
0.5
city street pavement
1.0
0.7
road side
1.5
1.0
Thermal pipes or trenches, equipment
2.0
0.5
railway
3.0
1.0
3. Buried cable stakes
For directly buried cables, obvious orientation signs or stakes should be set up every 50 to 100m in straight sections, at cable joints, at turns, and at places entering buildings.
(4) Requirements for cable laying in cable trays, trenches, mezzanines or tunnels
1. High-voltage and low-voltage power cables, strong current and weak current control cables should be arranged in layers in order. Generally, they should be arranged from top to bottom. Power cables and control cables should not be arranged on the same layer of brackets. AC three-core power cables should be placed on the same layer. There should be no more than 1 layer on ordinary supports and hangers, and no more than 2 layers on bridges. 2. AC single-core power cables should be arranged on the same side bracket. 3. The clear distance between cables laid in parallel should meet the design requirements. 4. The net distance between cable trench cables and thermal pipes and thermal equipment should not be less than 1m when laid in parallel, and should not be less than 0.5m when crossing; when limited by conditions, heat insulation protection measures should be taken. After the cable laying is completed, debris should be removed in time and the cover should be covered. When the top of the cover plate needs to be backfilled with soil, the gap in the cover plate should be sealed.
(5) Requirements for cable (body) laying
1.Construction technical preparation
(4) The cable end sealing should be tight, and electrical tests should be conducted as required. Rubber and plastic cables above 6kV should undergo AC withstand voltage test or DC withstand voltage test and leakage current test; For rubber and plastic cables of 1KV and below, use a 2500V megohmmeter to test the insulation resistance instead of the withstand voltage test. The insulation resistance of the cable has no obvious change before and after the test, and records should be kept.
(5) Before mechanically pulling the cable, appropriate tractors and sliding and guiding devices should be configured according to factors such as the actual path of the cable line, the minimum bending radius of the cable, the maximum traction strength of the cable, speed limit, etc., and the operating status should be debugged (same ditch, same ditch, same ditch). For cables laid in troughs, the pulley or pulley set should be set according to the maximum diameter and maximum bending radius).
2. Cable laying requirements
(1) The cable should be pulled out from the upper end of the cable tray.
(2) During manual release, a pulley must be placed every 1.5 to 2m. The cable is pulled out from the upper end of the cable drum and placed on the pulley. Then it is buckled with a rope and dragged forward. The cable must not be placed on the ground for dragging.
(3) When laying cables with mechanical traction, the cable should be advanced slowly, generally at a speed not exceeding 15m/min, and the traction head must be equipped with a steel wire sleeve. Large-section cables with a length within 300m can be directly tied to the cable core for traction.
The maximum traction strength when laying cables with mechanical traction should comply with, Maximum traction strength (unit: N/mm 2)
Traction method
Forced part
Allowable traction strength
tractor head
copper core
70
aluminum core
40
Steel mesh cover
lead sheath
10
Aluminum sleeve
40
plastic sheath
7
(4) The minimum allowable bending radius during cable laying is the key data for cable turning and laying, and is also a decisive factor in the layout of cable trench brackets, guide pulleys, bridge elbow components and cable protection tube bending. The bending radius of magnesium oxide insulated and rigid mineral insulated cables changes with the outer diameter of the cable, and the bending radius of other types of cables changes with different cable forms. At present, except for the minimum bending radius of rigid sheathed magnesium oxide mineral insulated cables, aluminum alloy conductor power cables, unarmored control cables, and shielded soft control cables, which are 2D to 7D, the minimum bending radius of other cables is more than 10D.
The minimum allowable bending radius should comply with, the minimum allowable bending radius (cable outer diameter D in mm)
Cable type
Cable form
multi-core
single core
plastic insulated cable
Unarmored
15D
20D
Armored
12D
15D
Rubber insulated cable
Lead-free package, steel armor sheath
10D
10D
Lead sheath
15D
15D
Steel armor sheath
20D
20D
Armored, copper-shielded control cable
10D
/
Flexible, aluminum sheathed isolated mineral insulated cable
15D
15D
3. Installation of signboards
(1) Cable signs should be hung at the following locations: ① Cable terminals, joints, branches; cable tunnel turns and straight sections every 50 to 100m. ② Both ends of the cable shaft and tunnel; inside the cable mezzanine and inside the well.
(2) The line number should be indicated on the sign; when there is no number, the cable model, specifications and starting and ending locations should be indicated; cables used in parallel should have sequence numbers.
4. Cable fixation
(1) Cables laid vertically or at an angle exceeding 30° shall be fixed on each bracket. (2) For horizontally laid cables, fix them at the first and last ends of the cable and at both ends of the turns and cable joints; when there are requirements for cable spacing, fix them every 5 to 10m.
(6) General requirements for the production of cable terminals and cable joints
5. The shell of the cable head and the metal sheath and armoring layer of the cable should be well grounded, and the grounding wire should be copper stranded wire or copper braided wire.
6. The metal sheath at the terminal of the three-core power cable must be well grounded, and the shielding layer and armored layer of the cable should be soldered to the ground wire. When the cable passes through a zero-sequence current transformer, when the grounding point is below the transformer, the grounding wire should be directly grounded; when the grounding point is above the transformer, the grounding wire should pass through the transformer and be grounded.
(7) Fire prevention and flame retardant measures for cables
1. Control cables and important power cables should use fireproof or flame-retardant cables to ensure that the main equipment can operate safely for a period of time in a fire emergency. 2. The holes where cables enter cable trenches, cable tunnels, cable mezzanines, cabinets and boxes must be fire-proof and sealed to prevent cables from catching fire and igniting other cables and equipment. 3. A firewall and fire door must be installed every 60 to 100m in cable trenches and cable tunnels. Important cable channels should be equipped with automatic alarm and automatic fire extinguishing devices. 4. Fire partitions should be installed between power cables and control cables. The fireproof sealing layer must have sufficient mechanical strength. Ensure the tightness and thickness of the fireproof sealing layer.
(8) Precautions for power cable laying line construction
1. Cable laying sequence requirements
① It should be laid from the centralized point of cable layout (power distribution room, control room) to the dispersed point of cable layout (workshop, equipment). ②Cables to the same end point are best laid at one time. ③Lay cables with long lines and large cross-sections first, then lay cables with short lines and small cross-sections; lay power and power cables first, then lay control and communication cables.
2. Cable break protection requirements
①The cable should be capped within 4 hours after cutting. ②Plastic insulated power cables should have moisture-proof ends. ③ Oil-immersed paper insulated power cables must be lead-sealed; the cutting point of the oil-filled cable must be higher than the adjacent cables on both sides.
3. Requirements for cable intermediate joints
① When laying cables in parallel, if there are intermediate joints, the joint positions should be staggered. ②The middle joint of the exposed cable should be supported and fixed by the pallet. ③ A spare length of power cable should be left near the terminals and joints. ④ Cables laid overhead should not be equipped with intermediate joints; cables laid underwater, in conduits, at intersections, doorways, narrow passages and intersections with other pipelines should not have joints.
4. Special personnel should be provided to protect the cable turns during cable laying to ensure that the bending radius of the cable complies with regulations and to avoid damage to the cable insulation. When laying and dragging cables, they should not directly rub against rigid or sharp objects.
5. Four-core power cables should be used in three-phase four-wire systems. Three-core cables plus a single-core cable or wire should not be used. The metal sheath of the cable can be used as a PE wire, but not as a neutral wire. Five-core low-voltage power cables should not use four-core cables plus a single-core cable or wire.
6. The length, model and specification of power cables used in parallel should be the same.
3. Installation of busbars and closed busbars
(1) Requirements for busbar installation
2. Inspection before busbar installation
(1) Check whether the busbar model and specifications are consistent with the design drawings, and check the factory test report and certificate. (2) Check that the surface of the busbar material should be smooth and smooth, without cracks, wrinkles, deformation or distortion.
3.Busbar production:
(1) The busbar is straight
Correct and straighten the busbar. For example, lay the busbar flat on a flat channel steel and pound it with a mallet to make it straight.
(2) Busbar cutoff
(3) Busbar bending
(4) Busbar drilling
Drill holes at the busbar connection. The location, size and number of the holes must comply with the specifications. The error in the center distance between screw holes is allowed to be ±0.5mm, and the diameter of the screw hole should not be larger than the bolt diameter by 1mm.
(5) Busbar filing and processing
The busbar connection is ground and processed to make the contact surface smooth and remove the oxide film. The reduction value of the cross-sectional area of the busbar after processing is stipulated as follows: the copper busbar cannot exceed 3% of the original cross-section, and the aluminum busbar cannot exceed 5% of the original cross-section.
4.Busbar connection is fixed
① The busbar should be coated with electrical compound grease on the contact surface after processing and kept clean. ② When connecting busbars, specified bolt specifications must be used. When the busbar is flat, the bolts should be inserted from bottom to top. In other cases, the nuts Should be placed on the maintenance side. ③ There should be flat washers on both sides of the busbar connected by bolts. There should be a clear distance of more than 3mm between adjacent bolt washers. The nut side should be equipped with spring washers or locking nuts. ④The bolt connection of the busbar must be tightened with a torque wrench. ⑤ When the busbar is connected by welding, the busbar should be aligned and fixed before the busbar conductor can be welded. ⑥ Before connecting the busbar to the equipment, the busbar insulation resistance should be tested and a withstand voltage test should be performed. ⑧The methods for fixing the busbar on the pillar insulator include: bolt fixing, plywood fixing and card plate fixing.
7. Busbar phase and color regulations
(1) Phase color of three-phase AC bus:
Phase A is yellow, phase B is green, and phase C is red.
(2) DC bus, the positive pole should be brown and the negative pole should be blue. (3) The neutral line or neutral line of the three-phase circuit and the grounded neutral line of the DC circuit should be light blue. (4) For metal enclosed busbars, the outer surface of the busbar and the inner surface of the casing should be matte black, and the outer surface of the casing should be light color.
(2) Requirements for closed busbar installation
Classified by function
Classification
busbar
According to transmission and distribution lines
High voltage and low voltage busbar
According to function
Power and lighting busbar
Classified by busbar
busbar
Applicable
Separated phase closed bus and closed common box bus
High voltage distribution lines
Intensive bus duct (three-phase four busbars or five busbars)
Low voltage distribution lines
1. Pre-installation requirements
②The technical descriptions such as conductor specifications, temperature rise value, rated current, protection level and shell protective grounding in the CCC certification and type test report should meet the design requirements; fire-resistant bus ducts also need a type test report issued by a nationally recognized inspection agency, in addition to the above In addition to technical parameters, the fire resistance time should also meet the design requirements. ③ Electrical tests should be done before the closed bus is brought into the site and installed, and the insulation resistance test should not be less than 20MΩ; the high-voltage closed bus must be subjected to an AC withstand voltage test, and the test results comply with the requirements of the closed bus product technical specification.
2. Installation and adjustment
(1) Fabrication and installation of supports and hangers
② For the straight section of the closed busbar, the distance between indoor supports and hangers shall not be greater than 2m. When installed vertically, spring brackets shall be provided every 4m.
(2) Hoisting and adjustment
② The deviation of the horizontality and verticality of the closed busbar should not be greater than 0.15%; The maximum deviation of the total length of the power bus should not be greater than 20mm; The maximum horizontal deviation of the entire length of the lighting busbar should not be greater than 5mm, and the maximum vertical deviation of the entire length should not be greater than 10mm.
3.Connect
① For the connection between closed busbars, lap joints or connectors can be used. ② When the closed busbar passes through the building deformation joint, expansion joints should be installed; when the straight section exceeds 80m, expansion joints should be installed at 50~60m. ③To connect the closed busbar to the equipment, lap joints or expansion joints can be used. ④ The closed bus must pass the electrical test before being connected to the equipment terminals; the insulation resistance test of the low-voltage bus shall not be less than 0.5MΩ; the insulation resistance test of the high-voltage bus shall not be less than 20MΩ. The AC withstand voltage test shall be performed on pillar insulators of the handover test standard. ⑤ Protective measures should be taken when vertical installation is less than 1.8m from the ground.
4. Grounding
① The metal casing of the closed busbar and the supporting structure should be connected reliably according to the product technical instructions using short circuit plates or grounding bolts. ② There should be no less than 2 protective grounding points along the entire length of the closed bus duct. The end of the branch section bus duct must be protectively grounded, and the connection with the grounded main line must be welded. ③ Before the closed busbar is reliably grounded, no handover test and power-on trial operation are allowed.
2H313030 Pipeline engineering construction technology
2H313031 Construction procedures and requirements for pipeline projects
1. Classification of industrial pipelines
(1) Classification according to material properties
Industrial pipes can be divided into metal pipes and non-metal pipes
metal pipe
Carbon steel pipes, low alloy steel pipes, alloy steel pipes, aluminum and aluminum alloy pipes, copper and copper alloy pipes, titanium and titanium alloy pipes, nickel and nickel alloy pipes, zirconium and zirconium alloy pipes
non-metallic pipes
Inorganic non-metallic pipes
Concrete pipes, asbestos cement pipes, ceramic pipes, etc.
Organic non-metallic pipes
Plastic pipes, fiberglass pipes, rubber pipes
(2) Classification according to design pressure
Category Name
Name Design pressure P (MPa)
vacuum pipe
P<0
low pressure pipeline
0≤P≤1.6
Medium pressure pipeline
1.6<P≤10
High pressure pipeline
10<P≤100
Ultra high pressure pipeline
P>100
(3) Classification according to the temperature of the conveying medium
Category Name
Medium working temperature t (℃)
cryogenic pipeline
t ≤ - 4 0
Normal temperature pipe
- 4 0 < t ≤ 1 2 0
Medium temperature pipe
1 2 0 < t ≤ 4 5 0
High temperature pipeline
T > 4 5 0
(4) Classification according to the properties of pipeline transportation media
Industrial pipelines can be divided into: according to the nature of the pipeline transportation medium: Water supply and drainage pipelines, compressed air pipelines, hydrogen pipelines, oxygen pipelines, acetylene pipelines, heat pipelines, gas pipelines, fuel pipelines, highly toxic fluid pipelines, toxic fluid pipelines, acid-base pipelines, boiler pipelines, refrigeration pipelines, purified pure gas pipelines, Pure water pipes, etc.
(5) Government supervision classification
1. Pressure pipeline
A licensing system is implemented for the production (including design, manufacturing, installation, modification and repair) of pressure pipelines listed in the "Special Equipment Catalog". For details, see 2H331031 in this book.
Go to (P364) 2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
2. Types of special equipment
(3) Pressure pipeline
1. Pressure pipeline: refers to tubular equipment used to transport gas or liquid using a certain pressure. Its scope is specified as the maximum working pressure is greater than or equal to 0.1MPa (gauge pressure), the medium is gas, liquefied gas, steam or flammable, explosive, toxic, corrosive liquid, the maximum working temperature is higher than or equal to the standard boiling point, and Pipes with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 50mm.
Pipes with a nominal diameter less than 150mm and a maximum working pressure less than 1.6MPa (gauge pressure) that transport non-toxic, non-flammable, non-corrosive gases and pipes belonging to the equipment body are excluded.
2. Types and varieties of pressure pipelines
category
variety
long distance pipeline
Oil pipeline, gas pipeline
public pipes
Gas pipelines, heating pipelines
industrial piping
Process pipelines, power pipelines, refrigeration pipelines
3. Classification of pressure pipelines
According to the national "Special Equipment Catalog", pressure pipelines are divided into three categories: long-distance pipelines, public pipelines and industrial pipelines. (1) Long-distance (oil and gas) pipelines refer to pipelines used to transport (oil and gas) commodity media between production areas, storage warehouses, and user units. (2) Public pipelines refer to gas pipelines and heat pipelines used for public utilities or civil purposes within cities or towns. (3) Industrial pipelines refer to process pipelines, utility pipelines and other auxiliary pipelines owned by enterprises and institutions used to transport process media. Including power pipelines used to transport steam and steam-water two-phase media in thermal power plants; refrigeration pipelines transporting refrigerant media in industrial refrigeration systems.
4. Pressure pipeline range
Pressure pipeline range
For example
Pipe components
Pipes, fittings, flanges, valves, seals, fasteners, filters, throttling devices, etc.
Pipe supports
Suspended rods, spring support hangers, counterweights, elastic bolts, saddles, backing plates, sliding supports, lifting lugs, snap rings, pipe clamps, etc.
Connector
Connection joints between pipeline components, pipelines and equipment, pipelines and non-pressure components, etc.
Pipeline safety protection device
Safety valves, bursting discs, flame arresters, emergency shut-off devices, etc.
(8) Pressure pipeline components
Categories and varieties of pressure pipeline components included in the "Special Equipment Catalog"
category
variety
Pressure pipeline pipe
Seamless steel pipe, welded steel pipe, non-ferrous metal pipe, ductile iron pipe, composite pipe, non-metal material pipe
Pressure pipe fittings
Non-welded pipe fittings (seamless pipe fittings), welded pipe fittings (seamed pipe fittings), forged pipe fittings, composite pipe fittings, non-metallic pipe fittings
Pressure pipeline valve
Metal valves, non-metal valves, special valves
pressure pipe flange
Steel forged flanges, non-metallic flanges
compensator
Metal corrugated expansion joints, rotary compensators, non-metallic expansion joints
Pressure pipe sealing elements
Metal sealing components, non-metal sealing components
Pressure pipeline special components
Anti-corrosion pipeline components and component combination devices
2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2. Qualification licenses for special equipment manufacturing, installation, modification and repair units
(1) Installation, repair and modification of pressure-bearing special equipment
1. Long-distance pipeline installation (GA1, GA2) licenses are implemented by the State Administration for Market Regulation.
2. Licensing for boiler installation (including repair and modification) (A, B), public pipeline installation (GB1, GB2), and industrial pipeline installation (GC1, GC2, GCD) shall be implemented by the provincial market supervision and management department.
License parameter level
License scope
Remark
GA1
(1) Long-distance gas pipelines with a design pressure greater than or equal to 4.0MPa (gauge pressure, the same below); (2) Long-distance oil pipelines with design pressure greater than or equal to 6.3MPa
GA1>GA2
GA2
Long-distance pipelines other than GA1 grade
/
GB1
gas pipeline
/
GB2
Thermal pipeline
/
GC1
(1) Process pipelines transporting acute toxicity category 1 media, acute toxicity category 2 gaseous media and acute toxicity category 2 liquid media with working temperatures higher than their standard boiling points as specified in the Catalog of Hazardous Chemicals; (2) The fire risk specified in the "Design Fire Protection Standards for Petrochemical Enterprises" GB50160 and the "Building Design Fire Protection Code" GB50016 is Class A or B flammable gases or Class A flammable liquids (including liquefied hydrocarbons), and the design pressure is greater than or Process pipeline equal to 4.0MPa; (3) Process pipelines that transport fluid media and have a design pressure greater than or equal to 10.0MPa, or a design pressure greater than or equal to 4.0MPa and a design temperature greater than or equal to 400°C
GC1 level, GCD level > GC2 level
GC2
(1) Process pipelines other than GC1 level; (2) Refrigeration pipelines
/
GCD
power pipeline
/
3. Production requirements for special equipment
(2) Notice of installation, modification and repair of special equipment
3. Long-distance pipeline installation notice
The installation unit undertaking the installation of inter-provincial long-distance pipelines shall complete notification procedures to the State Administration for Market Regulation; Installation units undertaking the installation of cross-city pipelines within the province shall complete notification procedures to the provincial quality and technical supervision department.
2. Composition of industrial pipelines
Industrial pipelines consist of pipeline components and pipeline supports.
1.Pipeline components Pipe components are components used to connect or assemble pipes. Includes pipes, fittings, flanges, seals, fasteners, valves, safety accessories as well as expansion joints, flexible joints, pressure-resistant hoses, traps, filters, throttling devices in pipelines, instruments and separators wait.
2. Pipe supports Pipe elements that transmit the self-weight of the pipeline, the weight of the transported fluid, the loads caused by operating pressure and temperature differences, and the loads caused by vibration, wind, earthquake, snow load, impact and displacement strain, etc., to the pipe rack structure. Including suspenders, spring supports and hangers, constant force supports and hangers, inclined rods, counterweights, elastic bolts, support rods, chains, guide rails, anchors, saddles, pads, rollers, brackets, sliding brackets, and pipes Lifts, lifting lugs, snap rings, pipe clamps, U-shaped clamps and splints, etc.
3. Construction procedures of industrial pipeline projects
Construction preparation → Cooperate with civil engineering reservation, pre-embedding and measurement → Prefabrication of pipes and brackets → Accessories, flange processing and inspection → Prefabrication of pipe sections → Pipe installation → Pipeline system inspection → Pipeline system test → Anti-corrosion and insulation → System cleaning → Data summary and drawing As-built drawing → Completion acceptance.
4. Technical requirements for industrial pipeline construction
(1) Conditions that should be met before pipeline construction
1. Construction drawings and related technical documents should be complete, and design disclosure and drawing review should be carried out in accordance with prescribed procedures. 2. The construction organization design or construction plan has been approved, a suitable and complete welding process assessment report has been prepared, the welding operation instructions have been prepared and approved, and technical and safety briefings have been conducted. 3. The construction personnel have passed the assessment in accordance with relevant regulations. 4. The project start documents have been processed. 5. Machinery and tools used for pipeline construction should be safe and reliable; measuring instruments should be certified and within the validity period. 6. Prepare and approve emergency response plans for possible production safety accidents. 7. Before the construction of pressure pipelines, written notification should be provided to the market supervision and management department where the project is located, and supervision and inspection by supervision units and inspection agencies should be accepted.
(2) Inspection of pipeline components and materials
1. Pipe components and materials should have product quality certification documents from the manufacturer. 2. Before using pipe components and materials, the material, specification, model, quantity and identification should be checked, and the appearance quality and geometric dimensions should be inspected and accepted. 3. When there are objections to the performance data or inspection results of pipeline components or materials, the batch of pipeline components or materials shall not be used until the objection is resolved. 4. Product quality certification documents for pipeline components include product certificates and quality certificates. Quality certification documents should be stamped with the quality inspection stamp of the manufacturing unit. Pipeline components subject to supervisory inspection should also provide a supervisory inspection certificate issued by a special equipment inspection and testing agency. ①The product certificate includes: product name, serial number, specifications and models, execution standards, etc. ②The quality certificate includes: chemical composition of materials, mechanical properties of materials and welded joints, heat treatment status, non-destructive testing results, pressure test results, type test results, product standards or other inspection items specified in the contract, and the quality of outsourced semi-finished products or finished products Proof etc. 5. Pipe components made of chromium-molybdenum alloy steel, nickel-containing alloy steel, nickel and nickel alloys, stainless steel, titanium and titanium alloy materials should be reviewed using spectral analysis or other methods and marked. Pipe components and materials made of stainless steel and non-ferrous metals must not be in direct contact with carbon steel or low alloy steel during transportation and storage. 6. The design document stipulates that the pipeline components or materials shall be subjected to low-temperature impact toughness test, and the stainless steel, nickel and nickel alloy pipeline components and materials shall be subjected to intergranular corrosion test. The supplier shall provide the low-temperature impact toughness and intergranular corrosion test results. documents, and the test results shall not be lower than those specified in the design documents. 7. Valve inspection should comply with the following regulations ①The appearance quality inspection should be carried out before the valve is installed. ②The valve should undergo shell pressure test and sealing test. The medium is clean water, and the chloride ion content in the water must not exceed 25ppm. ③The shell test pressure of the valve is: 1.5 times the maximum allowable working pressure of the valve at 20°C; the sealing test: 1.1 times the maximum allowable working pressure of the valve at 20°C. The test time shall not be less than 5 minutes, and the test medium temperature shall be 5 to 40°C. When the temperature is lower than 5°C, temperature-raising measures shall be taken. ④ Carry out set pressure adjustment and sealing test on the safety valve. Safety valve calibration should be recorded and sealed, and an inspection report should be issued.
(3) Pipe processing
3. Technical requirements for miter elbow production
(1) The composition of the miter elbow shall comply with the provisions of Figure 2H313031. For mitered elbows with a nominal size greater than 400mm, the number of middle sections may be increased, and the minimum width on the inner side shall not be less than 50mm. (2) The welded joints of mitered elbows should use full penetration welds. When the nominal size is greater than or equal to 600mm, bottom sealing welding should be performed inside the pipe. (3) The allowable deviation of the circumference of the miter elbow shall comply with the following regulations: 1) When the nominal size is greater than 1000mm, the allowable deviation is ±6mm; 2) When the nominal size is equal to or less than 1000mm, the allowable deviation is ±4mm.
(4) Pipeline installation
1. Conditions that should be met before pipeline installation ① The civil engineering works related to the pipeline have been inspected and qualified, meet the installation requirements, and the handover procedures have been completed. ②The equipment connected to the pipeline has been calibrated and fixed. ③Pipeline components and supports have been inspected and passed the inspection. ④The inside of pipes, pipe fittings, valves, etc. have been cleaned, and the internal quality of pipes with special requirements has met the requirements of the design documents. ⑤ Relevant processes such as degreasing, internal anti-corrosion or lining that should be carried out before pipeline installation have been completed.
2. When pipelines pass through roads, walls, floors or structures, they should be protected by adding casings or masonry culverts, and comply with the following regulations: ①Pipeline welds should not be set inside the casing; ②The length of the casing passing through the wall shall not be less than the thickness of the wall; ③The casing passing through the floor should be 50mm higher than the floor; ④ Pipes passing through the roof should be equipped with waterproof shoulders and rainproof caps; ⑤The space between the pipe and the casing should be filled with non-combustible materials that are harmless to the pipe.
3. Steel pipe installation ① When pipes are connected, the straightness should be measured at 200mm from the center of the interface. When the nominal size of the pipe is less than 100mm, the allowable deviation is 1mm; when the nominal size of the pipe is greater than or equal to 100mm, the allowable deviation is 2mm, and the allowable deviation for the entire length is 10mm. . ② The flange connection should be concentric with the steel pipe, and the bolts should be able to penetrate freely. Flange bolt holes should be arranged mid-span. The flange planes should be kept parallel, and their deviation should not be greater than 0.15% of the flange outer diameter and not greater than 2mm. The deflection of the flange joint must not be eliminated by tightening bolts. ③ Bolts of the same specifications should be used for flange connections, and the installation directions should be consistent. Bolts should be tightened symmetrically. After tightening, the bolts should be in close contact with the flange without any wedge gaps. When washers need to be added, there should be no more than one per bolt. All nuts should be screwed into the bolts, and the tightened bolts and nuts should be flush. ④ When large-diameter sealing gaskets need to be spliced, oblique overlap or labyrinth splicing should be used, and flat butt joints are not allowed.
4. Pipe installation for connecting equipment ① The connection between pipelines and equipment should be made after the equipment is installed, positioned and the anchor bolts are tightened. When connecting pipelines to moving equipment (such as air compressors, oxygen generators, steam turbines, etc.), strong connections must not be used to cause the moving equipment to withstand additional loads. external force. ② Before connecting the pipeline to the moving equipment, the parallelism and concentricity of the flange should be tested in a free state, and the allowable deviation should comply with the regulations. ③When the pipeline system is finally connected to the moving equipment, a dial indicator should be set up on the coupling to monitor the displacement of the moving equipment. When the rated speed of the moving equipment is greater than 6000r/min, its displacement value should be less than 0.02mm; when the rated speed is less than or equal to 6000r/min, its displacement value should be less than 0.05mm. ④ When the pipelines of large storage tanks are connected to pumps or other equipment with independent foundations, or the pipelines at the bottom of the storage tanks are laid on supports along the ground, they should be installed after the tank hydraulic pressure (water filling) has passed the test, or after the hydraulic pressure (water filling) ) test and initial settlement of the foundation, then connect the flange at the tank interface. ⑤ After the pipeline installation is qualified, it shall not bear additional loads other than those designed. ⑥After the pipeline pressure test, purging and cleaning pass, the interface between the pipeline and the moving equipment should be reset and inspected.
5. Heat tracing pipe installation ①The heating pipe should be installed parallel to the main pipe and should be able to drain fluid by itself. When a main pipe needs to be heated by multiple heating pipes, the relative positions between the heating pipes should be fixed. ② The horizontal heating pipe should be installed on one or both sides of the lower side of the main pipe, or close to the side of the bracket. Plumb heating pipes should be evenly distributed around the main pipe. ③The heating pipe shall not be spot welded directly to the main pipe. The number of heating pipe binding strips at the elbow shall not be less than 3, and the spacing between the heating pipe binding points in the straight pipe section shall comply with the regulations. For heating pipes that are not allowed to come into direct contact with the main pipe, an isolation pad should be installed between the heating pipe and the main pipe. When the heating pipe passes through the main pipe flange and valve, detachable connectors should be installed.
6. Jacket pipe installation ① When the outer pipe of the jacketed pipe is installed after being sectioned, the longitudinal welds should be set in locations that are easy to inspect and repair. ② The positioning plates of the jacketed pipes should be installed evenly without affecting the flow of the annulus medium and the thermal displacement of the pipes.
8. Valve installation ① Before installing the valve, its model should be checked according to the design document, and its installation direction should be determined according to the flow direction of the medium. ② The bottom layer of the butt weld should be argon arc welded, and measures should be taken to prevent deformation of the valve. ③The safety valve should be installed vertically; the outlet pipe of the safety valve should be connected to a safe location; when a stop valve is installed on the inlet and outlet pipe of the safety valve, the safety valve should be sealed and locked in the fully open state.
Connection form
Installation status
Flange, thread
closure
welding
turn on
9. Installation of supports and hangers ② For pipelines without thermal displacement, the boom should be installed vertically. For pipes with thermal displacement, the hanging point should be set in the opposite direction of the displacement and installed offset by 1/2 of the displacement value. ③ The fixed bracket should be installed according to the provisions of the design document and should be fixed before the compensation device is pre-stretched or pre-compressed. Two or more fixed brackets shall not be installed at the same time on the straight sections of cold and hot pipelines without compensation devices. ④ The sliding surface of the guide bracket or sliding bracket should be clean and smooth, and there should be no skew or jamming. For pipes with thermal displacement, the installation position of the bracket should be offset from the center of the supporting surface in the opposite direction of the displacement. The offset should be 1/2 of the displacement value, and the thermal insulation layer should not hinder its displacement. ⑤The spring height of spring supports and hangers should be installed according to the design documents. The springs should be adjusted to the cold value and recorded. The temporary fixing parts of the spring, such as positioning pins (blocks), should not be removed until the system installation, pressure test, and heat insulation are completed. ⑥ For pipelines with thermal displacement, supports and hangers should be inspected and adjusted in time during thermal load operation.
10. Pipeline static electricity grounding installation (1) For pipelines with electrostatic grounding requirements, when the resistance value between each pair of flanges or other joints exceeds 0.03Ω, a wire jumper should be provided. (2) The grounding resistance value, grounding position and connection method of the pipeline system shall be in accordance with the provisions of the design document. The electrostatic grounding lead should be welded. (3) For stainless steel and non-ferrous metal pipelines that require electrostatic grounding, wire jumpers or grounding leads must not be directly connected to the pipeline, and connecting plates of the same material should be used for transition. (4) After the electrostatic grounding is installed, it must be tested. If the resistance value exceeds the specified value, it should be inspected and adjusted.
2H313032 Piping system testing and purging requirements
1. Pipeline system test
According to the different usage requirements of the pipeline system, the main requirements are: ①Pressure test ②Leakage test ③Vacuum degree test
(1) Pressure test
1. Provisions for pressure testing of pipeline systems A test to verify the strength and tightness of pipes. The following requirements should be met:
(1) After the pipeline is installed and the heat treatment and non-destructive testing pass, a pressure test is performed. (2) The pressure test should use liquid as the test medium. When the design pressure of the pipeline is less than or equal to 0.6MPa, gas can be used as the test medium, but effective safety measures should be taken. (3) It is strictly forbidden to use gas for testing of brittle materials, and the pressure test temperature is strictly forbidden to be close to the brittle transition of metal materials. temperature. (4) When conducting a pressure test, a restricted area must be defined and irrelevant personnel shall not enter. (5) When leakage is found during the test, no pressure treatment is allowed. The test shall be repeated after the defects have been eliminated. (6) After the test, promptly remove the blind plate and expansion joint temporary restraint device. (7) After the pressure test is completed, no repairs or additions to the pipeline are allowed. When repairs and additions are made to the pipeline, the pressure test should be repeated. With the consent of the design or construction unit, the pressure test does not need to be repeated for minor repairs and additions where preventive measures have been taken to ensure structural integrity. (8) After passing the pressure test, the pipeline system pressure test record should be filled in.
2. Conditions that should be met before pressure test:
(1) In addition to anti-corrosion and thermal insulation, all pipeline installation projects within the test scope have been completed according to the design drawings, and the installation quality complies with relevant regulations. (2) The welds and other parts to be inspected have not yet been anti-corrosion and thermally insulated. (3) Temporary restraint devices have been installed on the expansion joints on the pipeline. (4) The pressure gauge used for testing has been calibrated and within the validity period, its accuracy shall not be less than level 1.6. The full scale value of the gauge shall be 1.5 to 2 times the maximum pressure being measured. There shall be no less than 2 pressure gauges. (5) Liquids or gases that meet the pressure test requirements are ready. (6) The pipeline has been reinforced according to the requirements of the test. (7) The pipeline to be tested and irrelevant systems have been separated by blind plates or other isolation measures. (8) The safety valves, bursting discs and instrument components on the pipeline to be tested have been removed or isolated. (9) The test plan has been approved and a technical safety briefing has been conducted. (10) Before the pressure test, the relevant information has been reviewed by the construction unit and relevant departments. For example, quality certification documents for piping components, inspection or test records of piping components, piping processing and installation records, welding inspection records, inspection reports and heat treatment records, piping isometric drawings, design changes and material substitution documents.
3. Provisions for pressure test substitution
(1) For non-pressure pipelines, with the consent of the design and construction unit, the fluid transported by the pipeline can be used for pressure testing during commissioning. When the transported fluid is gas or steam, a pre-test must be carried out according to the gas test regulations before the pressure test. (2) When the design pressure of the pipeline is greater than 0.6MPa, and the design and construction unit believes that the hydraulic test is impractical, the specified air pressure test may be used instead of the hydraulic test. (3) When pneumatic testing is used instead of hydraulic testing, it should be approved by the design and construction unit and comply with regulations.
(4) When on-site conditions do not allow hydraulic and pneumatic tests, with the consent of the design and construction unit, the following methods may be used instead of pressure tests:
① All circumferential and longitudinal butt welds and spiral seam welds shall be subject to 100% radiographic inspection or 100% ultrasonic inspection. ② All welds except circumferential, longitudinal butt welds and spiral seam welds (including welds connecting pipe supports and pipe components) shall be subject to 100% penetrant testing or 100% magnetic particle testing. ③The design unit conducts flexibility analysis of the piping system. ④ The pipeline system shall be tested for leakage using sensitive gas or immersed in liquid, and the test requirements shall be clearly specified in the design document.
4. Key points of hydraulic test implementation
① Clean water should be used for hydraulic tests. For stainless steel, nickel and nickel alloy steel pipes, or pipes connected to stainless steel pipes, nickel and alloy steel pipes or equipment, the chloride ion content in the water shall not exceed 25ppm. ② Before the test, all air should be exhausted when injecting liquid. ③The ambient temperature should not be lower than 5℃ during the test. When the ambient temperature is lower than 5℃, antifreeze measures should be taken. ④The test pressure of above-ground steel pipelines and non-ferrous metal pipelines that are subject to internal pressure should be 1.5 times the design pressure. For pipelines withstanding external pressure, the test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design internal and external pressure difference, and shall not be less than 0.2MPa. The test pressure of buried steel pipelines shall be 1.5 times the design pressure and shall not be less than 0.4MPa. ⑤ When the pipeline and equipment are tested as a system and the test pressure of the pipeline is equal to or less than the test pressure of the equipment, the test should be carried out according to the test pressure of the pipeline; the test pressure of the pipeline is greater than the test pressure of the equipment, and the pipeline and equipment cannot be separated , and when the test pressure of the equipment is greater than 77% of the pipeline test pressure calculated according to the "Construction Code for Industrial Metal Pipe Engineering" GB 50235-2010, with the consent of the design or construction unit, the test can be carried out according to the test pressure of the equipment. ⑥ The test should slowly increase the pressure. After reaching the test pressure, stabilize the pressure for 10 minutes. Then reduce the test pressure to the design pressure and stabilize the pressure for 30 minutes. Check whether there is a pressure drop on the pressure gauge and whether there is leakage in all parts of the pipeline.
5. Key points for implementing air pressure test
The air pressure test is a pressure test conducted using gas as the medium according to the requirements of the pipeline transportation medium. The key points for implementation are as follows: ①The test pressure of steel pipes and non-ferrous metal pipes that can withstand internal pressure should be 1.15 times the design pressure, and the test pressure of vacuum pipelines should be 0.2MPa. ② The test medium should be dry and clean air, nitrogen or other non-flammable and non-toxic gases. ③ A pressure relief device should be installed during the test, and its set pressure should not be higher than 1.1 times the test pressure. ④ Before the test, air should be used for pre-test, and the test pressure should be 0.2MPa. ⑤ During the test, the pressure should be slowly increased. When the pressure rises to 50% of the test pressure, if no abnormality or leakage is found, continue to increase the pressure step by step by 10% of the test pressure, and stabilize the pressure for 3 minutes at each step until the test pressure is reached. The pressure should be stabilized under the test pressure for 10 minutes, then the pressure should be reduced to the design pressure, and the foaming agent should be used to check that there is no leakage.
(2) Leakage test
The leakage test is a test that uses gas as the test medium under the design pressure and uses foaming agents, color developers, gas molecule sensors or other means to check leakage points in the pipeline system. The following requirements should be met: 1. Pipelines transporting extremely and highly hazardous media and flammable media must undergo leakage tests. 2. The leakage test should be carried out after passing the pressure test, and air should be used as the test medium. 3. The leakage test pressure is the design pressure. 4. The leakage test can be carried out in conjunction with the test run. 5. The leakage test should slowly increase the pressure step by step. When the test pressure is reached and the pressure is stopped for 10 minutes, the valve stuffing box, flange or threaded connection, vent valve, exhaust valve, etc. should be inspected by methods such as applying neutral foaming agent. All sealing points such as air valves and purge valves should be leak-free.
2. Pipe purging and cleaning
(1) General provisions
2. Pipe purging and cleaning methods should be determined based on the usage requirements of the pipeline, working medium, system loop, on-site conditions and the degree of dirt on the inner surface of the pipeline.
(4) Steam pipelines should be purged with steam. (5) Steam purging is not allowed for non-thermal pipelines.
5. The order of purging should be carried out in order of main pipe, branch pipe and drainage pipe. 7. A safety warning area should be set up during purging, and people are strictly prohibited from standing at the purging port. During steam purging, no flammable objects should be placed on or near the pipeline. 8. After the pipeline purging and cleaning are qualified, the construction unit shall jointly inspect and confirm with the construction unit or supervision unit, and the pipeline system purging and cleaning inspection record and pipeline concealed engineering (sealing) record shall be filled in.
(2) Key points for water flushing implementation
1. Clean water should be used for water flushing. When flushing stainless steel, nickel and nickel alloy steel pipes, the chloride ion content in the water should not exceed 25 ppm. 2. The water flushing flow rate shall not be less than 1.5m/s, and the flushing pressure shall not exceed the design pressure of the pipeline. 3. The cross-sectional area of the water flushing pipe should not be less than 60% of the cross-sectional area of the pipe being flushed, and no negative pressure should be formed during drainage. 4. Flushing should be carried out continuously. When there is no stipulation in the design, the water color and transparency of the discharge outlet should be consistent with the visual inspection of the inlet water to be qualified. After the pipe water is flushed, the accumulated water in the pipe should be drained and dried in time.
(3) Key points for air purging implementation
1. It is advisable to use the large air compressor or large gas storage tank of the production device for intermittent purging. The purge pressure should not be greater than the design pressure of the system container and pipeline, and the purge flow rate should not be less than 20m/s. 2. When purging oil-free pipelines, the gas must not contain oil.
(4) Key points for steam purging implementation
1. Before steam pipeline purging, the insulation project of the pipeline system should be completed. 2. The steam pipeline should be purged with a large flow of steam, with a flow rate of not less than 30m/s. Before purging the steam pipeline, the pipes should be warmed, drained in time, and the thermal displacement of the pipes should be checked. 3. Steam purging should be carried out in the order of heating → cooling → reheating.
(5) Key points for oil cleaning implementation
1. The oil pipelines of the lubrication, sealing, and control systems should be oil flushed after the mechanical equipment and pipelines have passed the pickling and before the system is commissioned. Stainless steel oil system pipelines should be cleaned by steam blowing. 2. Oil cleaning should be carried out in a circular manner. The oil temperature should be repeatedly raised and lowered 2 to 3 times between 40 and 70°C every 8 hours, and the filter element should be replaced or cleaned in time. 3. When there is no provision in the design documents or product technical documents, filter inspection should be used after pipeline oil cleaning. 4. Pipelines that have passed oil cleaning should be sealed or filled with nitrogen for protection.
2H313040 Power and power generation equipment installation technology
2H313041 Installation technical requirements for turbine generator equipment
1. Main equipment of turbine generator system
A steam turbine is a rotary prime mover that uses steam as the working fluid to convert thermal energy into mechanical energy. The turbine generator system equipment mainly includes: steam turbine, generator, exciter, condenser, deaerator, heater, feed water pump, condensate pump and vacuum pump, etc.
Steam turbine classification form
Classification
According to working principle
Impulse type, reaction type, speed level
According to thermal properties
Condensing type, back pressure type, air extraction type, air extraction back pressure type, multi-pressure type
Press main steam pressure
Low pressure, medium pressure, high pressure, ultra-high pressure, subcritical pressure, supercritical pressure, ultra-supercritical pressure
According to structure type
Single stage, multi-stage
According to the direction of air flow
Axial flow type, radial flow type, peripheral flow (return) type
Press Purpose
Industrial drive, power station steam turbine
2. Composition of steam turbine
Mainly composed of ①Steam turbine body equipment ②Steam system equipment ③Condensate system equipment ④Water supply system equipment ⑤Composed of other auxiliary equipment.
(2) Generator type and composition
1.Type of generator
Classification method
type
Divided by prime mover
Steam turbine generator, water turbine generator, diesel generator, wind turbine and gas turbine generator
Divided by cooling method
Externally cooled generator, internally cooled generator
Divided by cooling medium
Air cooling, air-liquid cooling and liquid cooling
Divided according to structural form
There are rotating magnetic pole type and rotating armature type. The generator of the power plant belongs to the rotating magnetic pole type.
2. Generator composition
(1) The generator consists of two parts: the stator and the rotor. (2) Stator: machine base, stator core, stator winding, end cover. (3) Rotor: rotor forgings, field windings, retaining rings, center rings, fans.
2H313042 Technical requirements for installation of boiler equipment
1. Main equipment of boiler system
(1) Boiler
1. Classification of boilers
(2) According to the boiler outlet working fluid pressure:
Boiler classification
Boiler outlet working fluid pressure
low pressure boiler
P<3.8MPa
Medium pressure boiler
3.8MPa≤P<5.4MPa
High pressure boiler
5.4MPa≤P<16.7MPa
subcritical boiler
16.7MPa≤P<22.1MPa
supercritical boiler
22.1MPa≤P<27.0MPa
Ultra supercritical boiler
P≥27.0MPa or rated outlet temperature≥590℃
2. Composition of boiler system
(1) The main equipment of the boiler system generally includes main equipment, combustion equipment and auxiliary equipment.
(2) The boiler body equipment is mainly composed of two parts: the boiler and the furnace.
1) Pot. The steam and water system consists of steam drum (steam-water separator and water storage tank), downcomer, header (header), water wall, superheater, reheater, temperature regulating device, sewage device, economizer and its connecting pipelines. composition. 2) Furnace. It consists of a furnace (steel frame), a coal hopper in front of the furnace, a grate (furnace grate), a distribution air supply device, a burner, a flue, an air preheater, a slag remover, etc. 3) Boiler auxiliary equipment. It mainly consists of fuel supply system equipment, air supply and induction equipment, steam and water system equipment, slag removal equipment, flue gas purification equipment, instruments and automatic control system equipment.
Go to (P363)
2. Types of special equipment
(1) Boiler
1. Boiler: refers to equipment that uses various fuels, electricity or other energy sources to heat the contained liquid to certain parameters and provides heat energy in the form of external output media. Its scope is stipulated that the designed normal water level volume is greater than or equal to 30L pressure-bearing steam boiler with rated steam pressure greater than or equal to 0.1MPa (gauge pressure); outlet water pressure greater than or equal to 0.1MPa (gauge pressure), and rated power greater than or equal to 0.1MW Pressure hot water boiler; organic heat carrier boiler with rated power greater than or equal to 0.1MW.
2. Boiler categories and varieties
category
variety
Pressure steam boiler
/
Pressurized hot water boiler
/
Organic heat carrier boiler
Organic heat carrier gas phase furnace, organic heat carrier liquid phase furnace
3. Boiler installation licenses are divided into two levels:
License parameter level
License scope
A
Steam and hot water boilers with rated outlet pressure greater than 2.5MPa
B
Steam and hot water boilers with rated outlet pressure less than or equal to 2.5MPa; organic heat carrier boilers
Go to (P366)
2. Special equipment installation, modification and maintenance licenses
(1) Pressure-bearing special equipment
2. Licensing for boiler installation (including repair and modification) (A, B) shall be implemented by the provincial market supervision and management department.
License parameter level
License scope
Remark
A
Steam and hot water boilers with rated outlet pressure greater than 2.5MPa
A>B Class A boiler installation>GC2, GCD
B
Steam and hot water boilers with rated outlet pressure less than or equal to 2.5MPa; organic heat carrier boilers
Class B boiler installation>GC2
(2) The structure and function of the steam drum, steam-water separator and water storage tank
1.Structure of steam drum The steam drum is a cylindrical container made of welded steel plates. It consists of a cylinder and a head. Its diameter, length, and weight vary with the evaporation capacity of the boiler. 2. The function of steam drum. The steam drum is not only a main component of the natural circulation boiler, but also a component that connects the heating surfaces of various parts of the boiler, such as downcomers, water walls, economizers, and superheaters; its heat storage capacity can improve the operation of the boiler. safety; when the load changes, the speed of air pressure change can be slowed down to ensure steam quality. 3. The structure and function of the steam-water separator and water storage tank. In recent years, supercritical or ultra-supercritical DC boilers are usually used as boilers in large domestic power stations. The steam-water separator and water storage tank are important equipment of DC boilers. The steam-water separator has a barrel structure. , equipped with a racecycler and a water blocking device. The water storage tank has a cylinder structure and a water blocking device. The function of the steam-water separator is to separate steam and water. The separated water enters the water storage tank and the separated steam enters the low-temperature superheater. .
(3) The structure and function of the water-cooled wall
(1) The water-cooled wall is the main radiation evaporation heating surface of the boiler. It is generally divided into two types: tubular water-cooled wall and membrane water-cooled wall. Small-capacity medium and low-pressure boilers mostly use plain tube water-cooled walls, while large-capacity high-temperature and high-pressure boilers generally use membrane water-cooled walls. 2.The main function of water-cooled wall ① Absorb the high-temperature radiant heat in the furnace to heat the working fluid and cool the flue gas so that the temperature of the flue gas entering the convection flue is reduced to a temperature that does not form slagging. This protects the furnace wall and makes the furnace wall structure lighter. Some, some thin. ② When the same amount of water is evaporated, the use of water-cooled walls saves more steel than the use of convection tube bundles.
2. Installation technical requirements for the main equipment of the boiler system
(1) Boiler system installation and construction procedures
Foundation and material acceptance → Steel frame assembly and installation → Steam drum (steam-water separator and water storage tank) installation → Header installation → Water-cooled wall installation → Air preheater installation → Economizer installation → Low-temperature superheater and low-temperature reheater Installation→High temperature superheater and high temperature reheater installation →Rigid beam installation →Body pipe installation →Valve installation →Hydraulic pressure test →Soot blowing equipment installation →Installation of burner, oil gun, ignition gun →Installation of flue and air duct →Wind pressure test →Furnace wall construction →Oven , boiling furnace (chemical cleaning) → steam purging → trial operation.
(2) Key technical points for industrial boiler installation
The installation forms of industrial boilers are mainly divided into two types: complete installation and bulk installation.
1. Complete boiler installation
(2) Main procedures for the installation of packaged boilers Boiler basic review → Verification and inspection of boiler equipment and technical data → Boiler equipment positioning and alignment → Installation of accessories → Installation of process pipelines → Hydraulic test → Stand-alone trial operation → Alarm and interlock test → Boiler thermal debugging and trial operation .
(3) Technical installation points of integrated boilers 3) Accessory installation. The installation of boiler accessories mainly includes the installation of economizers, blowers and duct dust collectors, induced draft fans, chimneys, and safety accessories such as pipes, valves, instruments, and water pumps. Among them, the economizer of the integrated boiler is an integral component before leaving the factory. A hydraulic pressure test should be carried out before installation. If there is no leakage, it will be qualified. It is also necessary to carefully check whether the insulation material embedded around the economizer tube is tight and firm, and whether the shell box plate is It should be flat, with no damage, and can be installed after there are no problems. When installing pipes, valves, instruments, and water pumps, the installation of pipes, valves, and instruments must be carried out strictly in accordance with the drawings. The valve should pass the strength and tightness test before being installed; the pressure gauge should be installed vertically, and a three-way plug valve should be installed between the pressure gauge and the gauge pipe to facilitate purging the pipeline and replacing the pressure gauge. The scale of the thermometer should be oriented in a convenient direction. Install in the direction observed; place the water supply pump on the foundation, align it with the center line, level it, and connect the water supply pipe according to the diagram. If there is water treatment equipment, it must be installed simultaneously with the boiler. If there is no water treatment equipment, an electronic descaler must be installed.
2. Bulk boiler installation
(1) Key points of bulk boiler installation Bulk boilers are more complex than packaged boilers. The boiler body must be assembled and installed on site, including the installation and partial fabrication of the boiler drum, body heating surface, tail heating surface, combustion equipment and its body ancillary equipment.
(2) Installation procedures for bulk boiler body Inventory inspection and acceptance of equipment→Foundation acceptance→Foundation laying out→Equipment transportation and lifting→Installation of steel frame and ladder platform→Steam drum installation→Installation of heating surface of boiler body→Installation of tail heating surface→Installation of main body pipe→ Hydraulic test → installation of combustion equipment → installation of ancillary equipment → installation of thermal instrument protection devices.
(3) Technical points of steam drum installation 1) Steam drum installation and construction procedures: Marking of the steam drum → Installation of the steam drum support → (Installation of the drum lifting ring) → Lifting of the steam drum → Alignment of the steam drum
(4) Technical points for installation of heating surfaces 1) The heating surface pipe should undergo a ball passing test, and the alloy material should undergo a spectral review. 2) For heating surface pipes that use the expansion joint process, the pipes must be set out and calibrated at a ratio of 1:1 before installation, and the pipe mouth must be annealed. The annealing temperature is generally controlled at 600~650℃, and the annealing length is 100~150mm. Then use a tube expander, and the tube expansion rate is generally controlled at 1.3% to 1.5%. 3) The heating surface using welding technology should strictly implement the welding process assessment. When hoisting the heating surface components, select a good center and lifting method, determine the binding position, and do not tie the rope to the pipe bundle to prevent pipe deformation and damage during lifting.
(3) Technical points for installation of main equipment of power station boilers
1. Boiler steel frame installation The boiler steel frame is the supporting structure of the furnace body. It is an all-steel structure that carries the weight of the heating surface, furnace wall and other accessories of the furnace body, and determines the shape of the furnace body. It is mainly composed of columns, beams, horizontal supports, vertical supports and diagonal supports, platforms, escalators, roof beams, etc. There are two ways to connect its steel structure: welding and high-strength bolted connection.
(1) Boiler steel frame construction procedures Foundation inspection and marking → Installation and alignment of column bottom plates → Installation of columns, vertical supports, horizontal beams and horizontal supports → Overall alignment → Final tightening of high-strength bolts → Installation of platforms, escalators and railings → Installation of roof beams, etc.
(2) Key technical points for boiler steel frame installation 2) How to install and align the steel frame. Mainly use a steel tape measure to check the distance between the center of the columns and the diagonal length between the girders; Use a theodolite to check the verticality of the column; Use a level to check the levelness and deflection of the large plate girder. The deflection of the plate girder is measured before the plate girder bears load, before the boiler water pressure, after the boiler water pressure test is filled with water and after the water is released, and before the entire boiler is started.
2. Installation of heating surface of boiler body
(1) General procedures for installing the heating surface of the boiler body: Equipment inventory inspection → spectrum inspection → ball pass test → header alignment and marking → pipe alignment and welding
(2) Technical points for installing the heating surface of the boiler body 1) Boiler heating surface combination site. Determined based on the combined volume and weight of the equipment, as well as on-site construction conditions. 2) Boiler heating surface combination form. It is decided based on the structural characteristics of the equipment and the construction conditions on site. Component combinations include: upright and horizontal. The vertical combination is to assemble the brackets according to the installation status of the equipment, place (or suspend) the header on the upper part of the bracket, and assemble the tube panel below the header. The advantage is that the combination field occupies a small area and facilitates the hoisting of components; The disadvantage is that it consumes a lot of steel and has poor safety conditions. The horizontal combination means that the pipe rows are placed horizontally on the combination bracket to combine with the header, and then the assembly is erected for hoisting. The advantage is that it overcomes the shortcomings of the upright combination; The disadvantage is that it occupies a large area of the combined field, and when the equipment is erected, if it is handled improperly, it may cause deformation or damage to the equipment. 3) The spiral water-cooled wall equipment is pre-assembled as a whole on the ground, and an appropriate amount of pre-shrinkage is left in the joints; when the spiral water-cooled wall is installed, it is hoisted and positioned in layers, and the baseline of the sling (vertical overlap plate) is accurately positioned. The helix angle deviation of the spiral water-cooling wall installation is controlled within 0.5°. 4) Lifting sequence of boiler heating surface components. Hoisting of the upper components of the water-cooling wall and tube rows → Hoisting of the middle components of the water-cooling wall and tube rows → Hoisting of superheater components and tube rows on the upper part of the furnace → Hoisting of superheater or reheater components and tube rows in the horizontal section of the furnace outlet → Hoisting of superheater components wrapped in the tail wall And pipe row hoisting → tail low temperature reheater, low temperature superheater, economizer hoisting, etc.
(4) Key points for quality control of power station boiler installation
1. Quality control of steel structure installation Before installation, the installation method of high-strength bolt connection points should be confirmed, and the number of temporary bolts and positioning pins should meet the requirements of the regulations. After the installation of each layer of the structure, check the verticality of the columns and the spacing between the columns and make records. The quality of high-strength bolt connections shall be comprehensively inspected and confirmed to be qualified according to regulations. After the steel structure is installed, retest the column verticality and column spacing, the horizontality and deflection of the large plate beams, etc. according to the regulations to see if they are qualified and make acceptance records. Check the final tightening quality of all high-strength bolt connection points. Confirm that all steel structures, except for those whose installation has been postponed with the consent of the manufacturer's representative, have been installed and have been strengthened as necessary before allowing large-scale hoisting.
2. Quality control of boiler heating surface installation The boiler heating surface system should pass the overall hydraulic pressure test. The primary steam test pressure of the drum boiler is 1.25 times the design pressure of the drum; The hydraulic pressure test pressure of the once-through boiler is 1.25 times the design pressure of the high-temperature superheater outlet, and not less than 1.1 times the design pressure of the economizer inlet; The test pressure of the reheater is 1.5 times the design pressure of the reheater inlet. Demineralized water should be used for test water quality, with a pH value above 10.5 and a chloride ion content less than 0.2mg/L.
3. Boiler thermal debugging and trial operation
(1) Oven
1. Purpose of oven After the masonry of the boiler furnace wall is completed, it must be baked. The purpose is to allow the boiler brick wall to dry slowly and not to be damaged or cracked during use.
2. Types of ovens Depending on the site conditions and the structural form of the boiler furnace wall, flame ovens, steam ovens, and steam and flame hybrid ovens can be used.
(2) Stove and chemical cleaning
1. Purpose of boiling and chemical cleaning Use chemicals to remove rust, grease, dirt, scale, etc. in the pot before operation to prevent steam quality from deteriorating and to avoid scaling on the heating surface that affects heat transfer and burns out.
3. Scope of boiler chemical cleaning (1) Boiler bodies with superheated steam outlet pressure of 9.8MPa and above should be chemically cleaned. (2) Boiler chemical cleaning equipment includes water system pipes and equipment such as economizers, steam drums (steam-water separators), water walls, connecting pipes from the economizer to the steam drum (steam-water separators), downcomers, etc.
4. Requirements for chemical cleaning (1) The chemically cleaned metal surface should be clean, without residual oxides and welding slag, without secondary rust and pitting corrosion, and without copper plating. (2) The residual scale of the boiler should be less than 30g/m2. (3) After cleaning, a good passivation protective film will be formed on the surface of the equipment. (4) The time from boiler chemical cleaning to boiler ignition should not exceed
(3) Flushing and purging of steam pipelines
The scope of flushing and purging of steam pipelines includes Desuperheating water pipe system and boiler superheater, reheater and superheated steam pipe purging. During the purging process, the furnace must be shut down for cooling (more than 12 hours) at least once to improve the purging effect.
(4) Boiler trial operation
① The boiler trial operation must be carried out on the premise that the oven is qualified. ② Increase the pressure of the boiler during trial operation. When the boiler is started, the pressure increase should be slow and the pressure increase speed should be controlled to minimize the wall temperature difference to ensure the safe operation of the drum. ③ Carefully check manholes, welding joints, flanges and other components and deal with them promptly if leaks are found. ④ Carefully observe whether the thermal expansion and displacement of each header, drum, steel frame, bracket, etc. are normal. ⑤After the trial operation is completed, go through the visa handover procedures according to regulations.
2. Technical requirements for steam turbine installation
(2) Installation technical requirements for industrial small steam turbines
1. Install general programs
(1) The installation of industrial small steam turbines includes two methods: complete installation and bulk installation. (2) For steam turbines that arrive fully assembled, the steam turbine body has been assembled and debugged before leaving the factory, so the installation work mainly involves the hoisting, alignment, leveling and installation of ancillary equipment. The key point and difficulty in installing a complete steam turbine lies in the alignment, adjustment and installation of the coupling between the steam turbine and the driven mechanical coupling. (3) When installing steam turbines that arrive in bulk, the turbine body must be installed. The general procedure for equipment installation: acceptance of foundation and equipment → installation of base → installation of cylinder and bearing seat → installation of bearings and shaft seal → installation of rotor → installation of guide vane ring or partition → inspection and adjustment of steam seal and flow gap → Part 1 , the lower cylinder is closed → coupling installation → grouting → cylinder insulation → transmission gearbox and turning device installation → adjustment system installation → adjustment and debugging of the adjustment system and security system → installation of auxiliary mechanical equipment.
2. Install quality control points
(1) Foundation inspection, marking and pad iron installation: Review the elevation, plane size, and hole size of the foundation to ensure that the foundation surface is smooth and defect-free and that the pad iron position is reasonable. (2) Installation of platen, cylinder, and bearing seat: vertical and horizontal center lines of the cylinder, equipment installation elevation, etc.; the strength and density of the secondary grouting to ensure that the connection of the upper and lower parts and the thermal expansion are not hindered; precise alignment, leveling and coupling of the equipment After centering, the grouting strength between the bottom of the equipment and the foundation. (3) Regulating oil and lubricating oil systems: Ensure there is no leakage in the oil system and ensure that the internal pipelines are clean, smooth and free of vibration. The oil quality has passed the laboratory test.
3. Technical points for the installation of major equipment
(1) Technical points for condenser installation
1) Installation and connection of condenser shell. Since the structure size of the condenser is quite large, its support method usually adopts the form of support directly located on the foundation of the condenser. The connection between the condenser and the low-pressure cylinder exhaust port uses a telescopic intermediate connection section. During the entire process of connecting the condenser to the cylinder, the positioning dimensions of the steam turbine must not be changed, and no additional stress may be added to the cylinder. 2) Installation of internal equipment and components of the condenser. Including the installation and connection of the tube sheet, the last stage of the low-pressure heater of the heat recovery system, and the tube bundle. The installation of the tube sheet and low-pressure heater in the condenser shell should be completed before the low-pressure cylinder is in place; the tube bundle can be threaded and connected after the low-pressure cylinder is in place. After the condenser is assembled, a water filling test should be conducted on the steam side. The water filling height should be 100mm below the steam seal depression. There should be no leakage for 24 hours.
(4) Key points of rotor installation technology
1) Rotor installation can be divided into: rotor hoisting, rotor measurement and rotor and cylinder centering. 2) Special beams and slings provided by the manufacturer and with factory test certificates should be used for rotor hoisting. Otherwise, a 200% working load test (time 1 hour) should be carried out. 3) Rotor measurement should include: measurement of journal ovality, cylindricality, rotor runout measurement (radial, end face and thrust plate deflection), and rotor curvature measurement.
(5) Technical key points of cylinder cover installation
1) The cover buckling work starts from lifting the first component in the lower cylinder until the upper cylinder is in place and the connecting bolts are tightened. The whole process should be carried out continuously without interruption. 2) Before the steam turbine is officially capped, all internal components should be assembled and then trial capped, so as to comprehensively check the coordination of the components in the cylinder. 3) Before the test buckle, compressed air should be used to purge all components and gaps in the cylinder to ensure that the inside of the cylinder is clean and free of debris, the joint surface is smooth, and the holes and passages are partially unobstructed. Parts that need to be blocked and isolated should be blocked. 4) When trying to fasten the empty cylinder, the clearance in the free state must meet the technical requirements of the manufacturer; after tightening 1/3 of the bolts according to the cold tightening requirements, check from the inside and outside that the 0.05mm feeler gauge is not inserted. 5) After the trial buckle inspection shows no problems, apply a layer of paint evenly on each surface of the cylinder before the cap can be officially buckled. Cylinder tightening generally uses cold tightening. For large-diameter cylinder bolts in high-pressure and high-temperature locations, the cold tightening method cannot achieve the torque required by the design, and hot tightening should be used. After tightening, rotate the rotor and listen to the fact that there should be no friction or abnormal sound inside. 6) After the installation of the steam turbine is completed, the auxiliary engine part has passed the test operation, and the static position of the speed regulation protection system has been adjusted, the test start of the steam turbine can be carried out. The first start of the steam turbine must be carried out in accordance with the starting requirements of the manufacturer. The installation is completed after passing the test.
Summary: The whole process is continuous without interruption. Purge (compressed air) → Trial buckle (feeler gauge does not fit in) → Check → Apply paint → Formal buckle cover (from bottom to top, continuously) → Tighten (cold tighten, first tighten left and right symmetrically and then tighten) → Disk Moving rotor (no friction and abnormal sound) → test start
(3) Technical requirements for installation of steam turbines in power stations
2. Technical points of installation
(1) Technical key points of low-pressure cylinder combination installation
1) Low-pressure outer lower cylinder combination: ①The rear section of the low-pressure outer lower cylinder (motor side) and the front section of the low-pressure outer lower cylinder (steam side) are in place respectively ②Adjust the level, elevation, and find the center ③Trial combination ④ Separate the front and rear sections by a certain distance ⑤ Clean and check the vertical joint surface again to confirm that it is clean and free of foreign matter. ⑥Formal combination
The basis for finding the center of the cylinder: laser, wire drawing, false shaft, rotor, etc. At present, the wire drawing method is mostly used.
2) Low-pressure outer upper cylinder combination: ①Try combination ② Check the clearance between horizontal and vertical joint surfaces ③Formal combination
3) Low pressure inner cylinder combination: ① Align the low-pressure inner cylinder in place ②Separation adjustment ③The low-pressure rotor is hoisted into the cylinder and positioned ④Adjustment of flow gap
(2) Technical points for installing high and medium pressure cylinders
The high and medium pressure cylinders of the steam turbine are delivered as a whole and do not need to be assembled on site. The turbine shaft positions the rotor and cylinder axially and radially through the transport ring paved at the end of the cylinder. Before the cylinder is in place, the radial clearance at the front and rear shaft seals of the cylinder, the reference plane of the front and rear cylinder and the rotor must be measured. The positioning dimensions between the shoulders should be checked with the manufacturer's assembly records to check whether the rotor in the cylinder has moved during transportation to ensure that the flow gap remains unchanged.
(3) Alignment of shaft system to wheel center
1) The alignment of the shafting wheel center is mainly the alignment of the high and medium pressure wheel center, the medium and low pressure wheel center, the low pressure wheel center and the low pressure rotor-electric rotor wheel center. 2) Find timing at the center of the shaft system’s wheel ① Low pressure rotor as the benchmark ②Usually adjustments are made in the full cylinder state ③The opening and height difference meet the technical requirements of the manufacturer ④Recheck and correct the wheel center multiple times at different stages
For example: the content of the shafting center alignment of a 660MW supercritical unit in a certain project, and the reserved values for the opening and height difference of each pair of wheels during centering are: The shafting center alignment needs to be carried out multiple times. That is: initial search of the shaft system; re-search after the condenser is filled with water to the operating weight; re-search before the cylinder cover is buckled; re-search before the secondary grouting of the foundation; re-search after the secondary grouting of the foundation; re-search when the shaft system is connected. Find again.
3. Technical requirements for generator installation
(1) Generator installation procedures
The stator is in place → Stator and rotor hydraulic pressure test → Generator penetrates the rotor → Installation of hydrogen cooler → Adjustment and installation of end caps, bearings and sealing tiles → Installation of exciter → Recenter and connect the wheels → Overall air tightness test
(2) Key points of installation technology
1. Key points of generator stator hoisting technology
(1) Lifting of the stator Generator stator hoisting usually adopts three methods: hydraulic lifting device hoisting, special hanger hoisting and driving modification system hoisting.
2. Key points of generator rotor installation technology
(1) Conduct a separate air tightness test before installing the generator rotor. After the leakage is eliminated, the air leakage volume test should be carried out again. The test pressure and allowable air leakage volume should comply with the manufacturer's regulations.
(2) Installation of generator rotor
1) The installation work of the generator rotor must be completed before ①Maintenance ②Electrical and thermal instruments ③Final cleaning and inspection of the stator and rotor ④Approval before proceeding. 2) Installation method of generator rotor: ①Slide type method ②Method of connecting shaft ③Method of using rear bearing seat as balance weight ④Method of using two sports cars, etc.
2H313043 Installation technical requirements for photovoltaic and wind power generation equipment
1. Composition of solar and wind power generation equipment
(1) Classification and composition of solar power generation equipment
1. Classification of solar power generation equipment Solar power generation equipment includes photovoltaic power generation and photothermal power generation. CSP is divided into two types: trough CSP and tower CSP.
2. Composition of solar power generation equipment
(1) Composition of photovoltaic power generation equipment Photovoltaic power generation equipment mainly consists of photovoltaic brackets, photovoltaic modules, combiner boxes, inverters, electrical equipment, etc. Photovoltaic brackets include tracking brackets, fixed brackets and manually adjustable brackets. (2) Composition of photothermal power generation equipment CSP equipment includes collector equipment, heat exchangers, turbine generators and other equipment, Among them, the collector of trough solar thermal power generation consists of collector bracket (driving tower, bracket), collector (driving shaft, cantilever, reflector, collector tube, collector tube bracket, pipe bracket, etc.) and collector Composed of accessories, etc.; The heat collection equipment of tower photothermal power generation consists of heliostats, heat absorber steel frames and heat absorber equipment. Trough photothermal power generation Trough tower photothermal power generation
(2) Classification and composition of wind power equipment
1. Classification of wind power equipment Wind power generation equipment can be divided into land wind power generation and offshore wind power generation according to the installation area. 2. Composition of wind power generation equipment Wind power plants generally consist of multiple wind turbines. Each wind turbine forms an independent power generation unit. Wind power generation equipment mainly includes towers, nacelles, generators, hubs, blades, electrical equipment, etc.
2. Installation procedures for solar, photothermal and wind power generation equipment
1. Installation procedures for solar power generation equipment
Construction preparation → Basic inspection and acceptance → Equipment inspection → Photovoltaic bracket installation → Photovoltaic module installation → Combiner box installation → Inverter → Electrical equipment installation → Commissioning → Acceptance.
2. Installation procedures for photothermal power generation equipment
(1) Installation procedures for trough photothermal power generation equipment Construction preparation → Basic inspection and acceptance → Equipment inspection → Installation of collector brackets → Installation of collectors and accessories → Installation of heat exchangers and pipeline systems → Installation of turbine generator equipment → Installation of electrical equipment → Commissioning → Acceptance.
(2) Tower type photothermal power generation equipment installation procedures Construction preparation → Basic inspection and acceptance → Equipment inspection → Heliostat installation → Heat absorber steel structure installation → Heat absorber and system piping installation → Heat exchanger and system piping installation → Turbine generator equipment installation → Electrical equipment installation → Debugging →Acceptance.
3. Installation procedures for wind power equipment Construction preparation → Basic ring platform and frequency converter, electrical cabinet → Tower installation → Engine room installation → Generator installation → Blade and hub combination → Impeller installation → Installation of other components → Electrical equipment installation → Commissioning and trial operation → Acceptance.
3. Technical requirements for installation of solar, photothermal and wind power generation equipment
1. Technical requirements for installation of solar power generation equipment Before installing photovoltaic power generation equipment, a special construction plan for photovoltaic power generation equipment should be formulated, and a targeted construction technical plan should be clearly formulated based on the site conditions and characteristics of photovoltaic power generation equipment. The plan should include targeted measures to prevent damage to photovoltaic modules during transportation and installation. measure. ① Bracket installation: The fixed bracket and the manually adjustable bracket are made of steel structure. The inclination of the bracket meets the design requirements. The manual adjustable bracket has flexible adjustment movement. The tracking bracket is firmly fixed to the foundation. ② Photovoltaic module installation: Photovoltaic modules and various components and equipment are fixed with bolts, and the torque meets the product or design requirements. The open-circuit voltage and short-circuit current of the photovoltaic module strings should be tested for the wiring between photovoltaic modules after the stringing. It is strictly forbidden to touch the metal live parts of the strings during construction. ③ Combiner box installation: The vertical deviation of the combiner box installation should be less than 1.5mm. ④Inverter installation: The top of the inverter base steel should be 10mm higher than the flat ground and have a reliable grounding.
2. Technical requirements for installation of photothermal power generation equipment Before installation, a special construction plan for photothermal power generation equipment should be formulated, appropriate hoisting machinery should be selected based on site conditions and the characteristics of the photothermal equipment, and a hoisting plan should be formulated. The turbine generator equipment shall be installed in accordance with the contents of "2H313041 Technical Requirements for Installation of Turbine Generator Equipment", and the installation of heat exchange equipment and system pipes shall be executed in accordance with the contents of "2H313030 Pipeline Engineering Construction Technology". The collectors of photothermal power generation equipment should have specific installation requirements for trough-type equipment and tower-type equipment.
(1) Technical requirements for installation of collectors of trough-type photothermal power generation equipment
1) The overall straightness deviation of the central axis of the center frame (tube) assembly is not greater than ±3mm, the installation deviation of adjacent collectors is not greater than ±0.5mrad, and the overall installation deviation of all collectors is not greater than ±1.5mrad. 2) The rotation angle of the driving device should be ±120°, and the deviation should be less than ±5°. 3) The collector should be installed from the driving end to the end, and the gap between the follower shaft and the bearing seat should meet the requirements of the manufacturer's technical documents. 4) When the collector reaches the 0° position, use the inclinometer testing equipment to check that the error value of the parabola placed in the horizontal position should be less than 5mm. 5) Each unit collector should be subjected to a rotation test after installation. The test rotation angle should be between 180° and -180°, and the deviation should be ±10°.
(2) Technical requirements for installation of tower-type photothermal power generation heat collection equipment
1) The heliostat and the bracket are firmly fixed, and the installation position and mirror adjustment angle meet the design requirements of the drawing. 2) The steel structure installation of tower heat absorbers should comply with the relevant requirements of the current national standard "Construction Quality Acceptance Standard for Steel Structure Engineering" GB 50205-2020. 3) The inside of the tower heat absorber tube screen equipment should be clean, free of debris and blockage; the installation should be symmetrical, and no more than 2 groups should be installed on a single side.
3. Technical requirements for installation of wind power equipment Before installation, a special construction plan for wind power turbines should be formulated. Appropriate hoisting machinery should be clearly selected based on site conditions and characteristics of wind power turbine equipment, and a hoisting plan should be formulated. Anti-tipping measures should be developed for the crane machinery, and measures should be taken to prevent the wind turbine equipment from being lifted during the hoisting process. Targeted measures for damage. ① Foundation ring: Install the foundation ring on the foundation, and tighten the fixing bolts with a torque wrench to meet the requirements of the manufacturer's data. ② Tower installation: The tower is supplied in multiple sections, and the crane’s lifting conditions are selected on site based on the weight, size and installation height of the tower. Install the tower in the lifting sequence from bottom to top. Clean and polish the tower joint surface flange. After the tower is in place and tightened, the gap inside the tower flange should be less than 0.5mm. ③ Engine room installation: Use the main crane to mechanically lift the engine room into place. Then install the anemometer, wind direction meter bracket, aviation light, forehead and air-cooling fan cover. ④Impeller installation: First, fix the hub on the combination bracket and assemble the three blades. Then use a hoisting machine to lift the assembled impeller assembly, and provide protection between the blades and the hanging rope during the hoisting.
For example, use a level to control the level of equipment, Use theodolite to control the verticality of the tower, Use a 400N*m torque wrench, a 1000N*m electric wrench and a hydraulic wrench to tighten the bolts one after another. Use a feeler gauge to check the clearance of the tower flange.
2H313000 Industrial mechanical and electrical engineering installation technology
2H313050 Manufacturing and installation technology of static equipment and metal structures
2H313051 Technical requirements for production and installation of static equipment
1. Steel welded atmospheric pressure vessels
(1) Scope
1. Design pressure (1) Circular cylinder container: design pressure is greater than -0.02MPa and less than 0.1MPa; (2) Rectangular container: The design pressure is zero.
2.Design temperature Non-alloy steel: boiling steel 0~250℃; killed steel 0~350℃.
(2) Production technology
2. Production technology (1) The flange surface should be perpendicular to the center line of the main axis of the nozzle or cylinder. The bolt through holes of the flange should be arranged mid-span with the main axis of the shell or the vertical line. If there are special requirements, they should be noted on the drawing. (2) The welding procedure evaluation report, welding procedure specifications, welding records and welder identification marks should be kept for 3 years. (3) The number, location and status of repairs should be recorded on the quality certificate of the container. (4) Unless otherwise specified, local radiographic or ultrasonic testing is required for container butt welding joints, and the testing length shall not be less than 10% of the length of each welding joint. For local non-destructive testing, priority should be given to the T-shaped joint. (5) After the container is manufactured, water holding test, hydraulic pressure test, air pressure test, air tightness test or kerosene leakage test should be carried out according to the drawing requirements. (6) Water is generally used as the test liquid, and other liquids that will not cause danger can also be used when necessary. The test gas generally uses dry, clean air, and nitrogen or other inert gases can also be used when necessary. (7) Two calibrated pressure gauges with the same range should be used during the test. The range of the pressure gauge is about 2 times the test pressure. The accuracy level of the pressure gauge used for the test should be grade 1.0. (8) If the drawing permits or with the consent of the design unit, the kerosene leakage test may be used instead of the water test.
3. Acceptance requirements (1) The factory quality certification document for containers should include three parts:
(2) The nameplate of the container should be fixed at an obvious location on the container.
Factory quality certification documents
Product certificate
/
Container Instructions
Container characteristics (including design pressure, test pressure, design temperature, working medium); General drawing of the container (this item may not be included when the drawing is provided by the ordering unit); List of main parts of the container; Special instructions such as the heat treatment status of the container and prohibition of welding.
quality certificate
Chemical composition and mechanical properties of main component materials; Non-destructive testing results; Pressure test results; Items that do not match the drawings.
The container nameplate should include the following:
1) Name of manufacturing unit; 2) The serial number of the container product issued by the manufacturing unit; 3) Manufacturing date; 4) Design pressure; 5) Test pressure; 6) Design temperature; 7) Container weight.
2. Pressure vessels
Go to (P363) 2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
2. Types of special equipment
(2) Pressure vessels 1. Pressure vessel: refers to a closed device that contains gas or liquid and carries a certain pressure. Its scope is defined as gases with a maximum working pressure greater than or equal to 0.1MPa (gauge pressure), liquefied gases and maximum working temperatures higher than or equal to the standard boiling point. Liquids, fixed containers and mobile containers with a volume greater than or equal to 30L and an inner diameter (non-circular cross-section refers to the maximum geometric size of the inner boundary of the cross-section) greater than or equal to 150mm; Gas cylinders and oxygen chambers containing gases, liquefied gases and liquids with a standard boiling point equal to or lower than 60°C with a nominal working pressure greater than or equal to 0.2MPa and the product of pressure and volume greater than or equal to 1.0MPa·L.
2. Types and varieties of pressure vessels
category
variety
Stationary pressure vessel
Ultra-high pressure vessels, Category III pressure vessels, Category II pressure vessels, Category I pressure vessels
Mobile pressure vessel
Railway tank cars, car tank cars, long tube trailers, tank containers, tube containers
gas cylinder
Seamless gas cylinders, welded gas cylinders, special gas cylinders
oxygen chamber
Medical oxygen chamber, high pressure chamber
3. According to the degree of danger, pressure vessels are divided into categories I, II, and III, which are equivalent to the first, second, and third category pressure vessels in the above table, among which ultra-high pressure vessels are classified as category III pressure vessels.
4. The scope of pressure vessels includes the pressure vessel body, safety accessories and instruments.
The main pressure components in the body
Barrel sections (including reducing sections), spherical shell plates, shell plates, heads, flat covers, expansion joints, equipment flanges of non-circular vessels, tube sheets and heat exchange tubes of heat exchangers, M36 or above (including M36 ) Bolts and pipes and pipe flanges with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 250mm, etc.
safety accessories
Directly connected to the pressure vessel safety valve, bursting disc device, fusible plug, emergency shut-off device, safety interlock device
meter
Pressure, temperature, liquid level and other measuring instruments directly connected to the pressure vessel
Go to (P367) 2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2. Special equipment installation, modification and repair license
(1) Pressure-bearing special equipment 3. The installation of fixed pressure vessels does not require a separate license, and the filling of various types of gas cylinders does not require a license. 4. Pressure vessel manufacturing units can design and install pressure vessels of the same manufacturing level and industrial pipelines connected to pressure vessels of this level (except for flammable, explosive and toxic media, and are not restricted by length and diameter); installation at any level Qualified boiler installation units or pressure pipe installation units can install pressure vessels. 5. The modification and major repair of pressure vessels shall be carried out by the unit that has obtained the corresponding level of manufacturing license, and no separate license shall be issued.
1. Install license (1) The installation of pressure vessels should be strictly carried out in accordance with the "2H331030 Relevant Provisions for Special Equipment" in this book. Units that have not obtained the corresponding qualifications for special equipment production licenses are not allowed to install pressure vessels. (2) According to the "Technical Safety Supervision Regulations for Stationary Pressure Vessels" TSG 21-2016, before installation, a "Notification Form for Installation, Maintenance and Modification of Special Equipment", also known as "Construction Notification", should be obtained.
2. Tower container (referred to as tower) (1) Structural form of tower The tower is an upright process equipment with a long and thin cylindrical structure. It is composed of a cylinder, a head (or head cover) and a support. It is a non-standard equipment specially designed and manufactured for certain production process requirements. The tower is suitable for separation processes such as distillation, extraction, absorption, and refining, and the device is suitable for various reaction processes. (2) Arrival status of tower Most of the towers are manufactured by the pressure vessel manufacturing company, and the construction company installs them on site. Due to their large volume (geometric dimensions) and transportation size restrictions, some towers cannot be manufactured as a whole in the manufacturing plant and transported to the installation site as a whole, leaving the factory in different assembly forms. The arrival status is divided into overall arrival, segmented arrival and segmented arrival. (3) Unpacking and inspection Before installing the tower equipment, the quantity and appearance quality of the equipment or semi-finished products and parts should be checked according to the packing list. The equipment can only be accepted if it meets the design requirements. (4) Basic acceptance Re-measure the foundation positioning axis, foundation elevation and other dimensions and process the surface to ensure they meet the requirements. The strength of the foundation concrete shall not be less than 75% of the design strength. If there are settlement observation requirements, settlement observation points shall be provided. Confirm that the installation baseline is clearly marked.
3. Horizontal container (1) The horizontal orientation lines on both sides of the equipment are used as the benchmark for installation elevation and level measurement. (2) The upper surface of the foundation embedded plate at the sliding end of horizontal equipment should be smooth and flat, and there should be no slag or splash. Concrete foundation shall not be plastered Higher than the upper surface of the embedded board. Inspection method: On-site measurement with level gauge and level ruler.
4. Shell and tube heat exchanger (1) Disassembly and assembly spaces are set aside according to the following conditions: 1) For floating head type and stuffing function heat exchangers, there should be space at the front end for extracting the tube bundle; there should be space at the rear end for removing the outer head cover and floating head cover. 2) For U-shaped tube heat exchangers, there should be space at the front end for extracting the tube bundle; or at the other end there should be space for removing the shell. 3) For fixed tube plate heat exchangers, there should be space at one end for replacing the heat exchange tubes; at the other end there should be space for disassembly and assembly of the tube box or head cover. (2) The installed heat exchanger should be adjusted according to the design documents or specifications, and the horizontality and verticality should be checked. If necessary, a voltage test should be carried out before installation. (3) After the core-pulling inspection of the pipe bundle is carried out on site, a pressure test should also be carried out, and a leakage test should be carried out if specified in the drawing.
5. Steel spherical storage tank (referred to as spherical tank) (1) Bulk packaging method: It is suitable for assembling spherical tanks of various specifications and forms. It is a method that is widely used in China and has mature technology. The construction procedures are: construction preparation → assembly of the upper and lower sections of the pillar → installation in the equatorial zone → installation in the lower temperate zone → installation in the lower cold zone → installation in the upper temperate zone → installation in the upper cold zone → installation in the upper and lower poles → adjustment and overall inspection of assembly quality. (2) Banding method: It should be used for the assembly of spherical tanks with a nominal volume of no more than 2000m3. (3) Welding sequence of spherical tank 1) Welding procedure principles: weld the longitudinal seam first, then the circumferential seam; weld the short seam first, then the long seam; weld the side with the larger groove depth first, and then weld the side with the smaller groove depth. (2) During electrode arc welding, welders should be symmetrically distributed and weld synchronously, and the lead or lag length within the same period of time should not be greater than 500mm. The first layer of welding bead of electrode arc welding should adopt the segmented back-welding method; when multi-layer and multi-pass welding, the arc starting point of each layer of welding bead should be staggered by 25~50mm. (4) Post-weld heat treatment of spherical tank The spherical tank determines whether to undergo post-weld overall heat treatment based on the design drawing requirements, containing medium, thickness, materials used, etc. Post-weld heat treatment of spherical tanks should be carried out before pressure testing.
4. Storage tanks
(1) Classification and application
2. Large storage tanks (1) Storage tanks with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 30m or a nominal volume greater than or equal to 1000m3. 3.LNG storage tank (liquefied natural gas storage tank) Storage tanks are classified into: single-containment tanks, double-containment tanks, full-containment tanks, and membrane tanks.
(2) Production and installation technology
1. Tank wall panels
(1) The formal installation method is to first weld the tank bottom on the foundation, then assemble and weld the first ring of tank wall plates on the tank bottom, and then weld it to the bottom plate, and then use a machine to mechanically weld the second ring of wall plates to the tank bottom. Assemble the first circle of wall panels piece by piece, weld the longitudinal welds of the second circle of wall panels, and weld the circumferential welds of the second circle of wall panels and the first circle of wall panels; proceed upward in this order until the last circle of wall panels is assembled. Welding completed. Large floating roof tanks are generally constructed using the formal installation method, and automatic welding can be used for welding the wall panels and bottom plates.
(2) The construction procedure of the flip-chip method is opposite to that of the formal method. The construction procedure of the flip-chip method is: construction preparation → laying of the tank bottom → installing the uppermost wall panel on the paved tank bottom → making and installing the tank roof → overall lifting →Install the next ring of siding →lift it as a whole →...until the next ring of siding, and install it from top to bottom in sequence.
The inversion installation method basically works on the ground, which avoids high-altitude operations, ensures safety, and is conducive to improving quality and efficiency. It is currently widely used in storage tank construction. The lifting tools for the flip-up method mainly include electric hoists or hydraulic lifting systems.
Storage tank installation method
Scope of application
formal attire
Large floating roof tank
Water float method (a type of formal method)
The construction period is long and the water resource utilization rate is relatively low. It has been gradually replaced by other installation techniques.
Flip chip method
storage tank
5. Gas cabinet
(1) Classification
1. Low-pressure wet gas cabinet Wet gas cabinets are gas cabinets with water tanks and water seals, including straight-up gas cabinets (the guide rails are straight guide rails with outer guides) and spiral gas cabinets (the guide rails are spiral). It can be divided into single-gas ark and multi-gas ark according to the movable tower section. 2. Dry gas cabinet Referred to as dry cabinet, its sealing form is non-water sealing, and it is a gas storage device with a piston sealing structure. The gas storage pressure is generated by the self-weight of the piston steel structure, sealing device, guide wheel and piston counterweight. At present, there are mainly three types of domestic thin oil sealed gas holders: polygonal thin oil sealed gas holders, cylindrical thin oil sealed gas holders and rubber membrane sealed gas holders.
(2) Production and installation technology
1.Materials (1) The materials used in the gas cabinet should comply with the provisions of the design documents. (2) The materials should have the original or copy of the product quality certificate, and the copy should have the dealer's special seal for quality inspection; the markings on the materials should be clear. (3) If there is any doubt about the material quality certificate, the material should be re-inspected. 2. Sample or sample rod The front and back sides, as well as the names, locations and specifications of the represented components, are marked on the templates or sample boards used in the prefabrication, assembly and inspection processes. After passing the appraisal by the quality management department of the construction unit, it shall be managed according to the measuring instrument management requirements. 3. Layout diagram (1) The layout of the gas tank bottom plate, sink wall, middle section and bell jar should be drawn based on the design documents and steel arrival dimensions. (2) The layout drawing should include the name, number, view direction, expansion method, orientation identification and weld number of each part and part.
6. Inspection and test requirements for static equipment
(1) Requirements for welding test pieces of pressure vessel products
1. Test purpose and method In order to test the mechanical properties and bending properties of product welded joints, product welding test pieces should be made, specimens should be prepared, and tensile, bending and specified impact tests should be carried out. 2. Specimen preparation (1) The materials, welding and heat treatment processes of the product welding test pieces should be within the qualified range of the welding process qualification of the pressure component welding joints they represent. (2) The product welding test pieces are welded by the welders involved in the pressure vessel products of this unit, and are stamped with the welder and inspector code stamps after welding. (3) The product welding test piece of the cylindrical pressure vessel shall be welded simultaneously on the extended part of the longitudinal weld of the cylinder section using the same conditions and welding process as for the welded pressure vessel. (4) For each spherical storage tank assembled on site, one product welding test piece should be made for vertical welding, horizontal welding, flat welding and overhead welding position. (5) The product welding test piece of the spherical tank shall be welded by the welder who welds the spherical tank under the same conditions and welding processes as the welding of the spherical tank. 3. Test piece inspection The product welding test piece has undergone visual inspection and radiographic (or ultrasonic) testing. If it fails to pass the test, it is allowed to be repaired. If it is not repaired, the sample can be intercepted to avoid the defective part.
(2) Inspection of three-layer lap welds of large storage tank bottom plates
1. After the lap joint weld of the overlapping part of the three-layer steel plate of the bottom plate, the butt weld of the tank bottom plate and the "T"-shaped weld of the wall plate is welded, welding should be carried out within a range of 200mm in each of the three directions. Penetration testing. 2. After all welding is completed, penetrant testing or magnetic particle testing should be performed.
(3) Water filling test of storage tank
1.Basic requirements (1) Water filling test inspection items: ①Tightness of tank bottom ② Tank wall strength and tightness ③Strength, stability and tightness of fixed roof ④Lifting test and tightness of floating roof and internal floating roof ⑤Tightness of floating roof drainage pipes ⑥Basic settlement observation 2. Conditions that should be met before water filling test All accessories and other components welded to the tank must be completed and inspected to pass the inspection; all welds related to the tightness test must not be painted. 3. Test medium and water filling (1) Under normal circumstances, clean water is used for the water filling test; under special circumstances, if other liquids are used for the water filling test, it must be approved by the relevant departments. (2) For stainless steel tanks, the chloride ion content in the test water shall not exceed 25 ppm. The test water temperature shall not be lower than 5℃. (3) The foundation settlement should be observed during the water filling test. If the foundation settles beyond the designed limit, water filling should be stopped. During the process of filling and draining water, the light-transmitting hole should be opened and the foundation should not be soaked in water.
(4) Geometric dimension inspection requirements
1. Spherical tank
Inspection content of geometric dimensions of spherical tank after welding
Inspection of edges and corners of shell plates after welding, Check the inner diameter between the two poles and the maximum inner diameter of the equatorial section, Pillar verticality check
Inspection contents after parts installation
Check the position, extension length of manholes and nozzles, and the perpendicularity between the flange surface and the central axis of the pipe
2. Storage tank
Storage tank geometry inspection content
Tank wall height deviation, Tank wall verticality deviation, The angle of the tank wall weld and the local concave and convex deformation of the tank wall, Radius deviation of inner surface of bottom ring wall plate
Inspection contents after tank bottom and tank top welding
The bottom of the tank is partially uneven and deformed after welding. Local concave and convex deformation of the floating roof, Forming and local concave and convex deformation of fixed roof
2H313052 Technical requirements for fabrication and installation of steel structures
1. Steel structure production
(2) Steel component manufacturing procedures and requirements
2. Metal structure manufacturing process requirements (5) For welding of metal structures, welding process documents should be prepared based on process assessment. For joints with large shrinkage or angular deformation, a reserved welding shrinkage allowance or anti-deformation method should be used to control shrinkage and deformation before formal welding; Long welds are welded by segmented de-welding, jump welding or multi-person symmetrical welding; Composite components composed of multiple components should be assembled and welded in sections, and the deformation should be corrected before final assembly welding.
2. Industrial steel structure installation technology
(1) General procedures for metal structure installation
1. Industrial steel structure installation (2) Main aspects of steel structure installation: ①Basic acceptance and processing ②Reinspection of steel components ③Steel structure installation ④Coating (anti-corrosion coating and/or fire-retardant coating). 2.Industrial steel structure installation procedures Component inspection→Foundation review→Steel column installation→Support installation→Beam installation→Platform board (layer board, roof board) installation→Enclosure structure installation.
(3) Steel structure fastening connection requirements
1.General provisions (2) Steel structure manufacturing and installation units should conduct anti-slip coefficient tests on the friction surfaces of high-strength bolt connections in accordance with the relevant provisions of the current national standard "Construction Quality Acceptance Standard for Steel Structure Engineering" GB 50205-2020, and the results should comply with design requirements. When the strength design of high-strength bolted connection nodes is based on pressure-bearing connections or tension-type connections, the test of the anti-slip coefficient of the friction surface does not need to be carried out. 2. Requirements for high-strength bolt connections (1) The friction surface of the high-strength bolt connection can be treated according to the requirements of the design anti-slip coefficient, and the anti-slip coefficient should meet the design requirements. When grinding with a manual grinding wheel, the grinding direction should be perpendicular to the force direction, and the grinding range should not be less than 4 times the bolt hole diameter. (2) Friction surface requirements for high-strength bolt connections after surface treatment: ① The connecting friction surface should be kept dry and clean, and should be free of flash, burrs, welding spatter, welding scars, iron oxide scale, dirt, etc.; ② The treated friction surface should be protected and no markings should be made on the friction surface; ③ When the friction surface is treated with rust, the floating rust on the friction surface should be removed with a fine wire brush perpendicular to the stress direction of the component before installation. (3) The high-strength large hexagonal head bolt connection pair should be composed of one bolt, one nut and two washers; the torsion-shear type high-strength bolt connection pair should be composed of one bolt, one nut and one washer.
(4) Steel component assembly and steel structure installation requirements
1. The distance between the flange plate joints and the web joints of welded H-shaped steel should not be less than 200mm; The splicing length of flange plates should not be less than 600mm; The web splicing width should not be less than 300mm, and the length should not be less than 600mm.
2. The crane beam and crane truss should not deflect after being installed in place. 3. When installing multi-section columns, the positioning axis of each column should be directed upward from the ground control axis and not from the axis of the lower column to avoid excessive cumulative errors. 4. After the steel grid structure is assembled and the roof project is completed, its deflection value should be measured separately, and the measured deflection should not exceed 1.15 times the corresponding design value.
2H313060 Automation instrument engineering installation technology
2H313061 Installation procedures and requirements for automated instruments
1. Construction preparation for automatic instrument installation
(3) Construction site preparation
2. Calibration and testing before instrument installation should be conducted indoors, and the setting of the instrument calibration room should meet the following requirements: (1) Places with large vibration, dust, noise and strong magnetic field interference should be avoided. (2) There should be AC and DC power supplies and instrument air sources that meet the adjustment requirements. (3) The room should be kept clean, quiet, well-lit, and well-ventilated. (4) The indoor temperature is maintained between 10 and 35°C, and the relative air humidity is not greater than 85%. (5) The power supply voltage for instrument testing should be stable. The voltage fluctuation range of AC power supply and DC power supply above 60V should be ±10%. The DC power supply voltage fluctuation range below 60V should be ±5%.
(4) Preparation of construction machinery and standard instruments
2. Standard instruments and instruments used for instrument calibration and testing should have valid metrological verification certificates, and the absolute value of their basic error should not exceed 1/3 of the absolute value of the basic error of the instrument being calibrated.
(5) Inspection and storage of instrument equipment and materials
2. Storage requirements for instrument equipment and materials (1) Precision equipment such as measuring instruments, control instruments, computers and external equipment should be stored in an insulated warehouse with a temperature of 5 to 40°C and a relative humidity of no more than 80%. (2) Actuators, various wires, valves, non-ferrous metals, high-quality steel, pipe fittings and general electrical equipment should be stored in a dry closed warehouse. (3) When the equipment is moved from an environment with a temperature below -5°C into an insulated warehouse, it should be placed in the warehouse for 24 hours before unpacking. (4) The storage period of instrument equipment and materials before installation should not exceed 1 year.
2. Main construction procedures for automated instrument installation
1. Principles of installation and construction of automated instruments (1) Principles of construction of automated instruments: civil construction first and then installation; first underground and then above ground; first install equipment and then piping and wiring; first two ends (control room, local panel, and field instruments) and then the middle (cable trough, junction box, protection pipes, cables, wires and instrumentation ducts, etc.). (2) The principles that should be followed when installing instrument equipment: inside first, then outside; first high, then low; first heavy, then light. (3) The principles that should be followed in instrument calibration: first obtain evidence and then verify; first single calibration and then joint calibration; first single loop and then complex loops; first single point and then network.
2. Automated instrument installation and construction procedures Construction preparation → Preparation and installation of panel cabinet foundation → Installation of panel cabinets and operation desks → Installation of cable troughs and junction boxes (boxes) → Installation of source components → Single instrument calibration, adjustment and installation → Installation of instrument pipelines → Cable laying → Instrument power supply equipment Test → Comprehensive control system test → Loop test, system test → Put into operation → Preparation of completion data → Handover and acceptance.
3. Instrument pipeline installation and construction procedures
(1) Type of instrument pipeline Instrument pipelines include measuring pipelines, pneumatic signal pipelines, gas source pipelines, hydraulic pipelines and heat tracing pipelines, etc.
(2) Instrument pipeline installation and construction procedures Outbound inspection of pipes and fittings → rust removal and primary anti-corrosion of pipes and brackets → valve pressure test → pipeline prefabrication and installation → pressure test and purging (cleaning) of pipes → secondary anti-corrosion of pipes and brackets.
3. Automation instrument installation and construction content
1. Installation and testing of instrument equipment (2) Testing of main instrument equipment. Calibration and adjustment of individual instruments; testing of temperature detection instruments, pressure detection instruments, flow detection instruments, level detection instruments, mechanical quantity detection instruments, component analysis and physical property detection instruments and actuators, etc.
3. Central control room installation (2) Main work content: Production and installation of steel foundations for panels, cabinets, and operating consoles; installation of panels, cabinets, and operating consoles; installation of grounding systems and control instruments in control rooms; installation of comprehensive control system equipment; installation and testing of instrument power equipment; internal carding component test; comprehensive control system test; loop test and system test (including detection loop test, control loop test, alarm system, program control system and interlocking system test).
4. Handover and acceptance: (1) After the loop test and system test of the instrument engineering are completed, the system can be put into operation. (2) After the instrument project has been opened and put into normal operation for 48 consecutive hours, the handover and acceptance conditions will be met. (3) Prepare and submit instrument project completion data.
2H313062 Technical requirements for installation of automated instrumentation equipment
1. Installation requirements for automated instrumentation equipment
1. General provisions for installation of instrument equipment (5) Instruments installed directly on the pipeline should be installed after the pipeline is purged. When they must be installed at the same time as the pipeline, the instrument should be removed before the pipeline is purged. (6) Instruments installed directly on equipment or pipelines should be pressure tested after installation. (7) The junction box (box) on the instrument should be sealed, and the inlet should not be facing upward.
3. Installation of temperature detection instruments ① If the temperature measuring element is installed in a location susceptible to strong impact from the material being measured, anti-bending measures should be taken according to the design documents. ②The temperature bulb of the pressure thermometer must be completely immersed in the object being measured. ③ When installing temperature measuring components in dusty areas, measures should be taken to prevent wear and tear. ④The temperature-sensing surface of the surface thermometer should be in close contact with the surface of the object being measured and should be firmly fixed. ⑤The temperature measuring element of the temperature detection instrument should be installed in a position that can accurately reflect the temperature of the object being measured.
4. Installation of pressure detection instruments ①The installation height of the pressure gauge or transmitter for measuring low pressure should be consistent with the height of the pressure point. ② When the pressure gauge for measuring high pressure is installed near the operating position, it should be more than 1.8m away from the operating surface, or a protective cover should be added to the front of the instrument. ③ The pressure gauge installed on site should not be fixed on equipment or pipes with strong vibration.
5. Installation of flow detection instruments ② The signal lines of turbine flowmeters and vortex flowmeters should use shielded wires, and the length of their upstream and downstream straight pipe sections should comply with the provisions of the design documents. ③The mass flow meter should be installed on a horizontal pipe that is completely filled with the fluid to be measured. When measuring gas, the box tube should be placed above the pipe. When measuring liquid, the box tube should be placed below the pipe. The flow direction of the fluid in the vertical pipe should be from bottom to top. ④The installation of electromagnetic flowmeter should comply with the following regulations: The flowmeter shell, the measured fluid and the pipe connection flange should be connected to equipotential grounding; When installed on a vertical pipeline, the flow direction of the measured fluid should be from bottom to top. When installed on a horizontal pipeline, the two measuring electrodes should not be directly above and below the pipeline; The length of the straight pipe section upstream of the flow meter and the installation support method should comply with the design documents. ⑤ The length of the upstream and downstream straight pipe sections of the ultrasonic flowmeter should comply with the design documents; for horizontal pipes, the position of the transducer should be within an angle of 45° with the horizontal straight line; the inner wall of the measured pipe should not have any structure that affects the measurement accuracy. scale or coating.
6. Installation of level detection instruments ① The float level gauge should be installed so that the float is vertical and at the height of the normal operating liquid level or boundary liquid level in the center of the float.
7. Installation of component analysis and physical property testing instruments ②The installation location of combustible gas detectors and toxic gas detectors should be determined based on the density of the gas being detected.
2. Installation requirements for source components of automated instruments
1. General provisions for installation of source components ① The installation of source components should be carried out at the same time as process equipment manufacturing or process pipeline prefabrication and installation. ② The drilling and welding of the source components must be carried out before the anti-corrosion, lining, purging and pressure test of the process pipeline or equipment. ③ When drilling holes in high-pressure, alloy steel, and non-ferrous metal process pipelines and equipment, mechanical processing methods should be used. ④ The source components installed on masonry and concrete pouring bodies should be buried at the same time as masonry or pouring. When this is not possible, installation holes should be reserved. ⑤ When installing source components, holes and welding should not be made on the weld seam and its edges. ⑥When the equipment and pipelines have insulation layers, the installed source components should be exposed outside the insulation layer. ⑦After the source components are installed, pressure tests should be conducted simultaneously with the equipment and pipelines.
2. Installation requirements for temperature source components (1) Installation position of temperature source components It should be selected in a place where the temperature of the medium changes sensitively and is representative. It should not be selected near resistance components such as valves, in places with dead ends in the medium flow stream, or in places with large vibrations. (2) Temperature source components and pipeline installation requirements 1) When the temperature source component is installed vertically to the pipeline, the axis of the source component should intersect perpendicularly with the axis of the pipeline. 2) When installing at the bend of the pipeline, it should be against the material flow direction, and the axis of the source component should coincide with the axis of the pipeline. 3) When installed at an oblique angle to the pipeline, it should be against the material flow direction, and the axis of the source component should intersect with the axis of the pipeline.
3. Pressure source components and pipeline installation requirements (1) Installation requirements on horizontal and inclined pipelines 1) When measuring gas pressure, the location of the pressure point is in the upper half of the pipe. 2) When measuring liquid pressure, the position of the pressure point should be within the range of 0 to 45° between the lower half of the pipe and the horizontal centerline of the pipe. 3) When measuring steam pressure, the position of the pressure point should be within the range of 0 to 45° between the upper half of the pipeline or the lower half and the horizontal centerline of the pipeline. (2) Requirements when the pressure source component and the temperature source component are on the same pipe section The pressure source component is on the upstream side of the temperature source component.
4. Installation requirements for flow source components and pipelines (1) The minimum length of the straight pipe section upstream and downstream of the flow source component should comply with the provisions of the design document. (2) No other source components or detection components shall be installed within the minimum length of the upstream and downstream straight pipe sections. (3) The inner surface of the straight pipe section should be clean and free of pits and protrusions. (4) When using a pressure equalizing ring to take pressure, the pressure taking holes should be evenly arranged on the same section, and the number of upstream and downstream pressure taking holes should be equal. (5) When the throttling device is installed on a horizontal or inclined pipeline, the position of the pressure port should meet the following requirements: ①When measuring gas flow, the pressure port should be in the upper half of the pipe. ② When measuring liquid flow, the pressure port should be within the range of 0 to 45° between the lower half of the pipe and the horizontal centerline of the pipe. ③When measuring steam, the pressure port should be within the range of 0 to 45° between the upper half of the pipe and the horizontal centerline of the pipe. (6) Orifice plate installation requirements: ① When using different pressure tapping methods, the requirements for the diameter of the pressure tapping hole are different, but they all require that the axis of the pressure tapping hole intersects perpendicularly with the axis of the pipeline, and The diameters of the pressure holes on the upstream and downstream sides should be equal. ② When the orifice plate uses a separately drilled corner joint for pressure measurement, the diameter of the pressure measurement hole should be between 4 and 10 mm. ③When using flange to take pressure, the diameter of the pressure taking hole should be between 6~12mm.
5. Installation requirements for level source components (1) The installation position of the level source component should be selected in a place where the level changes sensitively and where the detection element will not be impacted by the material.
6. Analyze the installation requirements of source components. ① The analysis source components should be installed at a location where the pressure is stable, can sensitively reflect the true composition changes, and obtain representative analysis samples. ② There should be no laminar flow, eddy current, air infiltration, dead ends, material blockage or non-production process chemical reactions around the sampling point. ③When installing the analysis source component on a horizontal or inclined pipeline, the installation orientation requirements and the pressure point requirements of the pressure source component are required same.
3. Instrument test
1. The instrument should be inspected, calibrated and tested before installation and use. Calibration and testing before instrument installation should be performed indoors. 2. Instrument engineering should conduct loop testing before the system is put into use. The power supply and gas source for the instrument loop test should be supplied by official power supply and gas source. 3. Calibration and testing of instruments that prohibit oil and degreasing in the design document must be carried out in accordance with the regulations. 4. Standard instruments used for instrument calibration and testing should have valid metrological verification certificates, and the absolute value of their basic error should not exceed 1/3 of the absolute value of the basic error of the instrument being calibrated. When selecting standard instruments for testing, ensure that their accuracy is at least one level higher than that of the instrument being calibrated. 5. Calibration and test records should be filled in for the calibration and testing of a single instrument; there should be test status identification and serial number identification on the instrument; seals and paint seals should be added to the parts of the instrument that require seals and paint seals. 6. The calibration test points of the temperature detection instrument should not be less than 2 points. The indication error of the direct display thermometer should comply with the regulations on instrument accuracy. Thermocouples and thermal resistors can test components at room temperature, and thermoelectric performance testing is not required. 7. In addition to the input and output characteristics testing and calibration of pressure and differential pressure transmitters, their accuracy should comply with the provisions of the design documents. The input and output signal range and type should be consistent with the nameplate identification and design documents, and should be consistent with the display instrument. Matching. Zero point, span adjustment and zero point migration adjustment should also be carried out according to the design documents and usage requirements. 8. The float type liquid level gauge can be calibrated using the dry calibration method or the wet calibration method. The determination of the hanging weight for the dry calibration method and the conversion of the test medium density for the wet calibration method should comply with the requirements of the product's design and use conditions. The tank level gauge and material level gauge can be calibrated directly by simulating the material level after installation. 9. The insulation resistance between the live parts of the power supply equipment and the metal shell, when measured with a 500V megger, should not be less than 5MΩ. 10. Before the loop test and system test of the integrated control system, the system itself should be tested in the control room. The test items should include relevant functional tests of the hardware and software of each operating station, engineering station, controller, personal computer and management computer, bus and communication network and other equipment that make up the system. The test of the integrated control system shall be carried out in accordance with the approved test plan. 12. The test of the control loop should comply with the following requirements: (1) The action direction of the controller and actuator should comply with the design document requirements. (2) Send a control signal to the actuator through the output of the controller or operating station, and check that the actuator's full stroke direction and position should be correct. When the actuator is equipped with a positioner, it should be tested at the same time. 13. The test of the detection loop should meet the following requirements: (1) Input a standard signal that simulates the measured variable at the signal input end of the detection loop. The indication error of the display instrument part of the loop should not exceed the square root of the sum of the squares of the basic errors allowed for each single instrument in the loop. (2) The temperature detection loop can input a resistance value or millivolt analog signal to the loop at the output end of the detection element. (3) If there is no loop for simulating the signal of the measured variable on site, the loop test should be carried out by inputting the signal at the front end that can simulate the input signal. 14. The test of the alarm system should meet the following requirements: (1) Instruments and equipment with alarm signals in the system, including various detection alarm switches, alarm output components and contacts of the instrument, should be adjusted according to the setting values specified in the design document. (2) Simulate the input signal at the signal generating end of the alarm circuit and check that the alarm lighting, sound and screen display should be correct. After the alarm point is set, a seal should be added to the adjustment device. (3) The alarm silencer, reset and recording functions should be correct. 15. The testing of program control systems and interlocking systems should meet the following requirements: (1) The hardware and software function tests of the program control system and interlocking system related devices should have been completed, and the system-related loop tests should have been completed. (2) The action settings of each relevant instrument and component in the system should be adjusted according to the design documents. (3) For systems with many interlocking points and complex procedures, the test can be carried out item by section first, and then the overall inspection and test can be carried out. (4) The test of the program control system should be carried out step by step according to the steps of program design. Its condition determination, logical relationship, action time and output status should all comply with the design documents. (5) When performing system function tests, instruments that have been tested and adjusted and qualified and the alarm output contacts of the detection alarm switches can be used to directly send out simulated condition signals. (6) During system testing, relevant professionals should be cooperated to jointly confirm the correctness of program operation and interlocking protection conditions and functions, and necessary measures should be taken for the operating status and safety protection of relevant equipment and devices during the testing process. 16. The integrated control system can first perform a loop test in the control room with the input and output terminals connected to the field lines, and then connect it to the field instruments to test the entire loop.
2H313070 Anti-corrosion and thermal insulation engineering construction technology
2H313071 Technical requirements for anti-corrosion engineering construction
1. Anti-corrosion
1. Anti-corrosion is to protect metal items that are prone to rust by adopting various means to extend their service life. Chemical anti-corrosion, physical anti-corrosion, electrochemical anti-corrosion and other methods are usually used. 2. Chemical corrosion protection is to change the internal structure of metal. For example, adding chromium and nickel to ordinary non-alloy steel makes stainless steel. 3. Physical corrosion protection is to cover the metal surface with a protective layer. For example, painting, lining. 4. Electrochemical corrosion is the corrosion of metal in the electrolyte due to the action of micro batteries formed on the metal surface. Electrochemical protection is divided into cathodic protection with impressed current and cathodic protection with sacrificial anodes. 5. Surface pretreatment refers to the process of removing attachments and generated oxides on the surface of the workpiece before painting, and improving the surface roughness, improving the adhesion between the workpiece surface and the coating, or giving the surface a certain corrosion resistance. Call pre-processing.
2. Anti-corrosion construction technology
(1) Surface treatment
1. Surface treatment method (1) Before painting, surface treatment methods include mechanical treatment, chemical treatment, electrochemical treatment, degreasing, electrochemical degreasing, rust removal, correction, pickling, flame cleaning, spray treatment, etc. Commonly used methods include tool cleaning, mechanical treatment, spraying or projectile treatment.
Mechanical treatment
Spraying, shot blasting, etc.
chemical treatment
Degreasing, chemical degreasing, immersion degreasing, spray degreasing, ultrasonic degreasing, conversion treatment
Tool cleaning
Handmade, powered. Hand tools include wire brushes, coarse sandpaper, shovels, scrapers, or similar hand tools. Power tools include rotating wire brushes, electric grinders or rust removers, etc.
spray treatment
Dry blasting, wet blasting, sandblasting, shot blasting, granular blasting
conversion processing
Phosphating, chromate passivation, passivation
2. Key points of construction technology (1) When selecting a surface treatment method, the required treatment level should be considered. When necessary, the surface roughness compatible with the proposed coating system should also be considered. The cost of surface treatment is usually proportional to the level of cleanliness, so a treatment level should be selected that is compatible with the requirements of the coating system, or a coating system that is compatible with the treatment level that can be achieved.
A
A large area of steel surface covered with oxide scale and almost no rust
B
Steel surfaces that have been corroded and the oxide scale has begun to peel off
C
The oxide scale has peeled off due to rust, or can be scraped off, and the steel surface is slightly pitted under normal vision.
D
The oxide scale has peeled off due to rust, and the steel surface is generally pitted and corroded under normal vision.
(3) Tool processing levels are divided into two levels: St2 level and St3 level; The quality levels of spray treatment are divided into four levels: Sa1, Sa2, Sa2.5 and Sa3.
(4) Requirements and treatment of weld surface 1) The surface of the butt weld should be smooth and free of pores, weld nodules and slag inclusions. The weld height should be less than or equal to 2mm and the transition should be smooth. 2) The welds at the corners of the equipment and the connecting parts should be full and smooth without burrs. The edges and corners should be ground into obtuse angles and form arc transitions. 3) The fillet part of the fillet weld, the height of the welding corner, the welding arc radius of the protruding corner and the welding arc radius of the inner corner should meet the requirements. 4) When removing the assembly fixture, the base material must not be damaged.
(5) Before anti-corrosion coating of solvent-free epoxy liquid coating, the following provisions are required according to GB/T 31361-2015: 1) The edges and corners of the base material surface should first be ground into rounded corners with R≥2mm. The welding seam should be free of sharp corners, depressions, pores, cracks, gaps and welding slag; cleaning the surface of the base material can easily cause pinholes and coating thickness. Uneven blemishes and defects. 2) Use appropriate methods to clean dust, grease and other contaminants on the surface of the substrate. 3) The surface of the base material must be sandblasted or shot blasted in accordance with the provisions of the GB/T 8923.1-2011 specification. The rust removal quality must reach Sa2.5 level and above, and the roughness must meet the requirements specified in the GB/T 1031-2009 specification. Rz30~100μm range. 4) Use purified compressed air or a metal brush to remove the residue remaining on the surface of the substrate due to the above process. The dust level should not exceed level 2 specified in the GB/T18570.3-2005 specification.
(2) Painting
1.Painting method (1) Coating methods include: manual painting, spraying, electrophoretic coating, autophoretic coating, dip coating, shower coating, rub coating, curtain coating, roller coating, etc. (2) Spraying methods are divided into: air spraying, high-pressure airless spraying, heated spraying, electrostatic spraying, powder electrostatic spraying, flame spraying, and automatic spraying.
2. Painting technical requirements (1) The coating process is the entire process of coating application in the coating operation. Including the preparation of paint, transportation of workpieces, various methods of coating, drying or curing, sanding and puttying and other processes. (2) Coating coatings should include epoxy resin coatings, polyurethane coatings, chlorinated rubber coatings, highly chlorinated polyethylene coatings, chlorosulfonated polyethylene coatings, acrylic resin modified coatings, silicone heat-resistant coatings, and fluorine coatings , zinc-rich coatings (organic, inorganic) and primer coatings. (3) When the coating enters the site, in addition to providing product quality certification documents, the supplier should also provide requirements such as surface treatment of the coating substrate and construction technology. Product quality certification documents should include: product quality certificate; quality technical indicators and testing methods; material testing reports or technical appraisal documents. (4) The construction environment temperature should be 5 to 30°C, and the relative humidity should not be greater than 85%, or the surface temperature of the coated substrate should be 3°C higher than the dew point temperature. (5) Water-based anti-corrosion coatings for steel structures are divided into primers, intermediate paints and topcoats.
(6) Coatings and related chemicals should comply with the following regulations: 1) Painting processes, coatings and related chemicals that are strictly prohibited or prohibited from use shall not be provided; 2) Safety technical information on coating processes, coatings and related chemicals should be provided to the contractor.
(3) Lining
1. Cement mortar lining (1) The cement mortar lining adopts single prefabrication or overall pipeline coating method. (2) Among the pipe sections constructed on site, the specifications of the steel pipes should be the same. Pipe sections of different diameters should be grouped separately and cement mortar lining construction should be carried out in sections. For on-site construction pipe sections, cleaning, assembly, welding, non-destructive testing, strength testing, tightness testing, external anti-corrosion layer patching and repairing, and acceptance must be completed before cement mortar lining construction.
2. Rubber lining (1) Heated vulcanized rubber lining (2) Natural vulcanized rubber lining (3) Pre-vulcanized rubber lining
3.Block lining
(4) Anti-corrosion engineering construction safety technology
1. Before painting operations, painting process documents should be prepared and corresponding protective measures should be formulated, which should include the following: (1) Harmful, dangerous factors, names, quantities and maximum allowable concentrations of toxic and hazardous substances in the process; (2) Protective measures; (3) Emergency measures in case of failure; (4) Safety technical operation requirements; (5) Coating process demonstration materials that are prohibited or restricted in use must not be used.
2. The painting workplace should be equipped with corresponding fire extinguishing equipment as required, set up safety signs, and be managed by a dedicated person.
3. Use rapid measurement methods and on-site tracking and monitoring.
4. Operation in limited space For the safety of internal coating and lining operations on equipment and pipelines, the following measures should be taken: (1) Go through the operation approval procedures; mark out no-fire zones; set up warning lines and safety warning signs. (2) Separate or isolate non-operating systems and remove flammable materials inside and around them. (3) Set up mechanical ventilation.
2H313072 Technical requirements for thermal insulation engineering construction
1. Technical requirements for thermal insulation layer construction
(1) Thickness and width
1. When using a thermal insulation product, the thickness of the thermal insulation layer is greater than or equal to 100mm, and the thickness of the cold insulation layer is greater than or equal to 80mm, it should be divided into two or more layers and constructed layer by layer. The thickness of each layer should be close to each other. 3. The joint width of rigid or semi-rigid thermal insulation products should not be greater than 5mm when used as a thermal insulation layer, and should not be greater than 2mm when used as a cold insulation layer.
(2) Seams
1. When constructing the thermal insulation layer, the same layer should be staggered, the upper and lower layers should be pressed, and the overlap length should not be less than 100mm. 2. The longitudinal joint position of horizontal pipes shall not be arranged within 45° of the vertical centerline of the pipe. When multiple pieces of rigid molded insulation products with large pipe diameters are used, the longitudinal joint position of the insulation layer does not need to be restricted by this restriction, but it should deviate from the vertical centerline of the pipe.
4. Requirements for expansion joints and expansion gaps:
① When equipment or pipes use hard insulation products, expansion joints should be left. ② At least one expansion joint of the horizontal pipe insulation layer between the two fixed pipe racks should be left. ③For vertical equipment and vertical pipelines, expansion joints should be left under the supports and flanges. ⑥The width of expansion joints should be 25mm for equipment and 20mm for pipes. ⑦ The expansion joints of the insulation layer should be tightly filled with mineral fiber felt strips, ropes, etc., and should be tied and fixed. The outside of the expansion joints of high-temperature equipment and pipeline insulation layers should be insulated. ⑧The expansion joints of the cold insulation layer should be tightly packed with soft insulation products or squeezed into foaming adhesive, and the outside should be sealed with a 50mm wide non-drying tape. Cold insulation should be provided outside the expansion joints of the cold insulation layer. ⑨ Setting up multi-layer insulation layer expansion joints: The expansion joints of each layer of the medium and low-temperature insulation layer do not need to be staggered; the expansion joints of each layer of the cold insulation layer and the high-temperature insulation layer must be staggered, and the staggering distance should be greater than 100mm.
⑩ When constructing the expansion gap, an expansion gap must be left on the other side of the expansion movement direction when one of the following conditions occurs: 1) Packing compensator and waveform compensator; 2) When the height of the sliding bearing is less than the thickness of the insulation layer; 3) Between the insulation structures of adjacent pipes; 4) Between the thermal insulation structure and the holes through which fixed components such as walls, beams, railings, platforms, supports and pipes pass.
(3) Attachments
1. Insulation equipment and accessories such as skirts, supports, lifting lugs, instrument pipe holders, supports and hangers on pipelines should be insulated. When there are no regulations in the design, insulation is not necessary. 2. Cold insulation equipment and accessories such as skirts, supports, lifting lugs, instrument pipe holders, supports and hangers on pipelines must be kept cold, and the length of the cold insulation layer must not be less than 4 times the thickness of the cold insulation layer or laid to the pad. The thickness of the cold insulation layer should be 1/2 of the thickness of the adjacent cold insulation layer, but not less than 40mm. Equipment skirts should be insulated inside and out. 3. The insulation layer after construction shall not cover the equipment nameplate.
(4) Construction by bundling method
1.General requirements ① Bundling spacing: for hard thermal insulation products, it should not be larger than 400mm; for semi-rigid thermal insulation products, it should not be larger than 300mm; for soft thermal insulation products, it should be 200mm. ② There should be no less than two strapping parts on each piece of thermal insulation product; the strapping should be strengthened for parts with vibration. ③Spiral wrapping is not allowed. ④ Insulation products with double or multiple layers of insulation should be bundled layer by layer, and the surfaces of each layer should be leveled and tightly seamed. 3. Covering with hard thermal insulation products For rigid thermal insulation products that are not allowed to be perforated, the hooks should be placed at the seams of the product; for rigid thermal insulation products that are drilled and hung, the holes and seams should be filled with mineral wool.
4. Equipment insulation ① When the insulation layer of vertical equipment or vertical pipes is constructed with hard or semi-rigid insulation products, it should be assembled from the bottom up starting from the supporting parts. The insulation should be circumferentially bundled with galvanized iron wire or packaging steel tape, and the cold insulation should be Stainless steel wire or stainless steel belt for circumferential binding. ② When the horizontal equipment has a bracket, the thermal insulation layer should be assembled starting from the bracket. The thermal insulation should be bundled with galvanized wire mesh, and the cold insulation should be bundled circumferentially or longitudinally with stainless steel straps.
2. Technical requirements for moisture-proof layer construction
(1) General requirements
1. Outdoor construction should not be carried out in rain, snow or sunshine. 2. Hard binding parts such as steel wires and steel strips shall not be installed outside the moisture-proof layer. 3. The moisture-proof layer on the equipment cylinder and pipeline should be constructed continuously without any disconnection or fault. The sealing area of the moisture barrier should be closed. For example, when applying asphalt glue or waterproof cold glue, it should be fully applied to the specified thickness, and the surface should be even and smooth. The method of pasting can be spiral winding or flat laying. After drying, asphalt glue or waterproof cold glue should be applied to the surface of the glass cloth.
(3) Glass fiber cloth composite clay coating structure
① The circumferential joints between vertical equipment and vertical pipes should be overlapped up and down. The longitudinal joints of horizontal equipment and horizontal pipes should overlap on both sides, and the seams should face downwards. ② The fiberglass cloth should be applied and pasted along with the first layer of cement. The overlap width of its circumferential and longitudinal seams should not be less than 50mm. The overlap should be tightly pasted and no bubbles or hollows should appear. ③The method of pasting can be spiral winding or flat laying. ④After the first layer of glue is dry, apply the second layer of glue.
(4) Polyurethane or polyvinyl chloride membrane structure
1. The overlap width of the circumferential and longitudinal seams of the rolled material should not be less than 50mm, or should comply with the requirements of the product instruction manual. The adhesive at the overlap should be full and dense. If the coiled product is required to be fully coated and pasted, the construction should be carried out according to the product instruction manual. 2. For pasting, the spiral winding method or the flat laying method can be used according to the width of the rolled material, the size of the pasted parts and the specific conditions of the on-site construction. 3. When the moisture-proof layer is constructed using composite aluminum foil, coated elastomer and other composite materials, the joints should be tight and the thickness or number of layers should comply with the requirements of the design documents.
3. Technical requirements for protective layer construction
(1) Technical requirements for metal protective layer construction
1.General requirements
(1) The joints of the metal protective layer can be in the form of overlapping, snapping, inserting and embedding. The protective layer should be installed close to the insulation layer or moisture-proof layer. The longitudinal joints of the metal protective layer can be overlapped or bite-jointed; Circumferential seams can be inserted or lapped. The indoor outer protective layer structure should be in the form of overlap. (3) The profiled plate should be installed from bottom to top. (5) The laying of the metal protective layer of vertical pipelines or equipment should be carried out from bottom to top, and the joints should be overlapped along the water.
2. Equipment thermal insulation protective layer
(1) The joints and ribs of the metal protective layer of equipment and large storage tanks are arranged in a staggered chessboard shape. (2) The metal protective layer on vertical equipment, vertical pipelines or inclined vertical pipelines with a slope greater than 45° should be fixed to the supporting parts in sections. (3) The metal protective layer of the thermal insulation layer of stationary equipment and rotating machinery should be laid from bottom to top. Circumferential joints should be lapped or plugged, and longitudinal joints can be bite-jointed or lapped. The size of the lapped or plugged joints should be 30 to 50mm. The metal protective layer of the thermal insulation layer on the top of flat-top equipment should be constructed according to the slope specified in the design.
3. Pipe insulation protective layer
(1) The circumferential joints of the metal protective layer of horizontal pipelines should be overlapped along the slope of the pipeline and along the water. The longitudinal joints should be arranged at 15° to 45° below the horizontal center line, and the seams should be facing downward. When there are obstacles on the sides or bottom, the longitudinal joints may be moved to within 60° above the horizontal centerline of the pipe. (2) The longitudinal joints of the metal protective layer of the pipeline, when it is a cold-insulation structure, should be fixed with metal hoops, and the spacing should be 250~300mm; when it is a thermal insulation structure, self-tapping screws or blind rivets can be used, the spacing should be It should be 150~200mm, and the spacing should be uniform. (3) When installing the metal protective layer at the pipe tee, the intersection between the branch pipe and the main pipe should be flanged and fixed, and overlapped along the water. When the vertical pipe and the horizontal straight pipe intersect at the lower part of the horizontal pipe, the vertical pipe should be wrapped first and then the horizontal pipe; when the vertical pipe and the horizontal straight pipe intersect at the upper part of the horizontal pipe, the horizontal pipe should be wrapped first and then the vertical pipe.
(4) The circumferential joints of the expansion parts of the metal protective layer of pipelines, the expansion parts of the protective layers of stationary equipment and rotating mechanisms should all adopt movable joints. The joints should meet the requirements of thermal expansion and must not be fixed. The spacing should meet the following requirements: ①The movable joints of rigid thermal insulation products should be consistent with the position of the expansion joints of the insulation layer; ②Spacing of movable joints of semi-rigid and soft thermal insulation products, Medium and low temperature pipelines should be 4000~6000mm, High temperature pipes should be 3000~4000mm.
(2) Technical requirements for construction of non-metallic protective layers
3. When using fiberglass protective layer, the following regulations should be met: (1) FRP can be divided into prefabricated and on-site production, and can be connected by pasting, riveting, and assembly methods.
2H313080 Construction technology of furnace and kiln masonry engineering
2H313081 Construction procedures and requirements for furnace and kiln masonry projects
1. Classification of industrial furnaces
According to its production process, it can be divided into two categories: dynamic kiln and static kiln.
2. Classification and performance of refractory materials
(1) Classification according to chemical properties
Classified by chemical properties
Characteristics
For example
Acid refractory materials
Acid resistance
Silica bricks, zirconium sand bricks
Alkaline refractory materials
Alkali resistance
Magnesia bricks, magnesia aluminum bricks, dolomite bricks
Neutral refractory materials
Acid resistance Alkali resistance
Acid resistance Alkali resistance corundum brick, high alumina brick, carbon brick
(6) Types and properties of other refractory materials
1. Refractory ceramic fibers and products (1) Refractory fiber is also called ceramic fiber performance: ①High temperature resistance ②Good thermal insulation performance and high thermal insulation efficiency ③Good chemical stability ④ Good resistance to thermal shock, rapid heat and rapid cooling ⑤Good insulation and sound insulation performance
2. Expansion joint filling material Good stretchability, such as refractory ceramic fiber, PVC board, foamed styrene, etc.
4. Protective materials Such as anti-oxidation materials, surface curing materials, brick joint sealing materials, etc.
3. Regulations on process handover before furnace and kiln masonry construction
The masonry work of the furnace kiln should be completed after the furnace skeleton structure and related equipment have been installed, and the construction can only be carried out after passing the inspection and signing the handover certificate.
(1) Contents of process handover certificate: ① Measurement records of the furnace centerline, control elevation and necessary settlement observation points. ②Certificate of acceptance of concealed projects. ③ Pressure test records of the furnace body cooling device, pipes and furnace shell and certificate of passing the welding tightness test. ④Retest records of the main dimensions of the steel structure and the installation location of the track lights in the furnace. ⑤Certificate of successful trial operation of the dynamic kiln or the movable part of the furnace. ⑥ Inspection certificate of the position, size and welding quality of the supporting brick plates and anchors in the furnace. ⑦Protection requirements for the results of the previous process.
4. Construction procedures of refractory brick masonry
(1) Construction procedures of dynamic furnaces 1. Dynamic kiln masonry can only be carried out after the single machine of the kiln has passed the no-load test operation and been accepted. 2. The basic sequence of masonry: starting point selection (from hot end to cold end or from low end to high end) → segmented work marking → brick selection (according to different use locations and working temperatures, select refractory bricks of different materials ) For example, when building a rotary kiln, the self-heating end to the cold end is divided into several sections for circumferential masonry. The length of each section: each section for wet masonry should not be more than 1m, and each section for dry masonry should not be more than 2m.
(2) Construction procedures of static furnaces The construction procedures for static kiln masonry are basically the same as those for dynamic kilns. The difference is: ①Masonry can be carried out without no-load test operation; ②The masonry sequence must be carried out from bottom to top; ③No matter which masonry method is used, each ring of bricks can be completed at one time; ④ The arching part should be built from both sides to the middle, and the arch tires should be pressed and fixed. After the brick locking is completed, the arch tires should be removed.
2H313082 Construction technical requirements for refractory materials
3. Technical requirements for refractory brick masonry construction
(1) Technical requirements for bottom and wall masonry 1. Before building the furnace bottom, the foundation should be leveled in advance. 4. The reverse arch base should be built symmetrically from the center to both sides. 6. The circular furnace wall should be built according to the center line. 7. Curved walls should be laid out according to the template. 9. The circular furnace wall shall not have three layers of heavy seams or three-ring through seams, and the upper and lower layers of heavy seams and the through seams of the adjacent two rings shall not be at the same location. The door bricks of the circular furnace wall should be evenly distributed. 10. When laying bricks, wooden mallets or rubber hammers should be used for alignment. Iron hammers should not be used. When the bricklaying is interrupted or the bricks are removed due to rework, a ladder-shaped sloping should be made. 11. The location of expansion joints should avoid stress-bearing parts, the furnace frame and holes in the masonry. The expansion joints in the inner and outer layers of masonry should not penetrate each other, and the upper and lower layers should be staggered from each other.
(2) Technical requirements for arch and vault masonry construction 5. Lock bricks should be distributed symmetrically and evenly according to the center line of the arch and vault. The number of locking bricks driven in is based on the specified span. The depth of locking bricks into arches and vaults should be 2/3 to 3/4 of the brick length, and the depth of locking bricks into arches and vaults should be consistent. When driving the locking bricks, the symmetrical locking bricks on both sides should be driven in evenly at the same time. A wooden mallet should be used to lock bricks, and a wooden block should be used as a backing when using a hammer. Locking bricks with more than 1/3 of the thickness cut off or with long sides cut into a wedge shape shall not be used, and bricks shall not be cut into masonry.
4. Technical requirements for construction of refractory castables
(1) Construction procedures of refractory castables Material inspection and acceptance → construction surface cleaning → anchor nail welding → formwork production and installation → waterproofing agent application → mixing of castables and making test blocks → pouring and vibrating → removal of formwork → reservation and filling of expansion joints → finished product maintenance.
(3) Technical requirements during construction 1. Clean water should be used for mixing refractory castables. 2. Formwork requirements for pouring: (1) It has sufficient strength and stiffness, the size of the formwork is accurate, and it prevents deformation during the construction process. (2) The joints of the formwork should be tight and there should be no leakage of slurry. (3) The template should take anti-adhesion measures. The surface of the insulating masonry in contact with the castables should be waterproofed. 4. The mixed refractory castable should be poured within 30 minutes.
5. Technical requirements for refractory spray coating construction
1. The spray paint should be sprayed using a semi-dry method. Before the spray paint is added to the sprayer, it should be properly moistened with water and stirred evenly. 2. When spraying, the material and water should be sprayed evenly and continuously, and no dry material or flow is allowed on the spray surface. 3. The spraying direction should be perpendicular to the sprayed surface. The distance between the nozzle and the sprayed surface should be 1~1.5m. The nozzle should continuously move in a spiral manner to make the coarse and fine particles evenly distributed. 4. Spraying should be carried out in sections and continuously, spraying to the designed thickness at one time. When the lining is thick and needs to be sprayed in layers, the second layer should be sprayed before the previous layer of spray paint solidifies. 5. When construction is interrupted, the joint should be made straight and moistened with water before continuing to spray. 6. After spraying, expansion sutures should be opened in time.
6. Refractory ceramic fiber construction technical requirements
The main methods of refractory ceramic fiber construction are: layer laying method, stacking method, stacking mixing method and refractory fiber spraying method.
1. General provisions: (2) Products must not be damp or squeezed; (3) When cutting products, the cuts should be neat; (4) The binder should be stirred evenly when used; (5) The pasting surface should be clean, dry, and flat, and the adhesive should be evenly applied on the pasting surface; (7) When constructing unshaped refractory materials on the refractory ceramic fiber lining, the surface should be waterproofed.
7. Technical requirements for winter construction
2. In addition to complying with the "Construction and Acceptance Specifications for Industrial Furnace Masonry Projects", winter construction of masonry projects should also comply with the following technical regulations: (1) Masonry should be carried out in a heating environment. The temperature at the work site and around the masonry should not be lower than 5°C. Refractory bricks and prefabricated blocks should be preheated to above 0℃ before masonry. After the masonry is completed, if the oven cannot be put into operation immediately, drying measures should be taken, and the temperature around the masonry should not be lower than 5°C. (2) The mixing of refractory mud and refractory castables should be carried out in the greenhouse. (4) Maintenance of refractory castables for winter construction: ① Cement refractory castables can be maintained using heat storage and heating methods. ② Dry heat method should be used for the maintenance of clay, water glass and phosphate cement castables.
8. Technical requirements for ovens
1. Main work in the oven stage ① Develop an oven plan for industrial furnaces; ② Prepare the tools and materials for the oven; ③Confirm the oven curve; ④Prepare the operation plan and emergency response plan during the drying period; ⑤ Determine and implement key monitoring points during the oven process.
2. Technical points of the oven (1) The oven should be carried out after the joint trial operation and adjustment of the mechanical and electrical equipment related to its production process have passed. (3) Industrial furnaces must be dried thoroughly before being put into production. The chimney and flue should be dried before oven drying. (4) The oven should develop oven curves and operating procedures. Its main contents include: oven period, heating speed, constant temperature time, maximum temperature, temperature for replacing the heating system, oven measures, operating procedures and emergency plans, etc. For kilns that need to be cooled after the oven, the cooling rate should be indicated in the oven curve. (5) The oven must be operated according to the oven curve. During the oven drying process, the actual oven curve should be measured and mapped.
2H314000 Building mechanical and electrical engineering construction technology
2H314010 Construction technology of building pipeline engineering
2H314011 Division and construction procedures of construction piping projects
1. Division of construction piping projects
The divisions, sub-divisions and sub-projects of construction pipeline engineering are shown in Table 2H314011. (Read on your own)
2. Construction procedures of building pipeline projects
(2) Water supply pipeline construction procedures
1. Indoor water supply pipeline construction procedures Construction preparation → Material acceptance → Cooperate with civil engineering reservation and burial → Pipeline mapping and laying out → Pipe bracket production → Pipe processing and prefabrication → Pipe bracket installation → Water supply equipment installation → Pipe and equipment installation → System pressure test → Anti-corrosion insulation → System cleaning, disinfect.
2. Construction procedures for outdoor water supply pipeline projects Construction preparation → Material acceptance → Pipeline mapping and laying out → Pipe trench excavation → Pipe processing and prefabrication → Pipe installation → System pressure test → Anti-corrosion and insulation → System flushing and disinfection → Pipe trench backfilling
(3) Drainage pipeline engineering construction procedures
1. Construction procedures for indoor drainage pipeline projects Construction preparation → Material acceptance → Cooperate with civil engineering reservation and pre-embedding → Pipeline mapping and laying out → Pipe support production → Pipe processing and prefabrication → Pipe support installation → Pipe and equipment installation → System irrigation test → System water and ball test.
2. Construction procedures for outdoor drainage pipe projects Construction preparation → Material acceptance → Pipeline mapping and laying out → Pipe trench excavation → Pipe processing and prefabrication → Pipe installation → Drainage pipe manhole construction → System closed water test → Anti-corrosion → System cleaning → System water test → Pipe trench backfilling.
2H314012 Construction technical requirements for construction pipelines
1. Commonly used connection methods for construction pipelines
Water supply system pipes should use qualified water supply cast iron pipes, galvanized steel pipes, water supply plastic pipes, composite pipes, copper pipes, and stainless steel pipes.
Connection form
Application
Threaded connection
Pipe diameter ≤ 100mm galvanized steel pipe, exposed pipe, steel-plastic composite pipe.
Flange connection
Larger diameter pipes, main roads and pipes that are frequently dismantled and inspected.
welding
Non-galvanized steel pipes, concealed pipes and larger diameter pipes, copper pipes.
Groove connection (clamp connection)
Diameter ≥ 100mm galvanized steel pipe or steel-plastic composite pipe.
Card sleeve type connection
Aluminum plastic composite pipe. Copper tube.
Snap connection
Thin-walled stainless steel water supply pipes.
Hot melt connection
PPR, HDPE and other plastic pipes.
Socket connection
Water supply and drainage cast iron pipes. Flexible connection --- rubber ring seal. rigid connection Connection---Seal with asbestos cement or intumescent filler. Use lead seal in important situations.
2. Key points of building pipeline construction technology
2. Materials and equipment management
(4) Before the valve is installed, the strength and tightness test should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the specification. The test should be conducted on 10% of each batch (same brand, same model, same specification), and no less than one. Closed-circuit valves installed on main pipes that have a cutting function should undergo strength and tightness tests one by one. The strength test pressure of the valve is 1.5 times the nominal pressure, and the tightness test pressure is 1.1 times the nominal pressure. (6) When the radiator comes into the site, its unit heat dissipation, metal thermal strength and other properties should be re-inspected; when the insulation material comes into the site, its thermal conductivity or thermal resistance, density, water absorption and other properties should be re-inspected; re-inspection Sampling inspection should be witnessed. Insulation materials of the same manufacturer and material must be retested no less than 2 times.
Notice: Industrial pipeline valves: shell pressure test and sealing test Construction pipeline valves: strength test and tightness test
4. Cooperate with civil engineering to reserve and bury
(2) If there are pipes passing through the outer walls of basements or underground structures, waterproofing measures should be taken. For buildings with strict waterproofing requirements, flexible waterproofing casings must be used. (3) When pipes pass through floor slabs, metal or plastic casings should be installed. The top of the casing installed in the floor slab should be 20mm above the decorative floor. The top of the casing installed in the bathroom and kitchen should be 50mm higher than the decorative floor, and the bottom should be level with the bottom of the floor. The gap between the casing and the pipe should be filled with flame-retardant dense material and waterproof ointment, and the end face should be smooth. (4) Metal or plastic casings should be installed when pipes pass through walls. Both ends of the casing should be flush with the finish. The gap between the casing and the pipe should be filled with fire-retardant dense materials, and the end faces should be smooth.
5. Pipe bracket production and installation
(4) Installation of indoor water supply metal riser pipe brackets: If the floor height is less than or equal to 5m, no less than 1 must be installed on each floor. If the floor height is greater than 5m, no less than 2 must be installed on each floor. The installation position must be well-proportioned. The height of the pipe bracket should be 1.5~1.8m from the ground. Pipe racks must be installed in the same area. The height should be consistent. (5) Grooved connection horizontal steel pipe supports and hangers should be installed on both sides of pipe joints (rigid joints, flexible joints, branch pipe joints) and upstream and downstream connection joints of tees, crosses, elbows, reducers and other pipe fittings On both sides, the clear distance between supports, hangers and joints should not be less than 150mm, and should not be greater than 300mm. (6) When plastic pipes are made of metal pipe supports, non-metallic pads or sleeves should be lined between the pipes and the supports. When carbon steel brackets are used for stainless steel pipes, plastic or rubber should be lined between the brackets and the pipes.
7.Pipeline installation
(1) Pipeline installation should generally be carried out according to the principles of main pipe first and then branch pipe, upper part first and then lower part, and inside first and then outside. For pipes of different materials, steel pipes should be installed first, and then plastic pipes should be installed. (5) When pipelines are laid through structural expansion joints, seismic joints and settlement joints, flexible connections should be made on both sides of the structural joints, and square compensators or expansion joints should be made where they pass through the structural joints. (6) When the hot and cold water pipes are installed parallel to each other, the hot water pipe should be above the cold water pipe. When installed vertically, the hot water pipe should be on the left side of the cold water pipe. (7) Indoor hot water and heating pipes should make full use of natural compensated thermal expansion and contraction. If the straight section is too long, a compensator should be installed. The form, specification and position of the compensator should meet the design requirements and be pre-stretched in accordance with relevant regulations.
(8) The installation slope of heating pipes should comply with the design and specifications, and the slope direction should be conducive to the exhaust and water drainage of the pipes.
Heating pipe type
Slope requirements
Hot water heating pipes with steam and water flowing in the same direction, steam pipes and condensate water pipes with steam and water flowing in the same direction.
3‰, not less than 2‰
Hot water heating pipes with steam and water flowing in opposite directions and steam and water flowing in opposite directions of steam pipes
Should not be less than 5‰
Radiator branch pipe
1%
(9) The coils laid underground in the low-temperature hot water radiant heating system should not have joints.
(10) The slope of the drainage pipe must comply with the design and specifications. No slope or reverse slope is strictly prohibited. The minimum slope of domestic sewage cast iron pipes, domestic sewage plastic pipes, suspended rainwater pipes, and buried rainwater pipes should meet
Pipe diameter (mm)
50
75
100 (110)
125
150(160)
200
Minimum slope (‰)
Pipe name
Domestic sewage cast iron pipes
25
15
12
10
7
5
Domestic sewage plastic pipes
12
8
6
5
4
/
Suspended rainwater pipe
All are 5
Buried stormwater pipes
20
15
8
6
5
4
(11) Drainage plastic pipes must be equipped with expansion joints according to design requirements and locations. If there is no requirement in the design, the spacing between expansion joints shall not be greater than 4m. Exposed drainage plastic pipes should be equipped with fire-retardant rings or fire-proof casings according to design requirements. When the diameter of the riser pipe is ≥110mm, a fire-retardant ring or a fireproof casing with a length of ≥500mm should be installed at the penetration part of the floor. After the pipe is installed, the Use C20 fine stone concrete to be poured and compacted in two parts over the floor slab; after the pouring is completed, combined with the construction of the leveling layer or surface layer, a water-blocking ring with a thickness of ≥20mm and a width of ≥30mm should be built around the pipe. When the horizontal main pipe passes through the fire partition partition wall, fire rings or fireproof casings with a length of ≥500mm should be installed on both sides of the wall where the pipe passes. (12) Hooks or clamps on metal drainage pipes should be fixed on the load-bearing structure. The bend at the bottom of the riser should be provided with buttresses or fixed measures should be taken. (13) The drainage vent pipe shall not be connected to the air duct or flue. The ventilation pipe should be 300mm higher than the roof and must be greater than the maximum snow thickness; When there are doors or windows within 4m of the ventilation pipe outlet, the ventilation pipe should be 600mm higher than the top of the door or window or lead to the side without doors or windows; On flat roofs where people often stay, the ventilation pipe should be 2m higher than the roof, and lightning protection devices should be installed according to lightning protection requirements.
(14) When the drainage pipe leading to the outdoors must be turned down through the wall or foundation, it should be connected with a 45° tee and a 45° elbow, and a cleaning port should be provided at the top of the vertical pipe section. For drainage pipes leading to outdoor drainage inspection wells, the introduction pipe in the well should be higher than the discharge pipe or the tops of the two pipes should be level with each other, and have a flow angle of not less than 90°. If the drop difference is greater than 300mm, there is no angle restriction. (15) Connection requirements for horizontal pipes and horizontal pipes, horizontal pipes and risers used for indoor drainage: 45° tee or 45° four and 90° inclined tee or 90° inclined four should be used. The connection between the standpipe and the end of the discharge pipe should use two 45° elbows or a 90° elbow with a curvature radius not less than 4 times the pipe diameter. (16) The drain pipes and overflow pipes of domestic drinking water tanks (pools), gray water tanks (pools), and rainwater and clean water tanks must not be directly connected to sewage pipes. Indirect drainage should be used, and a partition space of no less than 100mm should be left. (17) Pipes used in rainwater systems of high-rise buildings. ①The rainwater system of high-rise buildings uses galvanized welded steel pipes. ②The rainwater system of super high-rise buildings should use galvanized seamless steel pipes. ③The gravity flow rainwater pipe system of high-rise and super high-rise buildings uses ductile iron pipes.
8. Appliance/Equipment Installation
(1) After the radiators are assembled, a hydraulic pressure test should be performed before the entire set of factory radiators is installed. If there is no design requirement, the test pressure should be 1.5 times the working pressure, but not less than 0.6MPa; the test time should be 2 to 3 minutes, and the pressure should not drop and there should be no leakage or leakage. (2) There should be a straight pipe section in front of the domestic water supply meter and the valve that is not less than 8 times the diameter of the water meter interface. (3) The water pressure test of the heating cylinder (water distributor, water collector) should be carried out before installation. The test pressure is 1.5 times the working pressure, but not less than 0.6MPa. (4) Before the installation of the open water tank, a full water test should be carried out, and it should be left for 24 hours to observe. It should be leak-free; before the installation of the closed water tank (tank), a water pressure test should be carried out at 1.5 times the working pressure. The pressure should be 10 minutes under the test pressure. No falling, no leakage, no leakage. (5) The gray water tank should be located in a different room from the domestic water supply tank; the gray water tank (tank), valve, water meter and water supply plug should all have "gray water" signs.
9.Pipeline system testing
Before the pressure test of the building pipeline system, check the installation status of each system according to the process, and make test records. During the system pressure test, representatives from the supervisor and the construction unit should be present, and make corresponding test records. Tests that should be carried out on building duct work include: Pressure pipeline hydraulic pressure test (including strength test and tightness test), non-pressure pipeline water filling test, drainage main pipe ball test, water flow test, etc.
(1) Pressure test
1) The pipeline pressure test should adopt hydraulic test. A special construction plan should be prepared before the test and implemented after approval. Pipelines in high-rise buildings should first be tested according to zones and sections, and then tested as a whole according to the system after passing the test. 2) After the pipelines of the indoor water supply system and outdoor pipe network system are installed, a hydraulic pressure test should be carried out. The hydraulic test pressure must meet the design requirements. When the design does not indicate it, the test pressure of the water supply pipeline system of various materials is 1.5 times the working pressure, but shall not be less than 0.6MPa. 3) After the hot water supply system and heating system are installed, a hydraulic pressure test should be conducted before pipe insulation. The strength test pressure should meet the design requirements. When the design does not indicate it, the water pressure test pressure of the hot water supply system, steam heating system, and hot water heating system should be based on the working pressure at the top of the system plus 0.1MPa. At the same time, the test pressure at the top of the system The pressure is not less than 0.3MPa; The hydraulic test pressure of the high-temperature hot water heating system should be the highest point working pressure of the system plus 0.4MPa; The hydraulic test pressure of plastic pipes and aluminum-plastic composite pipe hot water heating systems should be the working pressure at the highest point of the system plus 0.2MPa, and the test pressure at the highest point of the system should not be less than 0.4MPa.
(2) Irrigation test
① Indoor concealed or buried drainage pipes must be filled with water before being concealed. ②Indoor rainwater pipes should be filled in whole sections or in sections according to the pipe material and building height. ③The outdoor drainage pipe network shall be tested in sections according to the drainage inspection wells.
(3) Water flow test
① Before the water supply system is put into use, open the valves, faucets and other water distribution points to conduct a water discharge test. ② After the drainage system is installed, drainage pipes and rainwater pipes should be tested separately.
(4) Ball passing test
The main drainage riser and horizontal main pipes should be tested for ball penetration. The diameter of the passing ball should not be less than 2/3 of the diameter of the drainage pipe, and the passing rate must reach 100%.
10. Pipeline anti-corrosion and insulation
(1) The anti-corrosion methods of pipelines mainly include painting, lining, electrostatic protection and cathodic protection. (2) Pipeline insulation can be divided into three types according to its purpose: thermal insulation, cold insulation, and heating protection. (3) The circumferential joints of the metal protective layer of horizontal pipes should be overlapped along the water, and the longitudinal joints should be located on the side and lower side of the pipe and along the water; the circumferential joints of the metal protective layer of the riser must be lapped up and down.
11. Pipeline system cleaning and trial operation
(3) After the heating pipeline system is flushed, it should be filled with water, heated, and tested for trial operation and debugging. If the room temperature is observed and measured to meet the design requirements, it is considered qualified. (4) The boiler safety valve should be subject to constant pressure inspection and adjustment. The set pressure should comply with the requirements of "Boiler Installation Engineering Construction and Acceptance Standards" GB 50273. The adjusted safety valve should be locked or sealed immediately. The boiler that leaves the factory as a whole should be put into continuous trial operation with load for 4 to 24 hours, and the trial operation records should be kept.
2H314020 Building electrical engineering construction technology
2H314021 Division and construction procedures of building electrical works
2H314021 Division and construction procedures of building electrical works
1. Division of construction electrical engineering divisions and sub-projects
The divisions, sub-divisions and sub-projects of construction electrical engineering are shown in Table 2H314021. (Read on your own)
2. Construction procedures of building electrical engineering
(1) Construction procedures for power transformation and distribution projects
1. Installation sequence of switch cabinets and distribution cabinets Unpacking inspection → secondary transportation → basic frame production and installation → cabinet fixation → busbar connection → secondary line connection → test adjustment → acceptance of power transmission operation.
2. Transformer construction procedures Unpacking inspection→Second transportation of the transformer→Transformer body installation→Accessory installation→Transformer hanging core inspection and handover test→Inspection before power transmission→Power transmission operation acceptance
(2) Construction procedures for power supply trunk lines and indoor wiring
1. Bus duct construction procedures Unpacking inspection → Bracket installation → Single-section bus duct insulation test → Bus duct installation → Insulation test before power on → Power delivery acceptance
(5) Construction procedures for lightning protection grounding devices:
Grounding body construction → Grounding trunk line construction → Down conductor laying → Voltage equalizing ring construction → Air-termination strip (air-termination pole, air-termination net) construction
2H314022 Construction technical requirements for building electrical engineering
1. Technical requirements for installation of power transformation and distribution equipment
1. Technical requirements for installation and construction of transformers and box-type substations
(2) The transformer box, the bracket, basic steel and shell of the dry-type transformer should be reliably connected to the protective conductor separately, and the fasteners and anti-loosening parts should be complete. 5% of the fasteners and anti-loosening parts should be randomly inspected. (3) Anti-seismic measures should be taken for transformer installation. (4) Transformers, high-voltage electrical equipment, wiring systems and relay protection systems must pass the handover test before being put into operation. (5) The foundation of the box-type substation and its floor-standing distribution box should be higher than the outdoor floor, and the surrounding drainage should be smooth. For metal box-type substations and floor-standing distribution boxes, the boxes should be reliably connected to the protective conductors and marked.
2. Technical requirements for installation and construction of switch cabinets and distribution cabinets
(1) The basic steel sections of switch cabinets and distribution cabinets should be installed straight. Galvanized bolts should be used to connect the distribution cabinets to each other or to the basic steel, and the anti-loosening parts should be complete. (2) The allowable deviation of the verticality of the distribution cabinet installation is 1.5‰, the joints between each other should not be greater than 2mm, and the deviation of the cabinets in rows should not be greater than 5mm. (3) The metal frame and basic steel of the switch cabinet and distribution cabinet should be reliably connected to the protective conductor. The grounding of the cabinet door and metal frame should be connected by an insulated copper core soft conductor with a cross-sectional area of not less than 4mm2, and there should be a grounding mark. (4) The rated voltage of the insulated conductors of the secondary circuit wiring of switch cabinets and power distribution cabinets should not be less than 450/750V. The conductor cross-sectional area of copper-core insulated conductors and copper-core cables should not be less than 2.5mm2, and should not be less than 1.5mm2 in other circuits. (5) The insulation resistance value between lines and line-to-ground of low-voltage complete distribution cabinet lines, feed lines should not be less than 0.5MΩ, and secondary circuits should not be less than 1MΩ. (6) The high and low voltage complete sets of power distribution cabinets must pass the handover test before trial operation.
2. Technical requirements for construction of power supply trunk lines and indoor distribution lines
1. Technical requirements for the installation of bus ducts
(1) Before installing the bus duct, the insulation resistance value of each bus duct should be measured and should not be less than 20MΩ. (2) When multiple bus ducts are laid side by side horizontally or vertically, a maintenance and inspection distance should be reserved between adjacent bus ducts. The shell of the plug-in box should be connected to the shell of the busbar and well grounded. (3) When the bus duct is installed horizontally, the diameter of the round steel hanger shall not be less than 8mm, and the distance between hangers shall not be greater than 2m. There should be no less than one bracket for each section of the bus duct, and additional brackets should be added at the corners for reinforcement. Spring brackets should be provided for vertical installation. (4) The metal shells of each section of the bus duct should be reliably connected, and the total length of the bus duct should be reliably connected to the protective conductor at no less than 2 places. (5) After the bus duct is installed, the holes that pass through the firewall and floor slab should be fireproof and sealed.
2. Technical requirements for construction of ladder frames, pallets and trough boxes
(1) The connection between the metal ladder frame, pallet or trough box body should be firm and reliable. When the total length is not more than 30m, there should be no less than 2 reliable connections with the protective conductor; when the total length is more than 30m, a connection point should be added every 20 to 30m, and both the starting and ending ends should be reliably grounded. (2) The connections between non-galvanized ladder frames, pallets, and trough boxes should be connected with protective bonding conductors; The connections between galvanized ladder frames, pallets and trough boxes do not need to be bridged to protect the bonding conductors, but each end of the connecting plate should not be less than 2 connection fixing bolts with lock nuts or lock washers. (3) The bending radius at the turns and branches of cable ladders, trays and trough boxes should not be less than the minimum allowable bending radius of cables in ladder frames, trays and trough boxes. (4) The spacing between horizontally installed brackets should be 1.5 to 3m; the spacing between vertically installed brackets should not be greater than 2m. (5) If the length of steel or plastic ladder racks, pallets and trough boxes in the straight section exceeds 30m, and the length of aluminum alloy or fiberglass ladder racks, pallets and trough boxes exceeds 15m, telescopic joints should be installed; ladder racks, pallets and trough boxes span the building. Compensation devices should be installed at deformation joints. (6) The wiring trough box should be installed above the cold water pipes and below the hot water pipes and steam pipes. When the requirements cannot be met, waterproofing and heat insulation measures should be taken. (7) Fireproof sealing measures should be taken for ladder frames, pallets and trough boxes that pass through floor slabs and pass through different fire protection zones.
3. Technical requirements for conduit construction
(1) Steel conduits shall not be connected by butt fusion welding; galvanized steel conduits or steel conduits with a wall thickness of 2 mm or less shall not be connected by casing fusion welding. Randomly inspect 20% of the total number of conduit connectors in each inspection batch, and not less than 1. (2) The metal conduit should be reliably connected to the protective conductor. 1) When non-galvanized steel conduits are connected with threads, both ends of the connection should be welded to protect the connecting conductor; the protective connecting conductor should be round steel, the diameter should not be less than 6mm, and its overlap length should be 6 times the diameter of the round steel times. 2) Both ends of the connection between galvanized steel conduits, bendable metal conduits and metal flexible conduits should be fixed with special grounding clips to protect the bonding conductor; the protective bonding conductor should be a copper-core soft conductor, and the cross-sectional area should not be less than 4mm2. 3) Randomly inspect 10% of the total number of conduit connectors in each inspection batch, and the number shall not be less than 1. (3) Conduit bending radius requirements 1) The bending radius of exposed conduits should not be less than 6 times the outer diameter of the pipe; when there is only one bend between two junction boxes, the bending radius should not be less than 4 times the outer diameter of the pipe. 2) The bending radius of concealed conduits should not be less than 6 times the outer diameter of the pipe; when the lines are buried underground or in concrete, the bending radius should not be less than 10 times the outer diameter of the pipe. (4) The distance between conduits buried in buildings and structures and the surface of buildings and structures should not be less than 15mm. When plastic conduits are grooved and buried in masonry, cement mortar with a strength of not less than M10 should be used for protection. (5) The pipe bracket should be installed firmly, the diameter of the round steel bracket should not be less than 8mm, and an anti-sway bracket should be installed. (6) When rigid conduits are connected to equipment and appliances through flexible conduits, the length of the flexible conduits should not be greater than 0.8m in power engineering and not greater than 1.2m in lighting engineering. Metal flexible conduits should not be used as connecting conductors to protective conductors.
4. Technical requirements for cable construction
(1) The cable bracket should be installed firmly, and the metal cable bracket must be reliably connected to the protective conductor. (2) The laying of cables must not have defects such as twisting, armor flattening, sheath rupture, and serious surface scratches. (3) AC single-core cables or split-phase cables shall not be pierced alone in steel conduits, and the fixing clamps and brackets shall not form a closed magnetic circuit. (4) Signs should be set up at the head end, end and branches of the cables, and sign posts should be set up for directly buried cables. (5) Fire prevention or sealing measures should be taken at places where cables enter and exit cable trenches, electrical shafts, buildings, distribution (control) cabinets, tables, boxes, and pipe mouths.
5. Technical requirements for wiring in conduits and wiring in slots
(1) Insulated wires of the same AC circuit should not be laid in different metal troughs or passed through different metal conduits. (2) Wires of different circuits, different voltage levels, AC and DC must not be worn in the same tube. (3) The joints of insulated wires should be installed in special junction boxes (boxes) or appliances, and should not be installed in conduits. (4) It is not suitable to lay insulated wires and cables in the same slot box at the same time. (5) The insulated conductors should have a certain margin in the trough box and should be tied in sections according to the circuit; when laying vertically or at an angle greater than 45°, the insulated conductors should be fixed in sections on special components in the trough box, each section There should be at least one fixed point. (6) The wires in the pipe should be insulated wires. The insulation colors of the A, B, and C phase wires are yellow, green, and red respectively, the neutral wire insulation is light blue, and the protective ground wire insulation is yellow and green. (7) After the wires are laid, use a 500V megger to test the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance of the line should not be less than 0.5MΩ.
6. Technical requirements for plastic sheathed wire wiring
(1) Plastic sheathed wires are strictly prohibited from being laid directly in building ceilings, walls, plastering layers, insulation layers or decorative surfaces. (2) The height of plastic sheathed wires when laying horizontally along the surface of the building indoors should not be less than 2.5m from the ground; when laying vertically, the part below 1.8m from the ground should be protected. (3) When the plastic sheathed wire enters the box (box) or is connected to equipment or appliances, its sheath layer should enter the box (box) or equipment or appliances, and the sheath layer and the entrance of the box (box) should be sealed. (4) Plastic sheathed wires should be fixed with line clips. The fixing should be straight, not loose or twisted, and the spacing between fixing points should be even and not loose.
3. Technical requirements for installation of electrical power equipment
1. Technical requirements for installation of power distribution cabinets and control cabinets (boxes, tables)
(1) The power distribution cabinet and control cabinet (box, platform) should have a certain mechanical strength, the outer casing should be flat and undamaged, the various appliances in the box should be firmly installed, the wires should be arranged neatly, the crimping should be firm, and have product certificates. (2) The insulation resistance of the power distribution (control) equipment and the lines to the motor should not be less than 0.5MΩ, and the insulation resistance of the secondary circuit should not be less than 1MΩ.
2. Technical requirements for motor inspection, wiring and no-load trial operation
(1) Check before motor wiring 2) For motors with a rated voltage of 500V and below, use a 500V megger to measure the insulation resistance of the motor. The insulation resistance should not be less than 0.5MΩ; the inspection quantity shall be random inspection of 50%, and shall not be less than 1 unit.
(2) Drying treatment of electric motor Drying treatment methods include: bulb drying method and current drying method. 1) Bulb drying method: Infrared bulb or general bulb light can be used to directly illuminate the winding. The temperature adjustment can be achieved by changing the power of the bulb. 2) Current drying method: Use an adjustable transformer to adjust the current. The current should be controlled within 60% of the rated current of the motor, and a measuring meter should be equipped to monitor the drying temperature at any time.
(3) Motor wiring
1) The motor wiring should be firm and reliable, and the wiring method should be consistent with the power supply voltage. Three-phase AC motors have two ways of Y connection and △ connection.
For example, if the line voltage is 380V, the △ connection should be made when the motor rated voltage is 380V, and the Y connection should be made when the motor rated voltage is 220V.
Generally, there are 6 terminals on the wiring frame of commonly used three-phase AC motors. When the motor nameplate indicates Y-shaped connection, D6, D4, and D5 are connected, and D1~D3 are connected to the power supply; When it is a △-shaped connection, D6 is connected to D1, D4 is connected to D2, D5 is connected to D3, and then D1~D3 are connected to the power supply.
2) The protective grounding of the motor shell must be good. The motor must be reliably grounded according to the grounding system of the low-voltage power distribution system. The ground connection terminal should be connected to the special ground bolt and cannot be connected to the fixing bolt of the machine base.
(4) Inspection before powering on the motor ① Compare the data indicated on the motor nameplate to check whether the connection method of the motor stator winding is correct (Y connection or △ connection), and whether the power supply voltage and frequency are appropriate. ② Turn the motor shaft to see if the rotation is flexible and whether there is any friction or other abnormal sounds. ③ Check whether the motor grounding device is in good condition. ④ Check whether the starting equipment of the motor is in good condition, whether the operation is normal, and whether the load carried by the motor is good.
(5) Motor test run 1) The no-load test run time of the motor should be 2 hours. The temperature rise, voltage and current of the body and bearings should meet the no-load operation requirements of construction equipment or process equipment, and the current, voltage, temperature, operating time, etc. should be recorded. Relevant data. 2) Be prepared to cut off the power before turning on the power, so as to ensure that the power can be cut off immediately if any abnormality occurs to the motor after the power is turned on (the motor cannot start, starts slowly, makes abnormal sounds, etc.). 3) The number of starts of the motor should not be too frequent. The time interval between two consecutive starts should not be less than 5 minutes, and the motor should be started again after it has cooled to a cold temperature. 4) The steering direction of the motor should be consistent with the operation indicator arrow on the equipment.
4. Technical requirements for electrical lighting construction
1. Technical requirements for installation of lighting distribution boxes
(1) The lighting distribution box should be installed securely, and the name of the electrical circuit should be marked inside the distribution box. (2) Neutral wire (N wire) and protective earth wire (PE wire) bus bars should be installed in the lighting distribution box respectively. The neutral wire and protective earth wire should be connected on the bus bar and shall not be twisted. (3) The current of each single-phase branch circuit in the lighting distribution box should not exceed 16A, and the number of lamps should not exceed 25. The current of each single-phase circuit of large-scale architectural combination lamps should not exceed 25A, and the number of light sources should not exceed 60 (except when LED light sources are used). (4) When the socket is a separate circuit, the number should not exceed 10. The number of power sockets used for computers should not exceed 5.
2. Technical requirements for lighting installation
(1) The lamps should be installed firmly and fixed using embedded hooks, expansion bolts, etc. It is strictly prohibited to use wooden wedges, nylon plugs or plastic plugs for fixation. The load-bearing capacity of the fixture should match the weight of the electrical lighting fixture. (2) The cross-sectional area of the insulated wire leading to a single lamp should match the power of the lamp, and the core cross-sectional area of the insulated copper core wire should not be less than 1mm2. The lead-in wire of lamps of 100W and above should be made of non-combustible porcelain tubes, mineral wool, etc. Material for thermal insulation protection. (3) The metal shell of Class I lamps must be reliably connected to the protective conductor with a copper-core flexible conductor. The connection should be marked with a grounding mark. The cross-sectional area of the copper-core flexible conductor should be the same as the cross-sectional area of the power cord entering the lamp. (4) When the mass of the chandelier exceeds 3kg, it should be fixed with embedded hooks or bolts. (5) The fixing and suspension devices of lamps with a mass greater than 10kg should be subjected to a constant uniform load strength test at 5 times the weight of the lamp, with a duration of not less than 15 minutes.
3. Technical requirements for switch installation
(1) Switches installed in the same building or structure should use the same series of products. The on-off positions of the single-control switches should be consistent, and they should be flexible in operation and reliable in contact. (2) The phase line should be controlled by a switch. (3) The switch should be installed in a location that is convenient for operation. The distance between the edge of the switch and the door frame should be 0.15-0.2m. The installation height of the lighting switch should meet the design requirements. (4) In flammable, explosive and particularly humid places, switches should be explosion-proof, sealed or take other protective measures.
4. Technical requirements for socket installation
(1) The sockets should be powered by separate circuits, and the sockets in a room should be powered by the same circuit. (2) Sockets of the same specifications installed side by side in the same room should have the same height. (3) Socket wiring 1) For a single-phase two-hole socket, the right hole or upper hole facing the socket should be connected to the phase wire, and the left hole or lower hole should be connected to the neutral conductor. 2) For a single-phase three-hole socket, the right hole facing the socket should be connected to the phase wire, the left hole should be connected to the neutral conductor (N), and the upper hole should be connected to the protective earth conductor (PE). 3) The protective ground conductor (PE) of the three-phase four-hole and three-phase five-hole sockets should be connected to the upper hole; the protective ground conductor terminal of the socket must not be connected to the neutral conductor terminal; for three-phase sockets in the same place, the phase of the wiring The order should be consistent. 4) The protective earth conductor (PE) must not be connected in series between sockets. 5) The phase wire and neutral conductor (N) should not be connected to the power supply by using the terminal block of the socket body. (4) When AC, DC or different voltage level sockets are installed in the same place, there should be obvious differences, and the sockets cannot be interchanged; matching plugs should be used according to AC, DC or different voltage levels. (5) In humid places, well-sealed splash-proof sockets should be used
5. Technical requirements for construction of lightning protection devices
1. Construction technical requirements for air terminals
(1) Technical requirements for construction of lightning rods 1) Material requirements for lightning rods. Generally made of hot-dip galvanized (or stainless steel) round steel and hot-dip galvanized steel pipes (or stainless steel pipes). The zinc coating should be smooth and consistent without flux spots. 2) The connection between the lightning rod and the down conductor should be welded. 4) The air-termination pole on the building should be connected to the building's air-termination network as a whole. When an independent grounding device is installed on the air-termination pole, the distance between the grounding device and other grounding grids should not be less than 3m. (2) Construction technical requirements for lightning strips (nets) 1) The air-termination strap should be made of hot-dip galvanized steel. The steel thickness should be greater than or equal to 4mm, and the coating thickness should not be less than 65μm. The air-termination strip is generally made of 40mmx4mm galvanized flat steel or φ12mm galvanized round steel. 2) The installation of air-termination strips should be smooth and straight without sharp bends. The fixed brackets should be evenly spaced, firmly fixed, and of the same height. The height of the fixed brackets should not be less than 150mm. Each fixed bracket shall be able to withstand a vertical tensile force of 49N. 3) The connection between the air-termination strips should be lap welded. 4) The overlap length of the air-terminating tape should comply with the regulations. The overlap between flat steels should be twice the width of the flat steels, and welding should be performed on three sides; The overlap between round bars is 6 times the diameter of the round bars, and welding is performed on both sides; The overlap between round steel and flat steel is 6 times the diameter of the round steel, and welding is performed on both sides. 5) Compensation measures should be taken for the bridging of the lightning strip across the deformation joint of the building. 6) Metal objects on the roof of the building should be integrated with the lightning network, such as iron railings, steel ladders, metal flagpoles, ventilation pipes, metal pole lights, cooling towers, etc.
2. Construction technical requirements for lightning protection down conductors
(1) Down conductors can use steel beams, steel columns, steel bars in concrete columns, fire ladders and other metal components in the building as natural down conductors. (2) When the exposed down conductor is made of hot-dip galvanized round steel, welding or clamp (connector) can be used to connect the round steel to the round steel. When the exposed down conductor is made of hot-dip galvanized flat steel, Can be welded or bolted. (3) Exposed down conductors should be fixed in sections, and the laying should be smooth and straight without sharp bends. The welds fixed by welding should be full and there are no omissions, and the bolts should have anti-loosening parts (washers). (4) When using the main steel bars in the concrete columns of the building facade as lightning protection down conductors, there are usually no less than 2 grounding test points. The grounding test points should be 0.5m above the ground, and the test points should be clearly marked. (5) The connection between the down-conductor and the air-termination should be reliable and should be connected by welding or clip (connector). The cross-sectional area of the round steel or flat steel connecting the down-conductor and the air-termination should not be smaller than that of the air-termination cross-sectional area of the vessel. (6) When structural steel bars are used as down conductors, fusion welding can be used to connect the steel bars to the steel bars.
6. Technical requirements for grounding device construction
(1) Construction technical requirements for grounding bodies
1. Construction technical requirements for artificial grounding bodies (poles)
(1) Construction technical requirements for metal grounding bodies (poles) (2) Construction technical requirements for grounding modules (3) Construction technical requirements for ion grounding bodies
2. Construction technical requirements for natural grounding bodies
(1) Use the steel bars of the building floor to make a horizontal grounding body (2) Use engineering pile steel bars to make vertical ground bodies (1) Construction technical requirements for metal grounding bodies (poles) 1) Vertically buried metal grounding bodies generally use galvanized angle steel, galvanized steel pipes, galvanized round steel, etc. The wall thickness of the galvanized steel pipe is not less than 2.5mm, the thickness of the galvanized angle steel is 4mm, the diameter of the galvanized round steel is not less than 14mm, and the length of the vertical ground body is generally 2.5m. The top of the buried grounding body should be no less than 0.6m away from the ground. In order to reduce the shielding effect of adjacent grounding bodies, the horizontal spacing between grounding bodies should be no less than 5m. After the construction of the grounding body is completed, the soil should be filled and compacted to reduce the grounding resistance. 2) Horizontally buried grounding bodies usually use galvanized flat steel, galvanized round steel, etc. The thickness of galvanized flat steel should be no less than 4mm and the cross-sectional area should be no less than 100mm²; the cross-sectional area of galvanized round steel should be no less than 100mm². The horizontal grounding body is laid underground, at least 0.6m from the ground. If there are multiple grounding bodies, a straight line distance of more than 5m should be maintained between each grounding body, and soil should be filled and compacted around the buried grounding bodies. 3) The connection of the grounding body should be firm and reliable, and lap welding should be used. When the grounding body is made of flat steel, its overlap length should be twice the width of the flat steel, and there should be three adjacent edges for welding; If round steel is used, the overlap length should be 6 times the diameter of the round steel and welded on both sides. After the grounding body is connected, the grounding resistance should be tested and the grounding resistance should meet the requirements of the specifications and standards.
3. Precautions for grounding body construction
(1) The grounding body must have sufficient mechanical strength. After the construction of the grounding body is completed, the grounding resistance should be measured in time. The grounding resistance of the independent grounding body of electrical equipment should be less than 4Ω, and the grounding resistance of the shared grounding body should be less than 1Ω. (2) The grounding body should be kept away from high temperature influences and high temperature places that increase soil resistivity. In areas with high soil resistivity, chemical resistance reducing agents can be filled into the grounding pit to reduce the soil resistivity.
(2) Construction technical requirements for grounding wires
1. Construction technical requirements for grounding trunk lines
(1) Grounding trunks usually use flat steel, round steel, copper rods, etc. Indoor grounding trunks are mostly exposed and are generally laid in electrical wells or cable trenches. The grounding trunk line can also use the existing steel pipes, metal frames, and metal frames in the building, but a grounding jumper must be made at the connection between the steel pipes, metal frames, and metal frames. (2) The grounding trunk line is connected by lap welding. The requirements for lap welding are as follows: 1) The overlap between flat steel bars (copper bars) should be twice the width of the flat bars (copper bars), and should be welded on no less than three sides; 2) The overlap between round steel (copper rods) is 6 times the diameter of the round steel (copper rod), and welding is performed on both sides; 3) The overlap between the round steel (copper rod) and the flat steel (copper bar) is 6 times the diameter of the round steel (copper rod), and welding is performed on both sides; 4) Between the flat steel (copper bar) and the steel pipe (copper pipe), close to the outer diameter surface of 3/4 pipe, weld on the upper and lower sides; 5) Weld the flat steel and the angle steel, close to the outer sides of the angle steel, and weld the upper and lower sides. (3) When using steel structures as grounding wires, the connection between the grounding electrode and the grounding trunk line should be made by electric welding. When electric welding is not allowed on the steel structure, column welding or drilling and tapping can be used, and then bolts and ground wires can be used to bridge the connection. Jumper wires generally use flat steel or wires with copper connectors welded (pressed) at both ends. The jumper wires should have a stretch of 150mm.
2. Construction technical requirements for grounding branch lines
(1) Ground branch lines usually use copper wires, copper bars, flat steel, round steel, etc. (2) The equipment connection branch line must pass through the ground or be buried in concrete. When the grounding wire crosses the expansion joint or settlement joint of the building, a compensator should be installed. The compensator can be replaced by bending the grounding wire itself into an arc. (3) The grounding wire should be connected by welding, and the welding must be firm and free of defects. If welding is not suitable, bolts can be used, but rust removal should be carried out. When the ground branch line is connected to the ground point of the electrical equipment, the joints should be connected with terminal bolts and use lock nuts or lock washers. When welding is not possible for non-ferrous metal ground wires, bolts can be used. (4) The grounding of each electrical device should be connected to the ground trunk line with a separate ground wire. Several electrical devices that need to be grounded should not be connected in series in one ground wire.
(3) Technical requirements for equipotential bonding construction
1. According to the scope of action of equipotential bonding, it is divided into total equipotential bonding, auxiliary equipotential bonding and local equipotential bonding. 2. The connection between equipotential bonding conductors can be welded or bolted according to the actual situation. When the equipotential bonding conductor is concealed, the connection between the conductors shall not be connected by bolt crimping. During welding, there should be no slag inclusions, undercuts, pores, or incomplete welding at the welding joint. Bolt connections should be firm and reliable, and bolts, washers, and nuts should be hot-dip galvanized. 3. Equipotential bonding wires, like ground wires (PE wires), should have yellow and green color codes at their ends.
2H314030 Ventilation and air conditioning engineering construction technology
2H314031 Division and construction procedures of ventilation and air conditioning projects
2. Construction procedures for ventilation and air conditioning projects
(1) Manufacturing and installation procedures for air ducts and components 2. Metal air duct installation procedures: Measuring and laying out → Installation of supports and hangers → Air duct inspection → Combined connection → Air duct adjustment → Air leakage test → Air duct insulation → Quality inspection.
(3) Equipment installation program 1. Refrigeration unit installation procedures: basic acceptance → unit transportation and hoisting → unit vibration reduction device installation → unit installation in place → unit piping → quality inspection. 2. Cooling tower installation procedure: foundation acceptance → cooling tower transportation and hoisting → cooling tower vibration reduction installation → cooling tower installation in place → cooling tower piping → quality inspection. 3. Water pump installation procedure: foundation acceptance → vibration reduction device installation → water pump in place → alignment and leveling → installation of piping and accessories → quality inspection. 4. Installation procedures for fresh air units and combined air conditioning units: equipment inspection and test → foundation acceptance → base installation → vibration reduction device installation → unit installation → alignment and leveling → quality inspection. 5. Installation procedures for fan coil units and air-conditioning terminal devices: equipment inspection and testing → installation of supports and hangers → equipment vibration reduction installation → equipment piping → quality inspection. 6. Fan (box) installation procedure: Fan inspection and test → (Foundation acceptance) → Support and hanger (base) installation → Vibration reduction installation → Fan in place → (Leveling and alignment) → Quality inspection. 7. Multi-connection system installation procedure: basic acceptance → outdoor unit lifting → equipment vibration reduction installation → outdoor unit installation → indoor unit installation → pipe connection → pipe strength and vacuum test → system filling with refrigerant → pipe and equipment insulation → debugging and operation →Quality check.
(5) System debugging and construction procedures 1. Equipment stand-alone trial operation procedure: equipment inspection → equipment test → trial operation → parameter test → data recording → quality inspection. 2. Water system debugging procedures: Equipment inspection → Valve component inspection → Test instrument preparation → Water flow test and adjustment → Pressure gauge and thermometer data recording → Quality inspection. 3. Wind system debugging procedures: Fan equipment inspection → Inspection of air ducts, air valves, and air outlets → Preparation of test instruments → Air volume test → Air volume balance adjustment → Record test data → Quality inspection. 4. Joint trial operation procedure of smoke prevention and exhaust system: system inspection → test and adjustment of mechanical positive pressure air supply system → test and adjustment of mechanical smoke exhaust system → test and adjustment of joint trial operation parameters → data recording → quality inspection. 5. Ventilation and air conditioning system joint trial operation procedures: system inspection → air volume and water volume testing and adjustment of the ventilation and air conditioning system → test and adjustment of the air conditioning automatic control system → joint trial operation → data recording → quality inspection.
2H314032 Construction technical requirements for ventilation and air conditioning projects
—Construction technical requirements for the production and installation of air duct systems
(1) Classification of air ducts
Level Category
Air duct working pressure P (Pa)
Sealing requirements
positive pressure in tube
negative pressure in tube
Micro pressure
P≤125Pa
P≥-125Pa
Seams and pipe connections should be tight
low pressure
125Pa<P≤500Pa
-500Pa≤P<-125Pa
The seams and pipe connections should be tight, and the sealing surface should be located at the positive pressure measuring point of the air duct.
medium pressure
500Pa<P≤1500Pa
-1000Pa≤P<-500Pa
Add sealing measures to seams and pipe connections
high pressure
1500Pa<P≤2500Pa
-2000Pa≤P<-1000Pa
All joints and pipe connections should be sealed
(2) Construction technical requirements for air duct production
1. The production and installation of the air duct system should be carried out in accordance with the approved construction drawings, contract stipulations or project negotiation records, relevant construction plans and standard specifications. 2. The selected finished air duct should provide a product certificate or undergo on-site re-inspection of strength and tightness.
For example, the covering material of the composite air duct must be non-combustible, and the inner insulation material should be non-combustible or flame-retardant and harmless to the human body. A combustion performance inspection report should be provided when the material enters the site. The fire resistance limit of the smoke prevention and exhaust system ducts should comply with the design requirements. Technical measures such as fire-proof ducts or galvanized iron ducts covered with rock wool fireproof boards can be used. A combustion performance test report will be provided when the relevant materials are brought to the site. The body, frame, fixed materials, sealing gaskets, etc. of fireproof air ducts must be non-combustible materials. When there is no provision in the design, the thickness of the galvanized layer of galvanized steel sheets should not be lower than at 80g/m2.
4. Metal air duct plates are spliced using bite connection, riveting, welding and other methods. The air ducts are connected to each other using flange connections, thin steel plate flange connections, etc. The bite seams of the air duct plates should be staggered, and there should be no cross-shaped seams; the plate connection seams should be straight, flat, tight and firm, without exposing the insulation layer, and meet the strength requirements of the connection with the structure. The welds of flange connections should be well fused and full, and bolt holes should be provided at the four corners of rectangular flanges. For flanges of the same specifications processed in the same batch, the arrangement and spacing of bolt holes should be uniform and interchangeable.
For example, metal plates with a plate thickness of less than or equal to 1.2mm are generally connected by bite joints. There are single bite joints, combined angle bite joints, corner bite joints, snap-type bite joints, vertical bite joints and other methods. For air ducts with plate thickness greater than 1.5mm, electric welding, argon arc welding and other methods are used. The distance between rectangular air duct flange bolts and rivets for medium and low pressure systems is less than or equal to 150mm, and for high pressure systems is less than or equal to 100mm. Galvanized steel plates and steel plates containing various types of composite protective layers should be jointed or riveted, and welded connections are not allowed. Supplement: "Code for Construction Quality Acceptance of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Projects" GB/T 50243 The distance between bolts and rivet holes of air duct flanges in micro-pressure, low-pressure and medium-pressure systems shall not be greater than 150mm; The air duct of the high-pressure system shall not be larger than 100mm.
5. Reinforcement measures for metal air ducts. Reinforcement measures should be taken for metal air ducts that meet the following conditions: (1) The diameter of the straight-jointed circular air duct is greater than or equal to 800mm, and the length of the pipe section is greater than 1250mm or the total surface area is greater than 4m2; the diameter of the spiral air duct used in high-pressure systems is greater than 2000mm. (2) The side length of the rectangular air duct is greater than 630mm or the side length of the rectangular insulated air duct is greater than 800mm, and the length of the pipe section is greater than 1250mm; or the single-sided plane area of the low-pressure air duct is greater than 1.2m2, and the medium and high-pressure air duct is greater than 1.0m2. (3) Take corresponding reinforcement measures based on its working pressure level, plate thickness, air duct length and cross-sectional size. The air duct can be reinforced with internal or external reinforcements, pipe wall pressing ribs, etc. Rectangular air duct reinforcements should be made of angle steel, light steel profiles or folded steel plates; circular air duct reinforcements should be made of angle steel. Supplement: Reinforcement methods such as: screw inner support reinforcement Supplement: Reinforcement methods such as angle steel or reinforcing bars should be used, but attention should be paid to the orderly, even and symmetrical arrangement, and their height should be less than or equal to the flange width of the air duct. The angle steel, reinforcing bars and air ducts are riveted firmly and evenly spaced, and the spacing should not be greater than 220mm.
6. The rectangular inner slope and the inner arc elbow should be equipped with deflectors to reduce the local resistance and noise of the air duct.
(3) Key points for installation of air duct system
1. Inspect the air duct before installation. Debris in the installation area or operating area should be cleared, and the production quality of the air duct and its accessories, as well as the production and installation quality of the air duct supports and hangers should be checked. For example, the steel sections and screw holes used to cut off supports, hangers, and brackets should be machined, and electrical welding is not allowed. Supports and hangers should not be placed at air outlets, valves, inspection doors, and automatic control devices.
2. The combination and connection length of the air ducts should be determined according to the conditions of the construction site and the lifting equipment. The sealing material used for air duct connections should meet the technical conditions of system function. For example, smoke prevention and exhaust systems or conveying air or smoke with a temperature higher than 70°C should use heat-resistant rubber sheets or non-combustible temperature-resistant and fire-proof materials; To transport gases containing corrosive media, acid-resistant rubber sheets or soft polyvinyl chloride sheets should be used.
3. The procedures for installing air ducts are usually the upper floor first and then the lower floor, the main pipe first and then the branch pipes, and the vertical pipes first and then the horizontal pipes. Attention should be paid when installing the air duct. For example, when using a hoisting assembly to install the air duct, the surface protection should be strengthened. Pay attention to the center of gravity of the lifting point to ensure that the hoisting is stable and safe and that the air duct does not cause distortion, bending, deformation, etc., and preventive measures should be taken when necessary. Deformation measures.
4. Measures to be taken when the air duct passes through a fire-proof and explosion-proof floor or wall that needs to be closed. Embedded pipes or protective casings with a steel plate thickness of not less than 1.6mm should be installed, and non-combustible flexible materials should be used to seal the space between the air duct and the protective casing. When the air duct passes through the deformation joint space of the building, a flexible short pipe should be installed. When the air duct passes through the wall of the building's deformation joint, a steel casing should be installed. The space between the air duct and the casing should be filled tightly with flexible waterproof materials.
5. It is strictly prohibited for other pipelines to pass through the air duct. 6. Air duct systems that transport flammable or explosive gases or are installed in flammable or explosive environments must be equipped with reliable anti-static grounding devices; air duct systems that transport flammable or explosive gases must pass through living areas or other auxiliary Interfaces must not be set up when producing rooms. Fixings such as cables in the outdoor air duct system are strictly prohibited from being connected to lightning rods or lightning protection nets. 7. The air valve should be installed in the correct direction, easy to operate, and flexible to open and close. Fire dampers with a side length (diameter) greater than or equal to 630mm or elbows and tees with a side length (diameter) greater than 1250mm should be equipped with independent supports and hangers. 8. When installing the muffler and static pressure box, separate supports and hangers should be installed and fixed firmly.
(4) Inspection and testing of air ducts
1. Before batch production of air ducts, the strength and tightness test of the air ducts should be carried out when testing or inspecting the air duct manufacturing process. For example, the test pressure is 1.5 times the working pressure for low-pressure air ducts; 1.2 times the working pressure for medium-pressure air ducts, and not less than 750Pa; and 1.2 times the working pressure for high-pressure air ducts. The tightness of the air ducts of smoke exhaust, dust removal, low-temperature air supply and variable air volume air conditioning systems should comply with the regulations for medium-pressure air ducts, and the test pressure is the working pressure of the air duct system. 2. After the installation of the air duct system is completed, tightness tests should be conducted on the installed main and dry air duct segments. Tightness inspection mainly checks the seams, riveting holes, flange flanges of the air duct, and the tightness of the connections between the air duct sections after the production and processing of the air ducts and components. Only after passing the inspection can it be delivered to the next process.
2. Construction technical requirements for air conditioning water systems
2. Pipe connections adopt threaded connections, welded connections, flange connections, clamp connections, welded connections, etc. The selection of connection methods should comply with the design requirements. 3. When galvanized pipes are connected with threads or grooves, the damaged surface of the galvanized layer and the exposed threaded part should be treated with anti-corrosion treatment. When using welding and flange welding connections, the surface of the weld and heat-affected zone should be subjected to secondary galvanizing or anti-corrosion treatment. 4. When pipelines pass through basements or exterior walls of underground structures, waterproofing measures should be taken. For buildings with strict waterproofing requirements, flexible waterproofing casings must be used. Steel casings should be installed where pipes penetrate floors and walls. The casing installed in the wall should be flush with the finishes on both sides of the wall. The top of the casing installed in the floor should be 20 to 50mm higher than the decorative surface, and the casing must not be used as a pipe support. When passing through fire protection zones, non-combustible materials should be used for fire-proof sealing; the gaps around the insulation pipes and casings should be tightly plugged with non-combustible materials. 5. Liners should be installed between cold (hot) water pipes and supports and hangers. The pressure-bearing strength of the liner should meet the total weight of the pipeline, and non-combustible and flame-retardant hard insulation materials or anti-corrosion treated wood lining should be used. The surface of the gasket should be smooth, and the gaps between the upper and lower gasket joint surfaces should be filled up. 6. The slope of the condensate drain pipe should meet the design requirements. When there is no requirement in the design, the slope of the pipeline should be greater than or equal to 8‰ and should be sloping toward the outlet.
7. Appearance inspection should be carried out before the valve is installed. Valves and check valves whose working pressure is greater than 1.0MPa and which function as a cut-off on the main pipe and the system's cold and hot water conversion and adjustment functions should be inspected for shell strength and valve disc sealing. Performance test, and the test is qualified. The valve installation location, debugging, inlet and outlet directions should be correct, and should be easy to operate. 8. After the installation of the air-conditioning refrigeration and cooling water piping system is completed, and after passing the visual inspection, a hydraulic pressure test should be carried out according to the design requirements. When there are no requirements in the design, the following provisions should be met: 1) The test pressure of cold (hot) water, cooling water and energy storage (cold and hot) systems. When the working pressure is less than or equal to 1.0MPa, the metal pipe and metal composite pipe should be 1.5 times the working pressure, and the minimum Should be less than 0.6MPa; when the working pressure is greater than 1.0MPa, 0.5MPa should be added to the working pressure. The tightness test pressure should be the design working pressure. 2) The strength test pressure (cold water) of various types of pressure-resistant plastic pipes should be 1.5 times the working pressure and should not be less than 0.9MPa; the tightness test pressure should be 1.15 times the design working pressure. 9. The condensate water system adopts water flow test, and it should be qualified if there is no leakage and smooth drainage. 10. After the water system pipeline test passes, the pipeline system flushing test should be carried out before the refrigeration unit and air-conditioning equipment are connected. 11. After the refrigerant piping system has been installed and the visual inspection has passed, blowout, air tightness and vacuum tests should be carried out.
3. Construction technical requirements for equipment installation
2. The installation position of the cooling tower should meet the design requirements, and the distance between the air inlet side and the building should be greater than 1000mm. The cooling tower should be installed horizontally. When multiple cooling towers are installed in the same cooling water system, the water surface height of each cooling tower should be consistent, and the height deviation should not be greater than 30mm. The water collecting tray of the cooling tower should be leak-free and the water distributor should distribute water evenly. The packing installation of the assembled cooling tower should be carried out after all electrical and gas welding operations are completed. 3. The filters of the air handling unit and air heat recovery device should be installed after the trial operation of the single unit is completed. The valves, instruments and meters connected to the unit should be fully installed, with correct specifications and positions. The opening direction of the air valve should be in the direction of the air flow. The air ducts and water pipes connected to the unit should be flexibly connected. 4. The fan and air duct are connected by flexible short pipes. 5. The water pump vibration-absorbing plate can be made of section steel or cast with reinforced concrete. When multiple water pumps are installed in a row, they should be arranged neatly. The water pump and the vibration damping plate must be firmly fixed, and the anchor bolts must be protected against loosening. Supplementary content: Clause 9.2.2 in "Code for Construction Quality Acceptance of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Projects" (GB/T50243-2016) The outlet pipe of the parallel water pump entering the main pipe should be connected obliquely along the water, and the oblique angle should not be greater than 60°. The traditional connection method of air conditioning ducts is welding of positive tees (T-shaped connection method). New specification: For diagonal plug-in connections along the water, the bevel angle should not be greater than 60°.
6. The installation of heat exchange equipment, cold and thermal storage equipment, softened water devices, water collectors and distributors, etc. should be stable. The pipelines connected to the equipment should be equipped with separate brackets. The pipelines should be equipped with valves, pressure gauges, thermometers, and filters as required. and other devices. 7. Open water tanks (tanks) should be filled with water before being connected to pipelines, and heat exchangers and closed containers should be subjected to hydraulic pressure tests before being connected to pipelines. 8. When the fan coil unit enters the site, the cooling capacity, heat supply, air volume, water resistance, power and noise performance of the unit should be witnessed and sampled, and the installation will be carried out after passing the re-inspection. Before installation, it is advisable to conduct a three-speed test run of the fan and a water pressure test of the coil. The test pressure should be 1.5 times the system working pressure. The test observation time should be 2 minutes. If there is no leakage, it is qualified. 10. The connection between water system pipes and equipment should be made after the equipment is installed. The interfaces between pipelines, water pumps, and refrigeration units should be flexible connecting pipes, and no forced connection is allowed. The pipes connected to it should be equipped with independent brackets.
4. Technical requirements for anti-corrosion and thermal insulation construction
2. The thermal insulation layer, thermal insulation moisture-proof layer and protective layer of air ducts and pipes should be made of non-combustible or flame-retardant materials, and the material, density, specification and thickness should meet the design requirements. 3. When thermal insulation materials enter the site, the thermal conductivity or thermal resistance, density, water absorption and other properties of the materials should be witnessed and sampled; installation can only begin after passing the re-inspection. 4. The construction of insulation projects for air ducts, components and air conditioning equipment should be carried out after the air duct system has passed the tightness test. 5. The air duct insulation is fixed or bonded with insulation nails according to the different insulation materials. The insulation of air duct components must not affect the operating function, and the insulation of the regulating valve must retain the position of the adjusting handle to ensure flexible and convenient operation. Frequently disassembled flanges, valves, filters, and inspection points on the air duct system adopt individually disassembled thermal insulation structures. 6. The insulation construction of air-conditioning water system and refrigeration system pipelines should be carried out after the strength and tightness of the pipeline system have been inspected and the anti-corrosion treatment has been completed.
5. Technical requirements for debugging ventilation and air conditioning systems
Before the ventilation and air conditioning system is installed and put into use, system debugging should be carried out. System debugging should include stand-alone test operation and debugging of the equipment, and joint test operation and debugging of the system under non-designed full load conditions. 1. Equipment for stand-alone trial operation and debugging includes: chilled water pumps, hot water pumps, cooling water pumps, axial flow fans, centrifugal fans, air handling units, cooling towers, fan coil units, electric refrigeration (heat pump) units, and absorption refrigeration units. , water ring heat pump unit, air volume regulating valve, electric fire damper, electric smoke exhaust valve, electric valve, etc. 2. The safety assurance measures for the trial operation of the equipment must be complete and reliable, and there must be a written safety technical explanation. The trial operation and debugging of the equipment should comply with the following requirements: (1) For fans in ventilators and air handling units, the impeller rotation direction is correct, the operation is smooth, and there is no abnormal vibration or sound. The operating power of the motor should comply with the regulations of the equipment technical documents. After 2 hours of continuous operation at rated speed, the temperature rise of sliding bearings and rolling bearings should comply with relevant specifications. (2) The direction of rotation of the water pump impeller is correct, there is no abnormal vibration or sound, and there is no looseness in the fastened connection parts. The operating power of the motor should comply with the regulations of the equipment technical documents. After the water pump has been running continuously for 2 hours, the temperature rise of the sliding bearing and rolling bearing should comply with the relevant specifications. (3) The cooling tower fan and cooling water system should be cyclically tested for no less than 2 hours, and there should be no abnormality in operation; the cooling tower body should be stable and free of abnormal vibration. The noise generated by the operation of the cooling tower should not be greater than the value specified in the design and equipment technical documents, and the water flow rate should meet the design requirements. (4) The refrigeration unit should operate smoothly without abnormal vibration or noise; the connections and sealing parts should be free of looseness, air leakage, oil leakage, etc.; The pressure and temperature of suction and exhaust should be within the normal working range; the actions of the energy regulating device, protective relays and safety devices should be sensitive and reliable; normal operation should be no less than 8 hours. 3. The joint trial operation and debugging of the system under non-designed full load conditions should be carried out after the single machine of the equipment has passed the trial operation. The continuous trial operation of the ventilation system should be no less than 2 hours, and the continuous trial operation of the air conditioning system with cold (heat) source should be no less than 8 hours. When the joint trial operation and debugging is not in the cooling period or heating period, only the trial operation and debugging without cold (heat) source will be carried out, and it will be made up during the first cooling period or heating period. 4. Joint trial operation and debugging content of the system under non-designed full load conditions: (1) Inspection, adjustment and linked operation of monitoring and control systems. (2) Measurement and adjustment of system air volume (ventilator, air outlet, system balance). (3) Measurement and adjustment of air conditioning water system. (4) Measurement and adjustment of indoor air parameters. (5) Measurement and adjustment of smoke prevention and exhaust system. The smoke prevention and exhaust system measures the air volume, wind pressure, and static pressure difference in evacuation stairwells, etc., and adjusts them to meet design and fire protection regulations. 5. The joint trial operation and debugging of the system under non-designed full load conditions should comply with the following requirements: (1) The allowable deviation between the system total air volume debugging results and the design air volume should be -5% to 10%; the pressure difference in each area of the building should meet the design requirements. (2) Joint commissioning of variable air volume air conditioning systems shall comply with the following regulations: 1) The system air handling unit should be able to realize frequency control of the fan speed within the design parameter range. 2) Under the designed external residual pressure condition of the air handling unit, the total air volume of the system should meet the requirement that the allowable deviation of air volume should be -5% to 10%; the allowable deviation of the fresh air volume from the designed fresh air volume should be 0 to 10%. 3) The allowable deviation between the maximum air volume debugging results of each variable air volume terminal device and the design air volume should be 0 to 15%. (3) The total flow rate of the air-conditioning cold (hot) water system and cooling water system should not exceed the design flow rate by more than 10%. (4) The indoor temperature of the comfort air conditioner should be better than or equal to the design requirements.
6. Clean air conditioning engineering construction technology
(2) Technical requirements for clean air conditioning systems
1. Technical key points of air duct production
(1) The rigidity and tightness of the air ducts of the clean air-conditioning system shall be in accordance with the air duct requirements of high-pressure and medium-pressure systems. Among them, those with cleanliness levels from N1 to N5 shall comply with the air duct manufacturing requirements for high-pressure systems; those with cleanliness levels from N6 to N9, and the working pressure is less than or equal to 1500Pa, shall comply with the air duct manufacturing requirements for medium-pressure systems. (2) The production of air ducts and components of clean air conditioning systems should be carried out in a relatively closed and clean environment. The floor should be paved with rubber sheets or other protective materials. The boards used for processing air ducts should be cleaned before cutting, and dried immediately after washing. Measures should be taken during the processing process to ensure no secondary pollution. After the air duct and components are made, clean the inner surface with non-corrosive cleaning fluid. After drying, seal it after inspection and meet the requirements. Remove the seal before installation. It can be installed immediately after cleaning without sealing. (3) The air duct must not have horizontal seams, and the longitudinal seams should be reduced as much as possible. When the side length of the rectangular air duct is not greater than 800mm, there shall be no longitudinal joints. All seams, flanges, and rivets of the air duct must be coated with sealant.
3. Installation points of high-efficiency filter
(1) Before installing the high-efficiency filter, the interior decoration work of the clean room must be completed, and it must be thoroughly cleaned, wiped, and air blown for 12 to 24 hours.
4. Key points for debugging clean air conditioning projects
(1) Before debugging the clean air conditioning project, ①The appearance inspection of each part of the clean room project has been completed and complies with the requirements of the contract and specifications; ② The water, electricity, steam and compressed air required for the operation of the ventilation and air conditioning system are already available. ③The instruments and tools used for debugging are ready; ④ There are no construction waste or other debris in the clean room, and everything has been carefully and thoroughly cleaned. (2) The detection and adjustment of the purification air-conditioning system should be carried out after the system has been operating normally for 24 hours or more and reaches stability. The cleanliness test of the clean room (area) upon completion of the project should be carried out in an empty state or in a static state. During testing, there should be no more than 3 people in the room, and they should wear clean work clothes that are suitable for the clean room grade. (3) Clean air conditioning project debugging includes: single unit trial operation and joint trial operation; the test results of system debugging should all meet the design requirements.
2H314040 Building intelligent engineering construction technology
2H314041 Division and construction procedures of intelligent building projects
2. Construction procedures of intelligent building projects
(1) Construction procedures of intelligent building projects
1. General construction procedures for construction equipment monitoring systems: Construction preparation → construction drawing deepening → equipment and material procurement → pipeline laying → equipment and component installation → system debugging → system trial operation → system testing → system acceptance.
2. Implementation procedures of safety prevention projects: Determination of safety precaution level → Plan design and review → Determination of project contractor → Development of construction drawings → Procurement of equipment and materials → Installation of pipelines and equipment → System trial operation and debugging → System testing → Project acceptance.
(2) Construction content and requirements of intelligent building projects
2. Deepening of construction drawings (1) Before in-depth design of intelligent building construction drawings, the brand, model, and specifications of intelligent equipment should be determined first. (2) When selecting a product, you should consider the product's brand and production location, application practices, supply channels and delivery cycles; the system scale and monitoring distance supported by the product; the product's network performance and standardization degree and other information. (3) The selection of intelligent building equipment should be based on the characteristics of project management, monitoring requirements, monitoring distribution, etc., determine the overall structure of the system, and then select equipment products. The model specifications of equipment and materials must comply with design requirements and national standards, and the equipment interfaces of each system must match. (4) Understand the structural conditions of the building, the location of equipment and pipelines, control methods and technical requirements from the construction drawings of construction, electrical, water supply and drainage, ventilation and air conditioning, etc., and then deepen the construction drawings for intelligent projects.
3. Equipment and material procurement and acceptance (2) Equipment and materials should be accompanied by product certificates, quality inspection reports, installation, use and maintenance instructions, etc.; imported equipment should provide certificates of origin, commodity inspection certificates, quality certificates, test reports, installation, use and maintenance instructions in Chinese. text. (4) During the cable entry inspection, the electrical performance indicators of the cables should be randomly checked; during the optical fiber entry inspection, the optical fiber performance indicators of the optical cables should be randomly checked; and records should be kept. (5) The quality inspection of equipment should focus on safety, reliability and electromagnetic compatibility. For equipment and materials that do not meet the conditions for on-site testing, a third party can be required to test and issue a test report. (7) The functions and performance of equipment, materials, interfaces and software used in building intelligent projects should be tested in accordance with the corresponding current national standards. Products with special requirements from both the supply and demand parties can be processed according to contract provisions or design requirements. 1) The interface technical documents should comply with the contract requirements; the interface technical documents should include interface overview, interface block diagram, interface location, interface type and quantity, interface communication protocol, data flow direction, interface responsibility boundary, etc. 2) The interface test files should meet the design requirements; the interface test files should include test link construction, test instrumentation, test methods, test content and test result evaluation, etc.
4. Cable construction
(1) Cable construction requirements 1) Before laying cables, the appearance and electrical continuity of the cables should be checked. Use a megohmmeter to measure the insulation resistance. The resistance value should not be less than 0.5MΩ. 2) When signal cables and power cables are laid in parallel or across, the distance between them shall not be less than 0.3m; when signal cables and power cables are laid across, they should be at right angles. 3) When laying cables, the minimum bending radius of multi-core cables should be greater than 6 times its outer diameter. 4) Power cords, signal lines, and control lines should be laid through separate pipes; when low-voltage power supply is used, power cords, signal lines, and control lines can be laid in the same pipe. 5) When laying cables in trenches, they should be laid on brackets or in wire troughs. When laying on the cable trench supports, please plan and negotiate with the building electrical professional in advance. High-voltage cables are on the uppermost support, medium-voltage cables are on the middle support, low-voltage cables are on the middle and lower support, and intelligent cables are on the bottom support. 6) The clear distance between exposed signal cables and electrical equipment with strong magnetic fields and strong electric fields should be greater than 1.5m. When shielded cables are used or laid through metal protective tubes or laid in metal enclosed wire troughs, the net distance should be greater than 1.5m. 0.8m. 7) In integrated wiring, the length of the twisted pair cables leading from the distribution frame to each information port in the work area should not be greater than 90m. 8) After the line laying is completed, it should be checked and marked, and the appearance and continuity should be checked again. Use a megohmmeter to measure the insulation resistance. The insulation resistance value should not be less than 0.5MΩ.
(2) Construction requirements for coaxial cables 1) The attenuation, bending, shielding, moisture-proof and other properties of coaxial cables should meet the design requirements and comply with the corresponding product standards. The coaxial cable should be in one straight line with no joints in the middle; the minimum bending radius of the coaxial cable should be greater than 15 times its outer diameter. 2) Video signal transmission cable requirements:
outdoor line
Coaxial cable with outer conductor inner diameter 9mm
Indoor line
Coaxial cable with outer conductor inner diameter 5mm or 7mm
Connection lines between computer room equipment
Coaxial cable with outer conductor inner diameter 3mm or 5mm
Video coaxial cable for elevator car
Special cable for elevator
For example, SYV-75-5 means: the video line uses a coaxial cable, the impedance outer sheath material is polyvinyl chloride, and the inner diameter of the outer conductor is 5mm.
(3) Construction requirements for optical cables 1) Before laying the optical cable, the optical fiber should be inspected. The optical fiber should have no breakpoints and its attenuation value should meet the design requirements. Check the length of the optical cable and select the optical cable according to the laying length of the construction drawing. 2) When laying optical cables, their minimum dynamic bending radius should be greater than 20 times the outer diameter of the optical cable. The traction end of the optical cable should be technically treated, and a traction machine with automatically controlled traction force can be used for traction. The traction force should be applied to the reinforced core, and its traction force should not exceed 150kg; the traction speed should be 10m/min; the linear length of one traction should not exceed 1km, and the reserved length of the optical fiber connector should not be less than 8m.
6. System debugging and trial operation (1) Before commissioning, check the installed equipment model, specifications, etc. according to the design documents. Check whether the line wiring is correct to avoid serious consequences caused by wiring errors. (2) The debugging plan, equipment floor plan, circuit diagram and other technical documents have been prepared. Debugging work should be presided over by the professional and technical person in charge of the project. (3) Before power-on and trial operation, the power supply part of the system should be inspected, and the voltage, polarity and phase of the power supply equipment should be checked.
7. System detection System testing should be carried out after the system has passed the trial operation. (1) Information should be submitted before system testing 1) Engineering technical documents; 2) On-site inspection records of equipment and materials and equipment unpacking inspection records; 3) Self-inspection records; 4) Sub-project quality acceptance records; 5) Trial operation record. (2) System testing organization 1) The construction unit should organize a project inspection team; 2) The project inspection team should designate the person in charge of inspection; 3) The project testing team of public institutions should be composed of qualified testing units. (3) System testing implementation 1) Prepare a system testing plan based on the testing items, testing quantities and testing methods stipulated in engineering technical documents and specifications. The testing plan will be implemented after approval by the construction unit or project supervision engineer; 2) Carry out testing according to the testing items listed in the system testing plan. The main control items and general items of the system testing should comply with the specifications; 3) System testing procedure: sub-project→sub-division project→division project; 4) After the system passes the test, fill in the sub-project test records, sub-division project test records and sub-division project test summary records; 5) Sub-project inspection records, sub-division project inspection records and sub-division project inspection summary records are filled in by the inspection team. The person in charge of the inspection makes the inspection conclusion. The supervision engineer of the supervision unit (or the project professional and technical person in charge of the construction unit) Sign to confirm.
8. Construction intelligence division (sub-division) project acceptance (1) Project acceptance conditions 1) The construction is completed according to the approved engineering technical documents; 2) Complete debugging and self-test; 3) The sub-project quality acceptance is qualified; 4) Complete the system trial operation; 5) The system passed the test; 6) Complete technical training. (2) Project acceptance organization 1) The construction unit organizes a project acceptance team to be responsible for project acceptance. 2) The personnel of the acceptance team should be determined according to the nature, characteristics and management requirements of the project. The total number of acceptance personnel should be an odd number, among which the number of professional and technical personnel should not be less than 50% of the total number of acceptance personnel. 3) The acceptance team should inspect the project entities and materials and make correct, fair and objective acceptance conclusions. (3) Project acceptance documents 1) As-built drawings; 2) Design change records and project negotiation records; 3) On-site inspection records of equipment and materials and equipment unpacking inspection records; 4) Sub-project quality acceptance records; 5) Trial operation record; 6) System testing records; 7) Training records and training materials. (4) When accepting each subsystem, acceptance documents should also be included 1) The acceptance documents of the intelligent integrated system should also include: application software documents compiled for the project; interface technical documents; interface test documents. 2) Information network system acceptance documents should also include: configuration files for switches, routers, firewalls and other equipment; QoS (quality of service) planning solutions; security control strategies; network management software related documents; network security software related documents. 3) The acceptance documents of the integrated wiring system should also include documents related to the integrated wiring management software. 4) The acceptance documents for cable TV and satellite TV receiving systems should also include user distribution level diagrams. 5) The acceptance document of the information application system should also include the application software requirement specifications, installation manual, operation manual, maintenance manual and test report. 6) The construction equipment monitoring system acceptance documents should also include: the installation manual, use and maintenance manual of the central management workstation software; the wiring diagram in the controller box. 7) The computer room project acceptance document should also include cabinet equipment assembly drawings. 8) The acceptance documents for lightning protection and grounding systems should also include a list of lightning protection equipment.
2H314042 Technical requirements for installation of intelligent building equipment
1. Technical regulations for the installation of building intelligent system equipment
1. Installation requirements for computer room equipment
(1) The installation location should meet the design requirements, the installation should be stable and firm, and it should be easy to operate and maintain. Equipment with a load capacity greater than 600kg/m² should have a separate equipment base and should not be installed directly on the anti-static floor. (2) The equipment installed in the cabinet should have ventilation and heat dissipation measures, and the internal connectors and equipment should be firmly connected.
2. Installation requirements for satellite antennas and cable television equipment
(1) Satellite receiving antenna installation requirements 1) The satellite antenna base should be constructed according to the location and size of the design drawings while pouring concrete in the civil construction. The anchor bolts in the base should be welded and connected to the steel bars on the top of the building and connected to the grounding body. The antenna The base ground resistance should be less than 4Ω.
3. Installation requirements for loudspeakers in broadcasting systems
(1) Determine the height of the broadcast loudspeaker and its horizontal and vertical direction according to the sound field design and on-site conditions. The sound radiation of the broadcast loudspeaker should be directed towards the broadcast service area. When there are tall buildings and tall terrain features around, avoid echoes caused by improper installation. (2) Speakers used in fire hazard areas should be made of flame-retardant materials or protected by flame-retardant back covers. Broadcast speakers should be able to work normally under short-term spray conditions. (3) The joints between the broadcast speakers and the broadcast lines should be in good contact, and the joints should be connected by crimping sleeves. (4) The poles, trusses, walls, ceilings and fasteners on which the speakers are installed should have sufficient load-bearing capacity. (5) Broadcast speakers installed outdoors should take measures to prevent moisture, rain and mildew.
4. Telephone switching equipment installation requirements
(1) When installing the switch cabinet, the vertical deviation between the upper and lower ends should not be greater than 3mm. The cabinets should be arranged in a straight line, and the error should not be greater than 5mm every 5m. (2) The vertical deviation of the upper and lower ends of the distribution frame should not be greater than 3mm, and the horizontal error of the base should not be greater than 2mm per meter.
5. Installation requirements for building intelligent monitoring equipment
(3) Main input equipment installation requirements 1) Various sensors should be installed in a position that can accurately reflect their detection performance, away from places with strong magnetic fields or violent vibrations, and to facilitate debugging and maintenance. 2) The opening and welding of water pipe type sensors must be carried out before the pressure test, cleaning, anti-corrosion and insulation of the pipeline. The installation of air duct type sensors should be carried out after the air duct insulation layer is completed. 3) The connection between the sensor and the field controller should meet the design requirements. For example, the wiring resistance of a nickel temperature sensor should be less than 3Ω, and the wiring resistance of a platinum temperature sensor should be less than 1Ω and grounded on the field controller side. 4) The electromagnetic flowmeter should be installed upstream of the flow regulating valve. There should be a straight pipe section 10 times the pipe diameter upstream of the flowmeter, and a straight pipe section 4 to 5 times the pipe diameter length downstream. 5) The installation location of the air quality sensor should be selected to correctly reflect the air quality condition. (4) Main output equipment installation requirements 1) Before installing solenoid valves and electric control valves, the resistance between the coil and the valve body should be checked according to the instructions, and simulated action tests and pressure tests should be carried out. The arrow on the valve housing points in the same direction as the flow of water. 2) Before installing the electric air valve controller, check whether the resistance, power supply voltage, input signal, etc. between the coil and the valve body meet the requirements. It is advisable to conduct a simulation action check. Notice: Industrial pipeline valves: shell pressure test and sealing test Building pipeline valves (water supply and drainage pipeline valves): strength test and tightness test Ventilation and air-conditioning water pipe valves (working pressure greater than 1.0MPa and play a cutting role on the main pipe and system cold and hot water operation conversion adjustment Functional valves and check valves): Test of shell strength and disc sealing performance Building intelligent valves (solenoid valves, electric control valves): simulated action test and pressure test Building intelligent valve (electric damper controller): simulated action inspection
6. Installation of automatic fire alarm system equipment
(1) The terminal box and module box should be installed in the weak current room and should be fixed on the wall according to the designed height. (2) The main lines, fire alarms and other control lines leading from the fire control room should be bundled separately and collected on both sides of the terminal board. The left side should be the main lines and the right side should be the control lines. (3) Equipment grounding should use copper-core insulated wires or cables. The shell and foundation of fire control equipment should be reliably grounded, and the working grounding wire and protective grounding wire should be separated.
7. Security system equipment installation requirements
(2) Camera installation requirements 1) It should be powered on and tested before installation, and the operation should be normal. In order to meet the requirements of the field of view of the monitoring target, the indoor installation height should not be lower than 2.5m from the ground; the outdoor installation height should not be lower than 3.5m. (3) Installation of entrance and exit control equipment 1) The installation height of various reading devices should not be higher than 1.5m from the ground. 2) When installing the inductive card reader, attention should be paid to the sensing range and should not be close to high-frequency or strong magnetic fields.
2. Debugging and testing of building intelligent system equipment
1. Satellite antenna and cable TV equipment debugging and testing
(2) Commissioning and testing of cable TV equipment 1) When conducting subjective evaluation and objective testing of cable TV and satellite TV receiving systems, the regulations for selecting standard test points: when the number of output ports of the system is less than 1,000, the number of test points shall not be less than 2; when the number of output ports of the system is greater than 1,000 , 2 to 3 test points should be selected for every 1000 points; at least one test point should be located after the last distribution amplifier of the main line in the system. 2) Objective test content: test the receiving frequency band, video system indicators and audio system indicators of the satellite receiving television system; measure the terminal output level of the cable TV system.
2. Debugging and testing of broadcast system speakers
(1) Check the speaker positions of the broadcasting system. They should be reasonably distributed and meet the design requirements. When testing the broadcast system, all broadcast speakers in the broadcast zone should be turned on, and the measurement points should be evenly arranged. (2) Detect and listen to each broadcast zone one by one. Conduct functional inspections on each broadcast zone and the entire system, and make adjustments based on the inspection results to ensure that the emergency functions of the system meet the design requirements. (3) Test the electroacoustic performance indicators of the system and conduct debugging based on the tests. The electroacoustic performance indicators of the system should meet the design requirements. (4) Contents that should be detected for emergency broadcasts (including fire emergency broadcast functions): emergency broadcasts have the highest level of priority; the response time for emergency broadcasts to play warning signals, alarm voices or real-time command voices to the relevant broadcast areas; automatic volume adjustment function. (5) Detect the sound field unevenness, leakage sound attenuation and system equipment signal-to-noise ratio of the broadcast system to meet the design requirements. (6) The continuous power-on time for system debugging should not be less than 24 hours.
3. Construction equipment monitoring system equipment debugging and testing
(2) Ventilation and air conditioning equipment system debugging and testing 1) Automatically adjust the damper to control the fresh air volume and supply air volume of the air conditioning system. 2) Automatically adjust the water valve to control the supply air temperature (return air temperature) to the set value. 3) Automatically adjust the humidification valve to control the supply air relative humidity (return air relative humidity) to the set value. 4) Use the filter's differential pressure switch alarm signal to determine whether the filter needs to be cleaned or replaced. 5) Monitor fan failure alarms and corresponding safety interlock control, electrical interlock and antifreeze interlock control, etc. (3) Debugging and testing of power transformation and distribution systems. 1) Operation status and fault alarm of high and low voltage switches of power transformation and distribution equipment; display of current value of power supply and main power supply circuit, display of power supply voltage value, power factor measurement, electric energy measurement, etc. 2) Transformer over-temperature alarm; emergency generator set power supply current, voltage and frequency and oil storage tank liquid level monitoring, fault alarm; uninterruptible power supply working status, battery pack and charging equipment working status detection. (4) Lighting control system debugging and testing 1) Monitor and detect lighting equipment (scene lighting, landscape lighting) using illumination, time, etc. as control parameters. 2) Randomly inspect 10% of the total number of open loops, and the number should not be less than 10. If the total number is less than 10, all should be tested. Lighting equipment in different areas are controlled on and off respectively. (5) Debugging and testing of water supply and drainage systems 1) Detection of liquid level, pressure parameters and water pump operating status of water supply system, drainage system and reclaimed water system; automatic adjustment of water pump speed; switching of water pump operation; fault alarm and protection. 2) All water supply and reclaimed water monitoring systems should be tested; 50% of the drainage monitoring systems should be randomly inspected, and no less than 5 sets should be tested. If the total number is less than 5 sets, all should be tested. (6) Detection of central management workstation and operation substation 1) The functional testing content of the central management workstation includes: the display function of operating status and measurement data; the reporting of fault alarm information should be timely and accurate, with prompt signals; the setting and modification functions of system operating parameters; control commands should be executed without conflicts; The recording, storage and processing functions of system operation data; operating permissions; the human-machine interface should be in Chinese. 2) The function of the operation substation detects the consistency of monitoring management authority and data display with the central management workstation. 3) The functions of the central management workstation should be fully tested, and 20% of the operating substations should be randomly inspected, and no less than 5 should be tested. If there are less than 5, all functions should be tested.
4. Debugging and testing requirements for automatic fire alarm equipment
3) The system lines should be checked according to national standards. Corresponding measures should be taken for misaligned wiring, open circuits, false soldering, short circuits, insulation resistance less than 20MΩ, etc. 4) Check the fire alarm controller, combustible gas alarm controller, fire linkage controller, gas fire extinguishing controller, fire electrical control device, fire equipment emergency power supply, fire emergency broadcasting equipment, fire telephone, transmission equipment, and fire control in the system The central graphic display device, fire electric device, fire shutter controller, area display (fire display panel), fire emergency lighting control device, fire alarm device and other equipment are subject to stand-alone power-on inspection. (2) Debugging and testing of automatic fire alarm system equipment 1) Connect all qualified equipment and systems according to the design to form a complete automatic fire alarm system, and check the functions of the system according to national standards and the designed linkage logic. All inspection quantities should be inspected, and the inspection method is observation inspection. 2) After the automatic fire alarm system has been running continuously for 120 hours without failure, the debugging record form must be filled in according to national standards.
5. Safety technology prevention system debugging and testing requirements
(1) Product inspection Safety protection products included in the national compulsory certification product catalog should check the product's certification certificate or test report. (2) Safety technology prevention system testing requirements 1) Subsystem functions should be tested item by item according to design requirements; 2) The number of cameras, detectors, entrance and exit reading equipment, electronic patrol information readers and other equipment to be randomly inspected should not be less than 20%, and should not be less than 3 units. If the number is less than 3 units, all equipment should be inspected. (3) Functional testing content of the comprehensive security management system 1) The quality and storage time of monitoring images, alarm information and other information records; 2) Linkage with the automatic fire alarm system and emergency response system, and alarm signal output interface; 3) The accuracy and real-time response of each subsystem in the security technology prevention system to the control commands of the monitoring center. (4) Alarm system debugging and testing 1) The detection range, sensitivity, false alarm, missed alarm, recovery after alarm state, anti-tamper protection and other functions and indicators of the detector used in the inspection and debugging system should meet the design requirements; 2) Check the controller’s local and remote alarm, anti-vandal alarm, arming and disarming, alarm priority, self-test and display functions, etc., and they should meet the design requirements; 3) Check the response time of the system during emergency alarm and it should basically meet the design requirements.
For example, detect the fortification status of prevention parts and key departments, and whether there are any prevention blind spots. Whether the operation of safety protection equipment meets the design requirements. Detector's blind area detection, anti-tamper alarm function detection, signal line open circuit and short circuit alarm function detection, power cord cut alarm function detection. Whether the alarm linkage between various prevention subsystems meets the safety prevention requirements.
(5) Video surveillance system debugging and testing 1) Check and debug the camera's monitoring range, focus, environmental illumination and anti-backlight effect, etc., so that the image clarity and grayscale meet the system design requirements; 2) Check and adjust the remote control functions of the pan/tilt, lens, etc. to eliminate undesirable phenomena such as remote control delay and mechanical impact, so that the monitoring range meets the design requirements; 3) Check and adjust the operating procedures, image switching, character overlay and other functions of the video switching control host to ensure normal operation and meet design requirements; 4) Check and debug the quality of surveillance images and playback images. Under normal working lighting conditions, the quality of surveillance images should not be lower than the current national standards or at least be able to identify human facial features; 5) When the system has alarm linkage function, functions such as automatically turning on the camera power, automatically switching audio and video to the designated monitor, automatic real-time recording, etc. should be checked and debugged; 6) The system should superimpose the identifiers of camera time and camera position (including elevator and floor display), and display them stably. When the system requires light linkage, you should check whether the image quality meets the design requirements after the lights are turned on. For example, camera system function testing, image quality testing, digital hard disk video surveillance system testing, whether the recording and storage time of surveillance images meet the design and specification standards, etc.
6. Conference system detection
Conference systems include: conference sound reinforcement system, conference video display system, conference lighting system, conference simultaneous interpretation system, conference discussion system, conference television system, conference voting system, conference camera system and conference sign-in system, etc. (1) When testing the conference system, the testing content and acceptance items should be determined based on the system scale and actual selected functions and systems, as well as the importance of the conference room and the complexity of the equipment. (2) Before testing the conference system, it is advisable to check the testing records of the power supply introduced into the conference system and the sound at the venue. (3) Function testing and performance testing of the conference system 1) Functional testing should use on-site simulation methods and be tested item by item according to design requirements; 2) Performance testing can be carried out using objective measurement or subjective evaluation methods. (4) Testing of conference sound reinforcement system 1) The acoustic characteristic index can detect the speech transmission index, or directly detect the content: maximum sound pressure level; transmission frequency characteristics; sound transmission gain; sound field unevenness; and total system noise level. (5) Detection of conference video display system 1) Detection content of display characteristic indicators: display brightness; image contrast; brightness uniformity; image horizontal clarity; color gamut coverage; horizontal viewing angle and vertical viewing angle. (6) Conference lighting systems with conference television functions should detect the average illumination value. (7) The conference discussion system and conference simultaneous interpretation system should detect the linkage function with the automatic fire alarm system. (8) Testing of conference video system 1) The functions of the main venue and branch venues should be tested separately; 2) The tests for performance evaluation should include sound delay, audio-visual synchronization, conference TV echo, image clarity and image continuity; 3) The detection of conference lighting systems should include illumination, color temperature and color rendering index.
2H314050 Fire engineering construction technology
2H314051 Division and construction procedures of fire protection projects
1. Division of fire protection engineering
Automatic sprinkler system: installation of fire water pumps and pressure regulator pumps, installation of fire water tanks and construction of fire pools, installation of fire pneumatic water supply equipment, installation of fire water pump adapters, pipe network installation, sprinkler head installation, alarm valve group installation, and other component installation, System pressure test, pipe network flushing, system debugging.
2. Fire engineering construction procedures
1. Construction procedures of water fire extinguishing system
(1) Construction procedures for fire water pumps and pressure stabilizing pumps Construction preparation→Foundation acceptance review→Pump body installation→Suction pipeline installation→Water outlet pipeline installation→Single machine commissioning.
(2) Fire hydrant fire extinguishing system construction procedures Construction preparation → Installation of main pipes → Installation of risers and branch pipes → Stabilization of the box → Installation of accessories → Pipeline pressure test and flushing → System debugging.
(3) Automatic sprinkler system construction procedures Construction preparation → Main pipe installation → Alarm valve installation → Stand pipe installation → Layered main and branch pipe installation → Sprinkler head branch pipe installation → Pipe pressure test → Pipe flushing → Pressure reducing device installation → Alarm valve accessories and other components installation → Sprinkler head installation → System water debugging.
(4) Construction procedures of automatic tracking and positioning jet fire extinguishing system Construction preparation → Main pipe installation → Stand pipe installation → Layered main and branch pipe installation → Pipe pressure test → Pipe flushing → Installation of fire extinguishing devices and accessories → Installation of power source and detection and control devices → System debugging.
3. Technical requirements for fire protection engineering construction
1. Construction requirements for water fire extinguishing systems
(1) The inlet and outlet pipes of reinforced concrete fire pools and fire water tanks should be equipped with waterproof casings. The inlet and outlet pipes of fire pools and fire water tanks made of steel plates should be flanged. Pipes with vibrations should be connected by flanges. Provide flexible joints. The inlet and outlet pipe joints of a combined fire pool or fire water tank should be connected by flanges. When other connections are used, they should be rust-proofed. (2) For fire water supply overhead pipelines, when the pipe diameter is equal to or larger than DN50, each section of water distribution main pipe or water distribution pipe should be equipped with not less than one anti-sway bracket, and the spacing between anti-sway brackets should not exceed 15m; when the pipeline turns, When the tee, cross, etc. change direction, an anti-sway bracket should be added. 1) The strength of the anti-sway bracket should be such that the weight of the pipe, fittings and water in the pipe plus 50% of the horizontal thrust will not cause damage or permanent deformation; 2) When the pipeline is installed through the beam, the pipeline should be fixed on the concrete structure with fasteners and should be treated as an anti-sway bracket. (3) The pipes of the automatic sprinkler system should be installed horizontally with a slope of 2‰ to 5‰ and should be oriented towards the drainage pipes; when it is difficult to use drainage pipes to drain water in local areas, corresponding drainage measures should be taken. (4) The water outlet direction of the indoor fire hydrant should be downward or at an angle of 90° to the wall where the fire hydrant is installed. The water outlet should not be installed on the door axis side. (5) The center of the indoor fire hydrant spout should be 1.1m from the ground. The height of special locations can be treated specially, with an allowable deviation of ±20mm. (6) Construction requirements for closed sprinkler heads of automatic sprinkler systems: 1) The sealing performance test should be carried out before installation, and the nozzle installation must be carried out after the system pressure test and flushing pass. 2) The nozzles should not be disassembled, assembled or modified during installation, and it is strictly prohibited to add any decorative coating to the decorative covers of the nozzles and concealed nozzles. 3) A special wrench should be used to install the nozzle. It is strictly prohibited to use the frame of the nozzle to tighten. 4) When the frame and splash plate of the nozzle are deformed or the original parts are damaged, the nozzle should be replaced with a nozzle of the same specification and model. (7) The installation of the rain alarm valve group should be carried out after the pressure test and flushing of the water supply pipe network have passed. (8) After the fire water supply pipe network is installed, strength test, flushing and tightness test should be carried out. (9) The debugging of the fire hydrant system should include: debugging and testing of water sources; debugging of fire water pumps; debugging of pressure stabilizing pumps or stabilizing facilities; debugging of pressure reducing valves; debugging of fire hydrants; debugging of automatic control detectors; alarm valves of dry fire hydrant systems, etc. The debugging of rapid opening and closing devices should include the debugging of electric or solenoid valves and other valves attached to alarm valves; debugging of drainage facilities; and interlocking control tests. (10) After the installation of the indoor fire hydrant system is completed, the test fire hydrant on the top floor (or in the water tank room) and the two fire hydrants on the first floor should be taken for test firing. (11) The debugging of the automatic sprinkler system should include: water source testing; fire pump debugging; pressure stabilizing pump debugging; alarm valve debugging; drainage facility debugging; and linkage testing.
2. After the pipe network of the automatic tracking and positioning jet fire extinguishing system is installed, strength test, flushing and tightness test should be carried out.
3. Gas fire extinguishing system installation requirements: (1) After the fire extinguishing agent storage device is installed, the pressure relief direction of the pressure relief device should not be toward the operating surface. The safety valve of the low-pressure carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system should be connected to the outdoors through a dedicated pressure relief pipe. (2) When the installation height of the selector valve exceeds 1.7m, measures should be taken to facilitate operation. The flow direction indicator arrow of the selector valve should point to the direction of medium flow. (3) After the installation of the fire extinguishing agent transportation pipeline is completed, the strength test and air pressure tightness test should be carried out and passed. (4) For nozzles without decorative covers installed under the suspended ceiling, the threads at the end of the connecting pipe should not be exposed on the suspended ceiling; for nozzles with decorative covers installed under the suspended ceiling, the decorative cover should be close to the suspended ceiling. (5) The debugging projects of the gas fire extinguishing system should include simulated start-up test, simulated jet test and simulated switching operation test.
4. The debugging of the foam fire extinguishing system includes: switching test of power source and backup power; test of water source; test of fire pump and voltage stabilizing equipment; debugging of foam proportion mixing device; debugging of foam generating device; debugging of alarm valve; foam Cold spray test of fire hydrant; water spray and foam spray test of foam fire extinguishing system, etc.
5. The linkage control components of the dry powder fire extinguishing device should undergo simulated start-up tests, including automatic simulated start-up and manual simulated start-up tests. 6. The debugging of the water mist fire extinguishing system should include debugging and linkage testing of the pump unit, pressure stabilizing pump, and zone control valve.
7. Construction requirements for smoke prevention and exhaust systems (2) The body, frame, fixing materials, and sealing materials of fireproof air ducts must be non-combustible materials, and their fire resistance levels should meet the design requirements. The combustion performance report of the materials should be checked when they enter the site. (3) The installation position and direction of the smoke exhaust fire damper should be correct. The valve should be closed in the direction of air flow. The distance between the fire dampers on both sides of the fire partition wall should not be greater than 200mm from the wall surface. (4) The smoke exhaust fire damper should be equipped with independent supports and hangers. (5) The installation positions of normally closed air supply vents, smoke exhaust valves or smoke exhaust outlets and manual control devices (including embedded casings) should meet the design requirements. If there are no design requirements, the manual control devices should be fixed and installed in clearly visible and distant places. The location is convenient for operation between 1.3 and 1.5m above the floor; the manual and electric operation of electric fire dampers and smoke prevention and exhaust air valves (ports) should be flexible and reliable, and the signal output should be correct. (6) The flexible short pipe of the smoke prevention and exhaust system must be made of non-combustible materials, and the combustion performance report of the material should be verified when it enters the site. (7) The smoke prevention and exhaust fan should be installed on a concrete or steel frame foundation and should not be equipped with a vibration damping device; if the smoke exhaust system is shared with the ventilation and air conditioning system and a vibration damping device is required, rubber damping devices should not be used. (8) After the installation of the air duct system is completed, a tightness inspection should be carried out; the allowable air leakage of the smoke prevention and exhaust duct should be determined according to the medium pressure system air duct.
8. Automatic fire alarm and fire linkage system (1) The automatic fire alarm system should be wired separately. Lines with different voltage levels and current categories in the system should not be laid in the same pipe or wire trough hole. (2) System debugging includes: 1) Debugging of fire alarm controller and its on-site components; 2) Household fire safety system debugging; 3) Debugging of fire linkage controller and its on-site components; 4) Debugging of fire-fighting telephone system; 5) Debugging of combustible gas detection and alarm system; 6) Debugging of various fire detectors; 7) Debugging of electrical fire monitoring system; 8) Debugging of fire equipment power supply monitoring system; 9) Debugging of emergency power supply for fire protection equipment; 10) Debugging of graphic display devices and transmission equipment in the fire control room; 11) Debugging of fire alarm and fire emergency broadcasting systems; 12) Debugging of fire shutter system; 13) Fire door monitoring system debugging; 14) Debugging of gas and dry powder fire extinguishing systems; 15) Debugging of automatic sprinkler system; 16) Debugging of fire hydrant system; 17) Debugging of smoke prevention and exhaust system; 18) Fire emergency lighting and evacuation indication system control and debugging; 19) Intermodal control debugging of elevators, non-fire power supplies and other related systems; 20) Debugging of the overall intermodal transport control function of the system
9. Technical requirements for fire protection systems in industrial projects Fire protection projects in industrial construction projects such as electric power, petrochemicals, metallurgy, and mining have many things in common with fire protection projects in civil and public buildings, but they also have their own characteristics and requirements. (1) Set up different fire protection facilities and fire extinguishing systems based on factors such as the nature of materials stored in industrial buildings, production operating conditions, fire risk, building volume and other factors. ①Thermal power plant Oil-immersed transformers with a capacity of 90MV·A and above should be equipped with automatic fire alarm systems, water spray fire extinguishing systems or other fire extinguishing systems; gas turbine generator units (including gas turbines, gearboxes, generators and control rooms) should be fully flooded with gas Fire extinguishing system and automatic fire alarm system should be set up. ②Iron and steel metallurgical enterprises Oil-immersed transformers in non-main step-down substations with a single capacity of greater than or equal to 40MV·A should be equipped with automatic fire alarm systems, as well as water spray, water mist and gas fire extinguishing systems; Warehouses that store zinc powder, calcium carbide, low sodium sulfite and other items that burn when exposed to water are not allowed to have indoor or outdoor fire-fighting water supply. ③Petroleum storage tanks, above-ground fixed roof storage tanks, internal floating roof storage tanks and horizontal storage tanks A low-expansion foam fire extinguishing system or a medium-expansion foam fire extinguishing system, as well as a fire cooling water system and an automatic fire alarm system should be installed. (2) Many industrial projects have fire stations. The type and number of fire trucks in the stations are adapted to the fire risk of the enterprise to meet the needs of extinguishing and controlling initial fires. If the capacity of a single generating unit in a thermal power plant is 300MW and above, a corporate fire station should be set up. There should be no less than 2 fire trucks in the station, one of which can be a water tank or foam fire truck, and the other can be a dry powder or dry powder foam fire truck. Joint vehicle.
2H314052 Acceptance requirements for fire protection projects
1. Relevant regulations for acceptance of fire protection projects
1. The housing and urban-rural development departments of local people's governments at or above the county level shall implement fire protection design review, fire protection acceptance, filing, and filing random inspection management of construction projects within their respective administrative regions. 2. For special construction projects that have one of the following circumstances, the construction unit shall apply for fire protection design review to the housing and urban-rural development department of the local people's government within its administrative region, and apply for fire protection acceptance to the fire protection design review and acceptance department after the completion of the construction project . Items that have not been inspected for fire protection or have not passed the inspection for fire protection are prohibited from being put into use. (1) Sports venues, auditoriums, public exhibition halls, and museum exhibition halls with a total construction area of more than 20,000 m2. (2) Civil airport terminals, passenger terminal waiting rooms, and passenger terminal waiting halls with a total construction area greater than 15,000 m2. (3) Hotels, restaurants, shopping malls, and markets with a total construction area greater than 10,000 m2. (4) Theaters with a total construction area of more than 2500 m2, reading rooms of public libraries, commercial indoor fitness and leisure venues, outpatient buildings of hospitals, teaching buildings, libraries, canteens of universities, production and processing workshops of labor-intensive enterprises, Temples, churches. (5) Children's rooms in nurseries and kindergartens with a total construction area of more than 1000m2, children's play halls and other indoor children's activity places, nursing homes, welfare homes, ward buildings of hospitals and nursing homes, teaching buildings, libraries, canteens of primary and secondary schools, schools collective dormitories, collective dormitories for employees of labor-intensive enterprises. (6) Song and dance halls, video halls, projection halls, karaoke halls, nightclubs, entertainment halls, saunas, Internet cafes, bars with a total construction area of more than 500m2, and restaurants, teahouses, and coffee shops with entertainment functions. (7) A category of high-rise residential buildings stipulated in the national fire protection technical standards for engineering construction. (8) Urban rail transit, tunnel projects, large-scale power generation, power transformation and distribution projects. (9) Factories, warehouses, special stations and docks that produce, store, load and unload flammable and explosive dangerous goods, filling stations, supply stations and pressure regulating stations for flammable and explosive gases and liquids. (10) State agency office building, electric power dispatching building, telecommunications building, postal building, disaster prevention command and dispatching building, radio and television building, and archives building. (11) There are construction projects listed in items 1 to 6 of this article. (12) Other public buildings with a single building area greater than 40,000m2 or a building height exceeding 50m other than those specified in Items 10 and 11 of this article. 3. For other construction projects, the fire protection acceptance record and spot inspection management system shall be implemented.
2. Fire protection acceptance conditions for special construction projects and materials that should be submitted
(1) Conditions for fire protection acceptance of special construction projects 1. Complete the fire protection design of the project and all fire protection contents agreed in the contract. 2. Have complete engineering fire protection technical files and construction management information (including on-site test reports of building materials, building components and equipment involved in fire protection). 3. The construction unit shall pass the acceptance inspection of all parts of the project involving fire protection; construction, design, project supervision, technical service and other units shall confirm that the fire protection quality of the project meets relevant standards. 4. The performance of fire protection facilities, joint debugging and testing of system functions and other contents have passed the test.
(2) Information that should be submitted for fire protection acceptance of special construction projects When applying for fire protection acceptance, the construction unit shall provide the following materials: (1) Fire protection acceptance declaration form; (2) Project completion acceptance report; (3) Completion drawings of construction projects involving fire protection.
3. Organization and acceptance procedures for fire protection engineering acceptance
1. Organization of fire protection acceptance (1) The fire protection inspection and acceptance of special construction projects shall be guided and supervised by the housing and urban-rural development department of the State Council. (2) The competent departments for fire protection design review and acceptance at or above the county level are responsible for the fire protection acceptance of special construction projects within their respective administrative regions. (3) The fire protection acceptance work of special construction projects across administrative regions shall be designated by the higher-level competent department jointly with the fire protection design review and acceptance departments of the administrative region where the construction project is located.
2.Acceptance procedure The acceptance procedure usually includes acceptance acceptance, on-site assessment and issuance of fire protection acceptance opinions. (1) Acceptance acceptance. The construction unit shall organize to fill in the "Fire Protection Acceptance Application Form", submit an application to the fire protection design review and acceptance department, and provide relevant written information. The information should be true and valid and meet the application requirements. (2) On-site assessment. After accepting the application for fire protection acceptance, the department in charge of fire protection design review and acceptance will conduct on-site assessment of the special construction project. On-site assessment includes on-site sampling inspection of the appearance of the building's fire prevention (extinguishing) facilities, on-site sampling measurement of measurable indicators such as distance, height, width, length, area, and thickness through professional instruments and equipment, and on-site sampling of the fire protection facilities. Functional sampling tests, joint debugging and joint testing of system functions of fire protection facilities, etc. (3) Issue fire protection acceptance opinions. After the on-site assessment is completed, the fire protection design review and acceptance department will formulate acceptance opinions or comments based on the relevant assessment rules for fire protection acceptance. After the acceptance assessment is passed, a "Construction Engineering Fire Acceptance Acceptance Letter" will be issued. For construction projects that implement joint acceptance of planning, land, fire protection, civil air defense, archives and other matters, the fire protection acceptance opinions shall be uniformly issued by the department designated by the local people's government.
3. Local fire acceptance For parts of large-scale construction projects that need to be partially put into use, fire protection acceptance of partial construction projects can be implemented based on the application of the construction unit. 4. Time limit for fire protection acceptance The department in charge of fire protection design review and acceptance shall organize fire protection acceptance within 15 days from the date of accepting the application for fire protection acceptance, and issue a "Construction Project Fire Protection Acceptance Opinion" after passing the on-site assessment and inspection.
4. Fire acceptance during construction
2. Fire protection projects can be divided into three types of fire protection acceptance forms according to construction procedures.
Concealed project fire protection acceptance
Conduct fire inspection before being concealed. For example, fire water supply pipes buried under roads and floors Network, fire alarm line ducts laid in the wall, etc.
Rough decoration fire protection acceptance
It belongs to the functional acceptance of fire protection facilities. After acceptance, The conditions for putting it into use are not yet met.
Fine decoration fire protection acceptance
After passing the acceptance inspection, the building is ready for use.
5. Fire acceptance and filing of other construction projects
1. For other construction projects, the construction unit shall report to the fire protection design review and acceptance department for fire protection acceptance filing within 5 working days from the date when the project is completed and accepted. The construction unit shall submit the following materials when applying for registration: (1) Fire protection acceptance record form; (2) Project completion acceptance report; (3) Completion drawings of construction projects involving fire protection. 2. The fire protection design review and acceptance department shall conduct random inspection management of other registered construction projects. The spot inspection work implements a "double random, one open" system, randomly selecting inspection objects and randomly selecting inspectors; the selection ratio is announced to the public by the housing and urban-rural development departments of the people's governments of provinces, autonomous regions, and municipalities directly under the Central Government, and the random inspection results are announced to the public. 3. If other construction projects fail to pass the random inspection in accordance with the law, they shall be stopped from use.
2H314060 Elevator engineering construction technology
2H314061 Division and construction procedures of elevator projects
1. Division of sub-projects of elevator projects
Elevator projects are divided into divisions and sub-projects according to the "Uniform Standard for Construction Quality Acceptance of Construction Projects" GB50300-2013
Branch project
Sub-branch project
sub-projects
elevator
Electrically driven Traction or strong Standard elevator
Equipment entry acceptance, civil engineering handover inspection, drive host, guide rail, door system, car, etc. Heavy, safety components, suspension devices, traveling cables, compensation devices, electrical devices, complete machine safety Installation acceptance
Hydraulic elevator
Equipment arrival acceptance, civil construction handover inspection, hydraulic system, guide rail, door system, car, etc. Heavy, safety components, suspension devices, accompanying cables, electrical devices, complete machine installation acceptance
escalator, self-service Moving sidewalk
Equipment entry acceptance, civil construction handover inspection, complete machine installation acceptance
The electric-driven traction or forced elevator installation sub-division project is composed of ① equipment entry acceptance ② civil construction handover inspection ③ driving host ④ guide rail ⑤ door system ⑥ car ⑦ counterweight ⑧ safety components ⑨ suspension device, accompanying cables, It consists of sub-projects such as compensation device ⑩ electrical device ⑪ complete machine installation and acceptance.
The hydraulic elevator installation sub-division project consists of ① equipment entry acceptance ② civil construction handover inspection ③ hydraulic system ④ guide rail ⑤ door system ⑥ car ⑦ counterweight ⑧ safety components ⑨ suspension device, accompanying cable ⑩ electrical device ⑪ complete machine installation acceptance, etc. Composed of sub-projects.
The installation of escalators and moving walkways consists of three sub-projects: ① equipment entry acceptance ② civil construction handover inspection ③ complete machine installation acceptance.
2. Classification and composition of elevators
1. Classification of elevators
(3) Classification by running speed ① Low-speed elevators, elevators with v≤1.0m/s; ②Medium speed elevator, elevator with 1.0m/s<v≤2.5m/s; ③High-speed elevator, elevator with 2.5m/s<v≤6.0m/s; ④Super high-speed elevator, elevator with v>6.0m/s.
2.Elevator composition
Elevators generally consist of four major parts: machine room, shaft, car, and landing. (1) Traction or forced elevators are divided into system functions and usually consist of traction system, guide system, car system, door system, weight balance system, drive system, control system, safety protection system, etc. (2) Hydraulic elevators generally consist of pump station system, hydraulic system, guidance system, car system, door system, electrical control system, safety protection system, etc. (3) Rack and pinion (construction) elevators generally consist of a car, a driving mechanism, standard sections, attached walls, chassis, fences, electrical systems, etc.
3. Main technical parameters of the elevator
① Rated load capacity ② Rated speed.
3. Classification, composition and main parameters of escalators
1. Escalator classification
(1) Classification by armrest decoration ① Fully transparent type: An escalator whose handrail guardrails are made of fully transparent glass. ② Opaque type: The escalator is made of stainless steel or other materials and has good stability. It is mainly used for escalators with large heights in subways, stations, docks and other places where people are concentrated. ③Translucent type: The handrail guardrail is translucent. (2) Classification according to step driving method ①Chain type: refers to an escalator in which the component driving the steps is a chain. Since the chain-driven structure is simple and the manufacturing cost is low, most escalators currently use chain-driven structures. ②Rack type: refers to an escalator in which the component driving the steps is a rack.
2. Composition of escalators
The main components of the escalator include steps, traction chains and sprockets, guide rail systems, main transmission systems (including motors, reduction devices, brakes and intermediate transmission links, etc.), driving spindles, tensioning devices, handrail systems, upper and lower covers, and comb teeth slabs, escalator frames, safety devices and electrical systems, etc.
3. Main parameters of escalators
①Lift height H ②Inclination angle α ③Rated speed v ④Step width Z ⑤Theoretical conveying capacity C
4. Elevator engineering construction procedures
1. Construction procedures for electric-driven traction or forced elevators
Civil construction handover inspection → Equipment entry acceptance → Installation of sample frames and wiring → Track installation → Car assembly → Installation of traction machine and machine room equipment → Installation of buffers and counterweight devices → Installation of traction ropes → Installation of hall doors → Electrical devices Installation → debugging and acceptance → trial operation.
2. Hydraulic elevator construction procedures
Civil construction handover inspection → Sample frame installation and wiring → Guide rail installation → Jack installation → Hydraulic piping → Installation of accessories in the machine room → Car assembly → Installation of components in the hoistway → Commissioning and acceptance → Trial operation.
3. Construction procedures for escalators and moving walkways
Civil construction handover inspection → Equipment entry acceptance → Escalator truss hoisting in place → Track installation → Installation of handrails and other structural accessories → Installation of safety devices → Mechanical adjustment → Installation of electrical devices → Commissioning and acceptance → Trial operation.
2H314062 Acceptance requirements for elevator projects
1. Requirements for installation and implementation of elevator projects
1. Procedures and construction management that should be performed before elevator installation
(1) The construction unit installing the elevator shall undertake the business within the scope of the license, and shall notify the special equipment safety supervision and management department of the municipality or districted city where the project is located in writing about the elevator to be installed before construction. Ready for construction. (2) Materials that should be submitted for written notification: "Special Equipment Installation, Modification and Maintenance Notice"; Qualification Certificates of Construction Unit and Personnel; Construction Organization and Technical Plan; Project Contract; Invitation for Installation Supervision and Inspection; Qualification Certificates of Elevator Manufacturing Units. (3) The installation unit shall apply for supervisory inspection from the prescribed inspection agency after the notification of performance and before starting construction (excluding equipment unpacking, on-site survey and other preparations). Installation can only be carried out after the inspection agency has reviewed the elevator manufacturing data and learned that the inspection conclusion is qualified. (5) After the elevator self-inspection trial operation is completed, the installation unit shall compile and provide the self-inspection records to the manufacturing unit, and the manufacturing unit shall be responsible for verification and debugging; after the inspection and debugging meet the requirements, the installation unit shall submit the records to the Special Equipment Safety Supervision and Administration Department of the State Council for approval The inspection and testing agency requires supervision and inspection; if the supervision and inspection is passed, the elevator can be delivered for use. After obtaining the permission, the handover and acceptance procedures shall be carried out in accordance with regulations.
2. Requirements for elevator technical data
(1) Elevator factory documents Civil engineering layout drawing, product factory certificate, copy of the type inspection certificate of the main components that ensure elevator safety such as door lock device, speed governor, safety gear and buffer, equipment packing list, installation, use and maintenance instructions, power circuit and safety Electrical schematic diagram of the circuit. (2) Elevator acceptance information Civil construction handover inspection records, equipment entry acceptance records, sub-project acceptance records, sub-division project acceptance records, and sub-division project acceptance records.
2. Quality acceptance requirements for electrically driven traction or forced elevator installation projects
1. Equipment entry acceptance requirements
(1) The random documents are complete; (2) Equipment parts should match the contents of the packing list; (3) There should be no obvious damage to the appearance of the equipment.
2. Requirements for civil construction handover inspection
(2) When there is a space accessible to people under the pit of the shaft, and it is important to When there is no safety gear device on the counterweight (or counterweight), the counterweight buffer must be able to be installed on (or the underside of the counterweight operating area must be) extended to a solid pier on solid ground. (3) Before the elevator is installed, all reserved holes in the hall door must be equipped with a safety protection enclosure (safety protection door) with a height of not less than 1200mm, and sufficient strength should be ensured. The lower part of the protection enclosure should have a height of not less than 100mm. The skirting board should be opened left and right, not up and down. (4) When the distance between the door sills of two adjacent floors is greater than 11m, a hoistway safety door must be installed between them. (5) The grounding resistance of the grounding device in the computer room should not be greater than 4Ω. (6) Fixed electrical lighting should be installed in the machine room, with the ground illumination not less than 200lx. A switch or similar device should be installed at an appropriate height near the entrance to control the lighting power supply. (7) Permanent electric lighting should be installed in the hoistway. The lighting voltage of the hoistway should be 36V safety voltage. The illumination in the hoistway should not be less than 50Lx. There should be one lamp each within 0.5m of the highest point and the lowest point of the hoistway. The distance between the lights should not exceed 7m. And set a control switch in the machine room and pit respectively. (8) The pit floor under the car buffer support should be able to withstand a force 4 times the static load of the fully loaded car.
4. Guide rail installation acceptance requirements
(1) The allowable deviation of the distance between the top surfaces of the two rows of guide rails: 0~2mm for the car guide rail; 0~3mm for the counterweight guide rail. (2) The installation of the guide rail bracket on the shaft wall should be fixed and reliable. Embedded parts should comply with the requirements of the civil engineering layout drawing. Anchors (such as expansion bolts, etc.) should be used for fixing on the concrete components of the shaft wall. Their connection strength and ability to withstand vibration should meet the elevator product design requirements. The compressive strength of the concrete components should comply with the requirements of the civil engineering layout drawing. (3) The allowable deviation of every 5m between the working surface of each guide rail (including the side and top surface) and the installation baseline: the car guide rail and the counterweight (balance weight) guide rail equipped with safety gear should not be greater than 0.6mm; there is no safety device The counterweight (balance weight) guide rail of the clamp should not be larger than 1.0mm. (4) There should be no continuous gap at the joint between the car guide rail and the counterweight (balance weight) guide rail working surface equipped with safety gear, and the step at the guide rail joint should not be greater than 0.05mm. The gap at the joint of the counterweight (balance weight) guide rail without safety gear should not be greater than 1.0mm, and the step at the joint of the guide rail working surface should not be greater than 0.15mm.
5. Door system installation acceptance requirements
(1) The allowable deviation of the horizontal distance between the elevator landing door sill and the car sill is 0~3mm, and the maximum distance is strictly prohibited from exceeding 35mm. (2) The forced closing device of the landing door must operate normally. (3) For horizontal sliding doors operated by power, after the first 1/3 of the closing stroke, the force preventing the door from closing shall not exceed 150N. (4) The landing door lock hook must be flexible in action. Before confirming the action of the locking electrical safety device, the minimum engagement length of the locking element is 7mm. (5) The indicator light box, call box and fire switch box of the landing door should be installed correctly, and their panels should be firmly attached to the wall and smooth horizontally and vertically. (6) The gaps between door leaves and door leaves, door leaves and door frames, door leaves and door lintels, door leaves and the car wall at the door, and the lower end of the door leaves and the sill should not be greater than 6mm for passenger elevators and 8mm for freight elevators.
8. Safety component installation and acceptance requirements
(1) The action speed setting seal of the speed limiter must be intact and there are no signs of disassembly. (2) The setting seal of the adjustable safety gear should be intact and there should be no trace of disassembly. (3) When the car is at the leveling position at both ends, the distance between the car, the buffer strike plate of the counterweight and the top surface of the buffer should comply with the requirements of the civil engineering layout drawing. The deviation between the center of the car and the counterweight's buffer striking plate and the center of the buffer should not be greater than 20mm.
9. Installation and acceptance requirements for suspension devices, accompanying cables and compensation devices
(4) The accompanying cable should avoid interference with other components in the shaft during operation. When the car is fully pressed against the buffer, the accompanying cables must not come into contact with the pit floor.
10. Requirements for acceptance of electrical installation installation (1) All electrical equipment, exposed conductive parts of conduits and wire ducts should be connected to the protective wire (PE), and the grounding branch lines should be directly connected to the terminals of the grounding main line respectively, and should not be connected to each other before being grounded. (2) The insulation resistance between conductors and between conductors and ground must be greater than 1000Ω/V, and its resistance value must not be less than: 0.5MΩ for power and electrical safety device circuits and 0.25MΩ for other circuits (control, lighting, signaling, etc.). (4) Wiring in the machine room and hoistway should be according to product requirements. Sheathed cables can be laid in the well or in the machine room, but they must not be laid on the ground.
11. Requirements for acceptance of the complete elevator machine (1) When any one phase of the three-phase power supply of the control cabinet is disconnected or any two phases are misconnected, the phase loss or phase misconnection protection device or function should prevent the elevator from dangerous malfunctions. (2) The power circuit, control circuit, and safety circuit must have short-circuit protection devices that match the load; the power circuit must have overload protection devices. (3) The downward sign of the car (counterweight and counterweight) on the speed governor must be consistent with the actual downward direction of the car (counterweight and counterweight). The rated speed and operating speed on the speed limiter nameplate must be consistent with the elevator being inspected. The speed governor must comply with its type test certificate. (4) Safety gear, buffers, and door lock devices must comply with their type test certificates. (5) The upper and lower limit switches must be safety contacts and must operate normally during the action test at the end station position. It must act before the car or counterweight contacts the buffer, and it remains in action when the buffer is fully compressed. (6) The electrical switch of the speed limiter and safety gear must operate reliably during the linkage test, and the driving host should brake immediately. (7) For instantaneous safety gear, the car should carry an evenly distributed rated load; for progressive safety gear, the car should carry an evenly distributed 125% of the rated load. When the electrical switches of the speed limiter and safety gear are short-circuited, the car moves down at the maintenance speed, and the speed limiter is manually operated mechanically, the safety gear should act reliably, the car must brake reliably, and the inclination of the car bottom should not be greater than 5 %. (8) During the test of landing doors and car doors, the landing doors on each floor must be able to be opened normally. When any landing door or car door is opened abnormally, the elevator is strictly prohibited from starting or continuing to run. (9) During the traction capacity test of the traction elevator, the car travels upwards without load in the upper range of the stroke and downwards with 125% of the rated load in the lower range of the stroke. It stops at the floor more than 3 times respectively. The car must stop reliably. (The floor should be leveled during no-load upward operation). When the car carries 125% of the rated load and moves downward at normal operating speed, the power supply to the motor and brake must be cut off, and the elevator must brake reliably. When the counterweight is completely pressed on the buffer and the driving host continues to operate in the upward direction of the car, the unloaded car is strictly prohibited from being lifted upwards. (10) Operation test should be carried out after the elevator is installed. The car operates 1,000 times each under no-load and rated load conditions according to the number of starts per hour and load duration specified in the product design (not less than 8 hours per day). The elevator should run smoothly, brake reliably, and operate continuously without interruption. Fault.
3. Quality acceptance requirements for hydraulic elevator installation projects
The quality acceptance requirements for hydraulic elevator installation projects are basically the same as those for traction or forced elevator installation projects; the difference is that hydraulic elevators add a hydraulic system. Acceptance requirements for hydraulic system installation: (1) The hydraulic pump station and hydraulic lifting mechanism must be installed firmly. (2) When the hydraulic oil reaches the product design temperature, the temperature rise protection device must be activated to stop the hydraulic elevator. (3) The relief valve on the hydraulic pump station should be set to operate when the system pressure is 140% to 170% of the full load pressure. (4) Hydraulic system pressure test qualification requirements: The car is parked at the highest landing station, and 200% of the full load pressure is applied between the hydraulic jacking mechanism and the stop valve for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes, the hydraulic system should be intact.
4. Quality acceptance requirements for escalator and moving walkway installation projects
1. Equipment entry acceptance
(1) Equipment technical data must provide a copy of the type test report of the steps or pedals, and a copy of the breaking strength certificate of the handrail (tape) for public transportation escalators and moving walkways. (2) The accompanying documents should include civil engineering layout drawings, product factory certificates, packing lists, installation, use and maintenance instructions, and electrical schematic diagrams of power circuits and safety circuits.
2. Civil construction handover inspection
(1) The vertical net height above the steps of escalators or the treads or tapes of moving walkways is strictly prohibited to be less than 2.3m. (2) Before installation, railings or barriers must be installed around the hoistway to ensure safety, and their height must not be less than 1.2m. (3) According to the requirements of the product supplier, the passage and transportation space required for the equipment to enter the site should be provided. (4) Before installation, the civil construction unit should provide obvious horizontal reference line markings.
3. Complete machine installation and acceptance
(2) Escalators and moving walkways must automatically stop running when there is no control voltage, circuit ground fault or overload. To stop escalators and moving walkways in the following situations, the switch must be disconnected through safety contacts or safety circuits: 1) The control device operates under overspeed and non-manipulation reversal of the running direction; 2) Additional brake (if any) operates; 3) The parts (such as chains or racks) that directly drive the steps, pedals or belts are broken or overstretched; 4) The distance between the driving device and the steering device is (unintentionally) shortened; 5) The steps and treads sag, or foreign objects are caught where the tape enters the comb plate, causing damage to the steps, treads or tape support structure; 6) One of the multiple escalators and moving walkways installed continuously without an intermediate exit stops running; 7) Action of handrail entrance protection device;
(4) Performance test of escalators and moving walkways. Under rated frequency and rated voltage, the allowable deviation between the speed of steps, pedals or belts in the running direction without load and the rated speed is ±5%; the operation of handrails The allowable deviation of speed relative to the speed of steps, pedals or tapes is 0 to 2%. (5) Escalators and moving walkways should undergo no-load braking tests, and the braking distance should comply with the requirements of Table 2H314062-1. (6) Escalators and moving walkways should undergo a downward stopping distance test with a braking load (unless the braking distance can be tested by other methods). The braking load should comply with the provisions of Table 2H314062-2, and the braking distance should comply with The provisions of Table 2H314062-1. (7) At the intersection of the escalator and the floor and in the triangular area where the escalators in each cross arrangement intersect, a vertical anti-collision protection plate without sharp edges should be installed. Its height should not be less than 0.3m. For example, a triangle without holes should be used. Protective board. (8) The main power switch of an electrical installation should not cut off the power socket, lighting power necessary for inspection and maintenance.
Go to P367 2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
1. Special equipment production licensing system
(2) Relevant requirements of the "Special Equipment Safety Supervision Regulations"
4. The installation, modification and maintenance of elevators must be carried out by the elevator manufacturing unit or a unit entrusted and agreed by the contract to obtain a license in accordance with these regulations. The elevator manufacturing unit is responsible for quality issues related to elevator quality and safe operation. The elevator manufacturing unit is responsible for the safety performance of the elevator.
2. Special equipment installation, modification and maintenance licenses
(3) Elevator
1. Elevator installation (including repair) licensing is implemented by the State Administration for Market Regulation authorized by the provincial market supervision department or the provincial market supervision department.
Device category
License parameter level
Remark
Traction drive passenger elevator (including firefighter elevator)
A1, v>6.0m/s
A2, 2.5m/s<v≤6.0m/s
B, v≤2.5m/s
Class A1 covers class A2 and class B covers class B
Traction drive freight elevators and forced drive freight elevators Elevators (including cargo elevators among explosion-proof elevators)
Not graded
Escalators and moving walkways
Not graded
Hydraulic drive elevator
Not graded
Miscellaneous elevators (including miscellaneous elevators in explosion-proof elevators)
Not graded
2H320000 Mechanical and electrical engineering project construction management
2H320010 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction bidding management
2H320011 Construction Bidding Scope and Requirements
1. Scope of compulsory bidding for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering projects that must be tendered:
According to the "Tendering and Bidding Law of the People's Republic of China", "Tendering and Tendering Implementation Regulations of the People's Republic of China", "Regulations on the Scope of Infrastructure and Public Utility Projects that Must Be Bidding", etc., mechanical and electrical engineering construction projects within the territory of the People's Republic of China must be subject to bidding in accordance with the following regulations :
(1) Projects that use state-owned capital investment or state financing in whole or in part, including: 1) Projects that use budget funds of more than 2 million yuan and account for more than 10% of the investment; 2) Projects that use funds from state-owned enterprises and institutions, and the funds occupy a controlling or dominant position. (2) Projects using loans and aid funds from international organizations or foreign governments, including: 1) Projects using loans and aid funds from international organizations such as the World Bank and Asian Development Bank; 2) Projects using loans and aid funds from foreign governments and their institutions. (3) Large-scale infrastructure, public utilities and other projects related to social public interests and public safety that do not fall into the situations specified in (1) and (2). (4) For projects within the scope specified in Articles (1) to (3) above, if the survey, design, construction, supervision and procurement of important equipment and materials related to project construction meet one of the following standards, bidding must be conducted: 1) The estimated price of a single construction contract is more than RMB 4 million; 2) For the procurement of important equipment, materials and other goods, the estimated price of a single contract is more than RMB 2 million; 3) For the procurement of survey, design, supervision and other services, the estimated price of a single contract is more than RMB 1 million. The survey, design, construction, supervision, and procurement of important equipment and materials related to project construction that can be combined in the same project must be tendered if the total estimated contract price reaches the standard specified in the preceding paragraph.
Bidding Scope Size:
Tendering is required (Scope and scale require both bidding)
scope
Use state funds
Large infrastructure and public utilities
Foreign government or international aid
scale
Single construction project ≥ 4 million yuan Important materials and equipment ≥ 2 million yuan Survey, design and supervision ≥ 1 million yuan
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering projects that do not require bidding:
Mechanical and electrical engineering projects that involve national security, state secrets, emergency rescue and disaster relief, use poverty alleviation funds to implement work-for-relief projects, require the use of migrant workers, and other special circumstances that are not suitable for bidding may not be subject to bidding in accordance with relevant national regulations.
Except for the special circumstances mentioned above, bidding may not be conducted for mechanical and electrical engineering projects under any of the following circumstances: (1) It requires the use of irreplaceable patents or proprietary technologies; (2) The purchaser can construct, produce or provide on its own in accordance with the law; (3) Franchise project investors who have been selected through bidding can build, produce or provide by themselves in accordance with the law; (4) It is necessary to purchase projects, goods or services from the original winning bidder, otherwise it will affect the construction or functional supporting requirements; (5) Other special circumstances stipulated by the state.
2. Bidding methods for mechanical and electrical projects
1. The bidding methods for mechanical and electrical engineering projects are divided into public bidding and invitation bidding.
Public bidding means that the tenderer invites unspecified legal persons or other organizations to bid in the form of a bidding announcement. Bidding announcements for projects that require bidding in accordance with the law shall be published through newspapers, periodicals, information networks or other media designated by the state. The bidding announcement shall specify the name and address of the bidder, the nature, quantity, implementation location and time of the bidding items, the method of obtaining bidding documents, and other matters. Invitation to bid means that the bidder invites specific legal persons or other organizations to bid in the form of a bid invitation letter. If the tenderer adopts the invitation bidding method, it shall issue invitations to bid to three or more specific legal persons or other organizations that have the ability to undertake the bidding project and have good credit standing.
2. Projects in which state-owned funds hold a controlling or dominant position and must be subject to bidding according to law shall be subject to public bidding; however, if one of the following circumstances occurs, bidding may be invited:
(1) The technology is complex, has special requirements or is restricted by the natural environment, and there are only a small number of potential bidders to choose from. (2) The cost of using public bidding accounts for a large proportion of the project contract value. (3) If the national key projects determined by the development planning department of the State Council and the local key projects determined by the people's governments of provinces, autonomous regions, and municipalities directly under the Central Government are not suitable for open bidding, invitation bidding may be conducted with the approval of the development planning department of the State Council or the people's governments of provinces, autonomous regions, and municipalities directly under the Central Government. .
3. Tendering and bidding management requirements for mechanical and electrical projects
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding management and requirements
(2) The tenderer may, in accordance with the requirements of the bidding project itself, require potential bidders to provide relevant qualification documents and performance information in the bidding announcement or bidding invitation, and conduct a qualification review of the potential bidders; the state’s qualifications for bidders If conditions are stipulated, those stipulations shall prevail. If the tenderer uses pre-qualification methods to conduct qualification reviews of potential bidders, it shall issue a pre-qualification announcement and prepare pre-qualification documents. The period for sale of prequalification documents or bidding documents shall not be less than 5 days. For projects that require bidding according to law, the time for submitting prequalification application documents shall not be less than 5 days from the date when the prequalification documents stop being sold. If there are less than 3 applicants who have passed the pre-qualification, bids shall be invited again. (3) The tenderer may make necessary clarifications or modifications to the issued prequalification documents or bidding documents. If the clarification or modification may affect the preparation of pre-qualification application documents or bidding documents, the tenderer shall notify in writing all persons who have obtained pre-qualification documents or bids at least 3 days before the deadline for submitting pre-qualification application documents or at least 15 days before the deadline for bidding. Potential bidders of the bidding documents; if it is less than 3 days or 15 days, the tenderer shall extend the deadline for submitting pre-qualification application documents or bidding documents. the clarification or The content modified by the applicant shall be an integral part of the bidding documents. (4) The tenderer shall abide by the relevant provisions of the Tendering and Bidding Law of the People's Republic of China when dividing the bidding project into sections, and shall not use the division of bid sections to restrict or exclude potential bidders. Tenderers for projects that require bidding according to law shall not use the division of bids to avoid bidding. (5) For projects that require bidding according to law, the validity period of the bid shall be stated in the bidding documents. The minimum period from the date the bidding documents are issued to the deadline for bidding shall not be less than 20 days. (6) The tenderer may require bidders to submit bid guarantees in the bidding documents. Bid security can be in the form of a bid guarantee or a bid bond. The bid deposit can be made by check, bank draft, etc., and generally shall not exceed 2% of the total bid price. The validity period of the bid bond shall be consistent with the validity period of the technical bid. For domestic bidders of projects that require bidding according to law, the bid deposit submitted in the form of cash or check shall be transferred out of their basic account. The tenderer shall not misappropriate the bid security deposit. (9) For projects that are technically complex or cannot accurately formulate technical specifications, the tenderer may conduct bidding in two stages. In the first stage, the bidder submits technical suggestions without quotation in accordance with the requirements of the bidding announcement or bidding invitation. The tenderer determines the technical standards and requirements based on the technical suggestions submitted by the bidder and prepares the bidding documents. In the second stage, the tenderer provides bidding documents to the bidders who submitted technical suggestions in the first stage, and the bidders submit bidding documents including the final technical plan and bid price in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents. If the tenderer requires the bidder to submit a bid deposit, it shall do so in the second stage.
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding management and requirements
(2) Bidders shall prepare bidding documents in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents. The bidding documents shall respond to the substantive requirements and conditions set forth in the bidding documents. (3) The bidder shall deliver the bidding documents to the bidding location before the deadline for submitting bid documents required in the bidding documents. After receiving the bidding documents, the tenderer shall sign and save them and shall not open them. If there are less than 3 bidders, the tenderer shall re-invite bids in accordance with this Law. (4) The bidder may supplement, modify or withdraw the submitted bid documents before the deadline for submission of bid documents required by the bidding documents and notify the tenderer in writing. The supplementary and modified contents shall be an integral part of the bidding documents. (5) Two or more legal persons or other organizations may form a consortium and bid jointly as one bidder. All parties to the consortium shall have the corresponding capabilities to undertake the bidding project; if relevant national regulations or bidding documents stipulate the qualifications for bidders, all parties to the consortium shall have the corresponding qualifications. For a consortium composed of units in the same profession, the qualification level shall be determined according to the unit with the lower qualification level. All parties to the consortium shall sign a joint bidding agreement, clearly stipulate the work and responsibilities to be undertaken by each party, and submit the joint bidding agreement together with the bidding documents to the tenderer. If a consortium wins the bid, all parties to the consortium shall jointly sign a contract with the tenderer and bear joint and several liability to the tenderer for the winning project. (6) If a bidder withdraws a submitted bid document, he shall notify the tenderer in writing before the bid deadline. If the bidder has received a bid deposit, it shall return it within 5 days from the date of receipt of the bidder's written withdrawal notice. If the bidder withdraws the bid document after the bid deadline, the bidder may not refund the bid deposit.
3. Requirements for bid opening and evaluation management of mechanical and electrical projects
(1) The bid opening shall be conducted publicly in accordance with the time and place specified in the bidding documents. If there are less than 3 bidders, the bid shall not be opened; the tenderer shall invite bids again. (2) The bid evaluation shall be carried out by the bid evaluation committee established by the bidder in accordance with the law. The bid evaluation committee shall be composed of representatives of the tenderer and experts in relevant technical, economic and other fields. The number of members shall be an odd number of five or more, among which experts in technical and economic fields shall not be less than two-thirds of the total number of members. (3) The bid evaluation committee shall strictly follow the bid evaluation methods and standards published in the bidding documents. One of the following situations , the bid evaluation committee shall reject the bid: the bid document does not respond to the substantive requirements and conditions of the bidding document; Some contents in the bidding documents need to be stamped by the bidding unit and signed by the person in charge of the unit but are not completed as required, and the bidding documents are not sealed as required; Engaging in illegal activities such as fraud, collusion in bidding, and bribery; The quotation is lower than the cost or higher than the maximum bid limit set in the bidding document; The bidder does not meet the qualifications specified by the state or the bidding documents; The same bidder submits two or more different bidding documents or bid quotations (except where the bidding documents require the submission of alternative bids). (4) After the bid evaluation is completed, the bid evaluation committee shall submit a written bid evaluation report and a list of successful bidders to the bidder. There should be no more than 3 winning bidders, and their ranking should be indicated.
2H320012 Conditions and procedures for construction bidding
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding conditions
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering projects have met the bidding conditions. 2. The bidder's qualifications have met the regulations and made substantial responses to the bidding documents. 3. The bidder has prepared the bidding documents in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents. 4. The bidder has submitted a bid guarantee in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents. 6. When the tenderer states in the bidding documents that it accepts consortium bids, the consortium shall be formed and a joint bidding agreement signed before submitting the prequalification application documents. If the consortium increases, decreases, or changes members after the pre-qualification, the bid will be invalid. 7. Bidders are not allowed to participate in the bidding if they have the following circumstances: legal persons, other organizations or individuals that have an interest in the bidder that may affect the fairness of the bidding; the person in charge of the unit is the same person or different units with holding or management relationships are not allowed to participate in the same bidding section Or bid for the same bidding project without dividing the bidding sections.
2. Mechanical and electrical engineering bidding procedures
2. Main focus of work during the bidding stage of electromechanical projects (1) Study bidding documents and bidding projects The key contents of the study of bidding documents include: instructions to bidders, project scope, bidding methods, bid evaluation methods, payment terms, scope of supply of mechanical and electrical projects, contract terms, bill of quantities, pricing and quotation methods, technical specification requirements, construction period, quality , safety and environmental protection requirements, bidding requirement format, design drawings, etc. (2) Bidding decision (3) Things to note when preparing bidding documents 1) Respond to the substantive requirements of the bidding documents. Bidding documents generally include: bidding letter, bidding quotation, construction organization design, commercial and technical deviation tables, requirements for construction period, quality, safety, environmental protection, and requirements for bidding document format, sealing and sealing. 2) Review the construction organization design. When formulating the construction organization design, there should be innovative and targeted outstanding advantages in technology, construction period, quality, safety assurance, environmental protection, etc., which will help reduce construction costs and be attractive to bidders. 3) Review or calculate the engineering quantities. 4) Determine the correct bidding strategy. 5) According to the format required by the bidding documents, organize each chapter of the bidding document into a complete bid, and according to the requirements of the bidding documents, stamp different seals on the parts that require different seals and seal the bidding documents.
3. Electronic bidding methods
1. Electronic bidding and bidding activities Electronic bidding activities refer to all or part of the bidding transactions, public services and administrative supervision activities completed in the form of data messages and relying on the electronic bidding system. According to different functions, the electronic bidding system is divided into a trading platform, a public service platform and an administrative supervision platform. 2. Electronic bidding requirements (1) The operating agency of an electronic bidding trading platform shall not bid or act as an agent in bidding projects conducted by the trading platform. (3) Bidders shall prepare and encrypt bidding documents in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents and the electronic bidding trading platform. If the bidder fails to encrypt the bidding documents as required, the electronic bidding trading platform shall reject them and prompt them. (4) The bidder shall complete the transmission and submission of bid documents before the bid deadline, and may supplement, modify or withdraw the bid documents. If the transmission of the bidding documents is not completed before the bidding deadline, the bidding documents will be deemed to be withdrawn. The electronic bidding trading platform shall reject bid documents delivered after the bidding deadline.
1. The review of bidders’ professional qualifications includes: Business qualifications, professional qualifications, technical capabilities, management capabilities, construction experience (or similar project performance), personnel status, financial status, reputation, etc.
2H320020 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction contract management
2H320021 Implementation of construction subcontract
1. Contract Analysis
2. Analyze contract conditions and loopholes, and formulate countermeasures for disputed content. The key points of contract analysis are as follows: (1) The legal basis of the contract, the main responsibilities of the contractor, the scope of the project, and the responsibilities of the contractor; (2) Contract price, valuation method and price compensation conditions; (3) Construction schedule requirements and extensions and their penalty clauses, legal consequences of project interruption, and liability for breach of contract by both parties to the contract; (4) Contract modification methods, project acceptance methods, claim procedures and dispute resolution, etc.
3. Contract Control
During the project implementation process, it is necessary to supervise, track and adjust the performance of the contract, and strengthen project change management to ensure the smooth performance of the contract.
1. Implement supervision
The purpose of contract implementation supervision by subcontracting units is to ensure that their contractual responsibilities are fulfilled in accordance with the contract. The main tasks are: (1) Supervise the implementation of the contract implementation plan and provide necessary guarantees for the work of various project departments. (2) Coordinate the working relationship between the relevant parties of the project and solve problems that arise during the implementation of the contract. (3) Provide guidance on specific implementation work, provide regular contract interpretations, and provide opinions, suggestions or warnings on problems discovered during the project.
2. Track and adjust
(1) During the contract period, compare the contract execution status with the contract provisions in terms of work scope, project progress, quality, technical standards, cost and safety, and identify problems. (2) Analyze the deviation issues discovered during the contract implementation process, analyze the reasons for the deviation, the implementing entity that caused the deviation, and the trend of contract implementation. (3) Formulate and take adjustment measures based on the analysis results of deviations in contract implementation. Adjustment measures can be divided into: organizational measures, technical measures, economic measures and contractual measures.
4. Performance and management of construction subcontracts
(1) Management of the general contractor
1. The general contractor shall handle the construction of subcontractors and subcontracted projects from construction preparation, on-site construction, process inspection, completion acceptance, project warranty, technology, quality, safety, environmental protection, progress, project payment, project information, etc. Manage the entire process. 2. The general contractor should send representatives to manage the subcontractors and effectively control and record the construction of the subcontracted projects to ensure that the quality and progress of the subcontracted projects meet the project requirements and the subcontracted contracts are performed normally, thereby ensuring that the general contractor interests and credibility. 3. According to the construction contract, the general contractor shall provide necessary services such as site layout, temporary facilities, axis and elevation measurement, etc. for the subcontractor's performance of the contract. 4. The general contractor or its competent department shall promptly inspect and review the subcontracted project construction organization design, construction technical plan, quality assurance system and quality assurance measures, safety assurance system and measures, construction progress plan, and construction progress submitted by the subcontractor. Statistical reports, project payment applications, concealed project acceptance reports, completion inspection reports and other documents and materials, provide review opinions and approve them. 5. For dangerous and major projects within the scope of the contract of the general contractor, engineering and technical personnel should be organized to prepare a special construction plan before construction. For dangerous and large projects exceeding a certain scale, regardless of whether they are subcontracted or not, the general contractor should organize an expert demonstration meeting to demonstrate the special construction plan. 7. After the subcontractor has passed its own inspection on the start of construction, key process inspection, completion acceptance and other processes, it shall notify the general contractor in advance to organize pre-acceptance. After approval, the general contractor shall report to the construction unit to organize inspection and acceptance.
(2) Performance and management of subcontractors
1. The subcontracting unit shall not subcontract the project to other units again. 2. The subcontractor must abide by the general contractor's management systems, ensure the quality, safety, construction period and environmental protection of the subcontracted project, and meet the requirements of the general contracting contract. 3. The subcontractor shall prepare the construction plan of the subcontracted project according to the general design of the construction organization and submit it to the general contractor for review. 4. The subcontractor shall prepare the construction progress plan, budget and settlement of the subcontracted project according to the requirements of the general contractor. 5. Provide the general contractor with relevant information such as plans, statistics, technology, quality, safety, environmental protection and acceptance of subcontracted projects in a timely manner. 6. The subcontractor shall establish an on-site environmental safety production assurance system in accordance with the requirements of the general contractor and the characteristics of the subcontracted project, strictly implement the laws, regulations and relevant provisions of the governments at all levels, and implement the general contractor’s relevant safety and standardization management requirements. Regulation. If a subcontractor fails to meet the environmental safety standardization standards stipulated in the contract, the general contractor has the right to oblige the subcontractor to make rectifications. All construction period and economic losses caused thereby shall be fully borne by the subcontractor. 7. The subcontractor must erect and configure various safety facilities and safety and labor protection supplies in accordance with the construction specifications, purchase the above materials from suppliers approved by the construction unit, and must strengthen site acceptance and pre-use acceptance after erection. 8. The subcontractor should identify environmental factors and hazard sources during the construction process and take measures to control them to prevent environmental pollution incidents and safety accidents. 9. In the event of a safety or casualty accident, the subcontractor shall immediately notify the general contractor's representative and the general contractor's safety supervision department, and handle the matter in accordance with the requirements of the relevant government departments. The general contractor shall provide assistance in troubleshooting the accident or rescuing personnel. The subcontractor shall bear liability for property damage, casualties and all resulting expenses caused by its own faults. 10. Subcontracting units should sign labor contracts with the recruited migrant workers and take measures to ensure the payment of wages to migrant workers.
2H320022 Construction contract changes and claims
2. Claims for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Reasons for the claim
(1) The parties to the contract breach the contract and fail to perform or fail to correctly perform their contractual obligations and responsibilities. (2) Errors in contract provisions, such as incomplete, incorrect, contradictory contract provisions, errors in design drawings and technical specifications, etc. (3) Contract changes. (4) Force majeure factors. Such as severe weather conditions, earthquakes, epidemics, floods, war states, etc.
2. Classification of claims
(1) According to the purpose of the claim: construction period claim and expense claim. (5) According to the reason for the claim: claim for delay, claim for change of project scope, claim for acceleration of construction and claim for adverse site conditions. (6) According to the contractual basis of the claim: intra-contractual claims, extra-contractual claims and moral claims.
3. Prerequisites for establishing a claim
(1) Compared with the contract, the incident has caused additional expenditures on the contractor's project costs or direct loss of construction period. (2) The reasons for increased costs or loss of construction period are not the contractor’s behavioral liability or risk liability according to the contract. (3) The contractor shall submit a notice of intention to claim and a claim report in accordance with the procedures and time specified in the contract.
4. Events in which the contractor may file a claim
(1) The contractor's violation of the contract causes time and expense losses to the contractor. (2) Loss of time and expense caused by project changes. (3) Loss of time and expense due to changes in construction conditions due to the supervision engineer's fault. (4) The contractor proposes to complete the project ahead of schedule or shorten the construction period, resulting in an increase in the contractor's costs. (5) Costs incurred in repairing project defects caused by reasons other than those of the contractor. (6) Losses caused by project shutdown due to reasons other than those of the contractor, such as incorrect information provided by the contractor. (7) Cost losses caused by changes in relevant national policies and regulations, rising prices, etc.
Supplement: Conditions for legal subcontracting (1) Subcontracted projects are non-main projects; (2) The subcontractor has corresponding qualifications and technical qualifications; (3) With the owner’s consent; (4) The subcontracted project is not subcontracted again.
Violation of any of the following conditions constitutes illegal subcontracting: (1) Subcontracting of the main project; (2) The subcontractor does not have the corresponding qualifications or technical qualifications; (3) Without the owner’s consent; (4) The subcontracted project is subcontracted or subcontracted again.
2H320030 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction organization design
2H320031 Construction organization design preparation requirements
1. Construction organization design type
(1) Division according to the preparation objects of construction organization design It can be divided into four categories: general construction organization design, unit project construction organization design, branch (sub-item) project construction organization design, and temporary power construction organization design. 1. General design of construction organization It is mainly compiled for group projects or extremely large projects composed of several unit projects, and plays a role in overall planning and key control of the entire project construction process. The preparation should be completed before the start of the group project. 2. Unit project construction organization design It is compiled with the unit (sub-unit) project as the object, and plays a guiding and restrictive role in the construction process of the unit (sub-unit) project. The preparation should be completed before the unit (sub-unit) project starts. 3. Division (sub-item) project construction organization design The construction technology and organization plan is prepared with division (sub-item) projects or special projects as the main object to specifically guide the construction operation process. It is also called special project construction organization design or construction plan. Major construction plans: refer to special construction plans for the safety of sub-projects that are technically difficult or dangerous. It should be prepared after the start of the project according to the progress of the project and before the start of the branch (sub-item) project. 4. Temporary power construction organization design If there are 5 or more temporary electrical equipment at the construction site or the total capacity of the electrical equipment is 50kW or more, a temporary electricity construction organization design should be prepared. The preparation should be completed before the power supply project starts. If there are less than 5 temporary electrical equipment at the construction site and the total capacity of the equipment is less than 50kW, safe electricity use and electrical fire prevention measures should be formulated. The general design of construction organization is the basis for formulating the construction organization design of unit projects and branch (sub-item) projects.
3. Basis for preparation of construction organization design
1. Laws, regulations and documents related to project construction; 2. Current relevant national standards and technical and economic indicators; 3. Approval documents from the administrative department in the area where the project is located, and construction requirements from the construction unit; 4. Project construction contract or bidding documents; 5. Engineering design documents; 6. On-site conditions within the project construction scope, engineering geology, hydrogeology, meteorology and other natural conditions; 7. The supply of resources related to the project; 8. The production capacity, machinery and equipment, technical level, etc. of the construction enterprise.
4. Basic contents of construction organization design
1. The basic contents of construction organization design include: Project overview, construction deployment, construction progress plan, construction preparation and resource allocation plan, main construction plan, construction site layout and various construction management plans, etc. (2) Construction deployment Construction deployment includes: project construction goals, schedule and spatial organization, analysis of key points and difficulties in project construction, organizational structure of project management, new technologies, new process deployment, technical and management requirements for the use of new materials and new equipment, and requirements for the main The selection requirements and management methods of subcontracted project construction units should be briefly explained. (3) Construction preparation and resource allocation plan 1) Overall construction preparation should include technical preparation, site preparation and financial preparation, etc. 2) The main resource allocation plan should include labor allocation plan and material allocation plan. (6) Various construction management plans The construction management plan should include: progress management plan, quality management plan, safety management plan, environmental management plan, cost management plan and other management plans. The formulation of various management plans should focus on the characteristics of the project. 2. The basic contents of the temporary power organization design at the construction site include: On-site survey, determine the location and line direction (power incoming line, substation or distribution room, power distribution device, electrical equipment), perform load calculation, select transformer, design power distribution system, design lightning protection device, determine protective measures , Develop safe electricity use measures and electrical fire prevention measures. For example, designing a power distribution system includes: designing distribution lines, selecting wires or cables; designing power distribution devices, selecting electrical appliances, designing grounding devices, and drawing temporary power engineering drawings. Temporary power construction drawings mainly include: electrical engineering general plan, distribution device layout drawing, distribution system wiring diagram, and grounding device design drawing. Temporary power engineering drawings should be drawn separately, and temporary power engineering should be constructed according to the drawings.
5. Approval of construction organization design preparation
1. The construction organization design should be prepared by the project leader, and can be prepared and approved in stages as needed. 2. The general design of the construction organization shall be approved by the technical person in charge of the general contractor; the construction organization design of the unit project shall be approved by the technical person in charge of the construction unit or the technical personnel authorized by the technical person in charge; the construction organization design (construction plan) of the special project shall be approved by the project Approval by the technical person in charge; major construction plans should be reviewed by relevant experts organized by the technical department of the construction unit and approved by the technical person in charge of the construction unit. 3. The construction plans of partial (sub-item) projects or special projects constructed by professional contracting units shall be reviewed and approved by the technical director of the professional contracting unit or the technical personnel authorized by the technical director; when there is a general contractor, the general contractor shall The project technical director of the unit shall approve the filing. 4. The construction plans of branch (sub-item) projects and special projects with greater risk should be prepared and approved according to the unit project construction organization design. 5. The temporary power organization design shall be prepared by electrical engineering technicians and implemented after review by relevant departments and approval by the technical director of the enterprise with legal person status. When changing the power organization design, relevant drawings and information should be supplemented.
6. Dynamic management of construction organization design
1. During the project construction process, when one of the following situations occurs, the construction organization design should be modified or supplemented. (1) There are major modifications to the engineering design When major modifications occur to the engineering design drawings, such as changes in the form of the foundation or main structure, major changes in decoration materials or methods, major adjustments to the electromechanical equipment system, etc., the construction organization design needs to be modified; For general modifications, the construction organization design will be supplemented depending on the changes; for minor modifications or corrections to the engineering design drawings, the construction organization design does not need to be adjusted. (2) Implementation, revision and abolition of relevant laws, regulations, norms and standards When relevant laws, regulations, specifications and standards come into effect or change, and involve the implementation, inspection or acceptance of the project, the construction organization design needs to be modified or supplemented. (3) Major adjustments to the main construction methods Due to changes in subjective and objective conditions, there have been major changes in construction methods. The original construction organization design can no longer guide construction correctly, and the construction organization design needs to be modified or supplemented. (4) Major adjustments to the allocation of major construction resources When there are major changes in the allocation of construction resources that affect changes in construction methods or have potentially significant impacts on construction progress, quality, safety, environment, cost, etc., the construction organization design needs to be modified or supplemented. (5) There are major changes in the construction environment When major changes occur in the construction environment, such as seasonal changes in construction methods caused by construction delays, changes in site layout and construction methods caused by changes in construction sites, etc., resulting in the original construction organization design being unable to correctly guide construction, the construction organization design needs to be modified or Replenish. 2. The modified or supplemented construction organization design shall be re-approved before implementation. (1) Modifications or additions to the construction organization design (plan) should be implemented by the original compiler; (2) In principle, modifications or supplements to the construction organization design (plan) must be re-approved according to the original approval level. 3. When the temporary power organization design is changed, the original approval procedures must be followed. When changing the temporary power organization design, relevant drawings and information should be supplemented. Temporary power projects must be jointly accepted by the preparation, review, approval department and the user unit, and can be put into use only after passing the standards. 4. The construction organization design should be filed after the project is completed and accepted.
2H320032 Preparation and implementation of construction plan
1. Types of construction plans
2. According to the content guided by the plan, it can be divided into two categories: professional engineering construction plan and special construction plan for safety of dangerous and major projects. (1) Professional engineering construction plans refer to engineering technical plans prepared for the purpose of organizing the implementation of professional projects (including multi-disciplinary cooperation projects) and for guiding the needs of various construction activities throughout the entire process of professional engineering construction. (2) The special construction plan for the safety of dangerous major projects refers to the "Safety Management Regulations for Partial Projects with Greater Danger" (Order No. 37 of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development) and the "Regulations on the Implementation of "Hazardous Projects" by the General Office of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development. The "Regulations on Safety Management of Sub-projects with Relatively High Risks" (Notice on Relevant Issues) (Jianbanzhi [2018] No. 31) requires the preparation of special safety construction plans for dangerous and major projects.
3. Basis for preparation of construction plan
The basis for preparation includes: laws and regulations related to engineering construction, standards and specifications, construction contracts, construction organization design, design technical documents (such as construction drawings and design changes), supplier technical documents (such as construction machinery performance manuals or equipment random information) , construction environment conditions, construction experience of similar projects, technical quality and creative ability of management and operating personnel, etc.
4. Contents and key points of construction plan preparation
1. Content of the construction plan The preparation content includes engineering overview, preparation basis, construction arrangement, construction progress plan, construction preparation and resource allocation plan, construction method and process requirements, main construction management plans, etc. 2. The main points of construction plan preparation (4) Construction preparation and resource allocation plan, where construction preparation includes technical preparation, on -site preparation and fund preparation; The resource allocation plan includes the labor power allocation plan and the material allocation plan (including engineering materials and equipment allocation plans, turnover materials and construction machinery allocation plans and surveillance and measurement equipment allocation plans). (5) Construction method and process requirements ① Clarify the construction method of the branch (sub -item) project or special project and carry out the necessary technical accounting; ② Clarify the requirements of the main sub -project (process) construction process; ③ Make a key explanation of sub -projects (processes), which are prone to quality problems, safety problems, construction difficulty, and high technical content; ④ For new technologies, new processes, and new materials and new equipment adopted by developing and applied to develop and formulate plans; ⑤ Specific requirements for seasonal construction. (6) Quality and safety assurance measures, the quality assurance measures include formulating process control points, clarifying process quality control methods, etc.; Safety guarantee measures include identification of dangerous sources and environmental factors, corresponding prevention and control measures.
5. Preparation, review and revision of special construction plans for safety of dangerous major projects
1. Requirements for the preparation of special construction plans for safety in dangerous major projects (1) If general construction contracting is implemented, the special safety construction plan shall be organized and compiled by the construction general contracting unit. If subcontracting is implemented for major critical projects, special construction plans may be organized and prepared by relevant professional subcontracting units. 1) Hoisting projects that use unconventional lifting equipment and methods in mechanical and electrical engineering, and the single lifting weight is 100kN and above; Hoisting machinery installation and disassembly projects with a lifting capacity of 300kN and above, or a total erection height of 200m and above, or a foundation elevation of 200m and above; Steel structure installation projects with spans of 36m and above, Or installation projects of grid and cable-membrane structures with spans of 60m and above; Construction techniques such as overall jacking, translation, and rotation of large structures with a weight of 1,000 kN and above are all dangerous sub-projects exceeding a certain scale. 2) Hoisting projects that use unconventional lifting equipment and methods in power construction projects, and the single lifting weight is 100kN or more; Installation projects for overweight equipment with a lifting capacity of 600kN and above; Dismantling works of internal climbing lifting equipment with a height of 200m and above; Wind turbine (including offshore) hoisting projects are all dangerous sub-projects that exceed a certain scale. (2) The main contents of the special construction plan for dangerous major projects should include the following nine aspects: (1) Project overview: Overview and characteristics of dangerous and large projects, construction layout, construction requirements and technical guarantee conditions; (2) Basis for preparation: relevant laws, regulations, normative documents, standards, specifications, construction drawing design documents, construction organization design, etc.; (3) Construction plan: including construction progress plan, material and equipment plan; (4) Construction technology: technical parameters, process flow, construction methods: operation requirements, inspection requirements, etc.; (5) Construction safety assurance measures: organizational assurance measures, technical measures, monitoring and control measures, etc.; (6) Construction management and operation personnel allocation and division of labor: construction management personnel, full-time safety production management personnel, special operations personnel, other operations personnel, etc.; (7) Acceptance requirements: acceptance standards, acceptance procedures, acceptance content, acceptance personnel, etc.; (8) Emergency response measures; (9) Calculation sheets and related construction drawings. 2. Review requirements for special construction plans for safety in critical projects (1) The special safety construction plan shall be reviewed by the technical department of the construction unit organized by professional and technical personnel from the construction technology, safety, quality and other departments of the unit. If it passes the review, it shall be signed by the technical person in charge of the construction unit and stamped with the official seal of the unit, and the signature shall be reviewed and signed by the chief supervisory engineer and stamped with the professional seal before implementation. If general construction contracting is implemented, the implementation must be signed by the technical person in charge of the construction general contracting unit and the relevant professional contracting unit before the implementation can be organized. (2) For dangerous and large projects exceeding a certain scale, the construction unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting to demonstrate the special construction plan. If general construction contracting is implemented, the construction general contracting unit shall organize an expert demonstration meeting. The special construction plan shall be reviewed by the construction unit and the chief supervising engineer before expert evaluation. 3. Expert argumentation content for ultra-hazardous large-scale projects (1) Whether the special construction plan is complete and feasible; (2) Whether the calculation sheet and verification basis of the special construction plan and construction drawings comply with relevant standards and specifications; (3) Whether the special construction plan meets the actual conditions on site and can ensure construction safety. 4. Modification requirements after demonstration of the ultra-hazardous and major safety special construction plan ① If the special construction plan for dangerous and large-scale projects exceeding a certain scale is concluded as "passed" after expert argumentation, the construction unit can modify and improve it by referring to the expert opinions. ② If the conclusion is "passed after modification", the expert opinion must clarify the specific modification content. The construction unit shall make modifications in accordance with the expert opinion and perform relevant review and review procedures before implementation. The modification status shall be notified to the expert in a timely manner. ③ If the special construction plan “fails” after verification, the construction unit shall reorganize expert verification after modification.
6. Construction plan optimization
1. Methods and purposes of construction plan optimization Construction plan optimization mainly selects the optimal construction plan through economic and technical comparison of construction plans, so as to accelerate the construction progress, ensure construction quality and construction safety, and reduce consumption. 2. Construction plan optimization content Construction plan optimization mainly includes: optimization of construction methods, optimization of construction sequence, optimization of construction work organization form, optimization of construction labor organization, optimization of construction machinery organization, etc. (1) Construction methods refer to the technical plans, technological processes, organizational measures, inspection methods, etc. used during project construction. It directly affects construction progress, quality, safety and project costs. The optimization of construction methods is a trade-off between the technical advancement and economic rationality of the plan, and the use of systems theory to select the construction method with the best overall benefits. It does not emphasize the most advanced technology or economic optimization, but emphasizes maximizing comprehensive benefits. (2) The optimization of the construction sequence is to ensure on-site order, avoid chaos, achieve civilized construction, and achieve quick, economical and safe results. (3) Optimization of the construction work organization form refers to the reasonable organization of work and the adoption of one or more comprehensive methods of sequential operations, parallel operations, and flow operations. (4) Construction labor organization optimization refers to organizing labor with certain qualities in accordance with the requirements of the project, selecting a relatively optimal labor combination plan, making it meet the requirements of the project construction, and investing in the construction project. (5) Optimization of construction machinery organization is to shift construction machinery from merely meeting the needs of construction tasks to how to exert its economic benefits. It is necessary to optimize the economic selection of construction machinery, reasonable matching, economic comparison of mechanized construction plans, and maintenance and management of construction machinery to ensure that construction machinery plays a huge role in project construction.
7. Implementation of construction plan
1. Before project construction, the compiler of the construction plan should make a technical explanation of the construction plan to the construction workers. (1) In addition to the technical disclosure required for the construction plans of divisions (sub-projects) and special projects, new equipment, new materials, new technologies, new processes, namely the four new technologies, as well as special environments and special operations, must also be disclosed to construction workers. Tell the truth. (2) The disclosure content includes the construction procedures and sequences of the project, construction technology, operating methods, essentials, quality control, safety measures, environmental protection measures, etc. 2. During the construction process, the construction unit shall strictly organize the construction in accordance with the special construction plan and shall not modify the special construction plan without authorization. (1) The construction unit shall inspect and analyze the implementation of the construction plan and make timely adjustments. (2) If adjustments are indeed needed due to planning adjustments, design changes, etc., the revised special construction plan shall be re-examined and demonstrated. (3) If it involves adjustments to funds or construction period, the construction unit shall make adjustments as agreed. 3. Before the implementation of the special construction plan, the plan should be explained; on-site supervision should be carried out during the implementation. (1) The compiler or project technical leader shall explain the plan to the construction site management personnel. (2) The construction site management personnel shall make a safety technical briefing to the operators, which shall be signed and confirmed by both parties and the project's full-time safety production management personnel. (3) The full-time safety production management personnel of the project should conduct on-site supervision of the implementation of the special construction plan. If the construction is not carried out in accordance with the special construction plan, they should require immediate rectification and report to the project leader in a timely manner. The project leader should promptly organize rectification within a time limit. 4. Construction plans that have been significantly modified or supplemented shall be re-approved before implementation. 5. When implementing dangerous and major projects, attention should be paid to: (1) The construction unit shall announce the name of the dangerous project, construction time and specific responsible personnel in a conspicuous location on the construction site, and set up safety warning signs in dangerous areas. (2) Relevant personnel for critical and major projects include: 1) The technical director of the general contractor and subcontracting unit or authorized professional and technical personnel, project leader, project technical leader, special construction plan preparer, project full-time production safety management personnel and related personnel. 2) The project chief supervision engineer and professional supervision engineer of the supervision unit. 3) Project technical leaders of relevant survey, design and monitoring units. (3) The construction unit shall conduct construction monitoring and safety inspections of dangerous and major projects in accordance with regulations. If an emergency situation that endangers personal safety is discovered, the construction unit shall immediately organize workers to evacuate the dangerous area. (4) For dangerous and major projects that require acceptance according to regulations, the construction unit and supervision unit should organize relevant personnel to conduct acceptance. If the acceptance is passed, it can only enter the next process after being signed and confirmed by the project technical leader and the chief supervising engineer of the construction unit. (5) After the critical project passes the acceptance inspection, the construction unit shall set up an acceptance signboard at a prominent location on the construction site to announce the acceptance time and responsible personnel. 6. The construction plan should be filed after the project is completed and accepted. (1) The construction unit shall include special construction plans and special construction plans for dangerous and major project safety, as well as relevant information such as review, expert demonstration, disclosure, on-site inspection, acceptance and rectification, into file management. (2) The supervision unit shall include relevant information such as supervision implementation rules, special construction plan review, special inspection, acceptance and rectification into file management.
2H320040 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction resource management
2H320041 Requirements for human resource management
1. Basic principles of human resource management
1. System optimization principles. 2. Energy level correspondence principle. 3. Incentive reinforcement principle. 4. The principle of elastic redundancy. 5. The principle of complementary value-added. 6. Principle of fair competition.
2. Allocation of key personnel of the project department at the construction site
1. The main management personnel of the construction site project department depends on the size and specific situation of the project, but must meet the needs of the project. 2. The person in charge of the engineering project department: project manager, project deputy manager, project technology leader. The project manager must have the qualifications of mechanical and electrical engineering construction divisions. 3. Project technical person in charge: It must have a prescribed professional title of mechanical and electrical engineering, and has experience in engineering construction technology management. 4. Technical personnel of the project department: According to the size and specific situation of the project, according to the sub -department, sub -project and professional equipment. 5. On -site construction managers of the project department: Construction workers, materials, safety officers, machinery staff, laborers, data officers, quality staff, standards, etc. must be trained and examined to hold a certificate. 6. Engineering projects shall be equipped with technical workers who have qualified for construction requirements for assessment or training.
3. Requirements for special operators and special equipment operators
(1) Requirements for special operations personnel
Special operations personnel refer to employees who are directly engaged in special types of operations. Among the special workers specified by the national work safety supervision agency, mechanical and electrical installation companies include welders, crane workers, electricians, on-site transport workers (forklift workers), shelf workers, etc. 1. Qualification requirements Possess safety technical knowledge for corresponding types of work; participate in the safety technology theory and practical operation assessment prescribed by the state and pass the examination, and obtain a special operation certificate. 2. Training requirements. Before taking up independent work, special safety technology theoretical study and practical training that are suitable for this type of work must be carried out. 3. Management requirements. Special operations personnel must hold a certificate to work. The special operations operation certificate shall be reviewed every 3 years. Special operations personnel who have been away from special operations positions for more than 6 months must be re-assessed before taking up their posts. Only those who pass the test can start working.
(2) Requirements for special equipment operators
According to the "Measures for the Supervision and Management of Special Equipment Operators" issued by the General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine of the People's Republic of China, boilers, pressure vessels (including gas cylinders), pressure pipelines, elevators, hoisting machinery, passenger ropeways, large amusement facilities, yards (factories) Operators of special equipment such as internal motor vehicles and their relevant managers are collectively referred to as special equipment operators. In mechanical and electrical installation companies, it mainly refers to production personnel engaged in the manufacturing and installation of the above-mentioned equipment, such as welders, flaw detectors, furnace workers, etc.
2. Requirements for non-destructive testing personnel (1) Level classification and requirements. 1) Level I personnel can perform non-destructive testing operations, record testing data, and organize testing data. 2) Level II personnel can prepare general non-destructive testing procedures, independently conduct testing operations according to the testing process, evaluate test results, and issue test reports. 3) Level III personnel can prepare non-destructive testing processes according to standards, review or issue test reports, explain test results, and arbitrate technical disputes between Level II personnel on test conclusions.
(3) Management requirements of construction enterprises for special operators and special equipment operators
1. Construction enterprises should establish and maintain a team of special operators and special equipment operators, conduct training, management, and establish a filing mechanism. 2. The type and quantity of special operations personnel should be allocated according to the construction organization design and construction plan, and reflected in the labor plan. 3. Employers should hire (employ) personnel who have obtained the "Special Operator Certificate" and "Special Equipment Operator Certificate" to engage in relevant management and operation work, and strictly manage the operators. 4. Special equipment operators should carry their certificates with them when working, and consciously accept the supervision and inspection of the employer's safety management and quality and technical supervision departments. 5. Special equipment operators should actively participate in safety education and safety technology training, strictly implement operating procedures and relevant safety rules and regulations, abide by regulations, and handle or report hidden dangers in a timely manner.
4. Basic principles of dynamic management of labor force at construction sites
1. The dynamic management of labor refers to the dynamic process of tracking, balancing and coordinating labor according to changes in production tasks and construction conditions to solve labor imbalances and the disconnect between labor and production requirements. The basic principles that should be followed in dynamic management of human resources are: (1) Dynamic management is based on progress plans and contracts to meet project needs; (2) Dynamic management should allow full and reasonable flow of human resources within the enterprise; (3) Dynamic management should be based on dynamic balance and daily scheduling; (4) Dynamic management should be aimed at optimizing the combination of human resources and fully mobilizing enthusiasm. 2. Real-name management of construction workers Real-name information for construction workers consists of basic information, employment information, integrity information, etc. 1) Basic information should include identity card information, education level, type of work (professional), skill (professional title or job certificate) level and basic safety training of construction workers and project managers. 2) Employment information should include information such as job position, labor contract signing, attendance, salary payment and employment records. 3) Integrity information should include integrity evaluations, reports and complaints, good and bad behavior records, etc.
2H320042 Requirements for engineering materials management
1. Material procurement planning and procurement plan
1. Grasp the performance aspects of the material procurement contract, which mainly include: ① Delivery of materials ② Basis for delivery inspection ③Acceptance of product quantity ④Product quality inspection ⑤Changes to the purchase contract 2. Develop a material procurement plan. The material procurement plan should cover the entire construction process. (1) The procurement plan should be reasonably connected with the design progress and construction progress, and the interface management relationship between them should be properly handled. (2) It is necessary to comprehensively analyze the pros and cons of loan costs, centralized procurement and batch procurement to arrange the procurement plan. 3. Analyze the current market situation. ① Pay attention to the supplier's supply capacity and production cycle, and determine the best time to purchase batches or supply. ② Consider the material transportation distance, transportation method and time, so that the material supply and construction schedule are arranged with an appropriate amount of time in advance to reduce storage and storage costs.
4. Material inventory management requirements
1. Requirements for site acceptance ① When the materials come into the site, the quantity and quality of the materials must be inspected according to the feeding plan, feeding voucher, quality guarantee certificate or product certificate. ②The acceptance work shall be carried out in accordance with the quality acceptance specifications and measurement and testing regulations. ③The acceptance content includes material variety, specifications, models, quality, quantity, certificates, etc. ④ Keep records and go through acceptance procedures for acceptance. ⑤ Materials requiring re-inspection should have a sampling and inspection certification report. ⑥Reject materials that do not meet the plan requirements or have substandard quality.
5. Requirements for material issuance, use and recycling
1. Requirements for hair collection ① Where there is a quota of project materials, materials shall be received based on the quota requisition list. ② The materials used for construction facilities are also subject to a quota distribution system, with overall control based on the facility material use plan. ③ For materials that exceed the quota, formalities should be completed before using the materials, fill in the quota requisition form, indicate the reason for the overconsumption, and implement it after approval. ④ Establish a ledger for receiving and delivering materials to record the status of receiving and saving materials. 2. Usage supervision requires that those responsible for on-site material management should carry out division of labor supervision on the use of on-site materials. include: ① Whether material disclosure and process handover are carried out in accordance with regulations; ②Whether materials are used reasonably according to material specifications; ③Whether the procedures for receiving and issuing materials are carefully implemented; ④Whether it is possible to clean as needed, clean as needed, and clean materials as they are returned to the site after work is completed; ⑤Whether materials are stacked according to the floor plan; ⑥Whether materials are protected as required. 3. Recycling requirements The remaining materials of the team must be recycled, the return procedures must be completed in a timely manner, and the deduction shall be registered in the quota requisition list.
2H320043 Requirements for construction machinery management
2. Principles for Selection of Construction Machinery and Tools
The selection principle is: 1. The types of construction machinery and tools should meet the needs of the mechanical equipment supply plan and construction plan in the construction deployment. 2. The main performance parameters of construction machinery and tools must be able to meet project needs and quality assurance requirements. 3. The operating performance of construction machinery and tools must be suitable for the specific characteristics of the project and the environmental conditions of the place of use. 4. Be able to take into account the technological progress and market expansion needs of construction companies in recent years. 5. Try to choose products that are safe, simple, reliable in operation, of good brand, and of the same model of similar equipment. 6. Comprehensively consider the selection characteristics of mechanical equipment.
3. Construction machinery and tool management requirements
1. The construction unit must formulate and implement construction machinery and equipment planning, annual purchase plans, and management systems. (3) Establish a file for each piece of construction equipment. The main content should include purchase time, usage records, accident and maintenance records, equipment status appraisal records, etc. 2. The construction project department must be familiar with the construction characteristics of the contracted project, and the construction machinery and tools must be technically, economically and safely adaptable. (1) Construction machinery entering the site ① The installation should be inspected and accepted, the performance and condition should be kept intact, and the information should be complete and accurate. ② For large machines that need to be assembled on site, an acceptance inspection must be organized before use to verify the assembly quality and safety performance, and they will be put into use after passing the test. ③Special equipment should undergo inspection procedures. (2) The principle of "fixation of man and machine" should be implemented in the use of construction machinery and tools, and the "three-fix" system of fixing machines, fixing people, and fixing job responsibilities should be implemented. Implement the system of dedicated personnel responsible for special planes of important construction machinery and equipment, the system of captain responsibility, and the system of operators holding certificates. (6) Establish construction equipment use and maintenance ledgers and reward and punishment systems. 3. Requirements for construction machinery and equipment operators: (3) Gradually meet the requirements of “four understandings and three meetings” at this level. Four understandings: understand performance, understand principles, understand structure, and understand uses; Three skills: know how to operate, know how to maintain, and know how to troubleshoot.
2H320050 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction technology management
2H320051 Construction technology briefing
1. Basis, type and content of construction technical disclosure
(1) Basis for construction technical disclosure
The basis for construction technical disclosure: project quality planning, construction organization design, special construction plan, engineering design documents, construction technology and quality standards, etc.
(2) Type and content of construction technical disclosure:
1. Design disclosure and drawing review 2. Overall project briefing 3. Unit engineering technical briefing (or professional briefing) 4. Technical briefing on each project 5. Change disclosure 6. Security technology briefing
1. Design disclosure and drawing review Design disclosure is a technical activity in which the construction unit organizes the general construction contractor and the supervision unit to participate, and the survey and design units explain the contents of the construction drawings, or the general construction contractor organizes subcontracting units and labor teams, and the general contractor It is a technical activity for the contracting unit to explain the construction drawings and construction content. 2. Overall project briefing Before the start of the project, the technical leaders at all levels will organize the relevant engineering technology management departments to formulate a technical briefing outline based on the general design of the construction organization, engineering design documents, construction contracts, equipment specifications and other materials, and provide guidance to the functional departments of the project department, professional technical leaders and The main construction person in charge and the relevant personnel of the subcontracting unit shall make disclosures. Its main content is the overall strategic arrangement of the project. 3. Unit engineering technical briefing (or professional briefing) Before the start of the unit's project, the project technical leader should draw up a technical briefing outline based on the unit's project construction organization design, engineering design documents, equipment instructions, and superiors' disclosures, and provide guidance to the responsible persons, technical managers, and construction team leaders within the scope of the profession. and key construction personnel to conduct technical briefings. The content of the disclosure is the overall arrangement of construction and technical management within the scope of this major. 4. Technical briefing on each project The professional and technical person in charge or construction personnel shall draw up a technical disclosure outline based on construction drawings, equipment instructions, approved unit project construction organization design, construction plans, operation instructions, and relevant information from superiors, and make disclosures to the construction personnel of the team. When conducting construction technical disclosures, relevant personnel from construction, design, manufacturing, supervision and other units should be invited to participate as needed, discuss carefully, and make necessary additions and modifications to the disclosure content. When changes to the approved plan are involved, the original plan should be modified and re-approved. The re-approved construction organization design (plan) should be technically explained again before implementation. 5. Change disclosure When there are major changes in the construction situation, a timely disclosure should be made to the operators. When the project negotiation has a greater impact on the construction, a technical disclosure should also be made. 6. Security technology briefing Before the construction of the project, the professional and technical person in charge of the project will propose targeted safety technical measures and explain the construction projects that have greater safety risks during the construction process. For example, lifting and transportation of large items, high-altitude operations, underground operations, trial operation of large equipment, and other high-risk operations.
2. Responsibilities and requirements for construction technical disclosure
(1) Responsibility for construction technical disclosure
1. The technical briefing of major engineering projects shall be organized by the company’s technical person in charge or the deputy technical quality manager of the branch (subsidiary) company; Technical briefings for general projects are organized by the technical person in charge of the project department; Technical briefings for unit projects are organized by the project technical person in charge; Technical briefings for individual projects shall be organized by professional technical persons in charge or construction workers; For special plans (critical and super-critical projects), the compiler or project technical leader shall explain the plan to the construction site management personnel; Technical briefings for special equipment construction are organized by project quality assurance engineers. The importance of technical disclosures should be defined before the start of the project. For important technical disclosures, the disclosure documents should be reviewed or approved by the project technical leader. 2. Construction personnel should construct in accordance with the requirements for construction technical disclosure, and are not allowed to change construction methods and quality standards without authorization. When technical personnel and safety, quality, and environmental management personnel discover that construction workers' failure to comply with disclosure requirements may cause adverse consequences, they should immediately stop the construction. If the stoppage is ineffective, they have the right to stop the construction, and report to superiors for processing if necessary. 3. When a quality, equipment or personal safety accident occurs during construction, if the cause of the accident is a disclosure error, the person who made the disclosure shall be responsible; Those who violate the disclosure requirements will be held responsible by the construction leader and construction personnel; The construction personnel themselves shall be responsible for any violation of the requirements of "what they should know and what they should do"; For those who work without a certificate or participate in construction work while off-duty, in addition to their own responsibilities, the team leaders and full-time engineers (full-time technicians) of the team should also be held responsible.
(2) Requirements for construction technical disclosure
1. The construction technical disclosure must be based on the approved construction organization design and construction plan, and the content should meet the requirements of the design documents, construction technical standards, specifications, construction process standards and engineering construction contracts. 2. The disclosure document should be prepared in a timely manner according to the characteristics of the project, and the content should be comprehensive, targeted and operable. 3. When making disclosures, relevant technical standards and processes must be strictly implemented, and the operating process should be specified according to the actual situation, so that operators can combine technical standards and process requirements when executing the process to meet the requirements of quality standards. 4. The level, stage and form of technical disclosure should be determined according to the scale of the project, the complexity and difficulty of the construction and the quality of the construction personnel. 5. The content of construction technical disclosure should correspond to the construction project content, construction technology, materials, technical level of construction personnel, on-site construction machinery and equipment conditions, and on-site operating environment, and fully reflect the characteristics of the project. The expression should be specific and accurate, and the form should be standardized, such as terminology, symbols, measurement units, chapters, sections, articles, paragraphs, diagrams, tables, etc., should meet the requirements of standardization work. 6. Technical disclosure shall be based on written documents. Audio-visual materials and BIM technology may be used as auxiliary means during the disclosure process. 7. The technical briefing must be completed before construction, and the signature procedures must be completed before construction operations can begin. 8. The technical person in charge of the subcontracting unit must make technical disclosures to the management personnel and construction operators at all levels of the unit in accordance with the technical disclosure requirements of the general contractor. 9. After the technical disclosure is completed, the persons in charge of both parties shall sign on the disclosure record for confirmation. The number of signed copies of the disclosure record shall be determined based on the project delivery information requirements, and it must be ensured that the person making the disclosure holds one copy and the person receiving the disclosure must hold at least one copy.
2H320052 Design Change Procedure
1. Classification according to the content of the content of the design change
According to the nature of the change, it is divided into major design changes and general design changes. 1. Major design changes Major rescheduling changes refer to changes that have an impact on the total construction period and milestones of the project, or change the project quality standards and overall design functions, or increase the cost beyond the approved basic design budget, or add individual projects that are not included in the original approved budget , or design changes proposed due to changes in process plans, expansion of design scale, addition of major process equipment, etc., changes in the basic design scope, etc. Major design changes shall be subject to approval procedures in accordance with relevant regulations. For example, major design changes for pressure pipeline projects mainly include: Involving design activities, key equipment, core technical solutions, and layout changes that have a significant impact on the realization of project plan goals; involving design changes related to use functions, quality, and look and feel in production operation, maintenance, and safety. 2. General design changes General design changes refer to partial improvements and improvements to the original design without violating the approved basic design documents. Generally, design changes do not change the process flow, have no impact on the total construction period and milestones, and have little impact on project investment.
2. Design change requirements
(1) Change procedures for design change applications submitted by construction units
1. The construction unit submits a change application to the supervision unit for review. 2. The supervision engineer or chief supervision engineer will review whether the technology is feasible, the difficulty of construction, and whether the construction period will increase or decrease. The cost engineer will calculate the cost impact and submit it to the construction unit for approval after review. 3. The engineer of the construction unit shall notify the design unit after the project manager or general manager of the construction unit agrees. After the design unit engineer agrees to the change plan, he will implement the design change and issue change drawings or change instructions. 4. The construction unit shall send the change drawings or change instructions to the supervision engineer, and the supervision engineer shall send them to the construction unit.
(2) Change procedures for design change applications submitted by construction units
1. The construction unit engineer organizes the demonstration of the change, the chief supervision engineer demonstrates whether the change is technically feasible, the difficulty of construction and the impact on the construction period, and the cost engineer demonstrates the impact of the change on the cost. 2. After the construction unit engineer reports the demonstration results to the project manager or general manager for approval, he notifies the design unit engineer, who approves the change plan, makes design changes, and issues change drawings or change instructions. 3. The construction unit shall send the change drawings or change instructions to the supervision engineer, and the supervision engineer shall send them to the construction unit. 4. If the supervision unit proposes a change proposal, it must submit a change plan to the construction unit and implement it in accordance with this procedure.
(3) The design unit issues design change procedures
1. The design unit issues design changes. 2. The construction unit engineer organizes the chief supervision engineer and cost engineer to demonstrate the impact of the change. 3. After the construction unit engineer reports the demonstration results to the project manager or general manager for approval, the construction unit will send the change drawings or change instructions to the supervision engineer, and the supervision engineer will send them to the construction unit.
(4) Precautions for design changes
3. The construction unit shall submit a report on the change in project price within 14 days after the project change is confirmed. After confirmation by the supervising engineer and the construction unit engineer, the contract price shall be adjusted according to the contract conditions. 4. Design changes shall be implemented by the construction unit according to the changed drawings, and the supervision engineer shall sign the implementation opinions. If any changes occur after the original design has been implemented, this should be noted. If materials are substituted during construction, material substitution procedures must be completed. Avoid changes that simply increase the amount of material without detailed drawings or specific parts to be used.
2H320053 Construction technical data and completion file management
2. Classification of construction project data
1. Construction project information (construction project documents)
Construction project documents: Various forms of information records formed during the project construction process, including project preparation stage documents, supervision documents, construction documents, as-built drawings and completion acceptance documents.
Project preparation stage documents
Before the start of the project, during the project preparation stages such as project establishment, approval, land use, survey, design, and bidding formed document.
Supervision documents
Supervision management information, progress control information, quality control documents, cost control documents, contract management documents and completion acceptance documents.
construction documents
Construction management documents, construction technical documents, construction progress and cost documents, construction material documents, construction records records, construction test records and inspection reports, construction quality acceptance records, and completion acceptance documents.
Project completion documents
Completion acceptance documents, completion settlement documents, completion handover documents, and completion summary documents.
2. Construction technical documents of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(2) Contents of construction technical documents Engineering technical document review form, construction organization design and construction plan, construction plan for sub-projects with greater risk, technical disclosure records, drawing review records, design disclosure records, design change notices, project negotiation records, and technical approval orders wait.
3. Preparation and filling requirements of construction technical documents
1. The general design of the construction organization shall be prepared by the project leader and approved by the technical leader of the general contracting unit; The construction organization design of the unit project shall be prepared by the project leader and reviewed and approved by the technical person in charge of the construction unit or the technical personnel authorized by the technical person in charge; The construction plan of a partial (sub-item) project or special project constructed by a professional contractor shall be organized and prepared by the project technical director, and shall be reviewed and approved by the technical director of the professional contractor or a technician authorized by the technical director. If there is a general contractor, , should be approved and filed by the project technical person in charge of the general contractor unit. 4. Technical disclosure records must meet the requirements, and the disclosure records should be signed and confirmed by the person making the disclosure and the person being made accountable. The preparation of technical disclosure records must comply with the requirements of construction drawings, design changes, construction technical specifications, construction quality acceptance standards, operating procedures, construction organization design, construction plans, and new technology construction methods. 5. The records of joint review of drawings and records of design disclosure shall be implemented after being signed by all parties. Professionals and units participating in the joint review and disclosure shall have complete signatures and seals. The construction unit should record the situation of joint review of drawings, organize, summarize and fill in the records of joint review of drawings. Design disclosure is usually organized by the construction unit. 6. The design change notice shall be prepared in accordance with the design change regulations, and shall be submitted to the construction unit for implementation after review and signature by the relevant units and departments. 7. The project negotiation record shall be filled in by the proposing party, handled by profession, and signed by all participating parties. The content should be detailed, and if design changes are involved, the design unit should issue a design change notice. 8. The technical contact (notification) form should specify the specific content that needs to be resolved or explained, and should be signed by all relevant parties. The technical contact (notice) form is a document used by the construction unit to conduct technical contact and processing with construction, design, supervision and other units. 9. Project quality accident handling records. Including the occurrence and processing records, signed by the construction project manager, professional and technical person in charge, quality inspector, and construction foreman. The engineering quality accident handling record should fill in the location where the accident occurred, the person directly responsible, the nature of the accident, the accident level, the accident process and cause analysis, the expected loss of the accident, preliminary handling opinions, etc.
4. Construction technical data management requirements
2. Establish a responsibility system for the management of construction technical data for mechanical and electrical engineering projects, clarify the responsibilities of each position, and the construction project department should set up a full-time data clerk. 3. The formation, collection and arrangement of construction technical data should start from contract signing and construction preparation until completion, and must be complete and complete. Engineering technical data shall be formed simultaneously with the progress of project construction and shall not be supplemented afterwards. 6. If the construction project implements general contracting management, the general contractor shall be responsible for collecting and summarizing the project files formed by each subcontracting unit, and shall hand them over to the construction unit in a timely manner; Each subcontracting unit shall organize and file the project documents generated by its own unit and hand them over to the general contractor in a timely manner. If a construction project is contracted by several units, each contracting unit shall be responsible for collecting and organizing the project documents of its contracted project, and shall hand them over to the construction unit in a timely manner. 7. A set of electronic files should be prepared for each construction project and handed over to the urban construction archives management agency along with the paper files. If the electronic file is signed with a legally valid electronic seal or electronic signature, the corresponding paper file does not need to be handed over. 8. Before organizing the completion acceptance of the project, all documents and materials should be collected and the project files should be completed; when organizing the completion acceptance, the acceptance of the project files should be organized, and the acceptance conclusion should be included in the project completion acceptance report and the completion of the project by the expert group. It is clear in the acceptance comments. 9. For projects that are included in the acceptance scope of the urban construction archives management agency, a set of project files that meet the regulations should be handed over to the local urban construction archives management agency before the completion acceptance and filing. 10. The acceptance of construction project files should be included in the joint acceptance of construction project completion.
5. Main contents of completion files of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2. The main contents of the completion files that the construction unit of the mechanical and electrical engineering project needs to archive: (1) General construction records. Including: construction organization design, (special) construction plan, technical briefing, and construction log. (2) Drawing change record. Including: drawing review records, design change records, and project negotiation records. (3) Equipment, product and material quality certification, inspection and installation records. (4) Pre-inspection, re-inspection and re-test records. (5) Various construction records, such as concealed project inspection and acceptance records, construction inspection records, handover inspection records, etc. (6) Construction tests and inspection records. Including electrical ground resistance, insulation resistance and other test records as well as trial operation records, etc. (7) Quality incident handling records. (8) Construction quality acceptance records. Including: inspection batch quality acceptance records, sub-project quality acceptance records, division (sub-division) project quality acceptance records. (9) Other relevant documents, physical photos, audio videos, CDs, etc. that need to be handed over to the construction unit.
6. Requirements for preparation of completion files for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Archive file content requirements: (1) Completion documents must comply with national and local laws and regulations as well as relevant mechanical and electrical engineering project construction technical specifications, standards and procedures. (2) The paper documents filed upon completion should be original, and the content must be true, accurate, and consistent with the actual project. (3) The archived documents should have clear handwriting, clear drawings, neat charts, and complete signature and seal procedures. (4) Archived electronic documents should use electronic signatures and other means, and the content contained should be true and reliable. The contents of archived electronic documents must be consistent with their paper counterparts. (5) Storage media for offline archiving of electronic files can use mobile hard drives, flash drives, optical disks, tapes, etc. (6) The carrier for storing and transferring electronic files should be tested and should be free of viruses and data reading and writing failures, and should ensure that the recipient can read the data through appropriate equipment. 3. Archiving requirements for audio and video files: (1) Audio and video files should be screened and identified before archiving, and audio and video materials should be selected for archiving that have clear and complete sounds and images, stable images, true colors, and reflect main factors such as theme content, main characters, scene characteristics, etc. (2) Video tape production should be in PAL format and MPEG2 or AVI format; audio recording should be in MP3 or WAV format. (3) The audio and video files transferred to the urban construction archives management agency should be original materials with descriptions and edited video feature films, and the carriers should be audio recordings, video tapes or CDs.
7. Requirements for completion file management of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2. Completion files are divided into storage periods and confidentiality levels according to regulations. The storage period should be selected from three storage periods: permanent storage, long-term storage, and short-term storage based on the preservation value of the documents in the volume. When there are documents with different retention periods in the same case file, the storage period of the case file should be longer. The classification level should be selected from three levels: top secret, secret, and secret. When there are documents with different confidentiality levels in the same case file, the high-security level should be used as the confidentiality level of the file. 3. Principles for organizing completed files (1) Follow the formation rules of urban construction documents and materials, and maintain the completeness, accuracy and system of the documents and materials in the volume to the greatest extent. (2) Follow the principle that the preservation value and confidentiality level of documents and materials in the case file are roughly the same. (3) When a construction project consists of multiple unit projects, the project documents should be organized according to the unit projects. (4) Project documents should be organized according to different formation and organization units and construction procedures, and according to project preparation stage documents, supervision documents, construction documents, as-built drawings, and completion acceptance documents, and can be composed into one or more volumes according to the quantity. roll. (5) There should be no duplicate documents in the case file, and documents on different carriers should be organized into separate files. The printed project documents should be kept in their original state. The organization and sorting of construction project electronic documents can be carried out according to paper documents. (6) The case file should not be too thick. The thickness of the written material roll should not exceed 20mm, and the thickness of the drawing roll should not exceed 50mm. 4. How to form papers (1) Documents in the project preparation stage should be organized according to construction procedures, forming units, etc.; (2) Supervision documents should be organized according to unit projects, branch projects or majors, stages, etc.; (3) Construction documents should be organized according to unit projects and division (sub-item) projects; (4) As-built drawings should be organized according to unit project and major; (5) Completion acceptance documents should be organized according to unit projects and majors; (6) When electronic files are filed, multi-level folders should be established for each project (project), which should be consistent with the file settings of paper documents, and corresponding identification relationships should be established; (7) Audiovisual materials should be organized according to each stage of the construction project. Audiovisual materials of major events and important activities should be organized according to themes. Corresponding identification relationships should be established between audiovisual files and paper files. 7. Acceptance and handover of completed files (1) There should be no less than two sets of project files, one set should be kept by the construction unit, and the other set (original) should be handed over to the local urban construction archives management Saved by the regulatory agency. (3) When the construction unit transfers project archives to the construction unit, it should prepare a "Transfer List of Project Archives" and both parties will check according to the list. Read the inventory. The handover list shall be made in duplicate. After the handover, both parties shall sign and seal the handover list, and each party shall keep one copy for archival purposes.
2H320060 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction progress management
2H320061 Implementation of unit project construction progress plan
1. Method of expressing the construction progress plan of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
Methods for expressing the construction progress plan of mechanical and electrical engineering include bar diagrams, network diagrams, milestone tables, and text descriptions. Commonly used are the bar diagram plan and the network diagram plan.
(1) Horizontal chart construction progress plan
2. The method of preparing the horizontal bar chart plan is simple, making it easy to compare the actual progress with the planned progress, and to calculate the requirements for labor, machinery, materials and funds. 4. The horizontal bar chart can also mark the logical relationships of important work in the chart, but if all the logical relationships are marked in the chart, the horizontal bar chart will lose its simplicity. Therefore, the general bar graph does not reflect the logical relationship of the work, cannot reflect the maneuvering time of the work, cannot clearly reflect the key work, key lines and work time differences that affect the construction period, which is not conducive to the dynamic control of the construction progress. 5. The Gantt Chart is suitable for mechanical and electrical engineering of small projects. When the project scale is large and the process relationship is complex, it is difficult for the Gantt Chart to fully reflect the contradictions between different sub-projects, and it is difficult to apply to the progress control of larger engineering projects. There are major limitations in using the Gantt Chart plan to control the construction progress.
(2) Network diagram construction progress plan
1. The construction schedule represented by the network diagram (double code number) can clearly express the logical relationship between various tasks. Through the calculation of time parameters of the network plan, key lines and key tasks can be found and the total construction period can be calculated. Commonly used ones include work calculation method and node calculation method. 2. The network plan can reflect the key lines with the longest construction period, and can also clarify the maneuvering time of each work, which facilitates the control focus of the construction progress plan. 3. Network plans can reflect excess time in non-critical lines. 4. Network plans can be prepared and managed using computer software.
2. Key points in the preparation of mechanical and electrical engineering progress plans
2. It is necessary to determine the construction sequence of electromechanical projects, highlight the main sub-projects, and meet the construction sequence requirements of first underground and then above ground, first trunk lines and then branch lines, meet the needs of quality and safety, meet user requirements, and pay attention to production auxiliary devices and supporting equipment. Arrangement of the project. 3. When determining the duration of sub-projects, it should be based on similar construction experience, combined with construction site conditions and construction resources, analysis and comparison, necessary corrections, and final confirmation. 4. When determining the start and completion time of various projects and the mutual overlap and coordination relationship, the following factors should be considered: ① Ensure the focus of the work, take into account the general aspects, and prioritize the main process production lines with large quantities of work. ② Meet the requirements of continuous and balanced construction, fully utilize resources, and improve productivity and economic benefits. ③ Set aside some backup projects so that they can be used as balance adjustments during the construction process. ④ Consider the limitations and impacts of various adverse conditions and prepare to mitigate or eliminate adverse impacts. ⑤ Consider the cooperation of the owner and the influence of relevant local government departments. 6. The content expressed in the unit project progress plan includes all work at various stages such as construction preparation, construction, trial operation, handover and acceptance, etc. 7. The unit project progress plan is the basis for preparing the construction operation progress plan of the project.
3. Implementation of unit project construction progress plan
(1) Briefing before implementation of unit project construction progress plan 1. Personnel participating in the disclosure should include project leaders, planners, dispatchers, operation team members, and relevant material supply, safety, and quality management personnel. 2. Contents of disclosure: key points of construction progress control (key lines, key tasks), human resources and material supply guarantees for construction, division of labor and connection relationships and time points of various professional teams (including subcontractors), and essentials of safety technical measures and unit project quality objectives. 3. In order to ensure the smooth implementation of the schedule plan, economic and organizational measures can be taken, such as establishing a contract responsibility letter and operating multiple shifts for key tasks.
2H320062 Operation schedule plan requirements
1. Requirements for preparation of construction work progress plan
1. The construction operation progress plan is a progress plan that decomposes the unit project construction progress plan objectives. The construction operation progress plan should be prepared according to the unit project construction progress plan. 3. The operation progress plan can be prepared in units of sub-projects or processes. Before preparation, a full understanding of the construction site conditions, current working conditions, human resources allocation, material supply status, etc. should be made, and problems that may be encountered during implementation and Its solution path proposes countermeasures, so the operation schedule is the most operable plan among all plans. 6. The operation schedule plan should specifically reflect the rationality of the construction sequence arrangement, that is, meet the basic requirements of underground first, then above ground, first deep, then shallow, first main line then branch line, first large parts then small parts, etc.
2. Implementation requirements of construction operation progress plan
(2) Inspection implementation 1. Checking the implementation of the operation schedule is a key link in the execution of the plan. It can be found whether there is any deviation between the actual progress and the planned progress, what is the degree of deviation when the deviation occurs, and whether measures need to be taken to correct it.
2H320063 Monitoring and adjustment of construction progress
1. Reasons and factors affecting the progress of the construction plan
(1) Reasons affecting the progress of the construction plan
1. Reasons given by the construction unit: Construction funds have not been secured, and project funds cannot be delivered on time, which affects the procurement of equipment and materials, affects the salary payment of construction personnel, and affects the schedule of the plan. 2. Reasons caused by the design unit: Construction drawings are not provided in time or the drawings are modified, causing the project to be stopped or reworked, affecting the plan progress. 3. Reasons of the supplier: The supplier breached the contract, and the equipment and materials did not arrive at the construction site as planned, or failed to pass the inspection after delivery, which affected the schedule of the plan. 4. Reasons caused by the construction unit: chaotic project management, errors in the preparation of construction plans, breach of contract by subcontractors, poor coordination at the construction site, insufficient construction personnel, improper construction plans and construction methods, etc., which affect the schedule of the plan.
(2) Factors affecting the progress of the construction plan
1. Project funds are not secured 2. Construction drawings are not provided in time 3. Unfavorable factors of climate and surrounding environment 4. Supplier’s breach of contract 5. Equipment and material prices rise 6. Application of four new technologies 7. Construction unit management capabilities
2. Monitoring and analysis of construction progress
(3) Analysis of the impact of construction progress deviation on subsequent work and the total construction period 1. Whether the work with schedule deviation is critical work (1) If the work with progress deviation is located on the critical line, that is, the work is critical work, no matter how small the deviation is, it will have an impact on subsequent work and the total construction period, and corresponding adjustment measures must be taken. (2) If the work with progress deviation is not critical work, it is necessary to compare the deviation value with the total time difference and free time difference to determine the degree of impact on subsequent work and the total construction period. 2. Is the progress deviation greater than the total time difference? (1) If the progress deviation of the work is greater than the total time difference of the work, this deviation will affect the subsequent work and the total construction period, and corresponding adjustment measures must be taken. (2) If the progress deviation of a job is less than or equal to the total time difference of the work, this deviation has no impact on the total construction period, but its impact on subsequent work needs to be determined by comparing the deviation with the free time difference. 3. Analyze whether the schedule deviation is greater than the free time difference
3. Construction schedule adjustment method
1. Change the connection relationship between certain tasks If deviations in the actual construction progress affect the total construction period, under the condition that the connection relationship between the work is allowed to change, the connection relationship between the relevant work of the critical line and the non-critical line will be changed to shorten the construction period. 2. Shorten the duration of certain tasks Without changing the connection relationship between the work, shortening the duration of some work, speeding up the construction progress and ensuring the realization of the planned construction period. This method is actually the construction period optimization method and construction period and cost optimization method in network plan optimization.
4. Contents and steps of construction schedule adjustment
1. Contents of adjustments to the construction schedule Including: construction content, project volume, start and end time, duration, working relationship, resource supply, etc. 2. Principles for adjustment of construction schedule (2) The object of adjustment must be critical work, and the work has the potential to be compressed. At the same time, the rush fee is the lowest compared with other compressible work.
5. Main measures for construction progress control
(1) Organizational measures 1. Determine the construction progress goals of mechanical and electrical projects and establish a progress goal control system; clarify the project site progress control personnel and their division of labor; implement the tasks and responsibilities of progress control personnel at all levels. 2. Establish a project progress reporting system, establish a progress information communication network, and implement an inspection and analysis system for the progress plan. 3. Establish a construction progress coordination meeting system, including the time, location, and participants of the coordination meeting. 4. Establish a management system for joint review of mechanical and electrical engineering drawings, engineering changes and design changes.
(2) Contractual measures 1. Sign a construction contract with each subcontracting unit before construction, stipulating the completion date and punitive measures for failure to complete on time. 2. The contract must have special provisions for special funds to prevent the construction progress from being affected by financial problems and fully ensure the timely arrival of labor, construction machinery, equipment, and materials. 3. Strictly control contract changes. Engineering changes and design changes proposed by all parties should be strictly reviewed before being added to the contract documents. 4. Risk factors and their impact on progress should be fully considered in the contract, as well as corresponding treatment methods. 5. Coordinate the relationship between the contract duration and the progress plan to ensure the achievement of progress goals. 6. Strengthen claims management and handle claims fairly.
(3) Economic measures 1. Consider the funds needed to speed up the construction progress in the project budget, prepare a fund demand plan, and meet the project expenses required to ensure the supply of funds to ensure the construction progress target, etc. 2. Handle project advance payment and project progress payment procedures in a timely manner during construction. 3. Provide generous rush fees for emergency rush work, reward early construction deadlines, and charge delay loss compensation for project delays.
(4) Technical measures 1. In order to achieve the planned progress target, optimize the construction plan and analyze the possibility of changing construction technology, construction methods and construction machinery. 2. Review the progress plan submitted by the subcontracting unit so that the subcontracting unit can carry out construction in a state that meets the overall progress plan. 3. Prepare construction progress control work rules and guide project department personnel to implement progress control. 4. Use network planning technology and other applicable planning methods, combined with computer applications, to implement dynamic control of the progress of electromechanical projects. 5. Drawing review should be strengthened before construction and random changes should be strictly controlled.
2H320070 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction quality management
2H320071 Construction quality pre-control
2. Preparation of quality plan for mechanical and electrical engineering
3. Central content of quality plan preparation (1) Expansion of goals. (2) Clarify job responsibilities. (3) Determine the process and specify specific control methods for the determined process. (4) Laws, regulations and standards. (5) Setting and management of quality control points. (6) Other measures that must be taken to achieve quality objectives and quality requirements. (7) Records that should be completed for relevant positions.
3. Quality control of the construction process of electromechanical installation projects
Construction quality control is divided into three stages according to the whole process: before-event control, during-event control and after-event control.
1. Prior control Quality control in the pre-construction preparation stage is the control of the people, machines, materials, methods, environment and resource conditions involved in the construction project. (1) Construction preparation quality control: including quality control of construction machinery and testing equipment; quality control of engineering equipment, materials, semi-finished products and components; quality assurance system, construction personnel qualification review, operator training and other management controls; quality control system organization control; Control of review of construction plans, construction plans, construction methods, and inspection methods; control of engineering technical environmental supervision and inspection; review and control of new processes, new technologies, and new materials, etc. (2) Strictly control the quality of joint review of drawings and technical disclosures, the quality of construction organization and design disclosures, and the quality of sub-project technical disclosures.
2. Control during events (1) Construction process quality control: including process control, control of handover inspections between processes; quality control of concealed projects; process control such as debugging, inspection, and testing. (2) Equipment manufacturing supervision and control. It means that large and special equipment must be sent to the factory to supervise its manufacture. (3) Intermediate product control. For example, the installation of boilers and pressure vessels is actually a continuing manufacturing process of assembling intermediate products. This quality control is particularly important. (4) Control of quality acceptance or assessment of sub-projects and divisions. (5) Review and control of construction changes such as design changes, drawing modifications, and project negotiations.
3. Post-event control (1) Completion quality inspection and control. Including joint commissioning and operation, review and approval of acceptance documents, general acceptance upon completion, and general handover. (2) Project quality assessment. Including quality assessment of unit projects, individual projects, and the entire project. (3) Review and filing of project quality documents. This is the most important quality control, it must be true and accurate. (4) Return visit and warranty.
4. Pre-control of mechanical and electrical engineering construction quality
The main contents of construction quality pre-control of electromechanical engineering projects include: construction quality planning of electromechanical engineering projects, process quality pre-control, etc.
(1) Construction quality planning of mechanical and electrical engineering projects 1. Determine quality goals 2. Establish an organizational structure 3. Formulate the job responsibilities of personnel and departments at all levels in the project management department 4. Establish quality assurance system and control procedures Quality control procedures at the construction site of mechanical and electrical engineering generally include process, welding, quality inspection, physical, chemical and non-destructive testing, materials and equipment, heat treatment, etc. 5. Prepare construction organization design (construction plan) and quality plan. 6. Planning of electromechanical integrated pipeline design The in-depth design of comprehensive pipelines is the primary task of mechanical and electrical engineering technology planning.
(2) Process quality pre-control There are generally three methods of process quality control: quality pre-control, process analysis, and quality control point setting, with quality pre-control being the main one. 1.Quality pre-control Quality pre-control includes: quality plan pre-control and construction organization design (construction plan) pre-control, construction preparation pre-control, and construction production element pre-control. 2. Process analysis (2) Steps of process analysis: The first step is a written analysis using the cause-and-effect analysis diagram method; The second step is to conduct test verification, and different methods can be used according to different processes, such as optimization methods; The third step is to formulate standards for management, mainly using the system diagram method and matrix diagram method. 3. Setting of quality control points (1) Quality control points refer to key parts that have a serious impact on the performance, safety, life, reliability, etc. of the project or key processes that have a serious impact on the next process. (2) Principles for determining quality control points: 1) Key processes or links in the construction process, such as high-voltage electrical appliances and power transformers of electrical installations, beam-column-plate nodes of steel structures, equipment foundations of key equipment, pressure tests, pad iron settings, etc. 2) Key quality characteristics of the process, such as non-destructive testing of welds, horizontal and vertical deviations of equipment installation, etc. 3) Weak links in construction or processes with unstable quality, such as welding rod drying, bevel processing, etc. 4) The key factors of quality characteristics, such as the key factors of the slope and parallelism of pipeline installation are the construction personnel, and the key factors of welding quality in winter welding construction are the ambient temperature, etc. 5) Processes, parts or objects that have a significant impact on the construction quality or safety of subsequent projects (subsequent processes). 6) Parts or links that adopt new processes, new technologies, and new materials. 7) Concealed engineering. (3) Division of quality control points According to the degree of impact of each control point on project quality, it is divided into three levels: A, B, and C. 1) A-level control points: Quality control points that affect the safe operation and use functions of devices and equipment or that must be stopped before handling when quality problems occur after operation or that have special requirements in the contract agreement must be inspected by the construction, supervision and owner. Personnel jointly check, confirm and issue visas. 2) Level B control points: Quality control points that affect the quality of the next process shall be jointly inspected, confirmed and signed by quality inspection personnel from both construction and supervision parties. 3) C-level control points: secondary quality control points that have little impact on project quality or can be dealt with at any time if problems arise after start-up. The quality inspection personnel of the construction party shall check and confirm by themselves. (4) Preparation of quality control points The detailed list of quality control points should include: The name and responsible person of the control system and control links, the name and number of the control point, the control level and responsible person, the number and name of the record sheet, etc. The quality inspection record form should be submitted to the owner for approval.
5. Quality pre-control plan
1. Quality pre -control scheme preparation By analyzing the characteristics of factors that affect the quality of construction, the quality pre -control scheme (or quality control diagram) and quality prevention measures are prepared, and it is implemented during the construction process. The quality pre -control scheme can be formulated for a branch, sub -project, construction process (such as: pipe welding) or a certain quality problem (such as welding cracks) in the process. 2. The content of the quality pre -control scheme It mainly includes: process (process) name, possible quality problems, and the quality pre -control measures proposed. The expression forms of the quality pre -control scheme are: text expression form, form expression form, and pre -control diagram expression form.
6. Quality control of coordinated construction of mechanical and electrical projects
1. Cooperation between mechanical and electrical engineering and decoration majors 2. Cooperation between mechanical and electrical majors (1) Whether there is interference between pipes, bridges, cables, etc. between air-conditioning ducts, water pipes, water supply and drainage, electrical and building intelligence and other mechanical and electrical disciplines. (3) Whether the junction of mechanical and electrical professional pipelines is connected in place. For example, whether the water supply pipe of the air-conditioning water system is connected in place, whether the air-conditioning machine room is equipped with a drainage pipe for condensed water, etc. (8) Linked debugging of the fire protection system, including linkage debugging of the fire water supply system, linkage debugging of the fire alarm system, linkage debugging of the smoke prevention and exhaust system, etc.
2H320072 Construction process quality inspection
2. Contents and methods of on-site quality inspection
1. Contents of on-site quality inspection Including: inspection before the start of construction, process handover inspection, inspection of concealed projects, inspection of resumption of work after shutdown, inspection after completion of sub-projects and divisions, and inspection of finished product protection. 2. Three-inspection system for quality inspection of engineering projects (1) The "three inspection system" refers to the process handover inspection. For important processes or processes that have a significant impact on project quality, the "three inspection system" should be strictly implemented. No further construction process shall be carried out without inspection and approval by the supervision engineer (or technical person in charge of the construction unit). (2) The "three inspection system" refers to an inspection system that combines "self-inspection" and "mutual inspection" by operators and "special inspection" by full-time quality management personnel. It is an effective method for construction companies to ensure the quality of on-site construction. 1) Self-inspection means that operators conduct self-inspections on their own construction operations or completed sub-projects, implement self-control and self-checking, and eliminate abnormal factors in a timely manner to prevent unqualified products from entering the next operation. 2) Mutual inspection refers to the mutual inspection between operators on completed operations or sub-projects. It is a review and confirmation of self-inspection and plays a role in mutual supervision. Mutual inspection can be in the form of mutual inspection between operators in the same group, or it can be a random inspection of the operators of the team by the quality inspector of the team, or it can also be a handover inspection of the next operation to the upper operation. 3) Special inspection refers to the quality inspector's inspection of the operations or sub-projects completed by the branch engineering construction team to make up for the shortcomings of self-inspection and mutual inspection. 4) Implement the three-inspection system and reasonably determine the scope of self-inspection, mutual inspection and special inspection. ① The inspection of raw materials, semi-finished products and finished products is mainly carried out by full-time inspectors. ② The inspection of various operations in the production process is mainly based on self-inspection and mutual inspection of construction site operators, supplemented by roving sampling inspections by full-time inspection personnel. ③The quality of finished products must undergo final inspection and certification. 3. Methods of on-site quality inspection ①Visual inspection method. Inspection based on the senses is also called visual quality inspection. ② Actual measurement method. By comparing the actual measured data with the requirements of construction specifications, quality acceptance standards and allowable deviation values, we can judge whether the quality meets the requirements. ③Test method. An inspection method to judge quality through necessary testing methods. Mainly include: physical and chemical testing, non-destructive testing, pressure test, test run, etc.
2H320073 Handling of construction quality problems and quality accidents
1. Classification and definition of engineering quality accident issues
2. Quality issues. If the quality of the project is not up to standard and must be repaired, reinforced or scrapped, causing little direct economic loss, it is considered a quality problem and must be handled by the enterprise itself. 3. Quality accidents. If the quality of the project is not up to standard, it must be repaired, reinforced or scrapped. Quality accidents will cause large direct economic losses.
2. Classification of engineering quality accidents
Engineering quality accidents are divided into four levels: particularly serious accidents, major accidents, major accidents, and general accidents.
3. Characteristics of quality accidents
Quality accidents in engineering projects are characterized by complexity, severity, variability, and frequency.
4. Quality incident handling procedures
1. Accident report 2. On-site protection 3.Accident investigation 4.Write a quality accident investigation report 5. Accident handling report
1. Accident report
When a quality accident occurs at the construction site, the construction leader (project manager) should promptly report the accident situation to the enterprise in accordance with the prescribed time and procedures. The contents of the report include: the time and place of the quality accident, the name of the project and the overview of the project; a description of the quality accident situation; quality accident site investigation records, evidence photos, videos, evidence materials, investigation records, etc.; the development and changes of quality accidents Situation etc. After an engineering quality accident occurs, the relevant personnel at the accident site should immediately report to the person in charge of the engineering construction unit; after receiving the report, the person in charge of the engineering construction unit should report to the housing and urban-rural construction administrative department of the people's government at or above the county level where the accident occurred within 1 hour and the person in charge of the engineering construction unit. Relevant department reports. In the event of an emergency, relevant personnel at the accident site may report directly to the housing and urban-rural development department of the people's government at or above the county level where the accident occurred.
The incident report should include the following: (1) The time and place of the accident, the name of the project, and the names of the units participating in the project; (2) The brief history of the accident, the number of casualties (including those who are missing) and the preliminary estimated direct economic losses; (3) The initial cause of the accident; (4) The measures taken after the accident and the accident control situation; (5) Incident reporting unit, contact person and contact information; (6) Other situations that should be reported. If new circumstances arise after the accident is reported, and the number of casualties changes within 30 days from the date of the accident, a supplementary report must be made in a timely manner.
3.Accident investigation
An investigation team will be formed headed by the project technical leader, and the participants should be professional technicians, quality inspectors and experienced technical workers directly related to the accident. The investigation content includes on-site investigation and data collection.
4.Write a quality accident investigation report
The accident investigation report shall include the following contents: (1) Overview of the accident project and each participating unit; (2) How the accident occurred and the rescue situation; (3) Casualties and direct economic losses caused by the accident; (4) Quality inspection reports and technical analysis reports related to the accident project; (5) The cause of the accident and the nature of the accident; (6) Identification of accident liability and suggestions for handling those responsible for the accident; (7) Accident prevention and rectification measures. The accident investigation report shall be accompanied by relevant evidence materials. Members of the accident investigation team shall sign the accident investigation report.
5. Accident handling report
After the accident is handled, a complete accident handling report should be submitted, which includes: original data and test data of the accident investigation; accident cause analysis and demonstration; accident handling basis; accident handling plan, methods and technical measures; inspection and re-inspection records; accident Handling conclusion; incident handling attachments (including quality incident report, investigation report, quality incident handling plan, quality incident handling implementation record, inspection record, acceptance data, etc.).
5. Quality incident handling methods
1. Rework processing When project quality defects cannot meet the specified quality standard requirements after repair, or there is no possibility of remediation, rework must be performed. 2.Repair processing Although the quality of some parts of the project does not meet the stipulated specifications, standards or design requirements, and there are certain defects, but after repair, it can reach the required quality standards without affecting the functional or appearance requirements, repair can be carried out. . 3. Restricted use When the quality defects of the project are dealt with according to the rework method, and it cannot be guaranteed to meet the specified use requirements and safety requirements, and it is impossible to rework the work, it can be dealt with according to the restricted use. 4. No processing Although the quality does not meet the requirements, the situation is not serious and has little impact on the use and safety of the project. After analysis, demonstration and approval by the design unit, no special treatment is required. 5. Scrap disposal When the above measures are taken and the specified requirements or standards are still not met, the product must be scrapped.
2H320080 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction safety management
2H320081 Construction site occupational health and safety management requirements
1. Key points for the implementation of occupational health and safety management
2. The project department should establish an occupational health and safety management organization and a responsibility system. The project manager is the first person responsible for occupational health and safety management. The construction team leader and team leader are managers and are responsible for the occupational health and safety management of the construction team and team. For construction projects under general contracting and subcontracting, the general contracting unit shall be responsible for the occupational health management of the construction site and inspect the prevention and control measures of occupational disease hazards of subcontracting units. 3. The project department should be equipped with full-time occupational health and safety management personnel according to the construction scale. Construction projects and decoration projects should be equipped according to the building area; civil engineering, line pipes, and equipment installation should be equipped according to the total cost; subcontracting units should be equipped with full-time or part-time personnel according to the number of workers. Occupational health managers.
2. Key points for construction safety implementation of the project department
1. Implement safety production management at the construction site in accordance with the enterprise's production safety management system
1) Formulate project safety management goals, establish a safety production organization and responsibility system, clarify safety production management responsibilities, and implement responsibility assessment; 2) Allocate expenses, employees, facilities, equipment, labor protection supplies and related testing equipment that meet the requirements for safe production and civilized construction; 3) Prepare safety technical measures, plans and emergency plans; 4) Implement production safety measures during the construction process, organize safety inspections, and rectify potential safety hazards; 5) Organize the construction site appearance, working environment and living facilities to meet safety and civilized standards; 6) Determine the person responsible for fire safety, formulate fire safety management systems and operating procedures for the use of fire, electricity, and flammable and explosive materials, set up fire escapes, fire water sources, equip fire protection facilities and fire extinguishing equipment, and install them at the construction site Set up obvious signs at the entrance; 7) Organize emergency rescue and rescue operations; 8) Make necessary records of construction safety production management activities and save appropriate information.
2. Establish and improve the safety production responsibility system
1) The project manager should be the first person responsible for safety production in the engineering project, and should be responsible for decomposing and implementing safety production responsibilities, implementing assessment rewards and punishments, and achieving project safety management goals; 2) The project manager, technical director and full-time safety production management personnel of the project general contracting unit, professional contracting and labor subcontracting units shall form a safety management organization and shall coordinate and manage on-site safety production. The project manager shall arrive at the site as required. Lead the team and direct production; 3) The general contracting unit, professional contracting unit and labor subcontracting unit shall be equipped with full-time safety production management personnel for the project in accordance with regulations, who shall be responsible for the daily management of safety production within their respective management scopes at the construction site; 4) Other managers of the engineering project department should assume the safety production responsibilities within the management scope of their positions; 5) Subcontracting units should obey the management of the general contracting unit and implement the safety production requirements of the general contracting project department; 6) The construction team should implement safety production requirements during the operation; workers should strictly abide by safe operating procedures and should avoid harming themselves, others and being harmed by others.
3. Safety production responsibilities of various personnel in the project department
(1) The full-time safety production management personnel of the project should be on duty as required and should perform the following main safety production responsibilities: 1) Inspections should be carried out on the project safety production management, and violations of command, illegal operations and violations of labor discipline should be prevented and dealt with, and records should be kept; 2) Sub-projects with greater risks should be supervised and recorded according to the plan; 3) Project safety production management files should be established, and project safety production status should be reported to the enterprise regularly. (2) The chief engineer of the project shall be technically responsible for the safety production of this project. (3) Construction workers have direct leadership responsibility for the safety production of the labor team (or team) under their jurisdiction. (4) The safety responsibilities of the operation team leader include: explaining safety technical measures to workers, organizing the implementation of safety technical measures; inspecting and accepting safety protection devices and facilities on the project site; training workers on safe operating procedures to improve the safety of workers Awareness to avoid potential safety hazards; when a major safety accident occurs, organizations should be organized to protect the site, take measures to reduce losses, report immediately and participate in accident investigation and handling. (5) The safety responsibilities of the team leader include: when arranging construction and production tasks, explain the safety measures to the workers of this type of work; strictly implement the safety technical operating procedures of this type of work, and refuse illegal instructions; before the operation, deal with the machinery and tools used in this operation, Conduct safety inspections on equipment, protective equipment and the working environment to eliminate safety hazards, check whether safety signs are set up in accordance with regulations, and whether the marking methods and content are correct and complete; organize teams to carry out safety activities and hold pre-job safety production meetings; conduct weekly safety reviews . (6) The safety responsibilities of operating workers include: conscientiously studying and strictly implementing safety technical operating procedures, and not operating in violation of regulations; consciously abiding by safety production rules and regulations, implementing safety technical briefings and relevant safety production regulations; obeying the guidance of safety supervisors, and actively participating in Safe activities; take good care of safety facilities; use protective equipment correctly; provide opinions on unsafe operations and refuse illegal instructions. Dispatched workers have the same rights and obligations for safe production as employees of the unit.
3. Safety technical disclosure system
1. Safety technical disclosure system (4) Before the implementation of the special construction plan, the compiler or project technical leader should make a briefing to the construction site management personnel. Construction site managers should provide safety briefings to workers, which should be signed and confirmed by both parties and the project's full-time safety production management personnel. 2. Safety technical disclosure records (1) After the foreman (construction worker) makes a written disclosure, he should keep the safety technical disclosure record and the signatures of all participants in the disclosure. (2) The safety officer is responsible for organizing and filing the disclosure records. The person making the disclosure and the safety officer should check the implementation of the safety technical disclosure. If any violation of safety regulations is found, corrective measures should be taken immediately. The safety technical disclosure record should be made in triplicate and kept by the foreman, construction team and safety officer respectively. 3. Main contents of security technical briefing (1) Overview of the project and sub-items; (2) The construction operation characteristics and dangerous points of this construction project; (3) Specific preventive measures for hazards; (4) Operating procedures and precautions that should be followed during operations; (5) Measures to be taken when potential accident hazards are discovered; (6) Evacuation, emergency and first aid measures to be taken after an accident.
4. Safety inspection
2. Accident hazards (1) Potential safety accidents (hereinafter referred to as hidden accidents) refer to the possibility that production and business units violate production safety laws, regulations, rules, standards, procedures and safety production management systems, or may exist in production and business activities due to other factors. The dangerous state of objects, unsafe behaviors of people and management deficiencies that led to the accident. (2) Accident hazards are divided into general accident hazards and major accident hazards. General accident hazards refer to hazards and hazards that are relatively difficult to rectify and can be rectified and eliminated immediately after discovery. Major accident hazards refer to hazards and hazards that are difficult to rectify and require a complete or partial shutdown of production and operations, and rectification and management must take a certain period of time to eliminate hazards, or hazards that are difficult to eliminate by the production and operation unit itself due to the influence of external factors. (3) The project leader of the construction unit should organize and formulate safety construction measures based on the characteristics of the project to eliminate potential safety accidents discovered during inspections. Safety construction measures are special measures for construction safety. Each construction site and each different operating environment are different. This requires the project leader to organize relevant personnel to formulate construction measures for the project according to the characteristics of the project to ensure safe construction, and For potential safety accidents that may arise at any time during the construction process, corresponding measures should be taken promptly to resolve them and eliminate potential safety accidents.
6. Fire safety inspection
1. Inspection method During the construction process, the person in charge of fire safety at the construction site should regularly organize fire safety managers to inspect the fire safety at the construction site. 2. Check the content Fire safety inspection should include the following main contents: (1) Whether the management of combustibles and flammable and explosive dangerous goods is implemented; (2) Whether fire prevention measures for hot work are implemented; (3) Whether there are any illegal operations in the use of fire, electricity, and gas, and whether the operating procedures for electric, gas welding, and thermal insulation and waterproof construction are followed; (4) Whether the temporary fire protection facilities are intact and effective; (5) Whether temporary fire lanes and temporary evacuation facilities are smooth.
2H320082 Construction site hazard source identification
1. Scope of project hazard source identification
2. Danger sources and accident risks (1) Danger source refers to a source, state, behavior or combination that may lead to personal injury or property damage. (2) Hazard sources should consist of three elements: potential hazards, existing conditions and triggering factors.
2. Types of hazard sources
2. Hazard source classification (1) The classification of work at heights is based on the height of four sections and whether there are objective risk factors that directly cause falls.
Special work at heights includes the following categories:
Operation height H (m)
Working at height level
2≤h≤5
Level 1
5<h≤15
Level 2
15<h≤30
Level three
h>30
Special grade
1) Working at high altitudes with gusts of level 6 or above is called strong wind high altitude operations. 2) Working at high altitudes in high or low temperature environments is called high altitude operations at different temperatures. 3) High-altitude operations during snowfall are called high-altitude operations in snowy weather. 4) High-altitude operations performed during rainfall are called high-altitude operations on rainy days. 5) High-altitude operations performed outdoors when artificial lighting is completely used are called night-time high-altitude operations. 6) Work at heights near or in contact with live objects is called work at high places with electricity. 7) Working at heights without a foothold or a solid footing is called suspended work at heights. 8) High-altitude operations to rescue sudden disasters are called rescue high-altitude operations.
For example: Level 3 snowy altitude operations refer to operations at altitudes between 15m and 30m under snowy weather conditions.
4. Main types and causes of major construction safety hazards (1) Classification of major construction safety hazard sources 1) Major hazard sources in construction sites Major hazard sources that exist in the construction of divisions, sub-items (processes), and the operation of construction equipment: scaffolding (including floor frames, cantilever frames, climbing frames, etc.), foundation pits, unloading platforms, supports, and lifting Installation and operation of tower cranes, material hoists, and construction elevators, instability of local structural projects or temporary buildings (work sheds, walls, etc.), resulting in collapse or collapse accidents; working surfaces with a height greater than 2m (including high-altitude, hole, and edge operations) Accidents such as people stepping out of the air, slipping, and instability due to unqualified or unavailable safety protection facilities and personnel not wearing protective ropes (belts); accidents such as stacking and moving (hoisting) of engineering materials, components, and equipment Accidents such as falling from high altitude, stacking and scattering, and hitting people; improper temporary storage or use of flammable and explosive chemicals for construction, and inadequate protection, resulting in fires or poisoning accidents; unsanitary food on the construction site, resulting in collective poisoning or disease. "Hazardous major projects" in the "Regulations on the Safety Management of Partial Projects with Greater Danger" (Order No. 37 of the Ministry of Housing and Urban-Rural Development) are all hazardous factors that are major hazard sources in construction sites. 2) Major hazard sources at the construction site and surrounding areas (2) Main hazards of major construction safety hazards Major construction safety hazards mainly include the following types: collapse, collapse, falling from height, fire, explosion, etc. The possible hazards (accidents) are greater.
3. Identification of hazard sources
3. Basic methods for identifying hazard sources (4) There are dozens of hazard source identification methods that have been developed at home and abroad, such as safety checklist, pre-hazard analysis, hazard and operability research, fault type and impact analysis, event tree analysis, and fault tree analysis. , LEC method, storage capacity comparison method, etc. The "safety checklist" method is often used to identify project construction hazards. 4. Key points for implementing hazard source identification (2) Compiling a list of hazard sources helps identify hazard sources and take timely measures to reduce the occurrence of accidents. The checklist is compiled during the initial stages of the project. The content of the list generally includes: the name, nature, risk assessment and possible consequences of the hazard source, and the countermeasures or measures that need to be taken.
2H320083 Construction safety technical measures
1. Formulation of construction safety technical measures
(2) Key points for implementation
1. Construction safety management plan (2) The safety management plan shall include the following contents: 1) Determine important project hazard sources and formulate project occupational health and safety management objectives; 2) Establish a project safety management organization with a management level and clarify responsibilities; 3) Allocate resources in occupational health and safety according to project characteristics; 4) Establish a targeted safety production management system and employee safety education and training system; 5) Develop corresponding safety technical measures for important project hazard sources; prepare plans for special safety technical measures for sub-projects (sub-projects) and special types of work with greater risks; 6) Develop corresponding seasonal safety construction measures according to seasonal and climate changes; 7) Establish an on-site safety inspection system and make corresponding provisions for the handling of safety accidents.
2. Layout of construction site and living area The following temporary buildings and temporary facilities should be included in the general layout of the construction site: (1) Entrances, exits, walls and enclosures of the construction site. (2) Temporary roads within the venue. (3) The direction and height of the laying or erection of water supply pipe networks or pipelines and distribution lines. (4) Construction site office rooms, dormitories, generator rooms, power transformation and distribution rooms, combustible material warehouses, flammable and explosive dangerous goods warehouses, combustible material storage yards and their processing yards, fixed hot work sites, etc. (5) Temporary fire lanes, fire rescue sites and fire water sources.
3. Construction safety technical measures fees (1) Manage according to the principle of “enterprise extraction, government supervision, ensuring needs, and standardizing use”. (2) Construction companies shall make provision based on the cost of construction and installation projects. Electric power engineering and urban rail transit engineering are 2.0%. Municipal public works, smelting projects, mechanical and electrical installation projects, chemical and petroleum projects, port and waterway projects, highway projects, and communication projects are 1.5%. (3) The safety fees extracted by the construction project construction enterprise shall be included in the project cost and shall not be deleted during bidding and shall be included in off-bid management. (4) The general contractor shall pay the safety fees directly to the subcontracting units in proportion and supervise their use, and the subcontracting units shall not make repeated withdrawals.
2. Safety technical measures for hoisting operations
(2) Key points for lifting implementation
2.Technical preparation (1) Special safety plans should be prepared for lifting and hoisting operations that are highly dangerous sub-projects. (2) Before hoisting large equipment, learn from the local meteorological department about the weather conditions during hoisting, apply for a hoisting operation permit, conduct joint inspections, and conduct signal transmission drills for personnel participating in hoisting operations.
3. Operational requirements (1) During the lifting process of the mobile crane, changes in the following parts should be monitored: 1) The stress on the lifting points and slings; 2) Lifting winches and luffing winches; 3) Super lift system working area; 4) Instrument display changes of the main parameters of the crane hoisting (boom length, working radius, elevation angle, load and load rate, etc.) 5) Hoisting safety distance; 6) Crane levelness and foundation changes, etc. (2) The entire process of moving, hoisting, stopping, and installing hoisted objects should be directed using semaphore or universal hand gesture signals. Do not start if the signal is unclear. Wireless communication equipment (such as walkie-talkies) should be used to coordinate and communicate with each other. (3) Installed structural components shall not be used as stress support points or any holes may be drilled into the components without approval from the relevant design and technical departments. Construction loads exceeding the design load shall not be stacked on it. (4) After the equipment is in place, it should be fixed in time. The lifting rigging can be removed only after confirmation and approval from the lifting director. (5) After the hoisting is completed, the site should be cleaned up in time.
3. Safety management of main construction machinery and temporary electricity use
2. Inspection and acceptance standards and applicable procedures for temporary electricity use (1) According to the relevant national standards, specifications and the actual load conditions of the construction site, prepare the "temporary power construction organization design" at the construction site, which shall be approved by the chief engineer of the construction company. After being submitted to the supervisor and owner for approval, the owner shall be assisted to submit the design to the local electricity industry Department declares electricity consumption plan. (2) Procurement and construction of equipment and materials in accordance with the plan approved by the electrical industry department and the "Technical Specifications for Safety of Temporary Electricity Use at Construction Sites" JGJ 46-2005; inspect and accept temporary electricity construction projects, and report to the electrical industry department Provide relevant information and apply for power transmission; the electrical industry department will conduct inspection, acceptance and testing, and power can only be used after agreeing to power transmission. (3) Main contents of temporary power inspection and acceptance Temporary electrical projects must be constructed by certified electricians. The inspection contents include: grounding and lightning protection, power distribution room and self-contained power supply, various distribution boxes and switch boxes, distribution lines, transformers, electrical equipment installation, electrical equipment debugging, ground resistance test records, etc. (4) Regular inspection of temporary power projects Inspections should be carried out by division and sub-project. Unsafe factors must be dealt with in a timely manner and re-inspection and acceptance procedures must be performed.
2H320084 Construction safety emergency plan
1. Emergency plan for safety accidents in mechanical and electrical engineering construction
(1) Regulations and standards
2. The "Construction Project Safety Production Management Regulations" provide for emergency rescue: (2) The construction unit shall, based on the characteristics and scope of the construction project, monitor the parts and links at the construction site that are prone to major accidents, and formulate an emergency rescue plan for production safety accidents at the construction site. In the case of general construction contracting, the general contractor shall organize and compile an emergency rescue plan for production safety accidents in construction projects. The general contractor and subcontracting units shall establish emergency rescue organizations or equip emergency rescue personnel, rescue equipment, equipment and organize drills regularly. 4. The "Measures for the Management of Emergency Plans for Work Safety Accidents" (former Order No. 88 of the State Administration of Work Safety) stipulates that the emergency plans of production and business units are divided into: comprehensive emergency plans, special emergency plans, and on-site disposal plans.
(2) Key points for implementation
1. Emergency plan system The emergency plan system of production and business units mainly consists of comprehensive emergency plans, special emergency plans and on-site disposal plans. The production and operation unit shall determine the emergency plan system based on the unit's organizational management system, production scale, nature of hazard sources and possible accident types, and may determine whether to prepare a special emergency plan based on the actual situation of the unit. For small enterprises with a single risk factor, Micro holdings can only write the current Site disposal plan. 2. Emergency rescue plan (1) The emergency plan preparation procedure for production and business units includes six steps: establishment of an emergency plan preparation working group, data collection, risk assessment, emergency capability assessment, emergency plan preparation, and emergency plan review. (2) The comprehensive emergency plan is the general outline of the emergency plan system of the production and business unit. It mainly explains the emergency response work principles of the accident as a whole, including the emergency organizational structure and responsibilities of the production and business unit, emergency plan system, accident risk description, early warning and information report , emergency response, safeguard measures, emergency plan management, etc. (3) Special emergency plans are emergency plans formulated by production and business units in response to a certain type or types of accidents, or for important production facilities, major hazard sources, major activities, etc. The special emergency plan mainly includes accident risk analysis, emergency command organization and responsibilities, disposal procedures and measures, etc. 3. Emergency response plan (1) On-site disposal plans are emergency response measures formulated by production and operation units for specific sites, devices or facilities based on different accident categories. They mainly include accident risk analysis, emergency work responsibilities, emergency response and precautions, etc. Production and business units should organize their own on-site workers and safety management professionals to jointly prepare on-site disposal plans based on risk assessments, job operating procedures and risk control measures. (2) The special construction plan of the project department at the construction site should include emergency response measures.
2. Implementation requirements for preventing major hazardous source accidents in electromechanical engineering
(1) Implementation requirements for preventing falling accidents from heights
1. Major sources of danger "Working at heights" and "working at openings and edges" etc. 2. Harmful factors There are no safety technical protection measures; the use of safety nets and seat belts does not meet the requirements; safety technical explanations and safety training are relatively lagging behind. 3. Preventive measures (1) There is a stable foothold; protective facilities such as guardrails, covers, safety nets, and protective doors must be provided, and they must be complete, reliable, and effective, and must be clearly marked before use after acceptance. (2) Prepare special construction plans for dangerous and major projects and implement the "Safety Management Regulations for Partial Projects with Greater Danger".
(2) Implementation requirements for preventing electric shock accidents
1. Major sources of danger Temporary power lines, distribution boxes, switch boxes, equipment, etc. 2. Harmful factors Three-level power distribution and two-level protection are not achieved; electrical protective equipment is not provided; wire laying does not meet requirements; temporary power management is chaotic; electricians operate without licenses, etc. 3. Preventive measures (1) Temporary electricity use at construction sites must comply with the requirements of the "Technical Specifications for Safety of Temporary Electricity Use at Construction Sites" JGJ 46-2005; (2) Protective equipment should be worn correctly when performing electrical work; (3) When the distance between the outer edge of the project and the external high-voltage wires is less than the safe distance, protective barriers, fences or protective nets must be added. Construction machinery and equipment and steel pipe scaffolding are strictly prohibited from touching high-voltage wires. (4) All kinds of electromechanical equipment and hand-held power tools must go through leakage switches for effective grounding and zero connection, the double wires of electric welding machines must be in place, and rain and snow awnings must be added to outdoor mechanical equipment; (5) If the various types of wires and cables used are damaged or aged, they must be removed in time and protective measures must be taken; (6) It is prohibited to use lighting equipment that is not connected to zero and the light pole is not insulated.
(3) Implementation requirements for preventing object strike accidents
1. Major sources of danger Falling objects from heights, hammering, etc. 2. Harmful factors Brutal disassembly, failure to set warning signs or dedicated supervision, failure to correctly wear labor protection equipment, etc. 3. Preventive measures (1) Safety helmets, labor protection shoes and other labor protection supplies have passed the acceptance inspection; (2) Hang corresponding warning signs at the entrance and work site of the construction site; (3) The safety department of the project department is responsible for daily inspections, and relevant departments are responsible for supervision of the project construction site.
3. Emergency measures when casualties occur
After a casualty accident occurs at the construction site, the project department should immediately activate the "accident emergency plan". (1) Rescue the injured first and contact the emergency hospital immediately to gain time for rescue. (2) Danger should be eliminated quickly and necessary measures should be taken to prevent further expansion of the accident. (3) Protect the accident site, mark out an isolation area, make isolation signs, and have someone guard the accident site. When it is necessary to move on-site items due to the requirements of rescuing the injured and eliminating dangers, marks and written records should be made, and relevant evidence should be properly kept; the location, color, shape, and physical and chemical properties of various items on-site should be kept as close to the accident as possible. The original state at the end; all possible measures must be taken to prevent damage by man-made or natural factors. According to the provisions of the "Production Safety Law of the People's Republic of China", enterprises should conscientiously fulfill their main responsibilities for production safety and achieve "four in place", that is, safety investment in place, safety training in place, basic management in place, and emergency rescue in place.
2H320085 Construction site safety accident handling
1. Classification of production safety accidents
1. Production safety accidents According to the casualties or direct economic losses caused by production safety accidents, production safety accidents are generally divided into four levels: particularly serious accidents, major accidents, major accidents, and general accidents. 2. Special equipment accidents According to the casualties or direct economic losses caused by special equipment accidents, special equipment accidents are generally divided into four levels: particularly major accidents, major accidents, major accidents, and general accidents.
2. Accident report
1. Incident reporting procedures (1) After an accident occurs, the relevant personnel at the accident site should immediately report to the person in charge of the unit; after receiving the report, the person in charge of the unit should report to the work safety supervision and management department of the people's government at or above the county level at the place where the accident occurred and the responsible person within 1 hour. Reports from relevant departments responsible for safety production supervision and management. (2) In the event of an emergency, relevant personnel at the accident site may report directly to the production safety supervision and management department of the people's government at or above the county level where the accident occurred and the relevant departments responsible for production safety supervision and management. 2. Contents of the accident report: (1) Overview of the unit where the accident occurred; (2) The time, place and construction site conditions of the accident; (3) Brief history of the accident; (4) The number of casualties that the accident has caused or may cause (including those who are missing) and the preliminary estimated direct economic losses; (5) Measures already taken; (6) Other situations that should be reported;
3. Accident investigation
Particularly serious accidents shall be investigated by accident investigation teams organized by the State Council or relevant departments authorized by the State Council; major accidents, major accidents, and general accidents shall be investigated by the provincial, municipal, and county-level people's governments respectively; general accidents that do not cause casualties shall be investigated. The people's government at the county level may also entrust the unit where the accident occurred to organize an investigation team to conduct an investigation.
2H320090 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction site management
2H320091 Communication and coordination
1. Internal communication and coordination
(2) Main contents of internal communication and coordination
1. Coordination of construction schedule arrangements (1) The link of progress plan coordination It includes a cycle of four links: schedule planning, organization and implementation, plan inspection, and plan adjustment. (2) Contents of progress plan coordination Coordination of schedules, including various professional construction activities. The construction schedule is being prepared and implemented ①The overlapping relationship between various majors and the schedule arrangement of the interfaces ②Coordination and cooperation during plan implementation ③The timing of entry of equipment and materials, etc. All should be coordinated and communicated internally to achieve efficiency and order and ensure the achievement of construction progress goals. 2. Coordination of construction production resource allocation ①Rational allocation of human resources ② Orderly supply of construction equipment and materials ③Optimal configuration of construction machinery and tools ④Rational allocation of funds, etc. 3. Coordination of project quality management Including ① supervision and inspection of project quality; ②Regular reporting of quality status and rewards and punishments; ③Communication and coordination when there are objections to quality standards; ④Coordination of quality concession processing and rework; ⑤ Organize on-site visits to model projects and on-site evaluations of problem projects; ⑥Communication and coordination of quality process. 4. Coordination of construction safety and health and environmental management Including ① establishment of safety responsibility system and division of labor; ②Regular reporting of management status and rewards and punishments; ③Safety training, safety education and assessment; ④Investigation and punishment of illegal operations; ⑤ Supervision and rectification of hidden dangers; ⑥Green construction education, physical examination, etc. 5. Handover and coordination at the construction site (1) Handover and coordination between mechanical and electrical, civil engineering and decoration majors. Including reserved embedment, reserved holes, equipment foundation, the position and form of electromechanical terminal devices and decorative interfaces, working surface exchange and cross-working, the use of water and power, the use of scaffolding, etc. (2) Coordination of professional construction sequence and construction technology. Including mechanical and electrical integrated pipeline layout, process flow, construction procedures, etc. (3) Technical coordination. Including design requirements, connection of various professional technologies, linkage function requirements, equipment parameter verification, implementation of system joint debugging functions, etc. 6. Coordination of engineering data Mechanical and electrical engineering data are organized according to professional projects, sub-projects, and branch projects (unit projects), and summarized into files. Engineering data from different majors must be coordinated to form overall mechanical and electrical engineering data.
(3) Main methods of internal communication and coordination
Coordination meetings are held regularly; irregular department meetings or professional meetings and symposiums are held; performance assessment of work tasks and objectives is carried out, and work completion status is reported. report system; use inspections to conduct in-depth exchanges and communications with the team at any time; regularly report on-site information; internally visit typical cases and conduct evaluations; use construction site publicity tools to communicate with employees, etc.
(4) Forms and measures of internal coordination and management
1. Coordinated management form (1) Routine management coordination meeting. Mainly report and communicate management deviations discovered after routine inspections, and discuss measures to correct them to avoid similar situations from happening again. (2) Establish a coordination and dispatch room or set up a dispatcher. It mainly implements real-time scheduling and coordination for the execution layer of the project (including operators) in terms of production resource requirements, operation process arrangements, and plan progress adjustment during construction. (3) Instructions from the project manager or other authorized leaders. Mainly manage and coordinate emergencies and urgent matters in the form of instructions. 2. Measures for internal coordination and management (1) Institutional measures. The project department has sound rules and regulations, clear responsibilities and obligations, so that coordinated management can be followed. If the responsibilities of various personnel and organizations at all levels are clear, the coordinated implementation can be implemented in place. (2) Educational measures. Make all employees of the project department understand that the management and coordination at work are based on the overall interests and may cause damage to local interests or the interests of a small number of people, and they must also obey the instructions of coordination and management. (3) Economic measures. Those who benefit from coordinated management must be charged fees in accordance with regulations, and those who suffer losses must be given appropriate compensation.
2. External communication and coordination
(1) Main objects of external communication and coordination
1. Units with direct or indirect contractual relationships Owners (construction units, management units), supervision units, etc., material and equipment supply units, construction machinery rental units, etc. 2. Units with negotiation records Design units, civil engineering units, other installation project contracting units, water supply units, and power supply units. 3. Engineering supervision and inspection unit Safety supervision, quality supervision, special inspection, fire protection, environmental protection, customs (if there are imported equipment and materials), labor and taxation and other units. 4. Entrusted inspection, testing and testing units Units for testing of various types of electromechanical materials and equipment, lightning protection and grounding testing, fire testing, water quality testing, air testing, energy saving testing, etc. 5. Units related to project resident life Residents (villagers), public security, medical, electric power and other units.
(2) Main contents of external communication and coordination
1. Communication and coordination with construction units Including on-site temporary facilities; docking of technical quality standards, transfer procedures of technical documents; negotiation and coordination of the comprehensive progress of the project; arrangement of the owner's funds and use of the construction party's funds; operating procedures for the handover and acceptance of equipment and materials provided by the owner; Equipment installation quality, determination of major equipment installation plans; contract changes, claims, visas; emergency handling of on-site emergencies. 4. Communication and coordination with equipment and material suppliers Including delivery sequence and delivery date; confirmation of compliance with technical standards, technical parameters and product requirements; bulk material ordering prices; equipment or material quality; relevant technical documents, factory acceptance data; communication of new equipment and new processes, on-site technology Guidance etc. 5. Communication and coordination with civil engineering units Including: the balance of comprehensive construction progress and the connection and cooperation of progress; negotiation and cooperation of cross construction; the mutual use and coordination of hoisting and transportation machinery, turnover materials, etc.; the mutual cooperation of important equipment foundations, embedded parts, and reserved holes for hoisting. and coordination; feedback on civil construction quality issues and negotiation of handling opinions; acceptance and handover when civil engineering projects are delivered and installed.
2H320092 Subcontracting management
1. The project department’s requirements for subcontracting team management
1. The general contractor shall be responsible for the construction unit in accordance with the provisions of the general contract. 2. Assessment and management of subcontracting units The general contractor shall assess and manage subcontracting units from aspects such as qualifications, technical equipment, technical management personnel qualifications, and contract performance capabilities, and determine subcontracting units that meet the project requirements. 3. Strengthen the whole-process management of subcontracting teams. The engineering project department of the general contractor should strengthen the entire process management of the subcontracting team as required. A subcontract cannot relieve the general contractor of any obligations and responsibilities. Any breach of contract or negligence by the subcontractor will be regarded as a breach of contract by the owner. Therefore, the general contracting unit must pay attention to and assign dedicated personnel to be responsible for the management of subcontractors to ensure the performance of subcontracts and general contracting contracts. 4. The project shall not be subcontracted again.
2. Principles and key points of the project department’s management of subcontracting teams
Principles of management: Subcontractors are responsible to the general contractor. All external communications related to project construction activities, such as contact with the contractor, design, supervision, supervision and inspection agencies, etc., shall be through the general contractor unless authorized and agreed by the general contractor. The package is carried out. The focus of management: training and certification of special operations personnel, construction schedule arrangement, quality and safety supervision and assessment, civilized construction management, distribution of supply materials, progress payment review and payment, completion acceptance assessment, completion settlement preparation and project data transfer, as well as major quality accidents and Handling of major engineering safety accidents.
3. Management system and supervision and assessment
1. Subcontracting management system The general contractor should establish a subcontracting management system and clarify management responsibilities, management processes, management content and various regulations and requirements. The contents of the management system include project progress management, quality management, safety management, material supply, personnel management, process visa, construction management, etc. 2. Subcontracting management supervision and assessment During the project implementation process, the general contracting unit shall supervise and assess the subcontracting units by listening to the work reports of the subcontracting units, joint project supervision and inspection, work contact sheets, coordination meetings, comprehensive assessment and evaluation, etc.
4. The project department’s coordination and management of the subcontracting team
1. Project subcontracting unit (2) Principles of coordinated management. The subcontractor is responsible to the general contractor. All external communications related to project construction activities, such as contact with the contracting unit, design, supervision, supervision and inspection agencies, etc., shall be conducted through the general contractor unless authorized and agreed by the general contractor. . (3) Focus on coordination and management. It includes construction schedule arrangement, coordination of construction issues, distribution of supply materials, formulation of quality and safety systems, allocation of funds, layout of temporary facilities, completion acceptance assessment, preparation of completion settlement and handover of project data, etc. There are also handling of major quality accidents and major engineering safety accidents. 2. Labor subcontracting unit (2) Principles of coordinated management. The subcontracting unit shall be responsible to the general contractor unit and shall not cause any external liability related to construction activities. Any communication and transmission, even the external communication and transmission related to work quality and work safety must be implemented after the approval of the general contractor and visa confirmation. (3) Focus on coordination and management. Arrangement of work plan, adjustment of work surface, supply of construction materials, implementation of quality management system and safety management system, payment of labor costs, acceptance of sub-projects and formation of materials and arrangement of living facilities.
5. The project department’s form of coordination and management of the subcontracting team
1. Hold regular coordination meetings. 2. Coordinate and handle matters in real time. 3. Thematic consultations are properly handled.
2H320093 On-site green construction measures
1. Green construction principles
"Four Festivals and One Environmental Protection" Energy saving, material saving, water saving, land saving and environmental protection.
2. Green construction responsibilities
1. Construction unit
(1) When preparing project budget estimates and bidding documents, the requirements for green construction should be clarified, and condition guarantees including site, environment, construction period, funds, etc. should be provided. (2) Provide the construction unit with design documents, product requirements and other relevant information for green construction of construction projects to ensure the authenticity and completeness of the information. (3) Establish a coordination mechanism for green construction of engineering projects:
4. Construction unit
(1) The construction unit is the main implementation body of green construction of construction projects and organizes the comprehensive implementation of green construction. (2) The general contractor has overall responsibility for green construction. (3) The general contractor shall implement and manage the green construction of the professional contractor, and the professional contractor shall be responsible for the green construction within the project contracting scope. (4) The construction unit should establish a green construction management system with the project manager as the first responsible person, formulate a green construction management system, be responsible for the organization and implementation of green construction, conduct green construction education and training, and regularly carry out self-inspections, joint inspections and evaluations. (5) Before formulating the green construction organization design, green construction plan or green construction special plan, the influencing factors of green construction should be analyzed, and implementation countermeasures and green construction evaluation plan should be formulated accordingly.
3. Key points of green construction
Green construction generally consists of six aspects: green construction management, environmental protection, material conservation and material resource utilization, water conservation and water resource utilization, energy conservation and energy utilization, land conservation and construction land protection. (1) Green construction management Green construction management includes five aspects: organizational management, planning management, implementation management, evaluation management, and personnel safety and health management.
(2) Key points of environmental protection technologies
1. Dust control
(1) When transporting earthwork, garbage, equipment, construction materials, etc., roads should not be polluted. Vehicles transporting materials that are prone to scattering, flying, or leaking should be sealed tightly. Car wash facilities should be installed at the exit of the construction site to keep vehicles leaving the site clean. (2) Ground hardening of on-site roads, processing areas, and material storage areas should be carried out in a timely manner. (3) During the earthmoving operation stage, measures such as watering and covering shall be adopted to ensure that the visual dust height in the operation area is less than 1.5m and does not spread outside the site. (4) Covering measures should be taken for stacked materials that easily generate dust; powdered materials should be stored in a closed manner. (7) Waste must not be burned at the construction site. (8) Prefabrication of pipelines and steel structures should be carried out in closed workshops by sandblasting and rust removal.
2.Noise and vibration control
(1) Conduct real-time monitoring and control of noise at the construction site boundary. On-site noise emissions shall not exceed the national standard "Environmental Noise Emission Standard for Construction Site Boundaries" GB 12523-2011. (2) Try to use low-noise and low-vibration machinery and take sound and vibration isolation measures.
3.Light pollution control
(1) Shielding measures should be taken during night welding operations to prevent welding arc light from leaking out. (2) The illumination angle of large lighting lamps should be controlled to prevent the leakage of strong light.
4. Water pollution control
(1) Corresponding treatment facilities should be set up at the construction site for different sewage. (2) Sewage discharge should be entrusted to a qualified unit to conduct wastewater quality testing and provide corresponding sewage testing reports. (3) Protect the groundwater environment. Adopt slope support technology with good water isolation performance. (4) For storage areas of chemicals and other toxic materials and oils, there should be strict water-proof layer design, and leakage collection and treatment should be done well.
5.Soil protection
(1) Protect the surface environment and prevent soil erosion and loss. Bare soil caused by construction should be covered in time. (2) There will be no blockage, leakage, overflow, etc. in sewage treatment facilities. (3) Anti-corrosion and insulation paint, insulating grease and dust-producing materials should be properly kept, and should be cleaned up in time if they cause pollution to the on-site ground. (4) Toxic and hazardous wastes should be recycled and handed over to qualified units for processing, and should not be transported as construction waste. (5) Vegetation damaged by construction activities should be restored after construction.
6. Construction waste control
(1) Formulate a construction waste reduction plan. (2) Strengthen the recycling and reuse of construction waste and strive to achieve a reuse and recycling rate of 30%. Construction waste such as gravel and earthwork should be used as foundation and roadbed backfill materials. (3) Closed garbage containers should be installed in the living area of the construction site, and domestic garbage at the construction site should be bagged and removed in a timely manner.
7. Underground facilities, cultural relics and resource protection
4. Green construction requirements
(2) Professional requirements 1. The embedding and reservation of pipelines and the installation of electromechanical terminal devices should be coordinated with civil engineering and decoration, and the processes should be reasonable. 2. Rust removal and anti-corrosion should be completed in the factory, and non-polluting and weather-resistant materials should be used for on-site painting. 3. Factory prefabrication is preferred for pipe processing, and mechanical connection should be used for pipe connections. 4. Heating radiator fin assembly should be completed in the factory. 5. Oil pollution generated by equipment installation should be cleaned up immediately. 6. Pipeline testing and flushing water should be discharged in an organized manner and reused after treatment. 7. The cutting of prefabricated air ducts should be carried out in the order of large-diameter pipes first, then small pipes, long materials first, and short materials last. 8. For concealed laying of wire conduits, the cables should be the shortest, energy-saving wires, cables and lamps should be selected, and energy-saving tests should be conducted. 9. Line connections should use welding-free joints and mechanical crimping. 10. When installing an uninterruptible power supply, measures should be taken to prevent leakage of power supply fluid, and used batteries should be recycled.
5. Green construction evaluation
(1) Evaluation system
1. Evaluation stage The green construction evaluation stage should be carried out in the following stages: foundation and foundation engineering, structural engineering, decoration engineering, and mechanical and electrical installation engineering. 2.Evaluation elements Each stage of green construction should be evaluated according to the following five elements: environmental protection, material conservation and material resource utilization, water conservation and water resource utilization, energy conservation and energy utilization, land conservation and land resource protection. 3.Evaluation indicators Each element of green construction consists of several evaluation indicators. The evaluation indicators can be divided into the following three categories according to their importance and difficulty: control items, general items, and priority items. 4. Evaluation level Based on the evaluation of the compliance of control items and the scores of general items and preferred items, the evaluation level of each element of green construction can be divided into the following three levels: unqualified, qualified, and excellent. 5. Frequency of evaluation The number of self-evaluations for green construction projects should not be less than once per month and not less than once per stage.
(2) Evaluation organization, procedures and materials
1. Evaluate the organization (1) The green construction evaluation of unit projects should be organized by the construction unit and participated by the project department and supervision unit. (2) The construction phase evaluation of unit projects should be organized by the supervision unit, with the participation of the construction unit and the project department. (3) The construction batch evaluation of unit projects shall be organized by the construction unit and participated by the construction unit and supervision unit. (4) The project department should organize random inspections of green construction and evaluate the completion of goals. 2. Evaluation procedures (1) The green construction evaluation of unit projects should be carried out first in batches, then in stages, and finally the green construction evaluation of unit projects. (2) Green construction evaluation of unit projects should be applied for before the project is completed. (3) During the evaluation, first listen to the implementation report of the project department, then check the relevant technical and management information, and comprehensively determine the evaluation grade.
2H320094 Civilized construction management on site
1. Construction site access and safety protection measures
2. The fire escape must be built in a circular shape or be sufficient to meet the conditions for fire trucks to return, and the width shall not be less than 3.5m.
2. Construction material management measures
7. Flammable, explosive, toxic and harmful items should be managed by dedicated personnel and stored separately, warning signs should be placed, and the prescribed safe distance should be maintained from living areas and construction areas.
4. Temporary power management measures at construction sites
1. There is a plan and management system for temporary power use. Temporary power use is managed by certified electricians, and electricians’ personal protection is in order. 2. The selection and configuration of the distribution box and control box are reasonable, the box body is clean and the installation is firm. 3. The power distribution system and construction machinery and tools adopt reliable grounding protection, and the distribution box and control box are equipped with two-level leakage protection. 4. The power cord of the electric machine tool is firmly crimped, the insulation is intact, and there is no random pulling, pulling, pressing, or smashing; the primary and secondary wires of the welding machine are fully protected, and the two wires of the welding handle are in place without damage. 5. The erection of distribution lines and the installation and use of lighting equipment and lamps should comply with regulatory requirements.
2H320100 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction cost management
2H320101 Basis for construction cost control
1. Composition of mechanical and electrical engineering cost items
(1) Division according to the components of project costs Construction and installation project fees include: labor fees, material fees, machinery fees, corporate management fees, profits, regulatory fees, and taxes.
(2) Divide by project cost components Construction and installation project fees include: sub-item project fees, measure project fees, other project fees, regulatory fees, and taxes.
2. Construction cost plan of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(4) Methods for preparing construction cost plans 1. Method of preparing cost plan according to cost components 2. Method of preparing cost plan according to project structure 3. Methods of preparing cost plans according to project implementation stages
2H320102 Implementation of construction cost plan
1. Principles of project cost control
Construction cost control should follow ①Cost minimization principle ②Comprehensive cost control principle ③Dynamic control principle ④The principle of combining responsibilities and rights
2. Basis and procedures for project cost control
(1) Basis for cost control 1.Contract documents 2. Cost planning Cost plan is a cost control plan, including cost control objectives and control measures, and is a guiding document for cost control. 3. Progress report 4. Engineering changes and claims information 5. Market information of various resources
(2) Cost control procedures 1. Determine hierarchical goals for project cost management 2. Collect cost data and monitor the cost formation process 3. Find deviations and analyze the reasons 4. Develop countermeasures to correct deviations 5. Adjust and improve cost management methods The selection of construction cost management methods should follow the principles of practicality, flexibility, firmness, and innovation.
3. Contents of project cost control
(1) Taking the project construction cost formation process as the control object 1. Bidding stage 2. Construction preparation stage (1) Formulate scientific, advanced, economical and reasonable construction plans. (2) According to the cost target issued by the enterprise, based on the physical work volume of the sub-projects, combined with the labor quota, material consumption quota and technical organization measures, a detailed and specific cost is prepared under the guidance of the optimized construction plan. Plan and break it down according to the division of labor among departments, construction teams and teams. (3) Preparation and implementation of indirect expenses. Based on the length of project construction time and the number of people participating in the construction, prepare an indirect cost budget and conduct detailed breakdown to provide a basis for future cost control and performance evaluation. 3.Construction stage (1) Strengthen the management of construction task orders and quota requisition orders. (2) Check and analyze the settlement information of construction task orders and quota requisition orders with the construction budget. (3) Collect and organize original monthly cost data, correctly calculate monthly costs, and analyze the difference between monthly budget costs and actual costs. (4) Implement responsibility cost accounting on the basis of monthly cost accounting. (5) Frequently check the performance of foreign economic contracts. If the requirements are not met, compensation should be made to the other party in accordance with the provisions of the contract; for units that lack the ability to perform the contract, decisive measures should be taken to immediately terminate the contract and find another reliable cooperative unit to avoid Affect construction and cause economic losses. (6) Regularly check the cost control status of each responsible department and responsible person. (7) Strengthen information collection during the construction process to provide a strong basis for project visa and later settlement. 4. Completion acceptance stage 5. Project warranty stage
4. Methods of project construction cost control
(1) Control costs with construction drawings. "Determine expenditure based on income" and "live within one's means" (2) Dynamic control of installation project fees: 1. Labor cost control Strengthening labor quota management, improving labor productivity, and reducing labor days consumed by projects are the main methods to control labor expenses. 2. Material cost control ① Strengthen the management of material procurement costs, also check the principle of "separation of quantity and price", and control the quantity difference and price difference. ② Strengthen the management of material consumption, refer to quotas, and control from two aspects: quota issuance and on-site consumption. 4. Control of construction machinery and equipment costs ① Arrange the use according to the type and quantity of machines specified in the construction plan and construction technical measures; ② Improve the utilization rate and intactness rate of construction machinery; ③Strictly control the leasing of construction machinery to external parties; ④Strictly control the entry and exit times of mechanical equipment. (3) Dynamic control of construction period costs In order to obtain the optimal project schedule with the least investment and achieve the best economic benefits for the project, the construction period-cost optimization method is often used. (4) Construction cost deviation control 2. Actual deviation = planned cost – actual cost Plan deviation = budget cost - planned cost Plan deviation reflects the goal to be achieved by cost pre-control beforehand. Actual deviations reflect the actual cost control of construction projects. The actual deviation is positive and the bigger the better. If it is negative, it means there are shortcomings and problems in cost control.
2H320103 Measures to reduce construction costs
1. Mechanical and electrical engineering project assessment costs, project planned costs (target costs), and actual project costs
1. Project assessment cost. The cost assigned by the enterprise to the project department. 2. Project planning cost. The standard cost stipulated in the internal contract signed by the enterprise's legal representative and the project manager. 3. Actual project cost. The total amount of expenses actually incurred during the construction process that can be included in the cost expenditure. 5. Cost reduction rate = (planned cost-actual cost)/planned cost
2. Main measures to reduce construction costs of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Organizational measures to reduce project construction costs
Cost management is a comprehensive enterprise-wide activity that aims to keep project cost consumption to a minimum and achieve effective control of project costs. First, establish a strong engineering project department with experienced and capable project managers. Secondly, the project department should decompose cost responsibilities to various positions and assign them to designated personnel, conduct full-process, all-staff, and dynamic management of costs, forming a cost management responsibility system with clear division of labor and assigned responsibilities to each person. Finally, determine a reasonable work process, improve various rules and regulations on the basis of scientific management, and clarify all aspects of work. This job requires accurate and complete delivery of relevant information.
2. Technical measures to reduce project costs
Technical measures are the guarantee for reducing costs. Advanced technical measures are adopted during the construction process. By combining technical measures with economic measures, technical advantages are used to achieve economic benefits and reduce project costs. (1) Develop advanced and reasonable construction plans and construction techniques In the construction preparation stage, advanced and reasonable construction plans and construction techniques are formulated, the construction site is reasonably arranged, and the level of industrialization of the construction process is improved to shorten the construction period, improve quality, and reduce costs. (2) Actively promote and apply new technologies During the construction process, we actively promote and apply various new technologies, new processes, new materials, and new equipment that reduce consumption and improve work efficiency, effectively reducing project costs. (3) Strengthen technology and quality inspection During the construction process, we will strengthen technology and quality inspection, strictly control quality, improve project quality, eliminate or reduce project rework, reduce waste, and reduce project costs.
3. Economic measures to reduce project costs (1) Control labor costs. (2) Control material costs. (3) Control machinery costs. (4) Control indirect costs and other direct costs. 4. Contractual measures to reduce project costs (1) Choose an appropriate contract structure model. (2) Adopt strict contract terms. (3) Contract control of the entire process.
2H320110 Mechanical and electrical engineering project trial operation management
2H320111 Trial operation conditions
1. Division of trial operation stages of electromechanical engineering projects
According to the trial operation stage, it is divided into three stages: stand-alone trial operation, linkage trial operation, and load trial operation (or feeding trial operation, trial production). The trial operation of the previous stage is the preparation for the trial operation of the latter stage, and the trial operation of the latter stage must be carried out after the completion of the previous stage.
1. Single machine trial operation Single-machine trial operation refers to the no-load operation of a single driving device and machine (unit) installed on site or/and the simulated load trial operation using air, water, etc. instead of the designed working (production) medium. The trial operation of a single machine is part of the construction and installation phase of the project. For a single piece of equipment that is indeed unable to undergo stand-alone trial operation due to medium restrictions or must be operated under load, it can be left for the load trial operation stage after the approval procedures are completed in accordance with regulations. Small and medium-sized single equipment projects can generally only carry out trial operation of a single machine.
2. Linked trial operation Linked trial operation refers to the simulated operation of machines, equipment, pipelines, electrical, automatic control systems, etc. within the scope of trial operation, using water and air as media after each reaches the trial operation standard. Linked trial operation is suitable for large-scale projects of complete equipment systems, such as refining and chemical engineering, mechanical and electrical engineering of continuous units, etc.
3. Load trial operation Load trial operation refers to the trial operation of the entire designated device (or production line) through the production process according to the media (raw materials) specified in the design document, and the end-to-end connection of the designated device to test all its performance except for the production output indicators. and produce qualified products. Load trial operation is the final stage of trial operation, starting from the device receiving raw materials to producing qualified products and ending with the production assessment.
2. Division of responsibilities and participating units for trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
1. Division of responsibilities and participating units for single-machine trial operation (1) The construction unit is responsible for the trial operation of a single machine. The work content includes: responsible for preparing and completing the trial operation plan and submitting it to the construction unit and supervisor for approval; organizing and implementing the trial operation operation, conducting tests, records, and conducting single-machine trial operation acceptance. (2) Participating units: construction units, supervision units, design units, construction units, and manufacturers of important machinery and equipment. For the trial operation of special equipment such as gantry and bridge cranes, the construction unit should invite personnel from the special equipment supervision and management unit to participate.
2. Division of responsibilities and participating units for joint trial operation (1) Organized and directed by the construction unit (owner). The work content of the construction unit includes: being responsible for providing various resources in a timely manner, reviewing and approving the joint trial operation plan; selecting and organizing trial operation operators; and implementing trial operation operations. (2) The work contents of the commissioning unit: prepare the joint trial operation plan and direct the joint trial operation according to the approved joint trial operation plan. (3) Job content of the construction unit: Responsible for monitoring post operations, handling problems arising from machines, equipment, pipelines, electrical, automatic control and other systems during the trial operation and providing technical guidance. (4) Participating units in the joint trial operation: construction units, production units, construction units, commissioning units, general contracting units (if the project implements general contracting), design units, supervision units, and manufacturers of important machinery and equipment. (5) If the construction unit wants to entrust the construction unit (or general contractor unit) to organize a joint trial operation, it can sign a contract to stipulate it. The construction unit (or general contractor) shall be responsible for organizing and implementing all the work of the trial operation on behalf of the construction unit (owner) during the joint trial operation, and shall assume its own auxiliary functions during the trial operation.
3. Division of responsibilities for load trial operation and participating units (1) The construction unit (owner) is responsible for organizing, coordinating and directing. (2) Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the load trial operation plan shall be jointly prepared by the construction unit, organized by the production department, the commissioning unit, the design unit, and the general contractor/construction unit. The production department shall be responsible for the command and operation or the commissioning unit may direct the production unit. Responsible for operations.
3. Conditions that should be met before trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
(1) Conditions that should be met before trial operation of a single machine 1. Relevant sub-projects have passed the acceptance inspection Mechanical equipment and its ancillary devices, pipelines, electrical equipment, control equipment, etc. have all been installed and accepted according to the requirements of the design documents and relevant procedures and specifications, including: (1) The installation level of mechanical equipment has been adjusted to the allowable range; (2) The geometric accuracy related to installation has been inspected and passed. 2. The construction process information is complete, including: (1) Certificates of conformity or re-inspection reports for various products; (2) Construction records, concealed engineering records and various inspection and test qualification documents; (3) Qualified electrical and instrument adjustment data related to the trial operation of a single machine, etc. 3. Resource conditions have been met The power, materials, machinery, testing instruments, etc. required for the trial operation meet the requirements for the trial operation. 4.Technical measures are in place (1) Lubrication, hydraulic, cooling, water, gas (steam) and electrical systems meet the requirements for individual system debugging and host joint debugging. (2) The prepared trial operation plan or trial operation operating procedures have been approved. 5. Preparation work completed (1) The trial operation organization has been established, and the operators have been trained and passed the examination, are familiar with the trial operation plan and operating procedures, and can operate correctly. The record forms are complete and maintenance personnel are in place. (2) For parts that may cause damage to people or mechanical equipment, the corresponding safety implementation and safety protection devices are set up. (3) The environment around the trial operation machinery and equipment should be clean and free of dust and loud noise. (4) The fire-fighting roads are smooth and the configuration of fire-fighting facilities meets the requirements.
(2) Conditions that should be met before linkage trial operation 1. Project quality acceptance is qualified 2. The intermediate handover of the project has been completed (1) "Three inspections and four determinations" (three inspections: checking for missing design items, unfinished projects, and hidden project quality hazards; four determinations: setting tasks, personnel, time, and measures for the identified problems) to rectify and eliminate deficiencies Completed, the remaining items have been processed. (2) The design change projects that affect material input have been completed. (3) The site is clean, all temporary construction facilities have been removed, and there are no debris or obstacles. 3. All stand-alone test runs passed the test 4. The process system test is qualified 5. Technical management requirements have been completed 6. Resource conditions have been met 7. Preparation work completed
2H320112 Trial operation requirements
1. Single machine trial operation of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(1) Main scope and purpose of single machine trial operation 2.Purpose The single trial operation mainly assesses the mechanical performance of a single piece of equipment and checks whether the manufacturing, installation quality and equipment performance of the mechanical equipment meet the specifications and design requirements.
(2) Single machine trial operation plan 1. Contents of the single-machine trial operation plan: project overview or trial operation scope; preparation basis and principles; goals and adoption standards; conditions that must be met before trial operation; organizational command system; trial operation procedures and operational requirements, schedule arrangement; trial operation Resource allocation; operational arrangements for environmental protection facilities; safety and occupational health requirements; expected technical difficulties in trial operation and countermeasures to be taken. 2. Compilation and review of stand-alone trial operation plan: The trial operation plan shall be organized and prepared by the chief engineer of the construction project, reviewed and approved by the chief engineer of the construction enterprise, and submitted to the construction unit or supervision unit for approval before implementation.
(3) Requirements for stand-alone trial operation of general mechanical equipment
1.Fan
(1) Centrifugal ventilator
5) For large fans with sliding bearings, the bearings should be shut down and inspected after 2 hours of load test operation. There should be no abnormality in the bearings; when there are local scratches on the alloy surface, they should be trimmed, and the continuous operation should not be less than 6 hours. 8) The fan safety and interlocking alarm and shutdown control systems should undergo simulation tests.
(2) Axial flow fan
5) During trial operation, the temperature measured on the bearing surface of general-purpose axial flow fans shall not be higher than the ambient temperature by 40°C; for power station-type axial flow fans and mine-type axial flow fans, the normal operating temperature of rolling bearings shall not exceed 70°C. , the instantaneous maximum temperature should not exceed 95°C, and the temperature rise should not exceed 60°C; the normal operating temperature of the sliding bearing should not exceed 75°C.
(3) Roots and Ye's blowers
① Before starting, the air inlet and exhaust valves of the blower should be fully opened. ② The air inlet and exhaust valves should be operated with no load under fully open conditions, and the operation time should not be less than 30 minutes. ③After the no-load operation is normal, the exhaust valve should be gradually and slowly closed until the exhaust pressure is adjusted to the designed boost value. The current of the motor must not exceed its rated current value. ④ During the load test operation, the air inlet and exhaust valves should not be completely closed, the machine should not be overloaded, and should be stopped after gradual unloading. It should not be stopped suddenly at full load. ⑤ During the load test operation, the blower should operate continuously for no less than 2 hours after the temperature of each part has stabilized under the specified speed and pressure; its bearing temperature should not exceed 95°C, the lubricating oil temperature should not exceed 65°C, and the effective value of the vibration speed It should not be greater than 11.2mm/s.
(4) Centrifugal blower
During the trial operation of the centrifugal blower, the driver and speed increaser should be tested first, and then the complete machine. The test operation of the whole machine should first open the air intake throttle to 10°~15° for small load test operation, and then perform load test operation.
(5) Axial flow blower
① Before starting, the exhaust valve should be closed, the vent valve should be opened, and the vane angle should be adjusted to the minimum working angle or the starting state with the vane closed. ② The main engine driven by the turbine should increase its speed in stages according to the speed increase curve, and should not stop running near the critical speeds of the shaft system. ③After the main engine starts and reaches the rated speed, the stator blades should be adjusted to the minimum working angle; they should not stay running for a long time with the stator blades closed at startup.
3.Pump
(1) Basic requirements for pump trial operation
1) The medium for trial operation should be clean water; when the medium transported by the pump is not clean water, it should be converted into clean water according to the density and relative density of the medium for trial operation. The flow rate should not be less than 20% of the rated value; the current should not exceed the rated current of the motor. . 2) The lubricating oil shall not leak or mist spray; the temperature rise of the lubricating oil in the bearings, bearing boxes and oil pools shall not exceed the ambient temperature of 40°C, and the temperature of the sliding bearings shall not exceed 70°C; the temperature of the rolling bearings shall not exceed 80℃. 8) The following items should be checked during the trial operation of the system and records should be kept. ①The pressure, temperature of lubricating oil and the oil supply and return conditions of each part; ②The temperature and pressure of the suction and discharge media; ③Cooling water supply and return situation; ④Temperature and vibration of each bearing; ⑤The current, voltage and temperature of the motor.
(2) Trial operation of centrifugal pump
4) Pump test run ① The leakage volume of the mechanical seal should not be greater than 5mL/h, and the leakage volume of the mechanical seal of the high-pressure boiler feed water pump should not be greater than 10mL/h; the leakage volume of the packing seal should not be greater than the provisions of Table 2H320112-5, and the temperature rise should be normal; For impurity pumps and pumps transporting toxic, harmful, flammable, explosive and other media, the leakage amount of the seal should not be greater than the specified value in the design. ② When a centrifugal pump with a relative density of working medium less than 1 is used for trial operation with water, the current of the control motor shall not exceed the rated value, and the water flow shall not be less than 20% of the rated value; when using toxic, harmful, flammable, explosive particles and other media The trial operation of the operating pump should comply with the provisions of the random technical documents. ③The cryogenic pump must not operate under throttling conditions.
5) Stop the pump ① The inlet valve of the centrifugal pump should be closed, and the valves of the ancillary systems should be closed in turn after the pump cools down. ② The shutdown operation of the high-temperature pump should comply with the provisions of the random technical documents; after shutdown, the pump should be turned for half a turn every 20 to 30 minutes until the temperature of the pump body drops to 50°C. ③ When the cryogenic pump is shut down, when there are no special requirements, the pump should always be filled with liquid; the suction valve and the discharge valve should be kept normally open; for cryogenic pumps using double-end mechanical seals, the sealing liquid in the liquid level controller and the pump seal cavity should be kept open. Maintain the pump's prime pressure. ④ For pumps transporting media that are prone to crystallization, solidification, precipitation, etc., after stopping the pump, blockage should be prevented and the pump and pipelines should be flushed with clean water or other media in a timely manner. ⑤The liquid accumulated in the pump should be drained.
(5) After the trial operation of a single machine, tasks that should be completed in time
(1) Cut off the power supply and other power sources. (2) Bleed, drain, sewage and rust-proof oil. (3) Relieve the remaining pressure in the potential accumulator, accumulator chamber and mechanical equipment. (4) Check the cleanliness of the lubricant and clean the filter; replace with new lubricant if necessary. (5) Dismantle temporary devices during trial operation and restore disassembled equipment components and ancillary devices. Carry out necessary rechecks on the geometric accuracy of the equipment and retighten all fastening components. (6) Clean and sweep the site, and cover the mechanical equipment with protective covers. (7) Organize various records of the trial operation. After passing the trial run, the participating units will jointly sign on the prescribed form for confirmation.
For example, after the compressor air load stand-alone trial operation, the residual pressure in the gas line and gas tank should be eliminated, the filter should be cleaned and the lubricating oil should be replaced, and the condensate in the intake pipe, condensation collector, cylinder and pipeline should be eliminated; the crankshaft needs to be inspected When opening the crankcase, the crankcase should be opened after 15 minutes of shutdown. For example, after the trial operation of a centrifugal pump, the inlet valve of the pump should be closed, and then the valves of the ancillary systems should be closed in sequence after the pump cools down; pumps that transport media that are prone to crystallization, solidification, precipitation, etc. should prevent clogging after stopping and use clean water in time. or other media to flush the pump and pipelines; drain the liquid accumulated in the pump.
2. Joint trial operation of electromechanical engineering projects
(1) Main scope and purpose of joint trial operation
1. Main scope Scope of linkage trial operation: single mechanical equipment (unit) or complete production line and its auxiliary facilities, including electrical system, lubrication system, hydraulic system, pneumatic system, cooling system, heating system, automatic control system, interlocking system, and alarm system wait. 2.Purpose The linkage trial operation mainly assesses the electrical interlocking of the linkage unit or the entire production line, and checks whether the overall performance and manufacturing and installation quality of the mechanical equipment meet the specifications and design requirements.
3. Load trial operation of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
(2) Standards that should be met during load trial operation
1. The production equipment operates continuously, produces qualified products, and the one-time feeding load test run is successful. 2. The main control points of load trial operation are arrived on time. 3. No major equipment, operation, personal accidents, fire or explosion accidents will occur. 4. Environmental protection facilities should achieve "three simultaneousness" and not pollute the environment. 5. The load test run shall not exceed the test run budget, and the economic benefits are good.
2H320120 Mechanical and electrical engineering construction settlement and completion acceptance
2H320121 Application of construction settlement regulations
1. Types of completion settlement and basis for project pricing
2. Basis for preparation of completion settlement (1) Project contract (including supplementary agreement). (2) Pricing specifications. (3) Confirmed project quantity, settlement contract price and additional or deducted contract price. (4) Tender documents. (5) Construction project design documents and related information. (6) Other basis.
3. Basis for project pricing (1) Divide the project quantities into parts. Including project proposals, feasibility study reports, design documents, etc. (2) Physical consumption of labor, materials, machinery, etc. Including investment estimation indicators, budget quotas, budget quotas, etc. (3) Project unit price. Including labor unit price, material price and machine shift fee, etc. (4) Equipment unit price. Including the original price of the equipment, equipment transportation and miscellaneous charges, imported equipment tariffs, etc. (5) Construction organization measures costs, indirect costs and other project construction costs. Mainly related to cost quotas and indicators. (6) Taxes and fees prescribed by the government. (7) Price index and project cost index.
2. Project advance payment and interim payment
2. Regulations on safe and civilized construction fees (2) Payment of safe and civilized construction fees 1) Unless otherwise agreed in the special contract terms, the employer shall prepay no less than 50% of the total safe and civilized construction fee of the current year's construction progress plan within 28 days of the start of the project, and the remaining part shall be paid at the same time as the progress payment. 2) If the contractor fails to pay the safe and civilized construction fee on time, the contractor may urge the contractor to pay. If the contractor fails to pay within 7 days of the expiration of the payment period, the contractor has the right to suspend the construction. 3. Provisions related to project progress payments (3) Application contents for progress payment include: 1) Accumulate the completed contract price. 2) Accumulate the actual contract price paid. 3) The total contract price completed in this cycle: the unit price project amount completed in this cycle; the total price project amount payable in this cycle; the daily labor price completed in this cycle; the safe and civilized construction fee payable in this cycle; The amount by which the period should be increased. 4) The total amount that should be deducted this cycle: the advance payment that should be deducted this cycle; the amount that should be deducted this cycle. 5) The actual contract price payable during this period.
3. Project Completion Settlement
3. Preparation of project completion settlement (3) Project completion settlement price: The settlement price at the completion of the project = the contract price. The budget or contract price adjustment amount during the construction process - the prepaid and settled project price - the quality deposit
2H320122 Completion acceptance work procedures and requirements
1. Scope and classification of completion acceptance of project delivery
(2) Classification of project delivery completion acceptance 2. Divided according to the acceptance methods of construction projects that meet the completion acceptance conditions (1) Intermediate acceptance of the project (2) Completion acceptance of individual projects (3) Completion acceptance of all projects: three stages: acceptance preparation, pre-acceptance and formal acceptance. For projects that are smaller in scale and have simple construction content, the completion acceptance of all projects can also be carried out at one time. 3. Divided according to the management requirements of relevant majors (1) Special acceptance Special acceptance is based on the Management Measures for Completion Acceptance of Construction Projects (Projects). After the completion of the construction project, the corresponding construction administrative functional departments must conduct special acceptance of the project completion, mainly including planning, fire protection, environmental protection, greening, city appearance, transportation, and water affairs. , civil air defense, health and epidemic prevention, traffic police, lightning protection and other special acceptance. (2) Special acceptance of mechanical and electrical engineering 1) Fire protection acceptance; 2) Acceptance of civil air defense facilities; 3) Environmental protection acceptance; 4) Acceptance of lightning protection facilities; 5) Health and epidemic prevention testing.
2. Basis for completion acceptance
1. Basis for guiding construction management behavior ① Relevant laws, regulations and regulations of the country and various industries; ②Construction quality acceptance specifications, procedures, and quality acceptance assessment standards; ③Relevant regulations on environmental protection, fire protection, energy conservation, earthquake resistance, etc. 2. Basis formed during project construction ① Feasibility study report, preliminary design, adjusted budget and other relevant design documents approved by the superior authority; ②Construction drawings, equipment technical information, design instructions, design change orders and related technical documents; ③Survey, design, construction, supervision of engineering construction projects, bidding documents and contracts for important equipment and materials; ④Relevant documents and information on the introduction or import of equipment and joint venture projects.
Example: What documents should the construction unit provide to prove that it is not a construction quality problem: Answer: The construction unit provides engineering contracts, design documents, installation instructions, construction records and other documents to prove that it is not an installation quality problem.
4. Procedures for completion of construction projects
2. The stage of completion acceptance of construction projects (1) Completion pre-inspection (2) Formal acceptance 1) Formal acceptance is divided into two stages, including single acceptance and full acceptance. 2) All acceptance work must first be prepared by the construction unit together with the design unit, construction unit, and supervision unit. The main contents of preparation include: sorting out and summarizing technical data and as-built drawings, binding them into volumes, classifying and cataloging them; verifying project quantities and assessing quality, etc. 3) After the formal acceptance has been confirmed by re-inspection or random inspection by all parties in the completion acceptance that it meets the requirements, formal acceptance handover procedures can be carried out. All parties involved in the completion acceptance must review the completion acceptance report and sign the acceptance certificate to complete the formal acceptance work.
5. Requirements and implementation of completion acceptance
1. Necessary documents for completion acceptance (1) Documents approved, modified, and adjusted by the competent department; effective acceptance specifications and complete quality acceptance standards. (2) Complete and approved project completion data. (3) There are project quality documents signed and confirmed by survey, design, construction, supervision and other units. (4) On-site certificate and on-site inspection report of the main materials and components used in the project. (5) Project warranty signed by the construction unit.
4. Transfer of completion data (1) Technical data of the completed project 1. Pre-project and completion documents and materials. 2. Engineering project certificate and construction test report. 3. Construction records. Including drawing review records, design change orders, concealed project acceptance records; positioning and setting out records; quality accident handling Management reports and records; special equipment installation inspection and acceptance inspection reports; sub-project usage function test records, etc. 4. Quality acceptance records of unit projects, division projects, and sub-projects. 5. As-built drawing.
2H320130 Mechanical and electrical engineering warranty and return visit
2H320131 Warranty implementation
1. Scope of warranty liability
1. The quality problem is indeed caused by the construction responsibility of the construction unit or poor construction quality. The construction unit is responsible for repairs and bears the repair costs. 2. Quality problems are caused by the responsibility of both parties and should be resolved through negotiation. Each party agrees on their economic responsibilities, and the construction unit is responsible for repairs. 3. Quality problems are caused by poor quality of equipment and materials provided by the construction unit. The construction unit shall bear the repair costs and the construction unit shall assist in repairs. 4. Quality problems occur due to the responsibility of the construction unit (user), and the repair costs or reconstruction costs shall be borne by the construction unit. 5. Repairs of foreign-related projects shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the contract, and economic responsibilities shall be handled according to the above principles.
2. Warranty period
The minimum warranty period for construction projects under normal use conditions is: 1. The warranty period of the construction project shall be calculated from the date of completion acceptance. 2. The warranty period for electrical pipelines, water supply and drainage pipelines, and equipment installation projects is 2 years. 3. The heating and cooling system has 2 heating periods or cooling periods. 4. The warranty period for other items shall be agreed between the contractor and the contractor. According to the provisions of the "Interim Measures for the Lifelong Quality Responsibility Investigation of the Project Leaders of the Five Responsible Parties of Construction Projects", the project leaders of the construction units, the project leaders of the survey units, the project leaders of the design units, and the construction units involved in new construction, expansion, and reconstruction construction projects The project manager of the unit, the chief engineer of the supervision unit, etc., in accordance with national laws, regulations and relevant regulations, bear corresponding responsibilities for the quality of the project within the design life of the project, which is called the life-long quality responsibility of the project leader of the five responsible parties of the construction project.
3. Warranty work procedures
1. Warranty certificate At the same time as the project is completed and accepted, the construction unit will send the mechanical and electrical installation project warranty certificate to the construction unit. The content of the warranty certificate mainly includes: project overview, equipment use and management requirements, warranty scope and content, warranty period, warranty status record (blank), warranty description, warranty unit name, address, phone number, contact person, etc. 2. Inspection and repair 3. Warranty project acceptance
2H320132 Implementation of return visit
2. Project return visit plan
4. Contents of project return visit The project return visit work plan includes: the department in charge of the return visit warranty business; the implementation unit of the return visit warranty; the target of the return visit (contractor or user) and the name of the project; the schedule and main content of the return visit; and the warranty period of the return visit project.
4. Methods of project return visits
1. Seasonal return visits. Return visit in winter: For example, return visits to the boiler room and heating system operations in winter. Summer return visit: Such as returning to visit the ventilation, air conditioning and refrigeration system operation status in summer. 2. Technical return visit. Mainly understand the technical performance and effects of new materials, new technologies, new processes, new equipment, etc. used in the construction process of the project, and find problems to be remedied and solved in a timely manner; it is convenient to summarize experience, obtain scientific basis, and continuously improve and improve , to create conditions for further promotion. Such follow-up visits can be conducted regularly or irregularly. 3. Return visit before the warranty expires. 4. Information transfer method: return visit. 5. Return visit in the form of symposium. 6. Tour-style return visit.
2H330000 Regulations and standards related to the construction of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H331000 Legal regulations related to the construction of mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H331010 Measurement related regulations
2H331011 Management regulations for the use of construction measuring instruments
1. Calibration division of construction measuring instruments
1. Mandatory test Mandatory verification means that measuring standard instruments and working measuring instruments must be submitted to a statutory or authorized metrology verification agency for verification according to the verification cycle. The scope of measuring instruments subject to mandatory verification is: (1) Public measuring standard instruments. (2) The highest measuring standard instruments used by departments, enterprises and institutions. (3) Measuring instruments used for trade settlement, safety protection, medical and health care, and environmental monitoring. 3. Calibration scope of construction measuring instruments (1) Work measuring instruments used in the construction process that are listed in the "Catalogue of Compulsory Verification of Work Measuring Instruments of the People's Republic of China" (hereinafter referred to as the "Compulsory Inspection Catalog"). Such as pressure gauges, electric energy meters (single-phase, three-phase), measuring transformers (voltage transformers, current transformers), insulation resistance measuring instruments, grounding resistance measuring instruments, sound level meters, etc. for safety protection. (2) The highest measuring standard instrument established by the construction unit: (3) Measuring instruments listed in the "Catalogue of Measuring Instruments Managed by Law of the People's Republic of China". Such as voltmeter, ammeter, ohmmeter, phase meter, etc.
3. Management regulations on the use of construction measuring instruments
5. The use of measurement standard instruments (referred to as measurement standards) by enterprises and institutions must meet the following conditions: (1) Passed by metrological verification. (2) Have the environmental conditions required for normal operation. (3) Have competent personnel for preservation, maintenance and use. (4) Have a sound management system.
4. Grades and calibration marks of construction measuring instruments
1. Contents included in the calibration seal and certificate of measuring instruments (1) Calibration certificate: A document proving that a measuring instrument has been calibrated and complies with relevant legal requirements. (2) Notification of failure (notification of verification results): a document stating that a measuring instrument is found to be non-compliant or no longer compliant with relevant statutory requirements. (3) Calibration mark: A mark applied to a measuring instrument to prove that it has been calibrated and meets the requirements. (4) Seal mark: a mark used to prevent any unauthorized modification, readjustment or removal of parts, etc. to the measuring instrument.
2H331012 Management procedures for measuring instruments at construction sites
4. Classified management of measuring instruments
Measuring instruments are divided into three categories: A, B, and C based on their performance, location of use, nature of use, and frequency of use.
(1) Class A measuring instruments
1. Scope of Class A measuring instruments ①The highest measuring standard instruments for construction enterprises and working measuring instruments used for value transfer. For example, first-grade flat crystal, zero-grade knife edge ruler, level gauge, right angle ruler gauge, hundredmeter gauge, dial indicator gauge, dial indicator gauge, autocollimator, vertical optical meter, standard Piston pressure gauge, etc. ②Work measuring instruments included in the national compulsory verification catalog. For example, pressure gauges, electric energy meters, ground resistance meters, sound level meters, etc. used for safety protection. (Measuring transformers (voltage transformers, current transformers), insulation resistance measuring instruments) 2. Management Measures for Class A Measuring Instruments ① It is the highest measuring standard instrument of the enterprise. In accordance with the relevant provisions of the "Measurement Law", it shall be sent to a statutory or authorized metrology verification institution for regular verification. ② Work measuring instruments that are subject to compulsory verification can be submitted to a statutory or authorized metrology verification institution for verification based on the principle of being close to the place. ③ For calibration and verification of large-scale test equipment, contact the statutory or authorized metrology verification agency to conduct regular on-site verification in the laboratory.
(2) Class B measuring instruments
1. Scope of Class B measuring instruments Measuring instruments used for process control, quality inspection and material management. For example, calipers, micrometers, dial indicators, dial indicators, levels, squares, feeler gauges, levels, theodolite, thickness gauges, thermometers, temperature indicating regulators; pressure gauges, dynamometers, tachometers, weights, Hardness tester, universal material Testing machines, balances; voltmeters, ammeters, ohmmeters, electric power meters, power factor meters; bridges, resistance boxes, galvanometers, multimeters, standard electrical signal generators; oscilloscopes, impedance graph meters, potentiometers, spectrometers Photometer etc. 2. Management Measures for Class B Measuring Instruments Class B measuring instruments can be regularly verified and calibrated by the measurement management department of the enterprise to which they belong. Items that the enterprise's metrology management department does not have the authority to verify may be submitted to a statutory or authorized metrology verification agency for verification.
(3) Class C measuring instruments
1. Scope of Class C measuring instruments ① The measurement performance is stable, the value is not easy to change, the low value is easy to consume and the use of measuring instruments does not require high precision. Such as steel ruler, bent ruler, steel tape measure below 5m, etc. ② When matching with the equipment, it is not allowed to disassemble or assemble the indicating measuring instruments. Such as voltmeter, ammeter, pressure gauge, etc. ③Non-standard measuring instruments. Such as vertical detection ruler, vernier feeler ruler, diagonal detection ruler, internal and external angle detection ruler, etc. 2. Management Measures for Class C Measuring Instruments Newly purchased Class C measuring instruments can be released for use after being inspected by the warehouse manager and verified to be qualified. For Class C measuring instruments in use, the measurement management personnel will inspect the site and replace them promptly if they are found to be damaged. For indicating instruments belonging to equipment that is inconvenient to disassemble and assemble, it can be carried out simultaneously with equipment maintenance. Instruments that have been certified can be directly compared, approved and confirmed to be qualified, and the instrument name, number and status should be noted on the equipment identification record. Strengthen the maintenance of measuring instruments on a daily basis and replace them as soon as they break down to ensure that the measuring instruments are in good working condition. Regularly send it to the measurement management department of the affiliated enterprise for calibration or verification.
5. Management procedures for measuring instruments at construction sites
The management procedures of measuring instruments should comply with the requirements for value transfer, value measurement, and value analysis to ensure that the detection data of quality characteristics recorded during the construction process are reliable and effective. The management program is shown in Figure 2H331012. Collect information → Determine the required equipment plan → Determine the purchase and rental plan → Procurement, leasing, acceptance → Submission for inspection → Storage, filing, storage → Send to the team → Adjustment and use → On-site inspection and comparison → Return to storage and storage →Second use
6. Management of measuring instruments by the project department
(1) Requirements for the use of measuring instruments at construction sites
1. Before the start of the project, the project department should prepare a "Measurement and Testing Equipment Equipment Plan" based on the project quality plan, construction organization design, and construction plan's accuracy requirements and production needs for testing equipment. 5. The project management department must set up a full-time (part-time) measurement administrator to conduct on-site tracking and management of the measuring instruments used in the construction. Work content includes: (1) Establish a ledger of measuring instruments used on site. (2) Responsible for periodic inspection of measuring instruments used on site. (3) Responsible for on-site inspection of the intact condition of measuring instruments.
(2) Storage, maintenance and maintenance system of measuring instruments at construction sites
3. Measuring and testing equipment should have obvious signs such as "qualified", "disabled", and "storage" to indicate the status of the measuring instruments. (1) Qualified: It is the accuracy of weekly inspection or one-time verification that can meet the requirements of quality inspection, inspection and testing. (2) Disabled: those that fail the test or are seriously damaged or missing during use. (3) Storage: Suspension of use based on frequency of use and production and operation conditions.
Properly configure measuring instruments according to the background
project
Measuring instruments
Elevation, elevation, settlement
Level
Angle, plane baseline, verticality
Theodolite
levelness
spirit level
flange clearance
feeler gauge
Ground resistance
Ground resistance measuring instrument
Insulation resistance
Megger
2H331020 Relevant regulations on electricity consumption and construction in construction
2H331021 Regulations on electricity use in construction
1. Regulations on electricity usage procedures
Applications for new installation of electricity, temporary electricity use, increase of electricity capacity, change of electricity use and termination of electricity use shall be handled in accordance with the prescribed procedures.
(1) Electricity regulations for new installations, capacity additions and changes
2. When users apply for new installations or additional electricity consumption, they should provide the power supply enterprise with the approval documents for the electricity project and relevant electricity consumption information. Including the location of electricity consumption, purpose of electricity, nature of electricity consumption, electrical equipment, electrical equipment list, electrical load, security power, electricity planning, etc., and truthfully fill in the electricity application form and go through the required procedures in accordance with the regulations of the power supply enterprise. 3. For accepted power applications, power supply enterprises should determine the power supply plan as soon as possible and formally notify users in writing within the following deadline. The maximum period for low-voltage power users shall not exceed 10 days; the maximum period for high-voltage single power supply users shall not exceed 1 month; and the maximum period for high-voltage dual power supply users shall not exceed 2 months. 4. The validity period of the power supply plan refers to the date from the date when the official notice of the power supply plan is issued to the date when the power supply subsidy is paid and the power project starts. The high-voltage power supply plan is valid for 1 year, and the low-voltage power supply plan is valid for 3 months. Overdue cancellation. 5. Change the regulations on electricity use. If any of the following conditions occurs, the electricity consumption will be changed. When users need to change their electricity consumption, they should apply in advance and bring relevant supporting documents to the power supply enterprise's electricity business location to go through the procedures and change the electricity supply and use contract. (1) Reduce the power consumption capacity agreed in the contract (referred to as capacity reduction) (2) Temporarily stop the power consumption of all or part of the powered equipment (referred to as suspension) (3) Temporary replacement of large-capacity transformer (referred to as temporary replacement) (4) Relocation of the power consumption address of the power receiving device (referred to as relocation) (5) Installation location of mobile electricity metering device (referred to as mobile meter) (6) Temporarily stop using electricity and dismantle the meter (referred to as temporary disassembly) (7) Change the user’s name (referred to as name change or transfer) (8) One household is divided into two or more households (referred to as household division) (9) Two or more users are merged into one household (referred to as merged household) (10) Termination of electricity use when the contract expires (referred to as account cancellation) (11) Change the power supply voltage level (referred to as voltage change) (12) Change the category of electricity consumption (referred to as category change)
(2) Regulations for users to handle electricity use procedures
2. If the project is located in a remote area, although the application for electricity has been accepted, it will still take some time to construct and electrify the lines introduced from the power grid, and the project is urgently needed to start, the general contractor usually uses its own power supply (such as diesel Generator set) solve the power problem first. At this time, the general contractor must inform the power supply department and obtain consent. At the same time, it must take appropriate safety technical measures to prevent its own power supply from accidentally entering the municipal power grid. 3. If the application is only for temporary power use for construction, then when the temporary power use for construction ends or the construction power is transferred to the power supply facilities of the construction project, the general contractor should promptly go through the procedures for terminating power use with the power supply department. For example, a power transmission and transformation engineering company undertook a substation construction project. The company took the construction power design plan to the power supply department where the factory was located to apply for power and was approved. However, the substation was located in a remote location, and the construction of lines imported from the power grid and It would take some time to get electricity, and the project was urgently needed to start, so the company decided to use diesel generator sets to solve the power problem. The company promptly notified the local power supply department of the plan and obtained approval. At the same time, the company actively took safety technical measures under the guidance of the local power supply department to prevent its own power supply from accidentally entering the municipal power grid.
2. Electricity metering devices and their regulations
The electricity metering device includes billing energy meters (active and reactive energy meters and maximum demand meters), voltage and current transformers and secondary connecting wires.
(2) Regulations on electricity metering and electricity bill collection 4. Users who use electricity temporarily should install electricity metering devices. For those that do not meet the installation conditions, the electricity fee can be calculated based on its power capacity, usage time, and specified electricity price.
Third, electricity safety regulations
(2) Safety management of temporary electricity use
1. Approved procedures for temporary use of electricity (1) The construction unit should prepare the "temporary power construction organization design" for the construction site based on relevant national standards, specifications and the actual load conditions of the construction site, and assist the owner to declare the power plan to the local electricity department. (2) Procurement and construction of temporary electrical equipment and materials shall be carried out in accordance with the plan approved by the electrical industry department and the "Technical Specifications for Safety of Temporary Electricity Use at Construction Sites". (3) Inspect and accept temporary electricity construction projects, provide relevant information to the power supply department, and apply for power transmission. (4) After inspection, acceptance and testing by the power supply department, power transmission will be started after approval.
2. Preparation of temporary electricity construction organization design (1) Temporary power use construction organization design should be prepared, or technical measures for safe power use and electrical fire prevention measures should be prepared. (2) The temporary power construction organization design shall be prepared by electrical technicians, reviewed by the technical person in charge of the project department, and implemented after review by relevant departments and approval by the technical person in charge of the enterprise with legal person qualifications. (3) The main contents of the temporary power construction organization design should include: on-site survey; determining the power incoming lines, substations, distribution rooms, distribution devices, electrical equipment locations and line directions; performing load calculations; selecting transformers; Design the distribution system: Design distribution lines, select wires or cables, Design power distribution devices, select electrical appliances, design grounding devices, and draw temporary power engineering drawings, including general plan of electrical engineering, distribution device layout, distribution system wiring diagram, and grounding device design drawings; design lightning protection devices; determine protection Measures; formulate safe electricity use measures and electrical fire prevention measures.
3. Inspection and acceptance of temporary electricity use (1) Temporary electricity projects must be constructed by certified electricians. After the installation of temporary power projects is completed, the safety department shall organize inspection and acceptance. Participants include project department leaders in charge of temporary power safety, relevant technical personnel, construction site supervisors, temporary power construction organization design and preparation personnel, electrician squad leaders and safety officers. If necessary, please invite representatives of the competent authorities and owners to participate. (2) The inspection content of temporary power projects includes: overhead lines, cable lines, indoor wiring, lighting devices, power distribution rooms and self-prepared power supplies, various distribution boxes and switch boxes, distribution lines, transformers, and electrical equipment installation , Electrical equipment debugging, grounding and lightning protection, electrical protection, etc. (3) The inspection status should be recorded and signed by relevant personnel for confirmation. (4) Temporary power projects should be inspected regularly. Once a month at the construction site and once a quarter at the grassroots level. During the inspection of the grassroots company, the grounding resistance value should be re-measured, unsafe factors must be dealt with in a timely manner, and re-inspection and acceptance procedures should be performed. (5) Temporary electricity safety files should be established and managed by the electrical technician in charge of the site. Among them, the "Electrician Maintenance Record" can be designated to be managed by an electrician and filed together after the temporary electrical work is dismantled.
For example, an electromechanical installation company revised its corporate safety inspection system in order to strengthen production safety. It stipulates that temporary power projects in the company's construction projects should be inspected regularly. Each construction site should be inspected quarterly, and the company should be inspected every six months. Ensure safe use of electricity. However, during the subsequent joint safety inspection activities organized by the local government, it was pointed out that the system was inappropriate: it violated the electric power law. The construction site should be inspected once a month and the company should be inspected quarterly. The company accepted the criticism and promptly revised the relevant contents of the safety inspection system in accordance with the law.
4. Technical requirements for temporary electricity safety (1) The 220V/380V three-phase four-wire low-voltage power system dedicated to temporary power projects with the neutral point of the power supply directly grounded must comply with the following regulations: adopt a three-level power distribution system, adopt a TN-S zero connection protection system, and adopt Secondary leakage protection system. (2) In the TN-S zero connection protection system powered by a dedicated transformer at the construction site, the metal shell of the electrical equipment must be connected to the protective neutral line PE. (3) When the construction site and external power lines share the same power supply system, the grounding and zero protection of the electrical equipment must be consistent with the original system.
(4) The PE wire material should be the same as the phase wire, and its minimum cross-section should comply with
Phase wire core cross section S (mm²)
Minimum cross section of PE wire (mm²)
S≤16
S
16<S≤35
16
S>35
S/2
(5) It is strictly forbidden to install switches or fuses on the PE line, to pass working current, and to disconnect the line. (6) In the TN-S system, the PE line must be repeatedly grounded in the distribution room, main distribution box, etc., and the grounding resistance should not be greater than 10Ω. (8) The electrical installation board of the distribution box must be equipped with an N line terminal board and a PE line terminal board. The N line terminal board must be insulated from the metal electrical installation plate, and the PE line terminal board must be electrically connected to the metal electrical installation plate. (9) The rated operating current and rated operating time of the two-stage leakage protector should be reasonably matched to enable it to have hierarchical and segmented protection functions. The rated operating current of the leakage switch of the final switch box should not be greater than 30mA, and the rated operating time should not be greater than 0.1s.
2H331022 Regulations on construction operations in power facility protection zones
2. Protection scope and protected areas of electric power facilities
2. Protection scope of power line facilities (1) Overhead power lines (2) Power cable lines (3) Electrical equipment on power lines (4) Power dispatching facilities
3. Power line protection zone The edge extension distance of voltage conductors at each level
Voltage (kV)
Extension distance (m)
1~10
5
35~110
10
154~330
15
500
20
3. Protection scope of electric power facilities and operating permission regulations within the protection zone
(1) Protection scope of electric power facilities and operating permission regulations within the protection zone
1. When blasting and other operations that may endanger the safety of electric facilities are carried out around electric facilities, the operation shall be carried out only after approval and measures to ensure the safety of electric facilities are taken in accordance with the provisions of the State Council on the protection of electric facilities. 3. In the following mechanical and electrical engineering construction activities, any unit or individual must obtain approval from the local power management department at or above the county level and take safety measures before proceeding. (1) Carry out farmland water conservancy infrastructure projects and piling, drilling, excavation and other operations in the overhead power line protection zone. (2) Any part of the lifting machinery enters the overhead power line protection zone for construction. (3) It is less than the safe distance between the conductor and the passing object and passes through the overhead power line protection zone. (4) Work in the power cable line protection zone. 4. (2) No unit or individual is allowed to conduct blasting operations within 500m (horizontal distance) from power facilities. When blasting operations must be carried out due to work needs, reliable safety precautions should be taken to ensure the safety of power facilities in accordance with laws and regulations issued by the state regarding blasting operations, and written consent must be obtained from the local power facility property rights unit or management department and reported to the Approved by relevant government management departments. Blasting operations carried out outside the prescribed scope must ensure the safety of electrical facilities. (3) No unit or individual may carry out soil extraction, piling, drilling, excavation or dumping of acids, alkalis, salts and other harmful chemicals within the following ranges from the outer edge of overhead power line towers and cable foundations. A 5m area around power line towers and cables of 35kV and below; a 10m area around power line towers and cables of 66kV and above.
5. Regulations on excavation work around power facilities (1) Scope within which soil is not allowed to be taken (2) The angle between the slope formed after soil removal and the horizon shall not be greater than 45°.
Voltage (kV)
Range of soil not allowed (m)
35
4
110~220
5
330~500
8
(2) Requirements for construction operations in or near power facility protection zones
For example, a construction company undertook a project that required blasting operations. After investigation, it was found that there were underground cables near the blasting point. In order to ensure the normal progress of the construction, the construction company communicated with the underground cable management department in a timely manner and obtained underground cables. The exact location of cable burial; invite personnel from the underground cable management department to participate when formulating the blasting construction plan, In the construction plan, safety technical measures to protect power facilities were specially formulated. After the construction plan was completed, it was reported to the local power management department for approval; when the blasting construction was carried out, the construction company invited the underground cable management department to assign dedicated personnel for on-site supervision. Due to proper measures, the blasting operation was successfully completed.
2H331030 Relevant regulations for special equipment
2H331031 Legal scope of special equipment
1. Definition of special equipment
Special equipment refers to boilers, pressure vessels (including gas cylinders), pressure pipes, elevators, hoisting machinery, passenger ropeways, large amusement facilities, and special motor vehicles in sites (factories) that pose a greater risk to personal and property safety. and other special equipment specified by laws and administrative regulations.
2. Types of special equipment
Boilers, pressure vessels, pressure pipes, lifting machinery
Go to each chapter
2H331032 Regulations on the manufacture, installation, modification and maintenance of special equipment
2. Qualification licenses for special equipment manufacturing, installation, modification and maintenance units
Qualifications for boilers, pressure vessels, hoisting machinery, elevators, and pressure pipelines
Go to each chapter
3. Production of special equipment
(1) Conditions that special equipment manufacturing, installation, transformation and repair units should meet
1. Have legal qualifications. 2. Have resource conditions suitable for the license scope and meet production needs. 3. Establish and effectively implement a quality assurance system that is consistent with the scope of the license. 4. Have the technical ability to ensure the safety performance of special equipment. 2. It should have resource conditions suitable for the license scope and meet production needs. Its specific resource requirements include: (1) Personnel, including management personnel, technical personnel, testing personnel, operating personnel, etc. (2) Workplace, including sites, factories, offices, warehouses, etc. (3) Equipment and facilities, including production (filling equipment), process equipment, testing instruments, test devices, etc. (4) Technical information, including design documents, process documents, construction plans, testing procedures, etc. (5) Regulations and standards, including laws, regulations, rules, safety technical specifications and related standards.
(2) Notice of installation, modification and repair of special equipment
1. Basis for notification (1) Article 23 of the "Special Equipment Safety Law" stipulates: The construction unit that installs, transforms, and repairs special equipment shall notify the municipality or districted city in writing of the proposed installation, transformation, and repair of special equipment before construction. The department of the municipal people's government responsible for the safety supervision and management of special equipment.
2. Notification requirements (1) Nature of notification Notification of construction is not an administrative permit. Construction can be carried out after the construction unit notifies it. (2) Content and method of notification Notification content: When the construction unit handles the notification of special equipment installation, transformation and maintenance, it only needs to fill in the "Special Equipment Installation, Transformation and Maintenance Notification Form". Notification method: The construction unit can notify the installation, renovation and maintenance through personal delivery, registered mail or express delivery, online notification, fax, email, etc.
(3) Special equipment leaves the factory (completion)
1. When special equipment leaves the factory, it should be accompanied by relevant technical information and documents such as design documents required by safety technical specifications, product quality certificates, installation, use and maintenance instructions, supervision and inspection certificates, etc. 2. Special equipment shall be supervised and inspected by relevant inspection agencies during and after the installation, modification and major repairs. Any equipment that has not been inspected or failed to pass the inspection shall not be delivered for use. The construction unit that installs, transforms or repairs shall hand over the relevant technical data and documents to the unit using the special equipment within 30 days after acceptance. The unit using special equipment shall store it in the safety technical file of the special equipment. The transferred safety technical files shall at least include the following contents: (1) Design documents of special equipment, product quality certificates, installation, use and maintenance instructions, supervision and inspection certificates and other relevant technical documents and documents, as well as installation technical documents and documents. (2) Energy efficiency test report of high-energy-consuming special equipment.
5. Legal responsibilities and prescribed penalties for violating the special equipment licensing system
1. Legal responsibilities and penalties for engaging in special equipment production activities without permission (1) Anyone who violates the provisions of the Special Equipment Safety Law and engages in special equipment production activities without a license shall be ordered to stop production, illegally manufactured special equipment shall be confiscated, and a fine of not less than RMB 100,000 but not more than RMB 500,000 shall be imposed; (2) If there are illegal gains, the illegal gains will be confiscated; (3) If installation, modification or repair is carried out, it shall be ordered to be restored to its original condition or ordered to be reinstalled, modified or repaired by a licensed unit within a time limit. 3. Legal responsibilities and penalties for failure to perform the “written notification” procedure before construction In violation of the provisions of the Special Equipment Safety Law, if a construction unit that installs, transforms or repairs special equipment starts construction without notifying the department responsible for special equipment safety supervision and management in writing before construction, it shall be ordered to make corrections within a time limit; if it fails to make corrections within the time limit, it shall be fined 10,000 yuan. A fine of more than 100,000 yuan is imposed.
2H332000 Construction related standards for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
2H332010 Unified requirements for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
2H332011 Project division and acceptance procedures for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
1. Division of construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
1. According to the "Uniform Standard for Construction Quality Acceptance of Industrial Installation Projects" GB/T 50252-2018, the projects accepted for industrial installation projects are: civil engineering, steel structure engineering, equipment engineering, pipeline engineering, electrical engineering, automation instrument engineering, and anti-corrosion Nine items include engineering, thermal insulation engineering, and furnace and kiln masonry engineering. 2. The construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects should be divided into unit projects, division projects and sub-projects. 3. Unit projects should be divided according to areas, devices or industrial plants and workshops (job numbers). (1) Larger unit projects can be divided into several sub-unit projects. (2) When a professional project is large in scale and has independent construction conditions or independent use functions, it can also constitute a separate unit project or sub-unit project. (3) Professional installation projects with independent construction conditions or usage functions are allowed to be divided into one or several sub-unit projects, such as large-scale cracking furnaces, steam turbines and other equipment projects with large project quantities and long construction periods. 4. Branch projects should be divided into civil engineering, steel structure, equipment, pipelines, electrical, automated instrumentation, anti-corrosion, thermal insulation and furnace masonry. Larger branch projects can be divided into several sub-branch projects. 5. The division of sub-projects should comply with the relevant professional construction quality acceptance standards. Sub-projects are divided by units (sets) (such as equipment, electrical devices, etc.), categories, materials, uses, systems (such as various systems in automated instrument engineering), processes, etc., which comprehensively combines the division of sub-projects in various majors. Routine practice. 6. When there is only a certain professional branch project in a unit project, the branch project should be the unit project. When there is only one sub-project in a divisional project, the sub-project shall be a divisional project. A unit project with only a certain professional branch project refers to a branch project with this professional project as the main body, a large amount of work, and a long construction period, such as pipe corridor projects and underground pipe network projects inside and outside the installation area. etc., can be accepted as a unit project to facilitate project quality management.
2. Project division for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
1.Civil engineering
(1) Inspection batches can be divided according to equipment foundation, floor, construction section or deformation joint according to the needs of construction quality control and professional acceptance. (2) Sub-projects can be divided according to equipment foundation, construction technology, main types of work, and materials. (3) The division of sub-projects should be determined according to basic equipment categories, building (structure) locations or majors. (4) Buildings (structures) that have independent construction conditions and can form independent functions can be divided into a unit project (or sub-unit project). Civil engineering is an indispensable component of industrial installation projects. Buildings (structures) in industrial installations can be divided into sub-unit projects of the unit project. Industrial buildings with independent functions, such as office buildings and comprehensive buildings, can be divided into unit projects.
2. Steel structure engineering
(1) Divide inspection batches according to processes or parts to facilitate quality acceptance and timely control of installation quality. (2) The steel structure accessories of the equipment can be divided into sub-projects to facilitate inspection and acceptance. For example, sub-projects can be divided according to construction technology, steel structure fabrication, steel structure welding, steel structure bolting, steel structure painting or steel structure fire protection. Larger sub-projects with independent construction conditions can be divided into divisions or sub-division projects. (3) Steel structure installation projects can be divided into divisional projects, and large steel structure installation projects can be divided into several sub-divisional projects. The steel structures in industrial installations can be divided into sub-projects within the unit project (or sub-unit project). For large-scale steel structure projects, they can be divided into several sub-division projects based on construction characteristics, construction procedures, professional categories, and material types to facilitate inspection and acceptance.
3. Equipment engineering (1) Equipment engineering sub-projects are divided according to equipment sets (sets) or units.
4.Pipework (1) Sub-projects should be divided according to pipeline medium, grade or material.
5. Electrical Engineering (1) Sub-projects should be divided according to electrical equipment or electrical circuits.
6. Automation instrument engineering (1) Sub-projects should be divided according to instrument categories and installation test procedures.
7. Anti-corrosion engineering
(1) The anti-corrosion project can be divided into one or several inspection batches according to the construction sequence, section, location or project quantity. (2) Sub-projects can be composed of one or several inspection batches, and sub-projects should be divided according to the types of anti-corrosion materials or linings used in equipment stands (sets), pipelines, steel structures and buildings (structures). Anti-corrosion of buildings (structures) refers to the parts related to equipment and pipelines, such as equipment supports, equipment foundations and cofferdam parts, pipeline supports, etc.
8. Thermal insulation project (1) The insulation project inspection batch can be divided into the same batch according to the project characteristics, the same working medium, the same working pressure level, and the same insulation structure. (2) Sub-projects can be composed of one or several inspection batches. In sub-projects, equipment and pipeline insulation projects should be divided according to systems and sections.
9. Furnace and kiln masonry projects (1) Inspection batches should be divided according to location, number of layers, construction sections or expansion joints. (2) Sub-projects should be divided according to the structural components or sections of the furnace. Sub-projects can be composed of one or several inspection batches. (3) The sub-projects should be divided according to the base (platform) of the furnace. (4) An independent production system or a large-scale furnace masonry project can be divided into a unit project. Larger unit projects can be divided into several sub-unit projects.
4. Procedures for construction quality acceptance
1. The construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects should be carried out in sequence according to sub-projects, divisional projects and unit projects. 2. Civil engineering, steel structure engineering, anti-corrosion engineering, thermal insulation engineering and furnace masonry engineering should be carried out in sequence according to inspection batch, sub-project, division project and unit project.
2H332012 Organization and qualification regulations for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
2. Procedures and organization for construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects
1. The construction quality acceptance of industrial installation projects should be carried out step by step in the order of inspection items (inspection batches), sub-projects, division projects and unit projects.
Inspection batch, sub-project, branch project, unit project acceptance organizer
subtopic
Industrial installation project quality acceptance organizer
Construction and installation project quality acceptance organizer
Inspection batches and items project
Professional engineer of the construction unit, Supervision engineer
Professional supervision engineer, Professional and technical person in charge of the project of the construction unit
Branch project
Project technical person in charge of the construction unit, chief supervisory engineer
chief supervisory engineer, Professional and technical person in charge of the project of the construction unit
Unit project
Construction unit project manager
Construction unit project manager
3. Acceptance of construction quality
1. Qualified quality acceptance of inspection items shall comply with the following provisions: (1) The construction quality of the main control project should comply with the corresponding professional construction quality acceptance standards. (2) The construction quality of each random inspection location (sampling) of general projects should comply with the regulations of the corresponding professional construction quality acceptance standards. (3) There should be complete construction basis, construction records and quality inspection, inspection and test records. 2. The quality acceptance of the inspection batch shall meet the following requirements: 3. Qualified quality acceptance of sub-projects shall comply with the following provisions: 4. Division (sub-division) project quality acceptance shall meet the following requirements: 5. The project quality acceptance of the unit (sub-unit) shall meet the following requirements: Qualified quality and complete information 7. When the quality of the inspection items (inspection batches) does not meet the requirements of the corresponding professional quality acceptance standards, it shall be handled in accordance with the following provisions: (1) Inspection items (inspection batches) that have been reworked or repaired should be re-accepted. (2) Inspection items (inspection batches) that can meet the design requirements after being tested and identified by a qualified testing agency shall be accepted. (3) Inspection items (inspection batches) that fail to meet the design requirements after testing and appraisal by a qualified testing agency, but are approved by the original design unit to meet safety and usability functions, can be accepted. (4) Sub-items and divisions (sub-divisions) that have been repaired or reinforced, although the geometric dimensions have been changed but can still meet the safety and use requirements, can be accepted according to the requirements of the technical treatment plan and negotiation documents. 8. When the quality of the inspection project does not meet the corresponding professional project quality acceptance specifications, this article stipulates four handling situations. (1) Under normal circumstances, unqualified inspection items should be promptly discovered and reworked through process control of process quality to meet the qualification requirements. (2) For parts that are difficult to rework and whose quality is difficult to determine, they should be tested and identified by qualified testing units, and their conclusions can be used as the basis for quality acceptance. (3) Repair of unqualified items is a remedial measure. The purpose of acceptance according to the technical treatment plan and negotiation documents is to ensure the safe performance of the project and avoid greater losses. (4) The terminology of rework and repair is in accordance with the current national standard "Quality Management System Fundamentals and Terminology" GB/T 19000-2016.
2H332020 Unified requirements for construction quality acceptance of building and installation projects
2H332021 Project division and acceptance procedures for construction quality acceptance of building installation projects
1. Division of items for construction quality acceptance of construction and installation projects
The construction quality acceptance of building and installation projects can be divided into unit projects, division projects, sub-projects and inspection batches.
1. Division of unit projects Buildings and structures that have independent construction conditions and can form independent functions are considered as a unit project. For larger unit projects, the part that can form independent functions can be designated as a sub-unit project. 2. Division of branch projects (sub-branch projects) The division of sub-projects should be determined according to the nature of the profession and the location of the project. 3. Division of sub-projects and inspection batches (1) The division of sub-projects should be based on the main types of work, materials, construction techniques, uses, types and equipment categories. (2) Inspection batches can be divided according to construction and quality control and professional acceptance needs, according to project volume, floors, construction sections, and deformation joints. In multi-story or high-rise building projects, the main sub-projects can be divided into inspection batches according to floors or construction sections. Sub-projects in single-story construction projects can be divided into inspection batches according to deformation joints, etc. For sub-projects with a small amount of work, they can be unified into one inspection batch. The installation project is generally divided into an inspection batch according to a design system or equipment category. For example, when the sub-project of making air ducts and accessories for ventilation and air-conditioning air supply systems contains air ducts of multiple materials and construction techniques, the inspection batch can be divided into different materials, such as the production of air ducts (galvanized steel plates) and accessories. Inspection batch, air duct (color steel sandwich panel) and accessories production inspection batch, air duct (phenolic) and accessories production inspection batch. For example, the inspection batch of sub-projects in the power supply main line installation project of the building electrical branch project should be divided according to the number of the power supply section and the electrical shaft.
2. Procedures for acceptance of construction quality of building and installation projects Inspection batch acceptance→sub-project acceptance→division (sub-division) project acceptance→unit (sub-unit) project acceptance.
2H332022 Organization and qualification regulations for construction quality acceptance of building installation projects
2. Regulations on the acceptance of construction quality of inspection batches
Inspection batch is the smallest unit of project acceptance.
1. Regulations on quality acceptance of inspection batches (1) The quality of main control items and general items has passed sampling inspection. (2) Have complete construction operation basis and quality inspection records. 2. Construction quality acceptance of inspection batches (2) Inspection of main control items and general items The main control item is an important inspection item to ensure the safety and use functions of the project. It is an inspection item that plays a decisive role in safety, sanitation, environmental protection and public interests. It is an item that determines the main performance of the inspection batch. Therefore, it must all comply with the relevant professional engineering stipulations on acceptance specifications. General items are inspection items other than the main control items, and deviations can be allowed. For example, the pressure test of pipelines; the tightness inspection of air duct systems, electrical insulation and grounding tests, etc. are all main control items.
4. Regulations on the quality acceptance of division (sub-division) projects
1. Division (sub-division) project quality acceptance regulations (1) The quality of sub-projects included in branch (sub-division) projects shall be accepted and accepted. (2) Quality control data should be complete. (3) The sampling test results of the equipment installation project regarding safety, energy saving, environmental protection and main functions should comply with the corresponding regulations. (4) The visual and sensory quality acceptance should meet the requirements.
5. Regulations on project quality acceptance of units (sub-units)
①The quality of the division (sub-division) projects included in the unit (sub-unit) project shall be accepted and qualified ②Quality control information should be complete ③The testing data on safety, energy saving, environmental protection and main functions of the branch projects included in the unit (sub-unit) project should be complete ④The random inspection results of the main functional items should comply with the relevant professional quality acceptance specifications. ⑤Perception and quality acceptance should meet the requirements
2. Unit project quality acceptance, also called project quality completion acceptance, is the last acceptance before the construction and installation project is put into use, and it is also the most important An acceptance is required. The conditions for acceptance are that all sub-projects that constitute the unit project should be qualified, and the relevant documents should be complete and qualified. In addition, the following three aspects of inspection should also be carried out: (1) Inspection data should be reviewed for branch projects involving safety, energy saving, environmental protection and use functions. Not only must its completeness be comprehensively checked (no missing items are allowed), but also the witness sampling inspection report that was supplemented during the acceptance of the branch project must also be reviewed. (2) Spot checks must be conducted on the main functions. The inspection of usage functions is a comprehensive inspection of the final quality of construction projects and equipment installation projects, and is also what users are most concerned about. Therefore, on the basis of passing the acceptance of sub-items and sub-projects, a comprehensive inspection will be carried out during the completion acceptance. The random inspection items are agreed upon by all parties participating in the acceptance inspection on the basis of the inspection data and documents, and the inspection locations are determined by sampling methods of measurement and counting. The inspection requirements shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the relevant professional engineering construction quality acceptance standards. (3) All parties participating in the acceptance inspection shall jointly conduct a visual quality inspection and jointly decide whether to pass the acceptance inspection.
2H333000 Regulations and related requirements for registration and practice management of Level 2 construction engineer (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2H333001 Standards for project scale for registered professional construction engineer level 2 (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2. Setting of project scale standards for mechanical and electrical engineering projects
1. Set up according to four professional series: mechanical and electrical installation engineering, petrochemical engineering, smelting engineering, and electric power engineering. 2. Standard indicators for the scale of large, medium and small mechanical and electrical engineering projects. According to the characteristics of different engineering projects, different definition indicators such as building area, project cost, project volume, investment amount, and annual output are specifically set.
2H333002 Scope of registered engineering practice for Level 2 construction engineer (mechanical and electrical engineering)
2. In mechanical and electrical engineering, the professional engineering scope of mechanical and electrical installation, petrochemical industry, electric power, and smelting
(1) Mechanical and electrical installation engineering 1. Scope of mechanical and electrical installation projects General industrial, civil and public electromechanical installation projects, purification projects, power station installation projects, lifting equipment installation projects, fire protection projects, light textile industry construction projects, industrial furnace installation projects, electronic engineering, environmental protection projects, sports stadium projects, machinery Automobile manufacturing engineering, forest industry construction engineering, etc.
(2) Petrochemical engineering 1. Scope of petrochemical engineering Petrochemical engineering is divided into oil and gas construction (surface construction projects of oil fields and gas fields), offshore oil engineering, oil and gas construction (crude oil and refined oil storage projects, natural gas storage and underground gas storage projects), petroleum and natural gas crude oil, refined oil products Storage engineering, natural gas storage, underground gas storage engineering, petroleum refining engineering, petroleum deep processing, organic chemical engineering, inorganic chemical engineering, chemical pharmaceutical engineering, chemical fiber engineering.
(3) Smelting engineering 1. Scope of smelting project Sinter pellet engineering, coking engineering, metallurgical engineering, oxygen production engineering, gas engineering, building materials engineering.
(4) Electric power engineering 1. Scope of power engineering Thermal power projects (including gas generators), power transmission and transformation projects, nuclear power projects, and wind power projects.
2H333003 Catalog of Construction Management Signature Documents for Second Class Construction Engineer (Electrical and Mechanical Engineering)
1. The type of project for which the registered construction engineer of mechanical and electrical engineering fills in the signature document
3. Signature document categories The types of signature documents for mechanical and electrical installation projects, power projects and smelting projects are divided into 7 types of management documents, namely: construction organization management; contract management; construction progress management; quality management; safety management; on-site environmental protection and civilized construction management; cost and expense management wait.
2. Documents generally included in various types of signature documents
1. Construction organization and management documents Drawing joint review and design change contact form; construction organization design review form; review form for main construction plans, hoisting plans, and temporary power plans; labor schedule; special or special operation personnel qualification review form; key or special process personnel qualifications Review form; project start report; project extension report; project suspension report; project resumption report; project completion report; project handover and acceptance report; contact sheet for external coordination unit of construction supervision government supervision unit; power of attorney for all insurances on the project.
2.Contract management documents Subcontracting unit qualification review form; project subcontract; labor subcontract; general material procurement plan; engineering equipment procurement general plan; engineering equipment, key material bidding documents and bid winning documents; contract change and claim application reports.
3. Construction progress management documents General progress plan approval form; branch project progress plan approval form; unit project progress plan approval form; subcontracted project progress plan approval form.
4. Quality management documents Unit project completion acceptance report form; unit (subunit) project safety and functional inspection data verification and main function spot inspection records; unit (subunit) project visual quality inspection record form; major hidden project quality acceptance records; unit and branch projects and visa and review of concealed project quality acceptance records; unit project quality pre-inspection (re-inspection) acceptance records; unit project quality acceptance records; intermediate handover acceptance reports; quality accident investigation and handling reports; project data transfer lists; project quality guarantees; projects Trial operation acceptance report.
5.Safety management documents Project safety production responsibility letter; subcontracting safety management agreement; construction safety technical measures review form; construction site fire protection key parts review form; construction site temporary electricity and fire application; large construction machinery inspection and use inspection form ; Construction site safety inspection and supervision reports; safety accident emergency plans, safety hazard notifications; construction site safety accident reporting, investigation, and handling reports.
6. On-site environmental protection and civilized construction management documents
7. Cost and expense management documents Project payment report; project change cost report; cost claim application form; cost change application form; monthly project progress report; project economic dispute settlement record form; review of stage economic analysis; summary of creditor's rights and debts; handling of relevant project economic disputes ; Completion settlement declaration form; Project insurance (personal, equipment, transportation, etc.) declaration form; Project settlement audit form